View / The Volume D2uservol1

User Manual: View / the Volume DL205 User Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 598 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

DL205 PLC User Manual

Volume 1 of 2

Manual Number: D2-USER-M

Notes

~ WARNING ~

Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com®, doing business as,

AutomationDirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or

uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or

operating the equipment.

To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes

that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and

usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to

verify that the equipment, installation, and operation is in compliance with the latest revision of these

codes.

At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical

Code, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). There may be local

regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for

safe installation and operation.

Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes

and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular

application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or operation.

Our products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as

on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the

operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life

support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death,

personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (“High Risk Activities”). AutomationDirect

specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.

For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our catalog. If

you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need

additional information, please call us at 1-770-844-4200.

This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At

AutomationDirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to

make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation.

This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product.

Trademarks

This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The

product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners.

AutomationDirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.

No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written

consent of Automationdirect.com® Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all

information included in this document.

~ ADVERTENCIA ~

Gracias por comprar equipo de automatización de Automationdirect.com®. Deseamos que su nuevo equipo

de automatización opere de manera segura. Cualquier persona que instale o use este equipo debe leer esta

publicación (y cualquier otra publicación pertinente) antes de instalar u operar el equipo.

Para reducir al mínimo el riesgo debido a problemas de seguridad, debe seguir todos los códigos de seguridad

locales o nacionales aplicables que regulan la instalación y operación de su equipo. Estos códigos varian de

área en área y usualmente cambian con el tiempo. Es su responsabilidad determinar cuales códigos deben ser

seguidos y verificar que el equipo, instalación y operación estén en cumplimiento con la revisión mas reciente

de estos códigos.

Como mínimo, debe seguir las secciones aplicables del Código Nacional de Incendio, Código Nacional Eléctrico,

y los códigos de (NEMA) la Asociación Nacional de Fabricantes Eléctricos de USA. Puede haber oficinas de

normas locales o del gobierno que pueden ayudar a determinar cuales códigos y normas son necesarios para una

instalación y operación segura.

Si no se siguen todos los códigos y normas aplicables, puede resultar en daños al equipo o lesiones

serias a personas. No garantizamos los productos descritos en esta publicación para ser adecuados

para su aplicación en particular, ni asumimos ninguna responsabilidad por el diseño de su producto, la

instalación u operación.

Nuestros productos no son tolerantes a fallas y no han sido diseñados, fabricados o intencionados para uso

o reventa como equipo de control en línea en ambientes peligrosos que requieren una ejecución sin fallas,

tales como operación en instalaciones nucleares, sistemas de navegación aérea, o de comunicación, control de

tráfico aéreo, máquinas de soporte de vida o sistemas de armamentos en las cuales la falla del producto puede

resultar directamente en muerte, heridas personales, o daños físicos o ambientales severos (“Actividades de Alto

Riesgo”). Automationdirect.com específicamente rechaza cualquier garantía ya sea expresada o implicada

para actividades de alto riesgo.

Para información adicional acerca de garantía e información de seguridad, vea la sección de Términos y

Condiciones de nuestro catálogo. Si tiene alguna pregunta sobre instalación u operación de este equipo, o si

necesita información adicional, por favor llámenos al número 1-770-844-4200 en Estados Unidos.

Esta publicación está basada en la información disponible al momento de impresión. En Automationdirect.

com nos esforzamos constantemente para mejorar nuestros productos y servicios, así que nos reservamos el

derecho de hacer cambios al producto y/o a las publicaciones en cualquier momento sin notificación y sin

ninguna obligación. Esta publicación también puede discutir características que no estén disponibles en ciertas

revisiones del producto.

Marcas Registradas

Esta publicación puede contener referencias a productos producidos y/u ofrecidos por otras compañías. Los nombres de las compañías

y productos pueden tener marcas registradas y son propiedad única de sus respectivos dueños. Automationdirect.com, renuncia

cualquier interés propietario en las marcas y nombres de otros.

PROPIEDAD LITERARIA 2017, AUTOMATIONDIRECT.COM® INCORPORATED

No se permite copiar, reproducir, o transmitir de ninguna forma ninguna parte de este manual sin previo consentimiento por escrito

de Automationdirect.com® Incorprated. Automationdirect.com retiene los derechos exclusivos a toda la información incluida en

este documento. Los usuarios de este equipo pueden copiar este documento solamente para instalar, configurar y mantener el equipo

correspondiente. También las instituciones de enseñanza pueden usar este manual para propósitos educativos.

~ AVERTISSEMENT ~

Nous vous remercions d’avoir acheté l’équipement d’automatisation de Automationdirect.com®, en faisant des

affaires comme, AutomationDirect. Nous tenons à ce que votre nouvel équipement d’automatisation fonctionne en

toute sécurité. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet équipement doit lire la présente publication (et toutes les

autres publications pertinentes) avant de l’installer ou de l’utiliser.

Afin de réduire au minimum le risque d’éventuels problèmes de sécurité, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux

et nationaux applicables régissant l’installation et le fonctionnement de votre équipement. Ces codes diffèrent d’une

région à l’autre et, habituellement, évoluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de déterminer les codes à respecter et de

vous assurer que l’équipement, l’installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la plus

récente de ces codes.

Vous devez, à tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prévention des incendies,

du Code national de l’électricité et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). Des

organismes de réglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent également vous aider à déterminer les

codes ainsi que les normes à respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement sûrs.

L’omission de respecter la totalité des codes et des normes applicables peut entraîner des dommages à l’équipement

ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits décrits dans cette publication

conviennent à votre application particulière et nous n’assumons aucune responsabilité à l’égard de la conception, de

l’installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit.

Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux défaillances et ne sont ni conçus ni fabriqués pour l’utilisation ou la revente en

tant qu’équipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux nécessitant une sécurité absolue, par

exemple, l’exploitation d’installations nucléaires, les systèmes de navigation aérienne ou de communication, le contrôle

de la circulation aérienne, les équipements de survie ou les systèmes d’armes, pour lesquels la défaillance du produit

peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matériels ou environnementaux («activités à

risque élevé»). La société AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d’aptitude à l’emploi en ce qui a

trait aux activités à risque élevé.

Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la sécurité, veuillez consulter la section Modalités et

conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l’installation ou du fonctionnement de

cet équipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplémentaires, n’hésitez pas à nous téléphoner au

1-770-844-4200.

Cette publication s’appuie sur l’information qui était disponible au moment de l’impression. À la société

AutomationDirect, nous nous efforçons constamment d’améliorer nos produits et services. C’est pourquoi nous nous

réservons le droit d’apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans préavis ni quelque

obligation que ce soit. La présente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractéristiques susceptibles de ne pas être

offertes dans certaines versions révisées du produit.

Marques de commerce

La présente publication peut contenir des références à des produits fabriqués ou offerts par d’autres entreprises. Les

désignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent être des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement à

leurs propriétaires respectifs. AutomationDirect nie tout intérêt dans les autres marques et désignations.

Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit être copiée, reproduite ou transmise de quelque façon que ce soit sans le consentement

préalable écrit de la société Automationdirect.com® Incorporated. AutomationDirect conserve les droits exclusifs à

l’égard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le présent document.

Notes:

DL205 PLC USER MANUAL

Please include the Manual Number and the Manual Issue, both shown below,

when communicating with Technical Support regarding this publication.

Manual Number: D2-USER-M

Issue: 4th Edition, Rev. D

Issue Date: 10/17

Publication History

Issue Date Description of Changes

1st Edition 1/94 Original edition

Rev. A 9/95 Minor corrections

2nd Edition 6/97 Added DL250, downsized manual

Rev. A 5/98 Minor corrections

Rev. B 7/99 Added torque specs for base and I/O

Rev. C 11/99 Minor corrections

Rev. D 3/00 Added new PID features, minor corrections

Rev. E 11/00 Added CE information, minor corrections

Rev. F 11/01 Added surge protection info, corrected RLL and DRUM instructions, minor

corrections

3rd Edition 6/02 Added DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs, local expansion I/O, ASCII and

MODBUS instructions, split manual into two volumes

Rev. A 8/03 Extensive corrections and additions

4th Edition 11/08 Changed publishing software resulting in change of appearance, addition of IBox

instructions, changes to PID chapter, added info for ERM and EBC modules, other

changes as necessary

Rev. A 4/10 Extensive corrections and additions

Rev. B 2/13

Corrected number of memory registers needed in the print message instruction.

Added new transient suppression for inductive loads to Chapter 2.

Added H2-CTRIO2 and H2-ERM100 references.

Rev. C 4/17 Minor corrections with general updates.

ECEMAIL Decimal Status Codes added, Chapter 5

Rev. D 10/17 Minor corrections with general updates

Notes

Volume one:

Table of ConTenTs

Volume One: Table of Contents i

Volume Two: Table of Contents xi

Chapter 1: Getting Started 1–1

Introduction 1–2

The Purpose of this Manual 1–2

Where to Begin 1–2

Supplemental Manuals 1–2

Technical Support 1–2

Conventions Used 1–3

Key Topics for Each Chapter 1–3

DL205 System Components 1–4

CPUs 1–4

Bases 1–4

I/O Configuration 1–4

I/O Modules 1–4

DL205 System Diagrams 1–5

Programming Methods 1–7

DirectSOFT Programming for Windows. 1–7

Handheld Programmer 1–7

DirectLOGIC™ Part Numbering System 1–8

Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming 1–10

Steps to Designing a Successful System 1–13

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

Table of Contents

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications 2–1

Safety Guidelines 2–2

Plan for Safety 2–2

Three Levels of Protection 2–3

Emergency Stops 2–3

Emergency Power Disconnect 2–4

Orderly System Shutdown 2–4

Class 1, Division 2, Approval 2–4

Mounting Guidelines 2–5

Base Dimensions 2–5

Panel Mounting and Layout 2–6

Enclosures 2–7

Environmental Specifications 2–8

Power 2–8

Marine Use 2–9

Agency Approvals 2–9

24 VDC Power Bases 2–9

Installing DL205 Bases 2–10

Choosing the Base Type 2–10

Mounting the Base 2–10

Using Mounting Rails 2–11

Installing Components in the Base 2–12

Base Wiring Guidelines 2–13

Base Wiring 2–13

I/O Wiring Strategies 2–14

PLC Isolation Boundaries 2–14

Powering I/O Circuits with the Auxiliary Supply 2–15

Powering I/O Circuits Using Separate Supplies 2–16

Sinking / Sourcing Concepts 2–17

I/O “Common” Terminal Concepts 2–18

Connecting DC I/O to “Solid State” Field Devices 2–19

Solid State Input Sensors 2–19

Solid State Output Loads 2–19

Relay Output Guidelines 2–21

Relay Outputs – Transient Suppression for Inductive Loads in a Control System 2–21

I/O Modules Position, Wiring, and Specification 2–26

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D iii

Table of Contents

Slot Numbering 2–26

Module Placement Restrictions 2–26

Special Placement Considerations for Analog Modules 2–27

Discrete Input Module Status Indicators 2–27

Color Coding of I/O Modules 2–27

Wiring the Different Module Connectors 2–28

I/O Wiring Checklist 2–29

D2-08ND3, DC Input 2–30

D2-16ND3-2, DC Input 2–30

D2–32ND3, DC Input 2–31

D2–32ND3–2, DC Input 2–32

D2-08NA-1, AC Input 2–33

D2-08NA-2, AC Input 2–34

D2-16NA, AC Input 2–35

F2-08SIM, Input Simulator 2–35

D2-04TD1, DC Output 2–36

D2–08TD1, DC Output 2–37

D2–08TD2, DC Output 2–37

D2–16TD1–2, DC Output 2–38

D2–16TD2–2, DC Output 2–38

F2–16TD1(2)P, DC Output With Fault Protection 2–39

F2–16TD1P, DC Output With Fault Protection 2–40

F2–16TD2P, DC Output with Fault Protection 2–41

D2–32TD1, DC Output 2–42

D2–32TD2, DC Output 2–42

F2–08TA, AC Output 2–43

D2–08TA, AC Output 2–43

D2–12TA, AC Output 2–44

D2–04TRS, Relay Output 2–45

D2–08TR, Relay Output 2–46

F2–08TR, Relay Output 2–47

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

Table of Contents

F2–08TRS, Relay Output 2–48

D2–12TR, Relay Output 2–49

D2–08CDR 4 pt., DC Input / 4pt., Relay Output 2–50

Glossary of Specification Terms 2–51

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations 3–1

CPU Overview 3–2

General CPU Features 3–2

DL230 CPU Features 3–2

DL240 CPU Features 3–2

DL250–1 CPU Features 3–3

DL260 CPU Features 3–3

CPU General Specifications 3–4

CPU Base Electrical Specifications 3–5

CPU Hardware Setup 3–6

Communication Port Pinout Diagrams 3–6

Port 1 Specifications 3–7

Port 2 Specifications 3–8

Selecting the Program Storage Media 3–9

Built-in EEPROM 3–9

EEPROM Sizes 3–9

EEPROM Operations 3–9

Installing the CPU 3–10

Connecting the Programming Devices 3–10

CPU Setup Information 3–11

Status Indicators 3–12

Mode Switch Functions 3–12

Changing Modes in the DL205 PLC 3–13

Mode of Operation at Power-up 3–13

Using Battery Backup 3–14

DL230 and DL240 3–14

DL250-1 and DL260 3–14

Battery Backup 3–14

Auxiliary Functions 3–15

Clearing an Existing Program 3–16

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D v

Table of Contents

Initializing System Memory 3–16

Setting the Clock and Calendar 3–16

Setting the CPU Network Address 3–17

Setting Retentive Memory Ranges 3–17

Using a Password 3–18

Setting the Analog Potentiometer Ranges 3–19

CPU Operation 3–21

CPU Operating System 3–21

Program Mode Operation 3–22

Run Mode Operation 3–22

Read Inputs 3–23

Read Inputs from Specialty and Remote I/O 3–23

Service Peripherals and Force I/O 3–23

CPU Bus Communication 3–24

Update Clock, Special Relays and Special Registers 3–24

Solve Application Program 3–25

Solve PID Loop Equations 3–25

Write Outputs 3–25

Write Outputs to Specialty and Remote I/O 3–26

Diagnostics 3–26

I/O Response Time 3–27

Is Timing Important for Your Application? 3–27

Normal Minimum I/O Response 3–27

Normal Maximum I/O Response 3–27

Improving Response Time 3–28

CPU Scan Time Considerations 3–29

Initialization Process 3–30

Reading Inputs 3–30

Reading Inputs from Specialty I/O 3–31

Service Peripherals 3–31

CPU Bus Communication 3–32

Update Clock/Calendar, Special Relays, Special Registers 3–32

Writing Outputs 3–32

Writing Outputs to Specialty I/O 3–33

Diagnostics 3–33

Application Program Execution 3–34

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

Table of Contents

PLC Numbering Systems 3–35

PLC Resources 3–35

V–Memory 3–36

Binary-Coded Decimal Numbers 3–36

Hexadecimal Numbers 3–36

Memory Map 3–37

Octal Numbering System 3–37

Discrete and Word Locations 3–37

V–Memory Locations for Discrete Memory Areas 3–37

Input Points (X Data Type) 3–38

Output Points (Y Data Type) 3–38

Control Relays (C Data Type) 3–38

Timers and Timer Status Bits (T Data type) 3–38

Timer Current Values (V Data Type) 3–39

Counters and Counter Status Bits (CT Data type) 3–39

Counter Current Values (V Data Type) 3–39

Word Memory (V Data Type) 3–39

Stages (S Data type) 3–40

Special Relays (SP Data Type) 3–40

Remote I/O Points (GX Data Type) 3–40

DL230 System V-memory 3–41

DL240 System V-memory 3–43

DL250–1 System V-memory (DL250 also) 3–46

DL260 System V-memory 3–49

DL205 Aliases 3–52

DL230 Memory Map 3–53

DL240 Memory Map 3–54

DL250–1 Memory Map (DL250 also) 3–55

DL260 Memory Map 3–56

X Input/Y Output Bit Map 3–57

Control Relay Bit Map 3–59

Stage Control/Status Bit Map 3–63

Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps 3–65

Remote I/O Bit Map 3–66

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D vii

Table of Contents

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration 4–1

DL205 System Design Strategies 4–2

I/O System Configurations 4–2

Networking Configurations 4–2

Module Placement 4–3

Slot Numbering 4–3

Module Placement Restrictions 4–3

Automatic I/O Configuration 4–4

Manual I/O Configuration 4–4

Removing a Manual Configuration 4–5

Power–On I/O Configuration Check 4–5

I/O Points Required for Each Module 4–6

Calculating the Power Budget 4–7

Managing your Power Resource 4–7

CPU Power Specifications 4–7

Module Power Requirements 4–7

Power Budget Calculation Example 4–9

Power Budget Calculation Worksheet 4–10

Local Expansion I/O 4–11

D2–CM Local Expansion Module 4–11

D2–EM Local Expansion Module 4–12

D2–EXCBL–1 Local Expansion Cable 4–12

DL260 Local Expansion System 4–13

DL250–1 Local Expansion System 4–14

Expansion Base Output Hold Option 4–15

Enabling I/O Configuration Check using DirectSOFT 4–16

Expanding DL205 I/O 4–17

I/O Expansion Overview 4–17

Ethernet Remote Master, H2-ERM(100)(-F) 4–17

Ethernet Remote Master Hardware Configuration 4–18

Installing the ERM Module 4–19

Ethernet Base Controller, H2-EBC(100)(-F) 4–22

Install the EBC Module 4–23

Set the Module ID 4–23

Insert the EBC Module 4–23

Network Cabling 4–24

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

viii

Table of Contents

10BaseFL Network Cabling 4–25

Maximum Cable Length 4–25

Add a Serial Remote I/O Master/Slave Module 4–26

Configuring the CPU’s Remote I/O Channel 4–27

Configure Remote I/O Slaves 4–29

Configuring the Remote I/O Table 4–29

Remote I/O Setup Program 4–30

Remote I/O Test Program 4–31

Network Connections to Modbus and DirectNet 4–32

Configuring Port 2 For DirectNet 4–32

Configuring Port 2 For Modbus RTU 4–32

Modbus Port Configuration 4–33

DirectNET Port Configuration 4–34

Network Slave Operation 4–35

Modbus Function Codes Supported 4–35

Determining the Modbus Address 4–35

If Your Host Software Requires the Data Type and Address 4–35

If Your Modbus Host Software Requires an Address ONLY 4–38

Example 1: V2100 584/984 Mode 4–40

Example 2: Y20 584/984 Mode 4–40

Example 3: T10 Current Value 484 Mode 4–40

Example 4: C54 584/984 Mode 4–40

Determining the DirectNET Address 4–40

Network Master Operation 4–41

Communications from a Ladder Program 4–44

Multiple Read and Write Interlocks 4–44

Network Modbus RTU Master Operation (DL260 only) 4–45

Modbus Function Codes Supported 4–45

Modbus Port Configuration 4–46

RS–485 Network (Modbus only) 4–47

RS–232 Network 4–47

Modbus Read from Network (MRX) 4–48

MRX Slave Memory Address 4–49

MRX Master Memory Addresses 4–49

MRX Number of Elements 4–49

MRX Exception Response Buffer 4–49

Modbus Write to Network (MWX) 4–50

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D ix

Table of Contents

MWX Slave Memory Address 4–51

MWX Master Memory Addresses 4–51

MWX Number of Elements 4–51

MWX Exception Response Buffer 4–51

MRX/MWX Example in DirectSOFT 4–52

Multiple Read and Write Interlocks 4–52

Non–Sequence Protocol (ASCII In/Out and PRINT) 4–54

Configure the DL260 Port 2 for Non-Sequence 4–54

RS–485 Network 4–55

RS–232 Network 4–55

Configure the DL250-1 Port 2 for Non-Sequence 4–56

RS–422 Network 4–57

RS–232 Network 4–57

Chapter 5: RLL and Intelligent Box (IBOX) Instructions 5–1

Introduction 5–2

Using Boolean Instructions 5–5

END Statement 5–5

Simple Rungs 5–5

Normally Closed Contact 5–6

Contacts in Series 5–6

Midline Outputs 5–6

Parallel Elements 5–7

Joining Series Branches in Parallel 5–7

Joining Parallel Branches in Series 5–7

Combination Networks 5–7

Comparative Boolean 5–8

Boolean Stack 5–8

Immediate Boolean 5–9

Boolean Instructions 5–10

Comparative Boolean 5–27

Immediate Instructions 5–33

Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions 5–41

Using Timers 5–41

Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits 5–43

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

Table of Contents

Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts 5–43

Accumulating Timer (TMRA) 5–44

Accumulating Timer Example using Discrete Status Bits 5–45

Accumulator Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts 5–45

Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits 5–47

Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts 5–47

Stage Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits 5–49

Stage Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts 5–49

Up/Down Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits 5–51

Up/Down Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts 5–51

Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions 5–53

Logical Instructions (Accumulator) 5–71

Math Instructions 5–88

Transcendental Functions (DL260 only) 5–121

Bit Operation Instructions 5–123

Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator) 5–130

Table Instructions 5–144

Clock/Calendar Instructions 5–175

CPU Control Instructions 5–177

Program Control Instructions 5–179

Interrupt Instructions 5–187

Intelligent I/O Instructions 5–191

Network Instructions 5–193

Message Instructions 5–197

Modbus RTU Instructions (DL260) 5–205

Modbus Read from Network (MRX) 5–205

Modbus Write to Network (MWX) 5–208

ASCII Instructions (DL260) 5–211

Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions (DL250-1/DL260) 5-230

Volume Two:

Table of ConTenTs

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. C

Chapter 6: Drum Instruction Programming (DL250-1/DL260 only) 6–1

Introduction 6–2

Purpose 6–2

Drum Terminology 6–2

Drum Chart Representation 6–3

Output Sequences 6–3

Step Transitions 6–4

Drum Instruction Types 6–4

Timer-Only Transitions 6–4

Timer and Event Transitions 6–5

Event-Only Transitions 6–6

Counter Assignments 6–6

Last Step Completion 6–7

Overview of Drum Operation 6–8

Drum Instruction Block Diagram 6–8

Powerup State of Drum Registers 6–9

Drum Control Techniques 6–10

Drum Control Inputs 6–10

Self-Resetting Drum 6–11

Initializing Drum Outputs 6–11

Using Complex Event Step Transitions 6–11

Drum Instruction 6–12

Timed Drum with Discrete Outputs (DRUM) 6–12

Event Drum (EDRUM) 6–14

Handheld Programmer Drum Mnemonics 6–16

Masked Event Drum with Discrete Outputs (MDRMD) 6–19

Masked Event Drum with Word Output (MDRMW) 6–21

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

xii

Table of Contents

Chapter 7: RLLPLUS Stage Programming 7–1

Introduction to Stage Programming 7–2

Overcoming “Stage Fright” 7–2

Learning to Draw State Transition Diagrams 7–3

Introduction to Process States 7–3

The Need for State Diagrams 7–3

A 2–State Process 7–3

RLL Equivalent 7–4

Stage Equivalent 7–4

Let’s Compare 7–5

Initial Stages 7–5

What Stage Bits Do 7–6

Stage Instruction Characteristics 7–6

Using the Stage Jump Instruction for State Transitions 7–7

Stage Jump, Set, and Reset Instructions 7–7

Stage Program Example: Toggle On/Off Lamp Controller 7–8

A 4–State Process 7–8

Four Steps to Writing a Stage Program 7–9

Stage Program Example: A Garage Door Opener 7–10

Garage Door Opener Example 7–10

Draw the Block Diagram 7–10

Draw the State Diagram 7–11

Add Safety Light Feature 7–12

Modify the Block Diagram and State Diagram 7–12

Using a Timer Inside a Stage 7–13

Add Emergency Stop Feature 7–14

Exclusive Transitions 7–14

Stage Program Design Considerations 7–15

Stage Program Organization 7–15

How Instructions Work Inside Stages 7–16

Using a Stage as a Supervisory Process 7–17

Stage Counter 7–17

Unconditional Outputs 7–18

Power Flow Transition Technique 7–18

Parallel Processing Concepts 7–19

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D xiii

Table of Contents

Parallel Processes 7–19

Converging Processes 7–19

Convergence Stages (CV) 7–19

Convergence Jump (CVJMP) 7–20

Convergence Stage Guidelines 7–20

Managing Large Programs 7–21

Stage Blocks (BLK, BEND) 7–21

Block Call (BCALL) 7–22

RLLPLUS (Stage) Instructions 7–23

Stage (SG) 7–23

Initial Stage (ISG) 7–24

Jump (JMP) 7–24

Not Jump (NJMP) 7–24

Converge Stage (CV) and Converge Jump (CVJMP) 7–25

Block Call (BCALL) 7–27

Block (BLK) 7–27

Block End (BEND) 7–27

Stage View in DirectSOFT 7–28

Questions and Answers about Stage Programming 7–29

Chapter 8: PID Loop Operation 8–1

DL250-1 and DL260 PID Loop Features 8–2

Main Features 8–2

Introduction to PID Control 8–4

Why use PID Control? 8–4

Introducing DL205 PID Control 8–6

Process Control Definitions 8–8

PID Loop Operation 8–9

Position Form of the PID Equation 8–9

Reset Windup Protection 8–10

Freeze Bias 8–11

Adjusting the Bias 8–11

Step Bias Proportional to Step Change in SP 8–12

Eliminating Proportional, Integral or Derivative Action 8–12

Velocity Form of the PID Equation 8–12

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

xiv

Table of Contents

Bumpless Transfer 8–13

Loop Alarms 8–13

Loop Operating Modes 8–14

Special Loop Calculations 8–14

Ten Steps to Successful Process Control 8–16

PID Loop Setup 8–18

Some Things to Do and Know Before Starting 8–18

PID Error Flags 8–18

Establishing the Loop Table Size and Location 8–18

Loop Table Word Definitions 8–20

PID Mode Setting 1 Bit Descriptions (Addr + 00) 8–21

PID Mode Setting 2 Bit Descriptions (Addr + 01) 8–22

Mode/Alarm Monitoring Word (Addr + 06) 8–23

Ramp/Soak Table Flags (Addr + 33) 8–23

Ramp/Soak Table Location (Addr + 34) 8–24

Ramp/Soak Table Programming Error Flags (Addr + 35) 8–24

PV Auto Transfer (Addr + 36) from I/O Module Base/Slot/Channel Option 8–25

PV Auto Transfer (Addr + 36) from V-memory Option 8–25

Control Output Auto Transfer (Addr + 37) 8–25

Configure the PID Loop 8–26

PID Loop Tuning 8–41

Open-Loop Test 8–41

Manual Tuning Procedure 8–42

Alternative Manual Tuning Procedures by Others 8–45

Tuning PID Controllers 8–45

Auto Tuning Procedure 8–46

Use DirectSOFT Data View with PID View 8–50

Open a New Data View Window 8–50

Open PID View 8–51

Using the Special PID Features 8–54

How to Change Loop Modes 8–54

Operator Panel Control of PID Modes 8–55

PLC Modes Effect on Loop Modes 8–55

Loop Mode Override 8–55

PV Analog Filter 8–56

Creating an Analog Filter in Ladder Logic 8–57

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D xv

Table of Contents

Use the DirectSOFT 5 Filter Intelligent Box (IBOX) Instruction 8–58

FilterB Example 8–58

Ramp/Soak Generator 8–59

Introduction 8–59

Ramp/Soak Table 8–60

Ramp/Soak Table Flags 8–62

Ramp/Soak Generator Enable 8–62

Ramp/Soak Controls 8–62

Ramp/Soak Profile Monitoring 8–63

Ramp/Soak Programming Errors 8–63

Testing Your Ramp/Soak Profile 8–63

DirectSOFT Ramp/Soak Example 8–64

Setup the Profile in PID Setup 8–64

Program the Ramp/Soak Control in Relay Ladder 8–64

Test the Profile 8–65

Cascade Control 8–66

Introduction 8–66

Cascaded Loops in the DL205 CPU 8–67

Tuning Cascaded Loops 8–68

Time-Proportioning Control 8–69

On/Off Control Program Example 8–70

Feedforward Control 8–71

Feedforward Example 8–72

PID Example Program 8–73

Program Setup for the PID Loop 8–73

Troubleshooting Tips 8–76

Glossary of PID Loop Terminology 8–78

Bibliography 8–80

Chapter 9: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 9–1

Hardware Maintenance 9–2

Standard Maintenance 9–2

Air Quality Maintenance 9–2

Low Battery Indicator 9–2

CPU Battery Replacement 9–2

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

xvi

Table of Contents

Diagnostics 9–3

Fatal Errors 9–3

Non-fatal Errors 9–3

Finding Diagnostic Information 9–4

V-memory Locations Corresponding to Error Codes 9–4

Special Relays (SP) Corresponding to Error Codes 9–5

I/O Module Codes 9–6

Error Message Tables 9–7

System Error Codes 9–8

Program Error Codes 9–9

CPU Error Indicators 9–10

PWR Indicator 9–11

Incorrect Base Power 9–11

Faulty CPU 9–11

Device or Module causing the Power Supply to Shutdown 9–12

Power Budget Exceeded 9–12

Run Indicator 9–13

CPU Indicator 9–13

BATT Indicator 9–13

Communications Problems 9–13

I/O Module Troubleshooting 9–14

Things to Check 9–14

I/O Diagnostics 9–14

Some Quick Steps 9–15

Testing Output Points 9–16

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Used to Test an Output Point 9–16

Noise Troubleshooting 9–17

Electrical Noise Problems 9–17

Reducing Electrical Noise 9–17

Machine Startup and Program Troubleshooting 9–18

Syntax Check 9–18

Duplicate Reference Check 9–19

TEST-PGM and TEST-RUN Modes 9–20

Special Instructions 9–22

Run Time Edits 9–24

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D xvii

Table of Contents

Forcing I/O Points 9–26

Regular Forcing with Direct Access 9–28

Bit Override Forcing 9–29

Bit Override Indicators 9–29

Reset the PLC to Factory Defaults 9-30

Appendix A: Auxiliary Functions A–1

Introduction A–2

What are Auxiliary Functions? A–2

Accessing AUX Functions via DirectSOFT A–3

Accessing AUX Functions via the Handheld Programmer A–3

AUX 2* — RLL Operations A–4

AUX 21-24 A–4

AUX 21 Check Program A–4

AUX 22 Change Reference A–4

AUX 23 Clear Ladder Range A–4

AUX 24 Clear Ladders A–4

AUX 3* — V-memory Operations A–5

AUX 31 A–5

AUX 31 Clear V-Memory A–5

AUX 4* — I/O Configuration A–5

AUX 41-46 A–5

AUX 41 Show I/O Configuration A–5

AUX 42 I/O Diagnostics A–5

AUX 44 Power-up Configuration Check A–5

AUX 45 Select Configuration A–6

AUX 46 to I/O Configuration A–6

AUX 5* — CPU Configuration A–7

AUX 51-5C A–7

AUX 51 Modify Program Name A–7

AUX 52 Display/Change Calendar A–7

AUX 53 Display Scan Time A–8

AUX 54 Initialize Scratchpad A–8

AUX 55 Set Watchdog Timer A–8

AUX 56 CPU Network Address A–8

AUX 57 Set Retentive Ranges A–9

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

xviii

Table of Contents

AUX 58 Test Operations A–9

AUX 59 Bit Override A–10

AUX 5B Counter Interface Configuration A–10

AUX 5C Display Error History A–11

AUX 6* — Handheld Programmer Configuration A–12

AUX 61, 62 and 65 A–12

AUX 61 Show Revision Numbers A–12

AUX 62 Beeper On/Off A–12

AUX 65 Run Self Diagnostics A–12

AUX 7* - EEPROM Operations A–12

AUX 71 - 76 A–12

Transferable Memory Areas A–13

AUX 71 CPU to HPP EEPROM A–13

AUX 72 HPP EEPROM to CPU A–13

AUX 73 Compare HPP EEPROM to CPU A–13

AUX 74 HPP EEPROM Blank Check A–13

AUX 75 Erase HPP EEPROM A–13

AUX 76 Show EEPROM Type A–13

AUX 8* — Password Operations A–14

AUX 81 - 83 A–14

AUX 81 Modify Password A–14

AUX 82 Unlock CPU A–14

AUX 83 Lock CPU A–14

Appendix B: DL205 Error Codes B–1

Appendix C: Instruction Execution Times C–1

Introduction C–2

V-Memory Data Registers C–2

V-Memory Bit Registers C–2

How to Read the Tables C–2

Boolean Instructions C–3

Comparative Boolean Instructions C–4

Bit of Word Boolean Instructions C–13

Immediate Instructions C–14

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D xix

Table of Contents

Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions C–15

Accumulator Data Instructions C–16

Logical Instructions C–18

Math Instructions C–20

Differential Instructions C–23

Bit Instructions C–24

Number Conversion Instructions C–25

Table Instructions C–25

CPU Control Instructions C–27

Program Control Instructions C–27

Interrupt Instructions C–28

Network Instructions C–28

Intelligent I/O Instructions C–28

Message Instructions C–29

RLLPLUS Instructions C–29

DRUM Instructions C–29

Clock / Calender Instructions C–30

Modbus Instructions C–30

ASCII Instructions C–30

Appendix D: Special Relays D–1

DL230 CPU Special Relays D–2

Startup and Real-Time Relays D–2

CPU Status Relays D–2

System Monitoring D–2

Accumulator Status D–3

Counter Interface Module Relays D–3

Equal Relays for Multi-step Presets with Up/Down Counter #1 / DL230

(for use with a Counter Interface Module) D–4

DL240/DL250-1/DL260 CPU Special Relays D–5

Startup and Real-Time Relays D–5

CPU Status Relays D–5

System Monitoring Relays D–6

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

Table of Contents

Accumulator Status Relays D–6

Counter Interface Module Relays D–7

Communications Monitoring Relays D–8

Equal Relays for Multi-step Presets with Up/Down Counter #1

(for use with a Counter Interface Module) D–9

Equal Relays for Multi-step Presets with Up/Down Counter #2

(for use with a Counter Interface Module) D–10

Appendix E: PLC Memory E-1

DL205 PLC Memory E-2

Non-volatile V-memory in the DL205 E-3

Appendix F: DL205 Product Weight Table F-1

DL205 Product Weight Table F-2

Appendix G: ASCII Table G-1

ASCII Conversion Table G-2

Appendix H: Numbering Systems H–1

Introduction H–2

Binary Numbering System H–2

Hexadecimal Numbering System H–3

Octal Numbering System H–4

Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) Numbering System H–5

Real (Floating Point) Numbering System H–5

BCD/Binary/Decimal/Hex/Octal -What is the Difference? H–6

Data Type Mismatch H–7

Signed vs. Unsigned Integers H–8

AutomationDirect.com Products and Data Types H–9

DirectLOGIC PLCs H–9

C-more/C-more Micro-Graphic Panels H–9

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D xxi

Table of Contents

Appendix I: European Union Directives (CE) I-1

European Union (EU) Directives I-2

Member Countries I-2

Applicable Directives I-2

Compliance I-2

General Safety I-3

Special Installation Manual I-4

Other Sources of Information I-4

Basic EMC Installation Guidelines I-5

Enclosures I-5

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) I-5

AC Mains Filters I-6

Suppression and Fusing I-6

Internal Enclosure Grounding I-6

Equi–potential Grounding I-7

Communications and Shielded Cables I-7

Analog and RS232 Cables I-8

Shielded Cables within Enclosures I-8

Analog Modules and RF Interference I-9

Network Isolation I-9

DC Powered Versions I-9

Items Specific to the DL205 I-10

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

xxii

Table of Contents

Notes

GettinG Started 1

Chapter

In This Chapter...

Introduction ...............................................................................1–2

Conventions Used ......................................................................1–3

DL205 System Components ....................................................... 1–4

Programming Methods ..............................................................1–7

DirectLOGIC™ Part Numbering System .....................................1–8

Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming ....................... 1–10

Steps to Designing a Successful System .....................................1–13

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

1-2

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Introduction

The Purpose of this Manual

Thank you for purchasing our DL205 family of products. This manual shows you how to

install, program, and maintain the equipment. It also helps you understand how to interface

them to other devices in a control system.

This manual contains important information for personnel who will install DL205 PLCs and

components and for the PLC programmer. If you understand PLC systems, our manuals will

provide all the information you need to start and keep your system up and running.

Where to Begin

If you already understand PLCs please read Chapter 2, “Installation, Wiring, and Specifications,”

and proceed on to other chapters as needed. Keep this manual handy for reference when you

have questions. If you are a new DL205 customer, we suggest you read this manual completely

to understand the wide variety of features in the DL205 family of products. We believe you will

be pleasantly surprised with how much you can accomplish with our products.

Supplemental Manuals

If you have purchased operator interfaces or DirectSOFT, you will need to supplement this

manual with the manuals that are written for those products.

Technical Support

We strive to make our manuals the best in the industry. We rely on your feedback to let us

know if we are reaching our goal. If you cannot find the solution to your particular application,

or, if for any reason you need technical assistance, please call us at:

770–844–4200

Our technical support group will work with you to answer your questions. They are available

Monday through Friday from 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Eastern Time. We also encourage you

to visit our web site where you can find technical and non-technical information about our

products and our company.

http://www.automationdirect.com

If you have a comment, question or suggestion about any of our products, services, or manuals,

please fill out and return the ‘Suggestions’ card included with this manual.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 1-3

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Conventions Used

When you see the “notepad” icon in the left–hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate

right will be a special note.

The word NOTE in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.

When you see the “exclamation mark” icon in the left–hand margin, the paragraph to its

immediate right will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of property,

or even death (in extreme cases).

The word WARNING in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.

Key Topics for Each Chapter

The beginning of each chapter will list the key topics

that can be found in that chapter.

Getting Started

CHAPTER

In This Chapter...

.................................................................1-2

...........................................................................1-4Specifications

General Information

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

1-4

Chapter 1: Getting Started

DL205 System Components

The DL205 family is a versatile product line that provides a wide variety of features in an

extremely compact package. The CPUs are small, but offer many instructions normally only

found in larger, more expensive systems. The modular design also offers more flexibility in

the fast moving industry of control systems. The following is a summary of the major DL205

system components.

CPUs

This product line includes four feature-enhanced CPUs: the DL230, DL240, DL250–1 and

DL260. All CPUs include built-in communication ports. Each CPU offers a large amount

of program memory, a substantial instruction set and advanced diagnostics. The DL250–1

features drum timers, floating–point math, 4 built-in PID loops with automatic tuning and 2

bases of local expansion capability.

The DL260 features ASCII IN/OUT and extended MODBUS communications, table and

trigonometric instructions, 16 PID loops with autotuning and up to 4 bases of local expansion.

Details of these CPU features and more are covered in Chapter 3, CPU Specifications and

Operation.

Bases

Four base sizes are available: 3, 4, 6 and 9 slot. The DL205 PLCs use bases that can be expanded.

The part numbers for these bases end with –1. These bases have a connector for local expansion

located on the right end of the base. They can serve in local, local expansion and remote I/O

configurations. All bases include a built-in power supply. The bases with the –1 suffix can

replace existing bases without a suffix if expansion is required.

I/O Configuration

The DL230 and DL240 CPUs can support up to 256 local I/O points. The DL250–1 can

support up to 768 local I/O points with up to two expansion bases. The DL260 can support

up to 1280 local I/O points with up to four expansion bases. These points can be assigned

as input or output points. The DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 systems can also be expanded

by adding remote I/O points. The DL250–1 and DL260 provide a built–in master for

remote I/O networks. The I/O configurations are explained in Chapter 4, System Design and

Configuration. I/O Modules

I/O Modules

The DL205 has some of the most powerful modules in the industry. A complete range of

discrete modules which support 24 VDC, 110/220 VAC and up to 10A relay outputs

(subject to derating) are offered. The analog modules provide 12- and 16-bit resolution and

several selections of input and output signal ranges (including bipolar). Several specialty and

communications modules are also available.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 1-5

Chapter 1: Getting Started

DL205 System Diagrams

The diagram below shows the major components and configurations of the DL205 system.

The next two pages show specific components for building your system.

Getting Started

Networking

RS232C

(max.50ft/16.2m) RS232C

(max.50ft/16.2m)

(max.

6.5ft / 2m)

Handheld Programmer

Operator Interface

Programming or

Computer Interface

Simple Motion Control

Flexible solutions in one package

High-speed counting (up to 100 KHz)

Pulse train output (up to 50KHz

High–speed Edge timing

Machine

Control

Packaging

Conveyors

Elevators

Programming or

Computer Interface

RS232C

(max.50ft/16.2m)

Handheld

Programmer

DL240

RS232/422

Convertor

RS232/422

Convertor

Simple programming

through the RLL Program

DL260 with H2–CTRIO(2) High Speed I/O Module

DL240 DL250–1 or DL260

DL305

Pulse

Output

Drive

Amplifier

Stepper Motor

Local I/O Expansion

DCM

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

1-6

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1–6

PROGRAMMING

Handheld Programmer

with Built-in RLLPLUS

Direct SOFT Programming

for Windows

AC INPUT

8pt 110 VAC

16pt 110 VAC

Direct

LOGIC DL205 Family

DC INPUT

8pt 12–24 VDC

16pt 24 VDC

32pt 24 VDC

32pt 5–15 VDC

SPECIALTY MODULES

High Speed Counters

CPU Slot Controllers

Remote Masters

Remote Slaves

Communications

Temperature Input

Filler Module

AC OUTPUT

8pt 18–220 VAC

12pt 18–110 VAC

2 commons

RELAY OUTPUT

4pt 5–30 VDC

5–240VAC

8pt 5–30 VDC

5 –240 VAC

12pt 5–30VDC

5–240VAC

(isolated pts.module

available)

ANALOG

CPUs

DL230 – 2.0K Built-in EEPROM Memory

DL240 – 2.5K Built-in EEPROM Memory

DL250–1 – 7.6K Built-in Flash Memory

DL260 – 15.8K Built-in Flash Memory

BASES

3 Slot Base, 110/220VAC, 24VDC

4 Slot Base, 110/220VAC, 24VDC

6 Slot Base, 110/220VAC, 24VDC, 125 VDC

9 Slot Base, 110/220VAC, 24VDC, 125 VDC

DC OUTPUT

4pt 12–24 VDC

8pt 12–24 VDC

16pt 12–24 VDC

2 Commons

32pt 12–24 VDC

4 Commons

4CH INPUT

8CH INPUT

2CH OUTPUT

8CH OUTPUT

4 IN/2 OUT

8 IN/4 OUT

ANALOG

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 1-7

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Programming Methods

Two programming methods are available for the DL205 CPUs: Relay Ladder Logic (RLL)

and RLLPLUS (Stage Programming). Both the DirectSOFT5 programming package and the

handheld programmer support RLL and Stage.

DirectSOFT Programming for Windows

The DL205 can be programmed with one of the most advanced programming packages in the

industry ––DirectSOFT5. DirectSOFT5 is a Windows-based software package that supports

many Windows features you already know, such as cut and paste between applications, point

and click editing, viewing and editing multiple application programs at the same time, etc.

DirectSOFT5 universally supports the DirectLOGIC CPU families. This means you can use

the same DirectSOFT5 package to program DL05, DL06, DL105, DL205, DL305, DL405 or

any new CPUs we may add to our product line. A separate manual discusses the DirectSOFT5

programming software which is included with your software package.

Handheld Programmer

All DL205 CPUs have a built-in programming port for use with the handheld programmer

(D2–HPP). The handheld programmer can be used to create, modify and debug your

application program. A separate manual that discusses the DL205 Handheld Programmer is

available.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

1-8

Chapter 1: Getting Started

DirectLOGIC™ Part Numbering System

As you examine this manual, you will notice there are many different products available.

Sometimes it is difficult to remember the specifications for any given product. However, if

you take a few minutes to understand the numbering system, it may save you some time and

confusion. The charts below show how the part numbering systems work for each product

category. Part numbers for accessory items such as cables, batteries, memory cartridges, etc, are

typically an abbreviation of the description for the item.

CPUs

Specialty CPUs

DL05/06 Product family

DL105 Product family

DL205 Product family

DL305 Product family

DL405 Product family

D0/F0

D1/F1

D2/F2

D3/F3

D4/F4

Class of CPU / Abbreviation 230...,330...,430...

Denotes a differentiation between

similar modules

–1, –2, –3, –4

Bases

D2/F2

D3/F3

D4/F4

Number of slots ##B

Type of Base DC or empty

Discrete I/O

Number of points 04/08/12/16/32/64

Input N

Output T

Combination C

AC A

DC D

Either E

Relay R

Current Sinking 1

Current Sourcing 2

Current Sinking/Sourcing 3

High Current H

Isolation S

Fast I/O F

Denotes a differentiation between

similar modules

–1, –2, –3, –4

D3– 16 ND2–1

D4– 16 ND2F

D3– 05B DC

D4– 440DC –1

DL205 Product family

DL305 Product family

DL405 Product family

DL05/06 Product family

DL205 Product family

DL305 Product family

DL405 Product family

D0/F0

D2/F2

D3/F3

D4/F4

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 1-9

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1–8

Analog I/O

DL05/06 Product family

DL205 Pd tf il

D0/F0

D2/F2

DL205 Product family

DL305 Product family

D2/F2

D3/F3

DL305

Product

family

DL405 Product family

D3/F3

D4/F4

Number of channels 02/04/08/16

Input (Analog to Digital) AD

p( gg)

Output (Digital to Analog) DA

p(gg)

Combination AND

Isolated S

Denotes a differentiation between

Similar modules

–1, –2, –3, –4

Communication and Networking

Special I/O and Devices

Programming

DL205 Product family

DL305 Product family

DL405 Product family

D2/F2

D3/F3

D4/F4

Name Abbreviation see example

CoProcessors and ASCII BASIC Modules

DL205 Product family D2/F2

DL305 Product family D3/F3

DL405 Product family D4/F4

CoProcessor CP

ASCII BASIC AB

64K memory 64

128K memory 128

512K memory 512

Radio modem R

Telephone modem T

F4– CP 128 –R

F3– 04 AD S–1

F3– 08 THM –n

note: –n indicates thermocouple

type

Alternate example of Analog I/O

such as: J, K, T, R, S or E

using abbreviations

D3– HPP

D3– HSC

D4– DCM

HPP (RLL PLUS Handheld Programmer)

HSC (High Speed Counter)

DCM (Data Communication Module)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

1-10

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming

If you have experience using PLCs, or want to set up a quick example, this section is what

you want to use. This example is not intended to explain everything needed to start up your

system. It is only intended to provide a general picture of what is needed to get your system

powered up.

Step 1: Unpack the DL205 Equipment

Unpack the DL205 equipment and verify you have the parts necessary to build this

demonstration system. The minimum parts needed are as follows:

• Base

• CPU

• A discrete input module such as a D2–16ND3–2 DC or a F2–08SIM input simulator module

• A discrete output module such as a D2–16TD1–2 DC

• *Power cord

• *Hook up wire

• *One or more toggle switches (if not using the input simulator module)

• *A screwdriver, blade or Phillips type

*These items are not supplied with your PLC.

You will need at least one of the following programming options:

• DirectSOFT5 Programming Software, DirectSOFT5 Manual, and a programming cable

(connects the CPU to a personal computer), or

• D2–HPP Handheld Programmer and the Handheld Programmer Manual.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 1-11

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 2: Install the CPU and I/O Modules

Insert the CPU and I/O into the base. The CPU must be inserted into the first slot of the

base (next to the power supply).

• Each unit has a plastic retaining clip at the top and

bottom. Slide the retainer clips to the out position

before installing the module.

• With the unit square to the base, slide it in using

the upper and lower guides.

• Gently push the unit back until it is firmly seated in

the backplane.

• Secure the unit to the base by pushing in the retainer clips.

Placement of discrete, analog and relay modules is not critical and may go in any slot in any

base; however, for this example, install the output module in the slot next to the CPU and the

input module in the next slot. Limiting factors for other types of modules are discussed in

Chapter 4, System Design and Configuration. You must also make sure you do not exceed the

power budget for each base in your system configuration. Power budgeting is also discussed

in Chapter 4.

Step 3: Remove Terminal Strip Access

Cover

Remove the terminal strip cover. It is a small

strip of clear plastic that is located on the base

power supply.

Step 4: Add I/O Simulation

To finish this quick start exercise or study other examples in this manual, you will need to

install an input simulator module (or wire an input switch as shown below), and add an output

module. Using an input simulator is the quickest way to get physical inputs for checking out

the system or a new program. To monitor output status, any discrete output module will work.

Wire the switches or other field devices prior to applying power to the system to ensure a

point is not accidentally turned on during the wiring operation. This example uses DC input

and output modules. Wire the input module, X0, to the toggle switch and 24VDC auxiliary

power supply on the CPU terminal strip as shown. Chapter 2, Installation, Wiring, and

Specifications, provides a list of I/O wiring guidelines.

Toggle switch Input

Module

Output

Module

CPU must reside in first slot!

Lift off

Retaining Clips

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

1-12

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 5: Connect the Power Wiring

Connect the wires as shown. Observe all precautions

stated earlier in this manual. For details on

wiring see Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and

Specifications. When the wiring is complete, replace

the CPU and module covers. Do not apply power at

this time.

Step 6: Connect the Programmer

Either connect the programming cable connected to

a computer loaded with DirectSOFT Programming

Software or a D2-HPP Handheld Programmer

(comes with programming cable) to the top port of

the CPU.

Step 7: Switch On the System Power

Apply power to the system and ensure the PWR indicator on the CPU is on. If not, remove

power from the system, check all wiring and refer to the troubleshooting section in Chapter 9

for assistance.

Step 8: Enter the Program

Slide the switch on the CPU to the STOP position (250–1/260 only) and then back to the

TERM position. This puts the CPU in the program mode and allows access to the CPU

program. Edit a DirectSOFT program using the relay ladder diagram below and load it into

the PLC. If using an HPP, the PGM indicator should be illuminated on the HPP. Enter the

following keystrokes on the HPP:

NOTE: It is not necessary for you to configure the I/O for this system since the DL205 CPUs automatically

examine any installed modules and establish the correct configuration.

After entering the example program put the CPU in the RUN mode with DirectSOFT or after

entering the program using the HPP, slide the switch from the TERM position to the RUN

position and back to TERM. The RUN indicator on the CPU will come on indicating the

CPU has entered the run mode. If not, repeat Step 8 ensuring the program is entered properly

or refer to the troubleshooting guide in Chapter 9.

During Run mode operation, the output status indicator “0” on the output module should

reflect the switch status. When the switch is on, the output should be on.

Ground

Line

Neutral

END

STR

BENT

OUT

CENT

Handheld Program Keystrokes

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 1-13

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Steps to Designing a Successful System

Step 1: Review the Installation Guidelines

Always make safety your first priority in any system

application. Chapter 2 provides several guidelines that will

help provide a safer, more reliable system. This chapter

also includes wiring guidelines for the various system

components.

Step 2: Understand the CPU Set-up Procedures

The CPU is the heart of your automation system and

is explained in Chapter 3. Make sure you take time to

understand the various features and set-up requirements.

Step 3: Understand the I/O System

Configurations

It is important to understand how your local

I/O system can be configured. It is also

important to understand how the system

Power Budget is calculated. This can affect

your I/O placement and/or configuration

options. See Chapter 4 for more information.

Step 4: Determine the I/O Module Specifications and

Wiring Characteristics

Many different I/O modules are available with the DL205 system.

Chapter 2 provides the specifications and wiring diagrams for the

discrete I/O modules.

NOTE: Analog and specialty modules have their own manuals and are not included in this manual.

Step 5: Understand the System Operation

Before you begin to enter a program, it is very helpful to

understand how the DL205 system processes information.

This involves not only program execution steps, but also

involves the various modes of operation and memory layout

characteristics. See Chapter 3 for more information.

Power up

Initialize hardware

Check I/O module

config. and verify

16pt

Input

8pt

Input

X17

X20

X27

8pt

Output

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

1-14

Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 6: Review the Programming Concepts

The DL205 provides four main approaches to solving the application program, including the

PID loop task depicted in the next figure.

• RLL diagram style programming is the best tool for solving boolean logic and general CPU register/

accumulator manipulation. It includes dozens of instructions, which will augment drums, stages and

loops.

• The DL250-1 and DL260 have four timer/event drum types, each with up to 16 steps. They offer

both time and/or event-based step transitions. Drums are best for a repetitive process based on a

single series of steps.

• Stage programming, called RLLPLUS, is based on state-transition diagrams. Stages divide the ladder

program into sections which correspond to the states in a flow chart of your process.

• The DL260 PID loop operation uses set-up tables to configure 16 loops. The DL250-1 PID loop

operation uses setup to configure 4 loops. Features include: auto tuning, alarms, SP ramp/soak

generation and more.

Step 7: Choose the Instructions

Once you have installed the system and understand

the theory of operation, you can choose from one

of the most powerful instruction sets available.

Step 8: Understand the Maintenance and

Troubleshooting Procedures

Equipment failures can occur at any time.

Switches fail, batteries need to be replaced, etc. In

most cases, the majority of the troubleshooting

and maintenance time is spent trying to locate the

problem. The DL205 system has many built-in

features that help you quickly identify problems.

Refer to Chapter 9 for diagnostics.

Standard RLL Programming

(see Chapter 5)

X0 LDD

V1076

CMPD

K309482

SP62

OUT

Timer/Event Drum Sequencer

(see Chapter 6)

Push–UP

Push–

DOWN

LOWER

RAISE

LIGHT

Stage Programming

(see Chapter 7)

PID Loop Operation

(see Chapter 8)

PID Process

SP 

–

TMR T1

K30 CNT CT3

K10

InstallatIon, WIrIng

and specIfIcatIons 1

Chapter

In This Chapter:

Safety Guidelines...............................................................................2–2

Mounting Guidelines.........................................................................2–5

Installing DL205 Bases......................................................................2–10

Installing Components in the Base.................................................. 2–12

Base Wiring Guidelines.....................................................................2–13

I/O Wiring Strategies........................................................................2–14

I/O Modules Position, Wiring, and Specification...............................2–26

Glossary of Specification Terms.........................................................2–51

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-2

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Safety Guidelines

NOTE: Products with CE marks perform their required functions safely and adhere to relevant standards

as specified by CE directives, provided they are used according to their intended purpose and that the

instructions in this manual are adhered to. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this

equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual. A listing of our international affiliates is available

on our Web site: http://www.automationdirect.com

WARNING: Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and equipment is your responsibility

and should be your primary goal during system planning and installation. Automation systems can fail

and may result in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel and/or damage equipment. Do

not rely on the automation system alone to provide a safe operating environment. Sufficient emergency

circuits should be provided to stop either partially or totally the operation of the PLC or the controlled

machine or process. These circuits should be routed outside the PLC in the event of controller failure,

so that independent and rapid shutdown is available. Devices, such as “mushroom” switches or end of

travel limit switches, should operate motor starter, solenoids, or other devices without being processed

by the PLC. These emergency circuits should be designed using simple logic with a minimum number of

highly reliable electromechanical components. Every automation application is different, so there may

be special requirements for your particular application. Make sure to follow all national, state, and local

government requirements for the proper installation and use of your equipment.

Plan for Safety

The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and equipment

safety part of the planning process. You should examine every aspect of the system to determine

which areas are critical to operator or machine safety.

If you are not familiar with PLC system installation practices, or your company does not

have established installation guidelines, you should obtain additional information from the

following sources.

• NEMA — The National Electrical Manufacturers Association, located in Washington, D.C.,

publishes many different documents that discuss standards for industrial control systems.

You can order these publications directly from NEMA. Some of these include:

ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems

ICS 3, Industrial Systems

ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems

• NEC — The National Electrical Code provides regulations concerning the installation and

use of various types of electrical equipment. Copies of the NEC Handbook can often be

obtained from your local electrical equipment distributor or your local library.

• Local and State Agencies — many local and state governments have additional requirements

above and beyond those described in the NEC Handbook. Check with your local Electrical

Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-3

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Three Levels of Protection

The publications mentioned provide many ideas and requirements for system safety. At a

minimum, you should follow these regulations. Also, you should use the following techniques,

which provide three levels of system control.

• Emergency stop switch for disconnecting system power

• Mechanical disconnect for output module power

• Orderly system shutdown sequence in the PLC control program

Emergency Stops

It is recommended that emergency stop circuits be incorporated into the system for every

machine controlled by a PLC. For maximum safety in a PLC system, these circuits must not

be wired into the controller, but should be hardwired external to the PLC. The emergency

stop switches should be easily accessed by the operator and are generally wired into a master

control relay (MCR) or a safety control relay (SCR) that will remove power from the PLC I/O

system in an emergency.

MCRs and SCRs provide a convenient means for removing power from the I/O system

during an emergency situation. By de-energizing an MCR (or SCR) coil, power to the input

(optional) and output devices is removed. This event occurs when any emergency stop switch

opens. However, the PLC continues to receive power and operate even though all its inputs

and outputs are disabled.

The MCR circuit could be extended by placing a PLC fault relay (closed during normal

PLC operation) in series with any other emergency stop conditions. This would cause

the MCR circuit to drop the PLC I/O power in case of a PLC failure (memory error, I/O

communications error, etc).

Output

Module Saw

Arbor

E STOP Master

Relay

Emergency

Stop

Power On

Master Relay Contacts

To disconnect output

module power

Use E-Stop and Master Relay

Guard

Limit

Guard Limit Switch

Master

Relay

Contacts

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-4

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Emergency Power Disconnect

A properly rated emergency power disconnect should be used to power the PLC-controlled

system as a means of removing the power from the entire control system. It may be necessary

to install a capacitor across the disconnect to protect against a condition known as “outrush.”

This condition occurs when the output Triacs are turned off by powering off the disconnect,

thus causing the energy stored in the inductive loads to seek the shortest distance to ground,

which is often through the Triacs.

After an emergency shutdown or any other type of power interruption, there may be

requirements that must be met before the PLC control program can be restarted. For example,

there may be specific register values that must be established (or maintained from the state prior

to the shutdown) before operations can resume. In this case, you may want to use retentive

memory locations, or include constants in the control program to ensure a known starting

point.

Orderly System Shutdown

Ideally, the first level of fault detection is the PLC control

program, which can identify machine problems. Certain

shutdown sequences should be performed. The types of

problems are usually things such as jammed parts, etc., that

do not pose a risk of personal injury or equipment damage.

WARNING: The control program must not be the only form of

protection for any problems that may result in a risk of personal

injury or equipment damage.

Class 1, Division 2, Approval

This equipment is suitable for use in Class 1, Zone 2,

Division 2, groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous locations only.

WARNING: Explosion Hazard! Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class 1, Division 2.

Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or area is known to be non-

hazardous.

WARNING: Explosion Hazard! Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the

area is known to be non-hazardous.

WARNING: All models used with connector accessories must use R/C (ECBT2) mating plug for all

applicable models. All mating plugs shall have suitable ratings for device.

WARNING: This equipment is designed for use in Pollution Degree 2 environments (installed within an

enclosure rated at least IP54).

WARNING: Transient suppression must be provided to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded

by 140%.

Turn off

Saw

Jam

Detect

RST

Retract

Arm

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-5

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Mounting Guidelines

Before installing the PLC system, you will need to know the dimensions of the components

considered. The diagrams on the following pages provide the component dimensions to use

in defining your enclosure specifications. Remember to leave room for potential expansion.

NOTE: If you are using other components in your system, refer to the appropriate manual to determine how

those units can affect mounting dimensions.

Base Dimensions

The following information shows the proper mounting dimensions. The height dimension is

the same for all bases. The depth varies depending on your choice of I/O module. The length

varies as the number of slots increase. Make sure you have followed the installation guidelines

for proper spacing.

Base

(Base Total Width)

(Mounting Hole)

(Component Width)

(Width with Exp.

Unit)

Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters

3-slot 6.77 172 6.41 163 5.8 148 7.24 184

4-slot 7.99 203 7.63 194 7.04 179 8.46 215

6-slot 10.43 265 10.07 256 9.48 241 10.90 277

9-slot 14.09 358 13.74 349 13.14 334 14.56 370

2.99”

(76mm)

3.54”

(90mm)

DIN Rail slot. Use rail conforming to

DIN EN 50022.

2.95”

(75mm)

3.62”

(92mm)

12 or 16pt I/O

4 or 8pt. I/O

with D2–EM Expansion Unit

4.45”

(113mm)

32pt. ZIPLink cable or

base exp. unit cable

5.85”

(148mm)

D2–DSCBL–1

on port 2

Mounting depths with:

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-6

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Panel Mounting and Layout

It is important to design your panel properly to help ensure the DL205 products operate

within their environmental and electrical limits. The system installation should comply with

all appropriate electrical codes and standards. It is important the system also conforms to the

operating standards for the application to ensure proper performance. The diagrams below

reference the items in the following list.

1. Mount the bases horizontally to provide proper ventilation.

2. If you place more than one base in a cabinet, there should be a minimum of 7.2” (183mm)

between bases.

3. Provide a minimum clearance of 2” (50mm) between the base and all sides of the cabinet. There

should also be at least 1.2” (30mm) of clearance between the base and any wiring ducts.

4. There must be a minimum of 2” (50mm) clearance between the panel door and the nearest

DL205 component.

NOTE: The cabinet configuration below is not suitable for EU installations.

Refer to Appendix I, European Union Directives.

Airflow

Safety Guidelines

Earth Ground

Panel Ground

Terminal

DL205 CPU Base

Power

Source

Temperature

Probe

Star Washers

Panel

Ground Braid

Copper Lugs

Panel or

Single Point

Ground

Star Washers

BUS Bar

Note: there is a minimum of 2” (50mm)

clearance between the panel door

or any devices mounted in the panel door

2”

50mm

min.

2”

50mm

min.

and the nearest DL205 component

2”

50mm

min.

2”

50mm

min.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-7

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

5. The ground terminal on the DL205 base must be connected to a single point ground. Use copper

stranded wire to achieve a low impedance. Copper eye lugs should be crimped and soldered to the

ends of the stranded wire to ensure good surface contact. Remove anodized finishes and use copper

lugs and star washers at termination points. A general rule is to achieve a 0.1 ohm of DC resistance

between the DL205 base and the single point ground.

6. There must be a single point ground (i.e., copper bus bar) for all devices in the panel requiring an

earth ground return. The single point of ground must be connected to the panel ground termination.

The panel ground termination must be connected to earth ground. For this connection you should

use #12 AWG stranded copper wire at a minimum. Minimum wire sizes, color coding, and general

safety practices should comply with appropriate electrical codes and standards for your region. A

good common ground reference (Earth ground) is essential for proper operation of the DL205.

Methods of providing an adequate common ground reference include:

• Installing a ground rod as close to the panel as possible.

• Connection to incoming power system ground.

7. Properly evaluate any installations where the ambient temperature may approach the lower or upper

limits of the specifications. Place a temperature probe in the panel, close the door and operate the

system until the ambient temperature has stabilized. If the ambient temperature is not within the

operating specification for the DL205 system, measures such as installing a cooling/heating source

must be taken to get the ambient temperature within the DL205 operating specifications.

8. Device mounting bolts and ground braid termination bolts should be #10 copper bolts or equivalent.

Tapped holes instead of nut–bolt arrangements should be used whenever possible. To ensure good

contact on termination areas, impediments such as paint, coating or corrosion should be removed

in the area of contact.

9. The DL205 system is designed to be powered by 110/220 VAC, 24VDC, or 125VDC normally

available throughout an industrial environment. Electrical power in some areas where the PLCs

are installed is not always stable and storms can cause power surges. Due to this, powerline filters

are recommended for protecting the DL205 PLCs from power surges and EMI/RFI noise. The

Automation Powerline Filter, for use with 120VAC and 240VAC, 1–5 Amps, is an excellent choice

(can be located at www.automationdirect.com); however, you can use a filter of your choice. These

units install easily between the power source and the PLC.

Enclosures

Your selection of a proper enclosure is important to ensure safe and proper operation of your

DL205 system. Applications of DL205 systems vary and may require additional features. The

minimum considerations for enclosures include:

• Conformance to electrical standards

• Protection from the elements in an industrial environment

• Common ground reference

• Maintenance of specified ambient temperature

• Access to equipment

• Security or restricted access

• Sufficient space for proper installation and maintenance of equipment

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-8

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Environmental Specifications

The following table lists the environmental specifications that generally apply to the DL205

system (CPU, Bases, I/O Modules). The ranges that vary for the Handheld Programmer are

noted at the bottom of this chart. I/O module operation may fluctuate depending on the

ambient temperature and your application. Refer to the appropriate I/O module specifications

for the temperature derating curves applying to specific modules.

* Operating temperature for the Handheld Programmer and the DV-1000 is 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) Storage temperature

for the Handheld Programmer and the DV-1000 is - 4° to 158° F (- 20° to 70°C).

** Equipment will operate below 30% humidity. However, static electricity problems occur much more frequently at lower

humidity levels. Make sure you take adequate precautions when you touch the equipment. Consider using ground

straps, anti-static floor coverings, etc., if you use the equipment in low humidity environments.

Power

The power source must be capable of supplying voltage and current complying with the base

power supply specifications.

Specification AC Powered Bases 24VDC Powered Bases 125VDC Powered Bases

Part Numbers

D2–03B–1,

D2–04B–1,

D2–06B–1

D2–09B–1

D2–03BDC1–1,

D2–04BDC1–1,

D2–06BDC1–1,

D2–09BDC1–1

D2–06BDC2–1,

D2–09BDC2–1

Input Voltage Range 100–240 VAC (+10%/ –15%)

50/60Hz 10.2 – 28.8 VDC (24VDC) with

less than 10% ripple 104–240 VDC

+10% –15%

Maximum Inrush Current 30A 10A 20A

Maximum Power 80VA 25W 30W

Voltage Withstand (dielectric) 1 minute @ 1500VAC between primary, secondary, and field ground

Insulation Resistance > 10 MΩ at 500VDC

Auxiliary 24 VDC Output 20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p

300mA max. None 20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p

300mA max.

Fusing (internal to base power

supply)

Non–replaceable 2A @ 250V

slow blow fuse

Non–replaceable 3.15A @

250V slow blow fuse

Non–replaceable 2A @ 250V

slow blow fuse

Specification Rating

Storage Temperature –4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)

Ambient Operating Temperature* 32°F to 131°F (0°C to 55°C)

Ambient Humidity** 30% – 95% relative humidity (non–condensing)

Vibration Resistance MIL STD 810C, Method 514.2

Shock Resistance MIL STD 810C, Method 516.2

Noise Immunity NEMA (ICS3–304)

Atmosphere No corrosive gases

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-9

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Marine Use

American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) certification requires flame-retarding insulation as per

4-8-3/5.3.6(a). ABS will accept Navy low smoke cables, cable qualified to NEC “Plenum

rated” (fire resistant level 4), or other similar flammability resistant rated cables. Use cable

specifications for your system that meet a recognized flame retardant standard (i.e., UL, IEEE,

etc), including evidence of cable test certification (i.e. tests certificate, UL file number, etc).

NOTE: Wiring needs to be “low smoke” per the above paragraph. Teflon coated wire is also recommended.

Agency Approvals

Some applications require agency approvals. Typical agency approvals that your application

may require are:

• UL (Underwriters Laboratories, LLC)

• CSA (Canadian Standards Association)

• FM (Factory Mutual Research Corporation)

• CUL (Underwriters Laboratories of Canada)

24 VDC Power Bases

Follow these additional installation guidelines when installing D2-03BDC1-1, D2-04BDC1-1,

D2-06BDC1-1 and D2-09BDC1-1 bases:

• Install these bases in compliance with the enclosure, mounting, spacing, and segregation

requirements of the ultimate application.

• These bases must be used within their marked ratings.

• These bases are intended to be installed within an enclosure rated at least IP54.

• Provisions should be made to prevent the rated voltage being exceeded by transient disturbances of

more than 40%.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-10

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Installing DL205 Bases

Choosing the Base Type

The DL205 system offers four different sizes of bases and three different power supply options.

The following diagram shows an example of a 6-slot base.

Your choice of base depends on three things:

• Number of I/O modules required

• Input power requirement (AC or DC power)

• Available power budget

Mounting the Base

All I/O configurations of the DL205 may use any of the base configurations. The bases are

secured to the equipment panel or mounting location using four M4 screws in the corner tabs

of the base. The full mounting dimensions are given in the previous section on Mounting

Guidelines.

WARNING: To minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or equipment damage, always

disconnect the system power before installing or removing any system component.

Power Wiring

Connections CPU Slot I/O Slots

Mounting

Tabs

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-11

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Using Mounting Rails

The DL205 bases can also be secured to the cabinet using mounting rails. You should use rails

that conform to DIN EN standard 50 022. Refer to our catalog for a complete line of DIN-

rail, DINnectors and DIN-rail mounted apparatus. These rails are approximately 35mm high,

with a depth of 7.5 mm. If you mount the base on a rail, you should also consider using end

brackets on each end of the rail. The end brackets help keep the base from sliding horizontally

along the rail. This helps minimize the possibility of accidentally pulling the wiring loose.

If you examine the bottom of the base, you’ll notice small retaining clips. To secure the base

to a DIN-rail, place the base onto the rail and gently push up on the retaining clips. The clips

lock the base onto the rail.

To remove the base, pull down on the retaining clips, lift up on the base slightly, and pull it

away from the rail.

35 mm

7.5mm

Retaining Clips

DIN Rail Dimensions

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-12

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Installing Components in the Base

To insert components into the base: first slide the module retaining clips to the out position

and align the PC board(s) of the module with the grooves on the top and bottom of the base.

Push the module straight into the base until it is firmly seated in the backplane connector.

Once the module is inserted into the base, push in the retaining clips to firmly secure the

module to the base.

WARNING: Minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or equipment damage. Always

disconnect the system power before installing or removing any system component.

Align module PC board to

slots in base and slide in

Push the retaining

clips in to secure the module

to the DL205 base

CPU must be positioned in

the first slot of the base

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-13

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Base Wiring Guidelines

Base Wiring

The diagrams show the terminal connections

located on the power supply of the DL205

bases. The base terminals can accept up to 16

AWG. You may be able to use larger wiring

depending on the type of wire used, but 16 AWG

is the recommended size. Do not overtighten the

connector screws; the recommended torque value

is 7.81 lb·in (0.882 N·m).

NOTE: You can connect either a 115VAC or 220VAC

supply to the AC terminals. Special wiring or jumpers

are not required as with some of the other DirectLOGIC

products.

WARNING: Once the power wiring is connected, install the plastic protective cover. When the cover is

removed there is a risk of electrical shock if you accidentally touch the wiring or wiring terminals.

125 VDC Base Terminal Strip12/24 VDC Base Terminal Strip

12 – 24 VDC

–

115 – 264 VDC

24 VDC OUT, 0.3A

–

110/220 VAC Base Terminal Stri

85 – 264 VAC

24 VDC OUT, 0.3A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-14

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

I/O Wiring Strategies

The DL205 PLC system is very flexible and will work in many different wiring configurations.

By studying this section before actual installation, you can probably find the best wiring

strategy for your application. This will help to lower system cost, wiring errors, and avoid

safety problems.

PLC Isolation Boundaries

PLC circuitry is divided into three main regions separated by isolation boundaries, shown in

the drawing below. Electrical isolation provides safety, so that a fault in one area does not

damage another. A powerline filter will provide isolation between the power source and the

power supply. A transformer in the power supply provides magnetic isolation between the

primary and secondary sides. Opto-couplers provide optical isolation in Input and Output

circuits. This isolates logic circuitry from the field side, where factory machinery connects.

Note the discrete inputs are isolated from the discrete outputs, because each is isolated from the

logic side. Isolation boundaries protect the operator interface (and the operator) from power

input faults or field wiring faults. When wiring a PLC, it is extremely important to avoid

making external connections that connect logic side circuits to any other.

In addition to the basic circuits covered above, AC-powered and 125VDC bases include an

auxiliary +24VDC power supply with its own isolation boundary. Since the supply output is

isolated from the other three circuits, it can power input and/or output circuits!

Safety Guidelines

Input Module

CPU

Comm.

Main

Power

Supply

Auxiliary

+24VDC

Supply

To Programming

Device, Operator

Inputs Commons CommonsOutputs

+24VDC Out

PLC

DL205

Interface, Network

Output Module

Internal Backplane

Supply for

Output Circuit

Primary Side Secondary, or

Logic side

Field Side

Filter

Power

Input

CPU

Input

Module

Main

Power

Supply

Inputs

Outputs

Power

Input

Output

Module

Primary Side Secondary, or

Logic side

Field Side

PLC

Programming Device,

Operator Interface, or Network

Isolation

Boundary

Isolation

Boundary

(backplane)

Filter

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-15

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Powering I/O Circuits with the Auxiliary Supply

In some cases, using the built-in auxiliary +24VDC supply can result in a cost savings for your

control system. It can power combined loads up to 300mA. Be careful not to exceed the

current rating of the supply. If you are the system designer for your application, you may be

able to select and design in field devices which can use the +24VDC auxiliary supply.

All AC powered and 125VDC DL205 bases feature the internal auxiliary supply. If input

devices AND output loads need +24VDC power, the auxiliary supply may be able to power

both circuits as shown in the following diagram.

The 12/24 VDC-powered DL205 bases are designed for application environments in which

low-voltage DC power is more readily available than AC. These include a wide range of

battery–powered applications, such as remotely-located control, in vehicles, portable machines,

etc. For this application type, all input devices and output loads typically use the same DC

power source. Typical wiring for DC-powered applications is shown in the following diagram.

Input Module

Auxiliary

+24VDC

Supply

Power Input DL205 PLC

Output Module

Loads

AC Power or 125VDC Bases

+–

Inputs Com. Outputs Com.

Input Module

Power Input

DL205 PLC

Output Module

Loads

DC Power

–

Inputs Com. Outputs Com.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-16

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Powering I/O Circuits Using Separate Supplies

In most applications it will be necessary to power the input devices from one power source, and

to power output loads from another source. Loads often require high-energy AC power, while

input sensors use low-energy DC. If a machine operator is likely to come in close contact with

input wiring, then safety reasons also require isolation from high-energy output circuits. It is

most convenient if the loads can use the same power source as the PLC, and the input sensors

can use the auxiliary supply, as shown to the left in the figure below.

If the loads cannot be powered from the PLC supply, then a separate supply must be used as

shown to the right in the figure below.

Some applications will use the PLC external power source to also power the input circuit. This

typically occurs on DC-powered PLCs, as shown in the drawing below to the left. The inputs

share the PLC power source supply, while the outputs have their own separate supply. A worst-

case scenario, from a cost and complexity viewpoint, is an application which requires separate

power sources for the PLC, input devices, and output loads. The example wiring diagram

below on the right shows how this can work, but also the auxiliary supply output is an unused

resource. You will want to avoid this situation if possible.

Input Module

Auxiliary

+24VDC

Supply

Power Input DL205 PLC

Output Module

Loads

AC Power

+–

Inputs Com. Outputs Com.

Input Module

Auxiliary

+24VDC

Supply

Power Input DL205 PLC

Output Module

Loads

AC Power

+–

Inputs Com. Outputs Com.

Load

Supply

Input Module

Power Input

DL205 PLC

Output Module

Loads

DC Power

–

Inputs Com. Outputs Com.

Load

Supply

Input Module

Auxiliary

+24VDC

Supply

Power Input DL205 PLC

Output Module

Loads

AC Power

+–

Inputs Com. Outputs Com.

Load

Supply

Input

Supply

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-17

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Sinking / Sourcing Concepts

Before going further in the study of wiring strategies, you must have a solid understanding of

“sinking” and “sourcing” concepts. Use of these terms occurs frequently in input or output

circuit discussions. It is the goal of this section to make these concepts easy to understand,

further ensuring your success in installation. First the following short definitions are provided,

followed by practical applications.

Sinking = provides a path to supply ground (–)

Sourcing = provides a path to supply source (+)

First you will notice these are only associated with DC circuits and not AC, because of the

reference to (+) and (–) polarities. Therefore, sinking and sourcing terminology only applies to

DC input and output circuits. Input and output points that are sinking only or sourcing only

can conduct current in only one direction. This means it is possible to connect the external

supply and field device to the I/O point with current trying to flow in the wrong direction, and

the circuit will not operate. However, you can successfully connect the supply and field device

every time by understanding “sourcing” and “sinking”.

For example, the figure to the right depicts a “sinking”

input. To properly connect the external supply, you

will have to connect it so the input provides a path to

ground (–). Start at the PLC input terminal, follow

through the input sensing circuit, exit at the common

terminal, and connect the supply (–) to the common

terminal. By adding the switch, between the supply (+)

and the input, the circuit has been completed . Current

flows in the direction of the arrow when the switch is

closed.

Apply the circuit principle above to the four possible

combinations of input/output sinking/sourcing types as shown below. The I/O module

specifications at the end of this chapter list the input or output type.

–

Input

Sensing

PLC

Input

Common

(sinking)

–

Input

Sensing

Load

Sinking Input Sinking Output

Sourcing Input Sourcing Output

PLC

Input

Common

–

Output

Switch

PLC Output

Common

–

Input

Sensing

Load

PLC

Input

Common

–

Output

Switch

PLC

Output

Common

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-18

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

I/O “Common” Terminal Concepts

In order for a PLC I/O circuit to operate,

current must enter at one terminal and exit at

another. Therefore, at least two terminals are

associated with every I/O point. In the figure

to the right, the Input or Output terminal is

the main path for the current. One additional

terminal must provide the return path to the

power supply.

If there was unlimited space and budget for

I/O terminals, every I/O point could have two

dedicated terminals as the figure above shows.

However, providing this level of flexibility

is not practical or even necessary for most

applications. So, most Input or Output points

on PLCs are in groups which share the return

path (called commons). The figure to the right

shows a group (or bank) of four input points

which share a common return path. In this

way, the four inputs require only five terminals

instead of eight.

NOTE: In the circuit above, the current in the common path is 4 times any channel’s input current when all

inputs are energized. This is especially important in output circuits, where heavier gauge wire is sometimes

necessary on commons.

Most DL205 input and output modules group their I/O

points into banks that share a common return path.

The best indication of I/O common grouping is on the

wiring label, such as the one shown to the right. There

are two circuit banks with eight input points in each. The

common terminal for each is labeled “CA” and “CB”,

respectively.

In the wiring label example, the positive terminal of a DC

supply connects to the common terminals. Some symbols

you will see on the wiring labels, and their meanings are:

AC supply AC or DC supply

Input Switch Output Load

DC supply

+–

–

I/O

Circuit

PLC

(I/O Point)

Return Path

Field

Device

Main Path

–

Input

Sensing

PLC

Input 4

Common

Input 3

Input 2

Input 1

20-28VDC

8mA

CLASS 2

D2-16ND3-2

IN 24

D2–16ND3–2

VDC

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-19

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Connecting DC I/O to “Solid State” Field Devices

In the previous section on Sourcing and Sinking concepts, the DC I/O circuits were explained

to sometimes only allow current to flow one way. This is also true for many of the field devices

which have solid-state (transistor) interfaces. In other words, field devices can also be sourcing

or sinking. When connecting two devices in a series DC circuit, one must be wired as sourcing and

the other as sinking.

Solid State Input Sensors

Several DL205 DC input modules are flexible because they detect current flow in either

direction, so they can be wired as either sourcing or sinking. In the following circuit, a field

device has an open-collector NPN transistor output. It sinks current from the PLC input

point, which sources current. The power supply can be the +24 auxiliary supply or another

supply (+12VDC or +24VDC), as long as the input specifications are met.

In the next circuit, a field device has an open-collector PNP transistor output. It sources

current to the PLC input point, which sinks the current back to ground. Since the field device

is sourcing current, no additional power supply is required.

Solid State Output Loads

Sometimes an application requires connecting a PLC output point to a solid state input on a

device. This type of connection is usually made to carry a low-level control signal, not to send

DC power to an actuator.

Several of the DL205 DC output modules are the sinking type. This means that each DC

output provides a path to ground when it is energized. In the following circuit, the PLC output

point sinks current to the output common when energized. It is connected to a sourcing input

of a field device input.

Field Device

+–

PLC DC Input

Output

Ground

Input

Common

Supply

(sinking) (sourcing)

Field Device

PLC DC Input

Output (sourcing)

Ground

Input

Common

(sinking)

Field Device

Output

Ground

Input

Common

PLC DC Sinking Output

+DC pwr

–

(sourcing)

(sinking)

Power

10–30 VDC

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-20

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

In the next example a PLC sinking DC output point is connected to the sinking input of a field

device. This is a little tricky, because both the PLC output and field device input are sinking

type. Since the circuit must have one sourcing and one sinking device, a sourcing capability

needs to be added to the PLC output by using a pull-up resistor. In the circuit below, a Rpull-up

is connected from the output to the DC output circuit power input.

NOTE 1: DO NOT attempt to drive a heavy load (>25mA) with this pull-up method

NOTE 2: Using the pull-up resistor to implement a sourcing output has the effect of inverting the output

point logic. In other words, the field device input is energized when the PLC output is OFF, from a ladder

logic point of view. Your ladder program must comprehend this and generate an inverted output. Or, you

may choose to cancel the effect of the inversion elsewhere, such as in the field device.

It is important to choose the correct value of Rpull-up. In order to do so, you need to know the

nominal input current to the field device (Iinput) when the input is energized. If this value is

not known, it can be calculated as shown (a typical value is 15mA). Then use Iinput and the

voltage of the external supply to compute Rpull-up. Then calculate the power Ppull-up (in watts),

in order to size Rpull-up properly.

Of course, the easiest way to drive a sinking input field device as shown below is to use a

DC sourcing output module. The Darlington NPN stage will have about 1.5 V ON-state

saturation, but this is not a problem with low-current solid-state loads.

Field Device

Output

Ground

Input

Common

PLC DC Sourcing Output

+DC pwr

–

(sourcing)

(sinking)

Supply

input

Field Device

Output

Ground

Input

Common

PLC DC Output

+DC pwr

–

(sourcing)

(sinking)

Power

(sinking)

pull-up

Supply

input

pull-up

Rinput

=supply

V – 0.7 –

input

I=input (turn–on)

input

pull-up

P=supply

pullup

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-21

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Relay Output Guidelines

Several output modules in the DL205 I/O family feature relay outputs: D2–04TRS, D2–08TR,

D2–12TR, D2–08CDR, F2–08TR and F2–08TRS. Relays are best for the following

applications:

• Loads that require higher currents than the solid-state outputs can deliver

• Cost-sensitive applications

• Some output channels need isolation from other outputs (such as when some loads require different

voltages than other loads)

Some applications in which NOT to use relays:

• Loads that require currents under 10 mA

• Loads which must be switched at high speed or heavy duty cycle

Relay outputs in the DL205 output modules are available in two

contact arrangements, shown to the right. The Form A type, or

SPST (single pole, single throw) type is normally open and is the

simplest to use. The Form C type, or SPDT (single pole, double

throw) type has a center contact which moves and a stationary

contact on either side. This provides a normally closed contact

and a normally open contact.

Some relay output module’s relays share common terminals,

which connect to the wiper contact in each relay of the bank.

Other relay modules have relays which are completely isolated

from each other. In all cases, the module drives the relay coil

when the corresponding output point is on.

Relay Outputs – Transient Suppression for Inductive Loads in a Control System

The following pages are intended to give a quick overview of the negative effects of transient

voltages on a control system and provide some simple advice on how to effectively minimize

them. The need for transient suppression is often not apparent to the newcomers in the

automation world. Many mysterious errors that can afflict an installation can be traced back

to a lack of transient suppression.

What is a Transient Voltage and Why is it Bad?

Inductive loads (devices with a coil) generate transient voltages as they transition from being

energized to being de-energized. If not suppressed, the transient can be many times greater

than the voltage applied to the coil. These transient voltages can damage PLC outputs or other

electronic devices connected to the circuit, and cause unreliable operation of other electronics

in the general area. Transients must be managed with suppressors for long component life and

reliable operation of the control system.

This example shows a simple circuit with a small 24V/125mA/3W relay. As you can see, when

the switch is opened, thereby de-energizing the coil, the transient voltage generated across the

switch contacts peaks at 140V.

Relay with Form A contacts

Relay with Form C contacts

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-22

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

In the same circuit, replacing the relay with a larger 24V/290mA/7W relay will generate a

transient voltage exceeding 800V (not shown). Transient voltages like this can cause many

problems, including:

• Relay contacts driving the coil may experience arcing, which can pit the contacts and reduce the

relay’s lifespan.

• Solid state (transistor) outputs driving the coil can be damaged if the transient voltage exceeds the

transistor’s ratings. In extreme cases, complete failure of the output can occur the very first time a

coil is de-energized.

• Input circuits, which might be connected to monitor the coil or the output driver, can also be

damaged by the transient voltage.

A very destructive side-effect of the arcing across relay contacts is the electromagnetic

interference (EMI) it can cause. This occurs because the arcing causes a current surge, which

releases RF energy. The entire length of wire between the relay contacts, the coil, and the

power source carries the current surge and becomes an antenna that radiates the RF energy. It

will readily couple into parallel wiring and may disrupt the PLC and other electronics in the

area. This EMI can make an otherwise stable control system behave unpredictably at times.

PLC’s Integrated Transient Suppressors

Although the PLC’s outputs typically have integrated suppressors to protect against transients,

they are not capable of handling them all. It is usually necessary to have some additional

transient suppression for an inductive load.

The next example uses the same 24V/125mA/3W relay used earlier. This example measures

the PNP transistor output of a D0-06DD2 PLC, which incorporates an integrated Zener diode

for transient suppression. Instead of the 140V peak in the first example, the transient voltage

here is limited to about 40V by the Zener diode. While the PLC will probably tolerate repeated

transients in this range for some time, the 40V is still beyond the module’s peak output voltage

rating of 30V.

Oscilloscope

Relay Coil

(24V/125mA/3W,

AutomationDirect part no.

750-2C-24D)

24 VDC

160

140

120

100

-20

Volts

Example: Circuit with no Suppression

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-23

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

5HOD\

&RLO



9'&

2VFLOORVFRSH

)RUWKLVH[DPSOHDP$:

UHOD\LVXVHG$XWRPDWLRQ'LUHFW

SDUWQR6&(*9'&

















9ROWV

5HOD\

&RLO



9'&

2VFLOORVFRSH

)RUWKLVH[DPSOHD9P$:

UHOD\LVXVHG$XWRPDWLRQ'LUHFW

SDUWQR&'

















9ROWV







Example: Small Inductive Load with Only Integrated Suppression

The next example uses the same circuit as above, but with a larger 24V/290mA/7W relay,

thereby creating a larger inductive load. As you can see, the transient voltage generated is much

worse, peaking at over 50V. Driving an inductive load of this size without additional transient

suppression is very likely to permanently damage the PLC output.

Example: Larger Inductive Load with Only Integrated Suppression

Additional transient suppression should be used in both these examples. If you are unable

to measure the transients generated by the connected loads of your control system, using

additional transient suppression on all inductive loads would be the safest practice.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-24

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Oscilloscope

24 VDC

DC Flyback Circuit

Sinking Sourcing

-5

Volts

Types of Additional Transient Protection

DC Coils:

The most effective protection against transients from a DC coil is a flyback diode. A flyback

diode can reduce the transient to roughly 1V over the supply voltage, as shown in this example.

Many AutomationDirect socketed relays and motor starters have add-on flyback diodes

that plug or screw into the base, such as the AD-ASMD-250 protection diode module and

784-4C-SKT-1 socket module shown below. If an add-on flyback diode is not available for

your inductive load, an easy way to add one is to use AutomationDirect’s DN-D10DR-A

diode terminal block, a 600VDC power diode mounted in a slim DIN rail housing.

DN-D10DR-A

Diode Terminal Block

AD-ASMD-250

Protection Diode Module

784-4C-SKT-1

Relay Socket

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-25

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

AC Coils:

Two options for AC coils are MOVs or bi-directional TVS diodes. These devices are most

effective at protecting the driver from a transient voltage when connected across the driver

(PLC output) but are also commonly connected across the coil. The optimum voltage rating

for the suppressor is the lowest rated voltage available that will NOT conduct at the supply

voltage, while allowing a safe margin.

AutomationDirect’s ZL-TSD8-120 transorb module is a good choice for 120VAC circuits. It

is a bank of eight bi-directional 180V TVS diodes.

NOTE: Manufacturers of devices with coils frequently offer MOV or TVS diode suppressors as an add-on

option which mount conveniently across the coil. Before using them, carefully check the suppressor’s

ratings. Just because the suppressor is made specifically for that part does not mean it will reduce the

transient voltages to an acceptable level.

For example, a MOV or TVS diode rated for use on 24-48 VDC coils would need to have a

high enough voltage rating to NOT conduct at 48V. That suppressor might typically start

conducting at roughly 60VDC. If it were mounted across a 24V coil, transients of roughly

84V (if sinking output) or -60V (if sourcing output) could reach the PLC output. Many

semiconductor PLC outputs cannot tolerate such levels.

Two more common options for DC coils are Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) or TVS diodes.

These devices should be connected across the driver (PLC output) for best protection as shown

below. The optimum voltage rating for the suppressor is the lowest rated voltage available that

will NOT conduct at the supply voltage, while allowing a safe margin.

AutomationDirect’s ZL-TSD8-24 transorb module is a good choice for 24VDC circuits. It is

a bank of 8 uni-directional 30V TVS diodes. Since they are uni-directional, be sure to observe

the polarity during installation. MOVs or bi-directional TVS diodes would install at the same

location, but have no polarity concerns.

24 VDC

DC MOV or TVS Diode Circuit

Sinking Sourcing

VAC

C MOV or Bi-Directional Diode Circuit

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-26

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

I/O Modules Position, Wiring, and Specification

Slot Numbering

The DL205 bases each provide different numbers of slots for use with the I/O modules. You

may notice the bases refer to 3-slot, 4-slot, etc. One of the slots is dedicated to the CPU, so

you always have one less I/O slot. For example, you have five I/O slots with a 6-slot base. The

I/O slots are numbered 0–4. The CPU slot always contains a PLC CPU or other CPU–slot

controller and is not numbered.

Module Placement Restrictions

The following table lists the valid locations for

all types of modules in a DL205 system:

Module/Unit Local CPU Base Local Expansion Base Remote I/O Base

CPUs CPU Slot Only

DC Input Modules . A A A

AC Input Modules A A A

DC Output Modules A A A

AC Output Modules A A A

Relay Output Modules A A A

Analog Input and Output Modules A A A

Local Expansion

Base Expansion Module A A

Base Controller Module CPU Slot Only

Serial Remote I/O

Remote Master A

Remote Slave Unit CPU Slot Only

Ethernet Remote Master A

CPU Interface

Ethernet Base Controller Slot 0 Only Slot 0 Only*

WinPLC Slot 0 Only

DeviceNet Slot 0 Only

Profibus Slot 0 Only

SDS Slot 0 Only

Specialty Modules

Counter Interface Slot 0 Only

Counter I/O AA*

Data Communications A

Ethernet Communications A

BASIC CoProcessor A

Simulator A A A

Filler A A A

* When used with H2-ERM(100) Ethernet Remote I/O system

CPU Slot I/O Slots

Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-27

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Special Placement Considerations for Analog Modules

In most cases, the analog modules can be placed in any slot. However, the placement can

also depend on the type of CPU you are using and the other types of modules installed to the

left of the analog modules. If you’re using a DL230 CPU (or a DL240 CPU with firmware

earlier than V1.4) you should check the DL205 Analog I/O Manual for any possible placement

restrictions related to your particular module. You can order the DL205 Analog I/O Manual

by ordering part number D2–ANLG–M.

Discrete Input Module Status Indicators

The discrete modules provide LED status indicators to show the status of the input points.

Color Coding of I/O Modules

The DL205 family of I/O modules have a color coding scheme to help you quickly identify if a

module is either an input module, output module, or a specialty module. This is done through

a color bar indicator located on the front of each module. The color scheme is listed below:

Wire tray area

Status indicators

Terminal Cover

(installed) behind terminal cover

Terminal

Module Type

Discrete/Analog Output

Discrete/Analog Input

Other

Color Code

Red

Blue

White

Color Bar

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-28

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Wiring the Different Module Connectors

There are two types of module connectors for the DL205 I/O. Some modules have normal

screw terminal connectors. Other modules have connectors with recessed screws. The recessed

screws help minimize the risk of someone accidentally touching active wiring.

Both types of connectors can be easily removed. If you examine the connectors closely, you’ll

notice there are squeeze tabs on the top and bottom. To remove the terminal block, press the

squeeze tabs and pull the terminal block away from the module.

We also have DIN rail mounted terminal blocks, DINnectors (refer to our catalog for a

complete listing of all available products). ZIPLinks come with special pre–assembled cables

with the I/O connectors installed and wired.

WARNING: For some modules, field device power may still be present on the terminal block even

though the PLC system is turned off. To minimize the risk of electrical shock, check all field device

power before you remove the connector.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-29

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

I/O Wiring Checklist

Use the following guidelines when wiring the I/O modules in your system.

1. There is a limit to the size of wire the modules can accept. The table below lists the suggested AWG

for each module type. When making terminal connections, follow the suggested torque values.

*NOTE: 16 AWG Type TFFN or Type MTW is recommended. Other types of 16 AWG may be acceptable,

but it really depends on the thickness and stiffness of the wire insulation. If the insulation is too thick or

stiff and a majority of the module’s I/O points are used, then the plastic terminal cover may not close

properly or the connector may pull away from the module. This applies especially for high temperature

thermoplastics such as THHN.

2. Always use a continuous length of wire, do not combine wires to attain a needed length.

3. Use the shortest possible wire length.

4. Use wire trays for routing where possible.

5. Avoid running wires near high energy wiring. Also, avoid running input wiring close to output

wiring where possible.

6. To minimize voltage drops when wires must run a long distance, consider using multiple wires for

the return line.

7. Avoid running DC wiring in close proximity to AC wiring where possible.

8. Avoid creating sharp bends in the wires.

9. To reduce the risk of having a module with a blown fuse, we suggest you add external fuses to

your I/O wiring. A fast blow fuse, with a lower current rating than the I/O module fuse can

be added to each common, or a fuse with a rating of slightly less than the maximum current

per output point can be added to each output. Refer to our catalog for a complete line of

DINnectors, DIN-rail mounted fuse blocks.

Terminal type Suggested AWG Range Suggested Torque

10-Terminal Fixed 14 – 24 AWG 3.5 lb-inch (0.4 N·m)

10-Terminal Removable 16* – 24 AWG 7.81 lb-inch (0.88 N·m)

20-Terminal Removable 16* – 24 AWG 2.65 lb-in (0.3 N·m)

Safety Guidelines

DINnector External Fuses

(DIN rail mounted Fuses)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-30

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2-08ND3, DC Input D2-16ND3-2, DC Input

Optical

COMIs olator

INPUT

12-- 24VDC

V+

To LED

Internal module circuitry

COM

12-- 24VDC

Internally

connected

010 20 30 40 50 55

AmbientTemperature (°C/°F )

32 50 68 86 104 122 131

C°

F°

Derating Chart

Points

10.2-- 26.4VDC

4--12mA

D2-- 08ND3

IN 12-- 24

D2-- 08ND3

VDC

Sink

Source

Sink

Source

20-- 28VDC

8mA

IN 24

D2-- 16ND3--2

VDC

CLAS S2

Optical

COMIs olator

Derating Chart

INPUT

24 VDC

V+

To LED

Internal modulecircuitry

Points

0102030405055

AmbientTemperature (°C/°F )

32 50 68 86 104122 131

C°

F°

Sink

Source

24 VDC

Sink

Source

Sink

Source

24 VDC

D2-08ND3 DC Input

Inputs per Module 8 (sink/source)

Commons per Module 1 (2 I/O terminal points)

Input Voltage Range 10.2–26.4 VDC

Peak Voltage 26.4 VDC

ON Voltage Level 9.5 VDC minimum

OFF Voltage Level 3.5 VDC maximum

AC Frequency N/A

Input Impedance 2.7 kq

Input Current 4.0 mA @ 12VDC

8.5 mA @ 24VDC

Minimum ON Current 3.5 mA

Maximum OFF Current 1.5 mA

Base Power Required 5VDC 50mA

OFF to ON Response 1 to 8 ms

ON to OFF Response 1 to 8 ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable, D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.3 oz. (65g)

D2-16ND3-2 DC Input

Inputs per Module 16 (sink/source)

Commons per Module 2 isolated

(8 I/O terminal points/com)

Input Voltage Range 20–28 VDC

Peak Voltage 30VDC (10mA)

ON Voltage Level 19 VDC minimum

OFF Voltage Level 7VDC maximum

AC Frequency N/A

Input Impedance 3.9 kq

Input Current 6mA @ 24VDC

Minimum ON Current 3.5 mA

Maximum OFF Current 1.5 mA

Base Power Required 5VDC 100mA

OFF to ON Response 3 to 9 ms

ON to OFF Response 3 to 9 ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable, D2-16IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.3 oz. (65g)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-31

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2–32ND3, DC Input

Optical

COMIsolator

INPUT

24 VDC

V+

To Logic

Internal module circuitry

IN 24

D2-- 32ND3

VDC

ACT

22-- 26VDC

4--6mA

CLAS S2

CI CI

CIICII

CIII

CIV

CIII

CIV

COMI

COMII

COMIII

COMIV

ints

010 20 30 40 50 55

AmbientTemperature (°C/°F )

32 50 68 86 104122 131

C°

F°

Derating Chart

24VDC

VDC

Sink

Source

Sink

Source

Sink

Source

Sink

Source

Sink

Source

D2-32ND3 DC Input

Inputs per Module 32 (sink/source)

Commons per Module 4 isolated (8 I/O terminal points / com)

Input Voltage Range 20-28 VDC

Peak Voltage 30VDC

ON Voltage Level 19VDC minimum

OFF Voltage Level 7VDC maximum

AC Frequency N/A

Input Impedance 4.8 kq

Input Current 8.0 mA @ 24 VDC

Minimum ON Current 3.5 mA

Maximum OFF Current 1.5 mA

Base Power Required 5VDC 25mA

OFF to ON Response 3 to 9 ms

ON to OFF Response 3 to 9 ms

Terminal Type (not included) Removable 40-pin Connector1

Status Indicator Module Activity LED

Weight 2.1 oz. (60 g)

1 Connector sold separately. See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-32

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2–32ND3–2, DC Input

D2-32ND3-2 DC Input

Inputs per Module 32 (Sink/Source)

Commons per Module 4 isolated (8 I/O terminal points / com)

Input Voltage Range 4.50 to 15.6 VDC min. to max.

Peak Voltage 16VDC

ON Voltage Level 4VDC minimum

OFF Voltage Level 2VDC maximum

AC Frequency N/A

Input Impedance 1.0 kq @ 5–5 VDC

Input Current 4mA @ 5VDC

11mA @ 12VDC

14mA @ 15VDC

Maximum Input Current 16mA @ 15.6 VDC

Minimum ON Current 3mA

Maximum OFF Current 0.5 mA

Base Power Required 5VDC 25mA

OFF to ON Response 3 to 9 ms

ON to OFF Response 3 to 9 ms

Terminal Type (not included) Removable 40-pin connector1

Status Indicator Module activity LED

Weight 2.1 oz. (60g)

1 Connector sold separately.

See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.

Sink

Source

5-15VDC

Sink

Source

5-15VDC

Sink

Source

5-15VDC

Sink

Source

5-15VDC

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-33

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2-08NA-1, AC Input

Optical

COM

Isolator

INPUT

110VAC

V+

To LED

Internal module circuitry

COM

Internally

connected

110VAC

010 20 30 40 50 55

AmbientTemperature (˚C/˚F)

32 50 68 86 104 122 131

C˚

F˚

Points

80-132VAC

10-20mA

D2-- 08NA-1

IN 110

D2-- 08NA-- 1

VAC

50/60Hz

Line

Derating Chart

D2-08NA-1 AC Input

Inputs per Module 8

Commons per Module 1 (2 I/O terminal points)

Input Voltage Range 80–132 VAC

Peak Voltage 132VAC

ON Voltage Level 75VAC minimum

OFF Voltage Level 20VAC maximum

AC Frequency 47–63 Hz

Input Impedance 12kq @ 60Hz

Input Current 13mA @ 100VAC, 60Hz

11mA @ 100 VAC, 50Hz

Minimum ON Current 5mA

Maximum OFF Current 2mA

Base Power Required 5VDC 50mA

OFF to ON Response 5 to 30 ms

ON to OFF Response 10 to 50 ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.5 oz. (70g)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-34

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2-08NA-2, AC Input

D2-08NA-2 AC Input

Inputs per Module 8

Commons per Module 1 (2 I/O terminal points)

Input Voltage Range 170–265 VAC

Peak Voltage 265VAC

ON Voltage Level 150VAC minimum

OFF Voltage Level 40VAC maximum

AC Frequency 47–63 Hz

Input Impedance 18kq @ 60Hz

Input Current

9mA @ 220VAC, 50Hz

11mA @ 265VAC, 50Hz

10mA @ 220VAC, 60Hz

12mA @ 265VAC, 60Hz

Minimum ON Current 10mA

Maximum OFF Current 2mA

Base Power Required 5VDC 100mA

OFF to ON Response 5 to 30 ms

ON to OFF Response 10 to 50 ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.5 oz. (70g)

Operating Temperature 32ºF to 131ºF (0º to 55ºC)

Storage Temperature -4ºF to 158ºF (-20ºC to 70ºC)

Humidity 35% to 95% (non-condensing)

Atmosphere No corrosive gases permitted

Vibration MIL STD 810C 514.2

Shock MIL STD 810C 516.2

Insulation Withstand Voltage 1,500VAC 1 minute (COM-GND)

Insulation Resistance 10M Q @ 500VDC

Noise Immunity NEMA 1,500V 1 minute

SANKI 1,000V 1 minute

RFI 150MHz, 430MHz

Optical

COM

Isolator

INPUT

220VAC

V+

To LED

Internal module circuitry

COM

Internally

connected

220VAC

010 20 30 40 50 55

AmbientTemperature (˚C/˚F)

32 50 68 86 104 122131

C˚

F˚

ints Derating Chart

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-35

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

0102030405055

AmbientTemperature (˚C/˚F)

32 50 68 86 104 122 131

C˚

F˚

Optical

Isolator

INPUT

110VAC

V+

To LED

Internal module circuitry

COM

Points

110VAC

80-- 132VAC

10-- 20mA

D2-- 16NA

IN 110

D2-- 16NA

VAC

50/60Hz

Derating Chart

IN SIM

F2-- 08SIM

D2-16NA, AC Input F2-08SIM, Input Simulator

D2-16NA AC Input

Inputs per Module 16

Commons per Module 2 (isolated)

Input Voltage Range 80–132 VAC

Peak Voltage 132VAC

ON Voltage Level 70VAC minimum

OFF Voltage Level 20VAC maximum

AC Frequency 47–63 Hz

Input Impedance 12kq @ 60Hz

Input Current

11mA @ 100VAC, 50Hz

13mA @ 100VAC, 60Hz

15mA @ 132VAC, 60Hz

Minimum ON Current 5mA

Maximum OFF Current 2mA

Base Power Required 5VDC 100mA

OFF to ON Response 5 to 30 ms

ON to OFF Response 10 to 50 ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-16IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.4 oz. (68g)

F2-08SIM Input Simulator

Inputs per Module 8

Base Power Required 5VDC 50mA

Terminal Type None

Status Indicator Switch side

Weight 2.65 oz. (75g)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-36

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2-04TD1, DC Output

D2-04TD1 DC Output

Outputs per Module 4 (current sinking)

Output Points Consumed 8 points (only first 4 pts. used)

Commons per Module 1 (4 I/O terminal points)

Output Type NMOS FET (open drain)

Operating Voltage 10.2-26.4 VDC

Peak Voltage 40VDC

ON Voltage Drop 0.72 VDC maximum

AC Frequency N/A

Max Load Current

(resistive)

4A/point

8A/common

Max Leakage Current 0.1 mA @ 40 VDC

Max Inrush Current 6A for 100 ms, 15A for 10 ms

Minimum Load Current 50 mA

External DC Required 24VDC @ 20 mA max.

Base Power Required 5VDC 60mA

OFF to ON Response 1ms

ON to OFF Response 1ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.8 oz. (80 g)

Fuses 4 (1 per point)

(6.3 A slow blow, non-replaceable)

010 20 30 40 50 55

AmbientTemperature (˚C/˚F)

32 50 68 86 104 122131

C˚

F˚

ints

2A /Pt.

3A /Pt.

4A /Pt.

24V

24VDCInternally

connected

12-- 24VDC+

+24V

10.2-- 26.4VDC

50mA-- 4A

D2-- 04TD1

OUT12--24

D2-- 04TD1

VDC

Common

12-- 24 +

+--

24VDC

VDC

To LED

Optical

Isolator

Output

Other

Circuits

Reg

InductiveLoad

0.1A 140

0.5A 30

1.0A 14

1.5A 90 35

2.0A 70 --

Load

8000

1600

100ms

800

540

3.0A

400

270-

40ms7msCurrent

Duration of output in ON state

4.0A 200-- --

MaximumNumberofSwitching Cycles perMinut

6.3A

Derating Chart

At 40 mS duration, loads of 3.0A or greater cannot be used.

At 100 mS duration, loads of 2.0A or greater cannot be used.

Find the load current you expect to use and the duration that the

output is ON. The number at the intersection of the row and column

represents the switching cycles per minute. For example, a 1A

inductive load that is on for 100 ms can be switched on and off a

maximum of 60 times per minute. To convert this to duty cycle

percentage use: (duration x cycles)/60. In this example,

(60 x .1)/60 = .1, or 10% duty cycle.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-37

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2–08TD1, DC Output D2–08TD2, DC Output

Optical

Isolator

COM

OUTPUT

12-- 24VDC

Internal module circuitry

12-- 24VDCInternally

connected

010 20 30 40 50 55

AmbientTemperature (˚C/˚F)

32 50 68 86 104 122 131

C˚

F˚

Points

10.2--26. 4VDC

0.2mA-0.3A

D2-- 08TD1

2--24

D2-- 08TD1

VDC

Derating Chart

D2-08TD1 DC Output

Outputs per Module 8 (current sinking)

Commons per Module 1 (2 I/O terminal points)

Output Type NPN open collector

Operating Voltage 10.2–26.4 VDC

Peak Voltage 40VDC

ON Voltage Drop 1.5 VDC maximum

AC Frequency N/A

Minimum Load Current 0.5 mA

Max Load Current 0.3 A/point; 2.4 A/common

Max Leakage Current 0.1 mA @ 40VDC

Max Inrush Current 1A for 10ms

Base Power Required 5VDC 100mA

OFF to ON Response 1ms

ON to OFF Response 1ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.3 oz. (65g)

Fuses 1 per common

5A fast blow, non-replaceable

D2-08TD2 DC Output

Outputs per Module 8 (current sourcing)

Commons per Module 1

Output Type PNP open collector

Operating Voltage 12–24 VDC

Output Voltage 10.8–26.4 VDC

Peak Voltage 40VDC

ON Voltage Drop 1.5 VDC

AC Frequency N/A

Minimum Load Current N/A

Max Load Current 0.3 A per point; 2.4 A per

common

Max Leakage Current 1.0 mA @ 40VDC

Max Inrush Current 1A for 10 ms

Base Power Required 5VDC 100 mA

OFF to ON Response 1ms

ON to OFF Response 1ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.1 oz. (60g)

Fuse 5A fast blow, non-replaceable

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-38

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2–16TD1–2, DC Output D2–16TD2–2, DC Output

Optical

Isolator

COM

OUTPUT

12-- 24

Internal modulecircuitry

24VDC

0102030405055

AmbientTemperature (˚C/˚F)

32 50 68 86 104122 131

C˚

F˚

Points

COM

Internally

connected

12-- 24VDC

24VDC

10.2--26.4

VDC0.1A

OUT12--24

D2-- 16TD1--2

VDC

CLASS2

VDC

*Can also be used with 5VDC supply

Dera

Char

D2-16TD1-2 DC Output

Outputs per Module 16 (current sinking)

Commons per Module 1 (2 I/O terminal points)

Output Type NPN open collector

External DC required 24VDC ±4V @ 80 mA max

Operating Voltage 10.2-26.4 VDC

Peak Voltage 30VDC

ON Voltage Drop 0.5 VDC maximum

AC Frequency N/A

Minimum Load Current 0.2 mA

Max Load Current 0.1A/point

1.6A/common

Max Leakage Current 0.1 mA @ 30 VDC

Max Inrush Current 150mA for 10 ms

Base Power Required 5VDC 200mA

OFF to ON Response 0.5 ms

ON to OFF Response 0.5 ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-16IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.3 oz. (65g)

Fuses None

D2-16TD2-2 DC Output

Outputs per Module 16 (current sourcing)

Commons per Module 2

Output Type NPN open collector

Operating Voltage 10.2-26.4 VDC

Peak Voltage 30VDC

ON Voltage Drop 1.0 VDC maximum

AC Frequency N/A

Minimum Load Current 0.2 mA

Max Load Current 0.1A/point

1.6A/module

Max Leakage Current 0.1 mA @ 30 VDC

Max Inrush Current 150mA for 10 ms

Base Power Required 5VDC 200mA

OFF to ON Response 0.5 ms

ON to OFF Response 0.5 ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-16IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.8 oz. (80g)

Fuses None

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-39

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

F2–16TD1(2)P, DC Output With Fault Protection

When these modules are installed, 16

X bits are automatically assigned as

the fault status indicator. Each X bit

indicates the fault status of each output.

Fault Status X bit Fault Status Indication

Missing external 24VDC All 16 X bits are on.

Open load1

Only the X bit assigned to the

faulted output is on

Over temperature

Over load current

Fault Status Operation

Missing external 24VDC Apply external 24VDC

Open load1Connect the load.

Over temperature Turn the output (Y bit) off or

power cycle the PLC

Over load current

The fault status indicators (X bits) can be reset

by performing the indicated operations in the

following table:

NOTE 1: Open load detection can be disabled by

removing the jumper switch J6 on the module PC

board.

Example

In this example, X10-X27 are assigned as the fault

status indicator.

X10: Fault status indicator for Y0

X11: Fault status indicator for Y1

X26: Fault status indicator for Y16

X27: Fault status indicator for Y17

These modules detect the following fault status and

turn the related X bit(s) on.

1. Missing external 24VDC for the module

2. Open load1

3. Over temperature (the output is shut down)

4. Over load current (the output is shut down)

NOTE: Not supported in D2-230, D2-240

and D2-250 CPUs.

Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4

D2-08ND3

F2-16TD1P

F2-16TD2P

X0 - X7 X10 - X27

Y0 - Y17

D2-250-1 or D2-260

Continued on next two pages.

PC Board

Jumper Switch J6

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-40

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Derating Chart

24VDC

Ambient Temperature (°C/°F)

ints

24V

Internally

connected

12–24VDC

10.2-26.4

VDC 0.25A

CLASS2

OUT 12-24

F2–16TD1P

VDC

24V

When the A/B switch is in the A position,

the LEDs display the output status of the

module’s first 8 output points. Positon B

displays the output status of the mod-

ule’s second group of 8 output points.

010 20 30 40 50 55°C

131°F

32 50 68 86 104 122

Optical

Isolator

OUTPUT

12–24

Internal module circuitry

24V

24VDC

VDC 0V

NOTE: Supporting Firmware:

D2-250-1 must be V4.80 or later

D2-260 must be V2.60 or later

F2–16TD1P, DC Output With Fault Protection

NOTE: Not supported in D2-230, D2-240

and D2-250 CPUs. F2-16TD1P DC Output with Fault Protection

Inputs per module 16 (status indication)

Outputs per module 16 (current sinking)

Commons per module 1 (2 I/O terminal points)

Output type NMOS FET (open drain)

Operating voltage 10.2–26.4 VDC, external

Peak voltage 40VDC

AC frequency N/A

ON voltage drop 0.7 V (output current 0.5 A)

Overcurrent trip 0.6A, min., 1.2A, max.

Minimum load current 0.2mA

Maximum load current 0.25A/point; 4A/common

Max leakage current 0.2mA (load detect enabled);

0.3mA disabled

Max inrush current 150 mA for 10ms

Base power required 5V 70 mA

OFF to ON response 0.5 ms

ON to OFF response 0.5 ms

Terminal type Removable (D2-16IOCON)

Status indicators Logic Side

Weight 2.0 oz. (25g)

Fuses None

External DC required 24VDC ±10% @ 50mA

External DC overvoltage

shutdown

27V, outputs are restored when

voltage is within limits

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-41

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Derating Chart

24VDC

   C



2



  



24V



V



10.2-26.4

VDC 0.25A

CLASS2

OUT 12-24

F2–16TD2P

VDC

24V

When the A/B switch is in the A position,

the LEDs display the output status of the

module’s first 8 output points. Positon B

displays the output status of the mod-

ule’s second group of 8 output points.

010 20 30 40 50 55°C

131°F

32 50 68 86 104 122

12–24VDC

24V

+–

24VDC

OUTPUT

Reg

12–24VDC

O



F2–16TD2P, DC Output with Fault Protection

NOTE: Supporting Firmware:

D2-250-1 must be V4.80 or later

D2-260 must be V2.60 or later

NOTE: Not supported in D2-230, D2-240

and D2-250 CPUs.

F2-16TD2P DC Output with Fault Protection

Inputs per module 16 (status indication)

Outputs per module 16 (current sourcing)

Commons per module 1

Output type NMOS FET (open source)

Operating voltage 10.2–26.4 VDC, external

Peak voltage 40VDC

AC frequency N/A

ON voltage drop 0.7 V (output current 0.5 A)

Overcurrent trip 0.6 A min., 1.2 A max.

Minimum load current 0.2 mA

Maximum load current 0.25 A/point; 4A/common

Max leakage current 0.2 mA (load detect enabled);

0.3 mA disabled

Max inrush current 150mA for 10ms

Base power required 5V 70mA

OFF to ON response 0.5 ms

ON to OFF response 0.5 ms

Terminal type Removable (D2-16IOCON)

Status indicators Logic Side

Weight 2.0 oz. (25g)

Fuses None

External DC required 24VDC ±10% @ 50mA

External DC overvoltage

shutdown

27V, outputs are restored when

voltage is within limits

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-42

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2–32TD1, DC Output D2–32TD2, DC Output

D2-32TD1 DC Output

Outputs per Module 32 (current sinking)

Commons per Module 4 (8 I/O terminal points)

Output Type NPN open collector

Operating Voltage 12–24 VDC

Peak Voltage 30VDC

ON Voltage Drop 0.5 VDC maximum

Minimum Load Current 0.2 mA

Max Load Current 0.1 A/point; 3.2 A per module

Max Leakage Current 0.1 mA @ 30VDC

Max Inrush Current 150mA for 10ms

Base Power Required 5VDC 350mA

OFF to ON Response 0.5 ms

ON to OFF Response 0.5 ms

Terminal Type (not included) Removable 40-pin connector1

Status Indicator Module activity

(no I/O status indicators)

Weight 2.1 oz. (60g)

Fuses None

External DC Power Required 20–28 VDC max.

120mA (all points on)

1 Connector sold separately.

See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.

D2-32TD2 DC Output

Outputs per Module 32 (current sourcing)

Commons per Module 4 (8 I/O terminal points)

Output Type Transistor

Operating Voltage 12 to 24 VDC

Peak Voltage 30VDC

ON Voltage Drop 0.5 VDC @ 0.1 A

Minimum Load Current 0.2 mA

Max Load Current 0.1 A/point; 0.8 A/common

Max Leakage Current 0.1 mA @ 30VDC

Max Inrush Current 150mA @ 10ms

Base Power Required 5VDC 350mA

OFF to ON Response 0.5 ms

ON to OFF Response 0.5 ms

Terminal Type (not included) Removable 40-pin connector1

Status Indicator Module activity (no I/O status

indicators)

Weight 2.1 oz (60g)

Fuses None

1 Connector sold separately.

See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-43

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

F2–08TA, AC Output D2–08TA, AC Output

F2-08TA AC Output

Outputs per Module 8

Commons per Module 2 (Isolated)

Output Type SSR (Triac with zero crossover)

Operating Voltage 24–140 VAC

Peak Voltage 140VAC

ON Voltage Drop 1.6 V(rms) @ 1.5 A

AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Minimum Load Current 50 mA

Max Load Current

1.5 A / pt @ 30ºC

1.0 A / pt @ 60ºC

4.0 A / common; 8.0 A / module

@ 60ºC

Max Leakage Current 0.7 mA (rms)

Peak One Cycle Surge

Current 15A

Base Power Required 5VDC 250mA

OFF to ON Response 0.5 ms - 1/2 cycle

ON to OFF Response 0.5 ms - 1/2 cycle

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 3.5 oz.

Fuses None

D2-08TA AC Output

Outputs per Module 8

Commons per Module 1 (2 I/O terminal points)

Output Type SSR (Triac)

Operating Voltage 15–264 VAC

Peak Voltage 264VAC

ON Voltage Drop < 1.5 VAC (>0.1 A)

< 3.0 VAC (<0.1 A)

AC Frequency 47 to 63Hz

Minimum Load Current 10mA

Max Load Current 0.5 A/point; 4A/common

Max Leakage Current

4mA (264VAC, 60Hz)

1.2 mA (100VAC, 60Hz)

0.9 mA (100VAC, 50Hz)

Max Inrush Current 10A for 10ms

Base Power Required 5VDC 250mA

OFF to ON Response 1 ms

ON to OFF Response 1 ms + 1/2 cycle

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.8 oz. (80g)

Fuses 1 per common, 6.3 A slow blow,

non-replaceable

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-44

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2–12TA, AC Output

AddressesUsed

Yes

Points

Yn+0

Yn+1

Yn+2

Yn+3

Yn+4

Yn+5 Yes

Us ed?

NoYn+6

Yn+7 No

nisthe starting address

Yes

Points

Yn+10

Yn+11

Yn+12

Yn+13

Yn+14

Yn+15Yes

Us ed?

NoYn+16

Yn+1

Optical

COM

Isolator

OUTPUT

To LED

Internal module circuitry

3.15A

15-- 132

ints

VAC

250mA/Pt.

300mA/Pt.

15-- 132VAC

0102030405055

AmbientTemperature (˚C/˚F)

32 50 68 86 104122 131

C˚

F˚

15-- 132VAC

10mA--0.3A

D2-- 12TA

OUT18--110

D2-- 12TA

VAC

50/60 Hz

Derating Chart

D2-12TA AC Output

Outputs per Module 12

Outputs Points Consumed 16 (four unused, see chart below)

Commons per Module 2 (isolated)

Output Type SSR (Triac)

Operating Voltage 15–132 VAC

Peak Voltage 132VAC

ON Voltage Drop < 1.5 VAC (>50mA)

< 4.0 VAC (<50mA)

AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Minimum Load Current 10mA

Max Load Current 0.3 A/point; 1.8 A/common

Max Leakage Current 2mA (132VAC, 60Hz)

Max Inrush Current 10A for 10ms

Base Power Required 5VDC 350mA

OFF to ON Response 1ms

ON to OFF Response 1ms + 1/2 cycle

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-16IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.8 oz. (80g)

Fuses

(2) 1 per common

3.15 A slow blow, replaceable

Order D2-FUSE-1 (5 per pack)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-45

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2–04TRS, Relay Output

5--30VDC

5-240VAC

4A 50/60Hz

D2-- 04TRS

OUTRELAY

D2-- 04TRS

5--30VDC

10mA-- 4A

5--240 VAC

010 20 30 40 50 55

AmbientTemperature (˚C/˚F)

32 50 68 86 104 122 131

C˚

F˚

Points

2A /

Pt.

3A /

Pt.

4A /

Pt.

COM

OUTPUT

To LED

Internal module circuitry

6.3A

5--240 VAC

5--30VDC

Derating Chart

D2-04TRS Relay Output

Outputs per Module 4

Outputs Points Consumed 8 (only 1st 4pts. are used)

Commons per Module 4 (isolated)

Output Type Relay, form A (SPST)

Operating Voltage 5-30 VDC / 5-240 VAC

Peak Voltage 30 VDC, 264 VAC

ON Voltage Drop 0.72 VDC maximum

AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Minimum Load Current 10mA

Max Load Current (resistive) 4A/point; 8A/module (resistive)

Max Leakage Current 0.1 mA @ 264VAC

Max Inrush Current 5A for < 10ms

Base Power Required 5VDC 250mA

OFF to ON Response 10ms

ON to OFF Response 10ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 2.8 oz. (80g)

Fuses

1 per point

6.3 A slow blow, replaceable

Order D2-FUSE-3 (5 per pack)

Typical Relay Life (Operations)

Voltage & Load Current

Type of Load 1A 2A 3A 4A

24VDC Resistive 500k 200k 100k 50k

24VDC Solenoid 100k 40k –– –

110 VAC Resistive 500k 250k 150k 100k

110 VAC Solenoid 200k 100k 50k –

220 VAC Resistive 350k 150k 100k 50k

220 VAC Solenoid 100k 50k –– ––

At 24 VDC, solenoid (inductive) loads over 2A cannot be used.

At 100 VAC, solenoid (inductive) loads over 3A cannot be used.

At 220 VAC, solenoid (inductive) loads over 2A cannot be used.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-46

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Points

0.5A /Pt.

COM

OUTPUT

To LED

Internal module circuitry

6.3A

5--240 VAC

5--30VDC

1A /Pt.

Internally

connected

5--240 VAC

5--30VDC 0102030405055

AmbientTemperature (˚C/˚F)

32 50 68 86 104 122131

C˚

F˚

5-240VAC

1A 50/60Hz

D2-- 08TR

OUTRELAY

D2-- 08TR

5--30VDC

5mA--1A

Derating Chart

D2–08TR, Relay Output

D2-08TR Relay Output

Outputs per Module 8

Outputs Points Consumed 8

Commons per Module 1 (2 I/O terminals)

Output Type Relay, form A (SPST)

Operating Voltage 5–30 VDC; 5–240 VAC

Peak Voltage 30VDC, 264VAC

ON Voltage Drop N/A

AC Frequency 47 to 60 Hz

Minimum Load Current 5mA @ 5VDC

Max Load Current (resistive) 1A/point; 4A/common

Max Leakage Current 0.1 mA @265 VAC

Max Inrush Current Output: 3A for 10ms

Common: 10A for 10ms

Base Power Required 5VDC 250mA

OFF to ON Response 12ms

ON to OFF Response 10ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 3.9 oz. (110g)

Fuses One 6.3A slow blow, replaceable

Order D2-FUSE-3 (5 per pack)

Typical Relay Life (Operations)

Voltage/Load Current Closures

24VDC Resistive 1A 500k

24VDC Solenoid 1A 100k

110VDC Resistive 1A 500k

110VDC Solenoid 1A 200k

220VAC Resistive 1A 350k

220VAC Solenoid 1A 100k

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-47

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

OUTRELAY

F2-- 08TR

12-- 250VAC

10A50/60Hz

12-- 28VDC

10ma -- 10A

Common

TypicalCircuit

12-- 250VAC

12-- 28VDC

Internal Circuitry

0102030405055

AmbientTemperature (°C/°F)

32 50 68 86 104122 131

C°

F°

10 A/pt.

Number

Points On

(100%duty

cycle)

NO 4

NO 5

C4-7

NO 2

NO 3

NO 1

C0-3

NO 0

NO 6

NO 7

Derating Chart

3 A/pt.

2.5 A/pt.

5A/pt.

F2–08TR, Relay Output

F2-08TR Relay Output

Outputs per Module 8

Outputs Points Consumed 8

Commons per Module 2 (isolated), 4-pts. per common

Output Type 8, Form A (SPST normally open)

Operating Voltage 7A @ 12–28 VDC, 12–250VAC;

0.5 A @ 120VDC

Peak Voltage 150VDC, 265VAC

ON Voltage Drop N/A

AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Minimum Load Current 10 mA @ 12 VDC

Max Load Current (resistive) 10A/point 3 (subject to derating)

Max of 10A/common

Max Leakage Current N/A

Max Inrush Current 12A

Base Power Required 5VDC 670mA

OFF to ON Response 15ms (typical)

ON to OFF Response 5ms (typical)

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 5.5 oz. (156g)

Fuses None

Typical Relay Life1 (Operations) at Room

Temperature

Voltage & Load Current

Type of Load 2 50mA 5A 7A

24 VDC Resistive 10M 600k 300k

24 VDC Solenoid - 150k 75k

110 VDC Resistive – 600k 300k

110 VDC Solenoid – 500k 200k

220 VAC Resistive – 300k 150k

220 VAC Solenoid – 250k 100k

1) Contact life may be extended beyond those values shown with

the use of arc suppression techniques described in the DL205 User

Manual. Since these modules have no leakage current, they do not

have built-in snubber. For example, if you place a diode across a

24VDC inductive load, you can significantly increase the life of the

relay.

2) At 120VDC 0.5 A resistive load, contact life cycle is 200k cycles.

3) Normally closed contacts have 1/2 the current handling

capability of the normally open contacts.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-48

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

F2–08TRS, Relay Output

12-- 250VAC

7A 50/60Hz

OUTRELAY

F2-- 08TRS

NO 0

NC 0

NO 3

NO 5

NC 7

NO 6

NC 6

NO 4

NO 2

NO 1

NO7

12-- 28VDC

10ma--7A

Common

Typical Circuit

Common

12-- 250VAC

12-- 28VDC

12-- 250VAC

12-- 28VDC

Internal Circuit ry

Typical Circuit

(Points0,6,&7only)

(points1,2,3,4,5)

5A/pt.

0102030405055

AmbientTemperature (˚C/˚F)

32 50 68 86 104122 131

C˚

F˚

4A/

pt.

7A/pt.

6A/

pt.

Number

Points On

(100%duty

cycle)

NC 6

NC 7

NO 4

NO 5

NO 2

NO 3

NO 1

NC 0

NO 0

NO 6

NO 7

12-- 28VDC

12-- 250VAC

12-- 28VDC

12-- 250VAC

12-- 28VDC

12-- 250VAC

12-- 28VDC

12-- 250VAC

12-- 28VDC

12-- 250VAC

normally closed

12-- 28VDC

12-- 250VAC

normally closed

12-- 28VDC

12-- 250VAC

12-- 28VDC

12-- 250VAC

normally closed

Derating Chart

F2-08TRS Relay Output

Outputs per Module 8

Outputs Points Consumed 8

Commons per Module 8 (isolated)

Output Type 3, Form C (SPDT)

5, Form A (SPST normally open)

Operating Voltage 7A @ 12–28 VDC, 12–250 VAC

0.5A @ 120VDC

Peak Voltage 150VDC, 265VAC

ON Voltage Drop N/A

AC Frequency 47 to 63Hz

Minimum Load Current 10mA @ 12VDC

Max Load Current (resistive) 7A/point 3 (subject to derating)

Max Leakage Current N/A

Max Inrush Current 12A

Base Power Required 5VDC 670mA

OFF to ON Response 15ms (typical)

ON to OFF Response 5ms (typical)

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-16IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 5.5 oz. (156g)

Fuses None

Typical Relay Life1 (Operations) at Room

Temperature

Voltage & Load Current

Type of Load 2 50mA 5A 7A

24VDC Resistive 10M 600k 300k

24VDC Solenoid - 150k 75k

110VDC Resistive – 600k 300k

110VDC Solenoid – 500k 200k

220VAC Resistive – 300k 150k

220VAC Solenoid – 250k 100k

1) Contact life may be extended beyond those values shown with

the use of arc suppression techniques described in the DL205 User

Manual. Since these modules have no leakage current, they do not

have built-in snubber. For example, if you place a diode across a

24VDC inductive load, you can significantly increase the life of the

relay.

2) At 120VDC 0.5 A resistive load, contact life cycle is 200k cycles.

3) Normally, closed contacts have 1/2 the current handling

capability of the normally open contacts.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-49

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2–12TR, Relay Output

5--240VAC

1.5A 50/ 60Hz

D2-- 12TR

OUTRELAY

D2-- 12TR

5--30VDC

Points

COM

OUTPUT

To LED

Internal module circuitry

5--240 VAC

5--30VDC

0.5A /Pt.

0102030405055

AmbientTemperature (˚C/˚F)

32 50 68 86 104122 131

C˚

F˚

1.5A /Pt.

0.75A/Pt.

5mA--1.5A

5--240 VAC

5--30VDC

5--240 VAC

5--30VDC

1.25A /Pt.

Derating Chart

D2-12TR Relay Output

Outputs per Module 12

Outputs Points Consumed 16 (four unused, see chart below)

Commons per Module 2 (6-pts. per common)

Output Type Relay, form A (SPST)

Operating Voltage 5–30 VDC; 5–240 VAC

Peak Voltage 30VDC; 264VAC

ON Voltage Drop N/A

AC Frequency 47 to 60 Hz

Minimum Load Current 5mA @ 5VDC

Max Load Current (resistive) 1.5 A/point; Max of 3A/common

Max Leakage Current 0.1 mA @ 265VAC

Max Inrush Current Output: 3A for 10ms

Common: 10A for 10ms

Base Power Required 5VDC 450mA

OFF to ON Response 10ms

ON to OFF Response 10ms

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-16IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 4.6 oz. (130g)

Fuses (2) 4A slow blow, replaceable

Order D2-FUSE-4 (5 per pack)

Typical Relay Life (Operations)

Voltage/Load Current Closures

24VDC Resistive 1A 500k

24VDC Solenoid 1A 100k

110VDC Resistive 1A 500k

110VDC Solenoid 1A 200k

220VAC Resistive 1A 350k

220VAC Solenoid 1A 100k

Addresses Used

Points Used? Points Used?

Yn+0 Yes Yn+10 Yes

Yn+1 Yes Yn+11 Yes

Yn+2 Yes Yn+12 Yes

Yn+3 Yes Yn+13 Yes

Yn+4 Yes Yn+14 Yes

Yn+5 Yes Yn+15 Yes

Yn+6 No Yn+16 No

Yn+7 No Yn+17 No

n is the starting address

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-50

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

D2–08CDR, 4 pt. DC Input / 4 pt. Relay Output

D2-- 08CDR

20-- 28VDC

8mA

IN/24VDC

D2-- 08CDR

RELAY

OUT

Points

Out-

puts

1A /Pt.

Derating Chart

COM

OUTPUT

To LE

Internal modulecircuitry

6.3A

5--240 VAC

5--30VDC

5--240 VAC

5--30VDC

0102030405055

AmbientTemperature (°C/°F )

32 50 68 86 104 122131C°F°

5--240VAC

1A 50/60Hz

5--30VDC

5mA--1A

Inputs

5mA/

Pt.

Optical

COMIs olator

INPUT

24VDC

V+

To LED

Internal module circuitry

24VDC

+--

Sink

Source

Sink

Source

D2-08CDR 4-pt. DC In / 4pt. Relay Out

General Specifications

Base Power Required 5VDC 200mA

Terminal Type (included) Removable; D2-8IOCON

Status Indicator Logic side

Weight 3.5 oz. (100 g)

Input Specifications

Inputs per Module 4 (sink/source)

Input Points Consumed 8 (only first 4-pts. are used)

Commons per Module 1

Input Voltage Range 20–28 VDC

Peak Voltage 30VDC

ON Voltage Level 19VDC minimum

OFF Voltage Level 7VDC maximum

AC Frequency N/A

Input Impedance 4.7 kq

Input Current 5mA @ 24VDC

Maximum Current 8mA @ 30VDC

Minimum ON Current 4.5 mA

Maximum OFF Current 1.5 mA

OFF to ON Response 1 to 10 ms

ON to OFF Response 1 to 10 ms

Fuses (input circuits) None

Output Specifications

Outputs per Module 4

Outputs Points Consumed 8 (only first 4-pts. are used)

Commons per Module 1

Output Type Relay, form A (SPST)

Operating Voltage 5–30 VDC; 5–240 VAC

Peak Voltage 30VDC; 264VAC

ON Voltage Drop N/A

AC Frequency 47 to 63 Hz

Minimum Load Current 5mA @ 5VDC

Max Load Current (resistive) 1A/point ; 4A/module

Max Leakage Current 0.1 mA @ 264VAC

Max Inrush Current 3A for < 100ms

10A for < 10ms (common)

OFF to ON Response 12ms

ON to OFF Response 10ms

Fuses (output circuits) 1 (6.3 A slow blow, replaceable);

Order D2-FUSE-3 (5 per pack)

Typical Relay Life (Operations)

Voltage/Load Current Closures

24VDC Resistive 1A 500k

24VDC Solenoid 1A 100k

110VAC Resistive 1A 500k

110VAC Solenoid 1A 200k

220VAC Resistive 1A 350k

220VAC Solenoid 1A 100k

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 2-51

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Glossary of Specification Terms

Inputs or Outputs Per Module

Indicates number of input or output points per module and designates current sinking, current

sourcing, or either.

Commons Per Module

Number of commons per module and their electrical characteristics.

Input Voltage Range

The operating voltage range of the input circuit.

Output Voltage Range

The operating voltage range of the output circuit.

Peak Voltage

Maximum voltage allowed for the input circuit.

AC Frequency

AC modules are designed to operate within a specific frequency range.

ON Voltage Level

The voltage level at which the input point will turn ON.

OFF Voltage Level

The voltage level at which the input point will turn OFF.

Input impedance

Input impedance can be used to calculate input current for a particular operating voltage.

Input Current

Typical operating current for an active (ON) input.

Minimum ON Current

The minimum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the ON state.

Maximum OFF Current

The maximum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the OFF state.

Minimum Load

The minimum load current for the output circuit to operate properly.

External DC Required

Some output modules require external power for the output circuitry.

ON Voltage Drop

Sometimes called “saturation voltage,” it is the voltage measured from an output point to its

common terminal when the output is ON at maximum load.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

2-52

Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications

Maximum Leakage Current

The maximum current a connected maximum load will receive when the output point is OFF.

Maximum Inrush Current

The maximum current used by a load for a short duration upon an OFF to ON transition

of an output point. It is greater than the normal ON state current and is characteristic of

inductive loads in AC circuits.

Base Power Required

Power from the base power supply is used by the DL205 input modules and varies between

different modules. The guidelines for using module power are explained in the power budget

configuration section in Chapter 4–7.

OFF to ON Response

The time the module requires to process an OFF to ON state transition.

ON to OFF Response

The time the module requires to process an ON to OFF state transition.

Terminal Type

Indicates whether the terminal type is a removable or non-removable connector or a terminal.

Status Indicators

The LEDs that indicate the ON/OFF status of an input point. These LEDs are electrically

located on either the logic side or the field device side of the input circuit.

Weight

Indicates the weight of the module. See Appendix F for a list of the weights for the various

DL205 components.

Fuses

Protective devices for an output circuit, which stop current flow when current exceeds the fuse

rating. They may be replaceable or non–replaceable, or located externally or internally.

CPU SPeCifiCationS and

oPerationS

Chapter

In This Chapter

CPU Overview ............................................................................3–2

CPU General Specifications ........................................................3–4

CPU Base Electrical Specifications ...............................................3–5

CPU Hardware Setup .................................................................3–6

Selecting the Program Storage Media ........................................3–9

Using Battery Backup .................................................................3–14

CPU Operation ........................................................................... 3–21

I/O Response Time .....................................................................3–27

CPU Scan Time Considerations ..................................................3–29

PLC Numbering Systems ............................................................3–35

Memory Map .............................................................................3–37

DL230 System V-memory ..........................................................3–41

DL240 System V-memory ..........................................................3–43

DL250–1 System V-memory (DL250 also) .................................3–46

DL260 System V-memory ..........................................................3–49

DL205 Aliases ............................................................................. 3–52

DL230 Memory Map .................................................................3–53

DL240 Memory Map .................................................................3–54

DL250–1 Memory Map (DL250 also) .........................................3–55

DL260 Memory Map .................................................................3–56

X Input/Y Output Bit Map .......................................................... 3–57

Control Relay Bit Map ................................................................3–59

Stage Control/Status Bit Map ..................................................... 3–63

Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps ...........................................3–65

Remote I/O Bit Map ...................................................................3–66

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-2

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

CPU Overview

The Central Processing Unit is the heart of the PLC. Almost all

system operations are controlled by the CPU, so it is important

that it is set up and installed correctly. This chapter provides the

information needed to understand:

• The differences between the various models of CPUs, and

• The steps required to set up and install the CPU.

General CPU Features

The DL230, DL240, DL250–1 and D2–260 are modular CPUs

which can be installed in 3, 4, 6, or 9 slot bases. All I/O modules

in the DL205 family will work with any of the CPUs. The DL205

CPUs offer a wide range of processing power and program instructions. All offer RLL and

Stage program instructions (See Chapter 5). They also provide extensive internal diagnostics

that can be monitored from the application program or from an operator interface.

DL230 CPU Features

The DL230 has 2.4K words of memory comprised of 2.0K of ladder memory and approximately

400 words of V-memory (data registers). It has 92 different instructions available for

programming, and supports a maximum of 256 I/O points.

Program storage is in the factory-installed EEPROM. In addition to the EEPROM there is

also RAM on the CPU which will store system parameters, V-memory, and other data which

is not in the application program.

The DL230 provides one built-in RS-232 communication port, so you can easily connect a

handheld programmer or a personal computer without needing any additional hardware.

DL240 CPU Features

The DL240 has a maximum of 3.8K of memory comprised of 2.5K of ladder memory and

approximately 1.3K of V-memory (data registers). There are 129 instructions available for

program development and a maximum of 256 points local I/O, and 896 points with remote

I/O are supported.

Program storage is in the factory-installed EEPROM. In addition to the EEPROM, there is

also RAM on the CPU that will store system parameters, V-memory and other data which is

not in the application program.

The DL240 has two communication ports. The top port is the same port configuration as the

DL230. The bottom port also supports the DirectNET protocol, so you can use the DL240 in

a DirectNET network. Since the port is RS-232, you must use an RS-232/RS-422 converter

for multi-drop connections.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-3

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

DL250–1 CPU Features

The DL250–1 replaces the DL250 CPU. It offers all the DL240 features, plus more program

instructions and a built–in Remote I/O Master port. It offers all the features of the DL250 CPU

with the addition of supporting Local expansion I/O. It has a maximum of 14.8K of program

memory comprised of 7.6K of ladder memory and 7.2K of V-memory (data registers). It

supports a maximum of 256 points of local I/O and a maximum of 768 I/O points (maximum

of two local expansion bases). In addition, port 2 supports up to 2048 points if you use the

DL250–1 as a Remote master. It includes an internal RISC–based microprocessor for greater

processing power. The DL250–1 has 240 instructions. The instructions are in addition to

the DL240 instruction set which includes drum timers, a print function, floating point math,

PID loop control for 4 loops and the Intelligent Box (IBox) instructions.

The DL250–1 has a total of two built–in communications ports. The top port is identical to

the top port of the DL240, with the exception of the DirectNet slave feature. The bottom port

is a 15–pin RS-232/RS-422 port. It will interface with DirectSOFT and operator interfaces,

and provides DirectNet and Modbus RTU Master/Slave connections.

DL260 CPU Features

The DL260 offers all the DL250–1 features, plus ASCII IN/OUT and expanded Modbus

instructions. It also supports up to 1280 local I/O points by using up to four local expansion

bases. It has a maximum of 30.4K of program memory comprised of 15.8K of ladder memory

(saved on flash memory) and 14.6K of V-memory (data registers). It also includes an internal

RISC–based microprocessor for greater processing power. The DL260 has 297 instructions.

In addition to those in the DL250–1 instruction set, the DL260 instruction set includes table

instructions, trigonometric instructions and support for 16 PID loops.

The DL260 has a total of two built–in communications ports. The top port is identical to the

top port of the DL250–1. The bottom port is a 15–pin RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 port. It will

interface with DirectSOFT (version 4.0 or later), operator interfaces, and provides DirectNet,

Modbus RTU Master/Slave connections. Port 2 also supports ASCII IN/OUT instructions.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-4

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Feature DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Total Program memory (words) 2.4K 3.8K 14.8K 30.4K

Ladder memory (words) 2048 2560 7680 (Flash) 15872 (Flash)

V-memory (words) 256 1024 7168 14592

Non-volatile V Memory (words) 128 256 No No

Boolean execution /K 4–6 ms 10–12 ms 1.9 ms 1.9 ms

RLL and RLLPLUS Programming Yes Yes Yes Yes

Handheld programmer Yes Yes Yes Yes

DirectSOFT programming for Windows. Yes Yes Yes

Yes (requires

version 4.0 or

higher)

Built-in communication ports One RS–232 Two RS–232

One RS–232

One RS–232 or

RS–422

One RS–232

One RS–232,

RS–422 or RS–485

EEPROM Standard on CPU Standard on CPU Flash Flash

Total CPU memory I/O points available 256 (X,Y,CR) 896 (X, Y, CR) 2048 (X, Y, CR) 8192

(X, Y, CR, GX, GY)

Local I/O points available 256 256 256 256

Local Expansion I/O points (including

local I/O and expansion I/O points) N/A N/A 768

(2 exp. bases max.)

1280

(4 exp. bases max.)

Serial Remote I/O points (including

local I/O and expansion I/O points) N/A 896 2048 8192

Serial Remote I/O Channels N/A 2 8 8

Max Number of Serial Remote Slaves N/A 7 Remote / 31 Slice 7 Remote / 31 Slice 7 Remote / 31 Slice

Ethernet Remote I/O Discrete points N/A 896 2048 8192

Ethernet Remote I/O Analog I/O

channels N/A Map into V–memory Map into V–memory Map into V–memory

Ethernet Remote I/O channels N/A Limited by power

budget

Limited by power

budget

Limited by power

budget

Max Number of Ethernet slaves per

channel N/A 16 16 16

I/O points per Remote channel N/A 16,384 (limited to

896 by CPU)

16,384 (16 fully

expanded H4–EBC

slaves using V–

memory and bit–of–

word instructions)

16,384 (16 fully

expanded H4–EBC

slaves using V–

memory and bit–of–

word instructions

I/O Module Point Density 4/8/12/16/32 4/8/12/16/32 4/8/12/16/32 4/8/12/16/32

Slots per Base 3/4/6/9 3/4/6/9 3/4/6/9 3/4/6/9

CPU General Specifications

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-5

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Specification AC Powered Bases 24 VDC Powered Bases 125 VDC Powered Bases

Part Numbers

D2–03B–1

D2–04B–1

D2–06B–1

D2–09B–1

D2–03BDC1–1

D2–04BDC1–1

D2–06BDC1–1

D2–09BDC1–1

D2–06BDC2–1

D2–09BDC2–1

Input Voltage Range 100–240 VAC +10% –15% 10.2–28.8 VDC (24VDC)

with less than 10% ripple 104–240 VDC +10% –15%

Maximum Inrush Current 30A 10A 20A

Maximum Power 80VA 25W 30W

Voltage Withstand (dielectric) 1 minute @ 1500VAC between primary, secondary, field ground, and run relay

Insulation Resistance > 10Mq at 500VDC

Auxiliary 24 VDC Output 20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p

300mA max. None 20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p

300mA max.

Fusing (internal to base power

supply)

Non–replaceable 2A @ 250V

slow blow fuse Non–replaceable 3.15 A @

250V slow blow fuse Non–replaceable 2A @ 250V

slow blow fuse

Feature DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Number of instructions available

(see Chapter 5 for details) 92 129 240 297

Control relays 256 256 1024 2048

Special relays (system defined) 112 144 144 144

Stages in RLLPLUS 256 512 1024 1024

Timers 64 128 256 256

Counters 64 128 128 256

Immediate I/O Yes Yes Yes Yes

Interrupt input (hardware / timed) Yes / No Yes / Yes Yes / Yes Yes / Yes

Subroutines No Yes Yes Yes

Drum Timers No No Yes Yes

Table Instructions No No No Yes

For/Next Loops No Yes Yes Yes

Math Integer Integer Integer,

Floating Point

Integer,

Floating Point,

Trigonometric

ASCII No No Yes, OUT Yes, IN/OUT

PID Loop Control, Built In No No Yes, 4 Loops Yes, 16 Loops

Time of Day Clock/Calendar No Yes Yes Yes

Run Time Edits Yes Yes Yes Yes

Supports Overrides No Yes Yes Yes

Internal diagnostics Yes Yes Yes Yes

Password security Yes Yes Yes Yes

System error log No Yes Yes Yes

User error log No Yes Yes Yes

Battery backup Yes (optional) Yes (optional) Yes (optional) Yes (optional)

CPU Base Electrical Specifications

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-6

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

CPU Hardware Setup

Communication Port Pinout Diagrams

Cables are available that allow you to quickly and easily connect a Handheld Programmer or

a personal computer to the DL205 CPUs. However, if you need to build a cable(s), use the

pinout descriptions shown on the following pages. You can also use the Tech Support/Cable

Wiring diagrams located on our website.

The DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs have two ports while the DL230 has only one. All

of the CPUs require at least one RJ-12 connector. The DL250-1 and DL260 require one 15

pin D-shell connector.

RJ12 Phone Jack

RS-232, 9600 baud

Communication Port

–K-sequence

–DirectNET slave

–Modbus RTU slave

–easily connect

DirectSOFT,

handhelds, operator

interfaces, any DirectNet

master

Port 1

DL250–1 and DL260

Port 2

Additional DL260 Features

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

RUN

TERM

RUN

CPU

PWR

BATT

PORT 1

PORT 2

DL240

CPU

RUN

PWR

BATT

PORT 1?

CPU

RJ12 Phone Jack

RS-232, 9600 baud

Communication Port

–K-sequence

–easily connect

Direct SOFT, handhelds,

operator interfaces, etc.

Port 1

RJ12 Phone Jack

RS-232, up to 19.2K baud

Communication Port

–K-sequence

–DirectNET slave

–easily connect

DirectSOFT, handhelds,

operator interfaces, or any

DirectNet master

Port 2

15-pin HD Connector

RS-232/RS-422, up to 38.4K baud

Communication Port

–K-sequence

–DirectNET Master/Slave

–Modbus RTU Master/Slave

–easily connect

Direct SOFT,

handhelds, operator

interfaces, any DirectNet

or Modbus master or slave

DL260

Port 2

DL250–1 and DL260

–ASCII IN/OUT Instructions

–Extended Modbus Instructions

–RS-485 support

CPU

DL230

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-7

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Port 1 Specifications

The operating parameters for Port 1 on the DL230 and DL240 CPUs are fixed.

• 6-pin female modular (RJ12 phone jack) type connector

• K–sequence protocol (slave only)

• RS-232, 9600 baud

• Connect to DirectSOFT, D2–HPP, DV–1000, HMI panels

• Fixed station address of 1

• 8 data bits, one stop

• Asynchronous, Half–duplex, DTE

• Odd parity

Port 1 Specifications

The operating parameters for Port 1 on the DL250–1 and DL260 CPU are fixed. This applies

to the DL250 as well.

• 6-pin female modular (RJ12 phone jack) type connector

• K–sequence protocol (slave only)

• DirectNET (slave only)

• Modbus RTU (slave only) - supported only on D2-250-1 and D2-260

• RS-232, 9600 baud

• Connect to DirectSOFT, D2–HPP, DV1000 or DirectNET master

• 8 data bits, one start, one stop

• Asynchronous, Half–duplex, DTE

• Odd parity

NOTE: The 5V pins are rated at 200mA maximum, primarily for use with some operator interface units.

Port 1 Pin Descriptions (DL230 and DL240)

1 0V Power (–) connection (GND)

2 5V Power (+) connection

3 RXD Receive Data (RS-232)

4 TXD Transmit Data (RS-232)

5 5V Power (+) connection

6 0V Power (–) connection (GND)





230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

6-pin Female

Modular Connector

Port 1 Pin Descriptions (DL250-1 and DL260)

1 0V Power (–) connection (GND)

2 5V Power (+) connection

3 RXD Receive Data (RS-232C)

4 TXD Transmit Data (RS-232C

5 5V Power (+) connection

6 0V Power (–) connection (GND)

6-pin Female

Modular Connector

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-8

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Port 2 Specifications

The operating parameters for Port 2 on the DL240 CPU are configurable using Aux functions

on a programming device.

• 6-Pin female modular (RJ12 phone jack)

type connector

• K–sequence protocol, DirectNET (slave),

• RS-232, Up to 19.2K baud

• Address selectable (1–90)

• Connect to DirectSOFT, D2–HPP,

DV-1000, HMI, or DirectNET master

• 8 data bits, one start, one stop

• Asynchronous, Half–duplex, DTE

• Odd or no parity

Port 2 Specifications

Port 2 on the DL250-1 and DL260 CPUs

is located on the 15-pin D-shell connector. It is configurable using AUX functions on a

programming device. This applies to the

DL250 as well.

• 15-Pin female D type connector

• Protocol: K-sequence, DirectNET Master/

Slave, Modbus RTU Master/Slave, Remote

I/O, (ASCII IN/OUT DL260 only)

• RS-232, non-isolated, distance within 15m

(approximately 50ft)

• RS-422, non-isolated, distance within

1000 m (approximately 3280ft)

• RS-485, non–isolated, distance within

1000m (DL260 only

• Up to 38.4 K baud

• Address selectable (1–90)

• Connects to DirectSOFT, D2–HPP,

operator interfaces, any DirectNET or

Modbus master/slave, (ASCII devices-DL260

only)

• 8 data bits, one start, one stop

• Asynchronous, Half–duplex, DTE Remote

I/O

• Odd/even/none parity

Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL250–1 / DL260)

1 5V 5VDC

2 TXD2 Transmit Data (RS-232)

3 RXD2 Receive Data (RS-232)

4 RTS2 Ready to Send (RS–232)

5 CTS2 Clear to Send (RS–232)

6 RXD2 – Receive Data – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

7 0V Logic Ground

8 0V Logic Ground

9 TXD2 + Transmit Data + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

10 TXD2 – Transmit Data – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

11 RTS2 + Request to Send + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

12 RTS2 – Request to Send – (RS–422)(RS–485 DL260)

13 RXD2 + Receive Data + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

14 CTS2 + Clear to Send + (RS422) (RS–485 DL260)

15 CTS2 – Clear to Send – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL240 only)

10V Power (–) connection (GND)

2 5V Power (+) connection

3 RXD Receive Data (RS-232)

4 TXD Transmit Data (RS-232)

5 RTS Request to Send

6 0V Power (–) connection (GND)

6-pin Female

Modular Connector

15-pin Female

D Connector







230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-9

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Selecting the Program Storage Media

Built-in EEPROM

The DL230 and DL240 CPUs provide built-in EEPROM storage. This type of memory is

non-volatile and is not dependent on battery backup to retain the program. The EEPROM

can be electrically reprogrammed without being removed from the CPU. You can also set

Jumper 3, which will write protect the EEPROM. The jumper is set at the factory to allow

changes to EEPROM. If you select write protection by changing the jumper position, you

cannot make changes to the program.

WARNING: Do NOT change Jumper 2. This is for factory test operations. If you change Jumper 2, the

CPU will not operate properly.

EEPROM Sizes

The DL230 and DL240 CPUs use different sizes of EEPROMs. The CPUs come from the

factory with EEPROMs already installed. However, if you need extra EEPROMs, select one

that is compatible with the following part numbers.

EEPROM Operations

Many AUX functions are specifically for use with an EEPROM in the Handheld Programmer.

This enables you to quickly and easily copy programs between a program developed offline in

the Handheld Programmer and the CPU. Also, you can erase EEPROMs, compare them, etc.

See the DL205 Handheld Programmer Manual for details on using these AUX functions with

the Handheld Programmer.

NOTE: If the instructions are supported in both CPUs and the program size is within the limits of the

DL230, you can move a program between the two CPUs. However, the EEPROM installed in the Handheld

Programmer must be the same size as (or larger than) the CPU being used. For example, you could not

install a DL240 EEPROM in the Handheld Programmer and download the program to a DL230. Instead, if

the program is within the size limits of the DL230, use a DL230 chip in the Handheld when you obtain the

program from the DL240.

Jumper in position

shown selects write

protect for EEPROM

EEPROM

CPU Type EEPROM Part Number Capacity

DL230 Hitachi HN58C65P–25 8K byte (2Kw)

DL240 Hitachi HN58C256P–20 32K byte (3Kw)





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-10

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Installing the CPU

The CPU must be installed in the first slot in the base (closest to the power supply). You

cannot install the CPU in any other slot. When inserting the CPU into the base, align the

PC board with the grooves on the top and bottom of the base. Push the CPU straight into

the base until it is firmly seated in the backplane connector. Use the retaining clips to secure

the CPU to the base.

WARNING: To minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or equipment damage, always

disconnect the system power before installing or removing any system component.

Connecting the Programming Devices

The handheld programmer is connected to the CPU with a Handheld Programmer cable.

You can connect the Handheld Programmer to either port on a DL240 CPU. The Handheld

Programmer is shipped with a cable. The cable is approximately 6.5 ft (200cm).

If you are using a Personal Computer with the DirectSOFT programming package, you can

use either the top or bottom port.

CPU must reside in first slot!

Retaining Clips

Connect Handheld to either Port

Connect PC to either Port



230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-11

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

CPU Setup Information

Even if you have years of experience using PLCs, there are a few tasks you need to do before

you can start entering programs. This section includes some basic tasks, such as changing the

CPU mode, but it also includes some tasks that you may never have to use. Here’s a brief list

of the items that are discussed:

• Using auxiliary functions

• Clearing the program (and other memory areas)

• How to initialize system memory

• Setting retentive memory ranges

The following paragraphs provide the setup information necessary to ready the CPU for

programming, including set-up instructions for either type of programming device you are

using. The D2–HPP Handheld Programmer Manual provides the Handheld keystrokes

required to perform all of these operations. The DirectSOFT Manual provides a description of

the menus and keystrokes required to perform the setup procedures via DirectSOFT.

Port 1

Port 2

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

RUN

TERM

RUN

CPU

PWR

BATT

PORT 1

DL240

CPU

RUN

CPUBATT

PORT1

DL250-1

Port 1

Port 2

Status Indicators

Mode Switch

Analog

Adjustments

Battery Slot

DL230

DL260

PWR

PORT?2

CPU

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-12

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Status Indicators

The status indicator LEDs on the CPU front panels have specific functions that can help in

programming and troubleshooting.

Mode Switch Functions

The mode switch on the DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs provides positions for enabling

and disabling program changes in the CPU. Unless the mode switch is in the TERM position,

RUN and STOP mode changes will not be allowed by any interface device, (Handheld

Programmer, DirectSOFT programing package or operator interface). Programs may be

viewed or monitored but no changes may be made. If the switch is in the TERM position and

no program password is in effect, all operating modes as well as program access will be allowed

through the connected programming or monitoring device.

The CPU mode can be changed in two ways:

• Use the CPU mode switch to select the operating mode.

• Place the CPU mode switch in the TERM position and use a programming device to change

operating modes. In this position, you can change between Run and Program modes.

NOTE: If the PLC is switched to the RUN Mode without a program in the CPU, the CPU will produce a

FATAL ERROR which can be cleared by cycling the power to the PLC.

Mode Switch Position CPU Action

RUN (Run Program) CPU is forced into the RUN mode if no errors are encountered. No

changes are allowed by the attached programming/monitoring device.

TERM (Terminal) RUN, PROGRAM and the TEST modes are available. Mode and

program changes are allowed by the programming/monitoring device.

STOP (DL250–1 and DL260 only Stop Program) CPU is forced into the STOP mode. No changes are allowed by the

programming/monitoring device.

Indicator Status Meaning

PWR ON Power good

OFF Power failure

RUN

ON CPU is in Run Mode

OFF CPU is in Stop or Program Mode

Blinking CPU is in Firmware Upgrade Mode

CPU ON CPU self diagnostics error

OFF CPU self diagnostics good

BATT ON Low battery voltage (only with System

Memory bit B7633.12 set)

OFF CPU battery voltage is good or disabled

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-13

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Changing Modes in the DL205 PLC

The CPU mode can be changed in two ways: you can use the CPU mode switch to select

the operating mode, or you can place the mode switch in the TERM position and use a

programming device to change operating modes. With the switch in this position, the CPU

can be changed between Run and Program modes. You can use either DirectSOFT or the

Handheld Programmer to change the CPU mode of operation. With DirectSOFT use the

PLC menu option PLC > Mode or use the Mode button located on the Online

toolbar. With the Handheld Programmer, use the MODE key.

Mode of Operation at Power Up

The DL205 CPUs will normally power up in the mode that it was in just prior to the power

interruption. For example, if the CPU was in Program Mode when the power was disconnected,

the CPU will power up in Program Mode (see warning note below).

WARNING: Once the super capacitor has discharged, the system memory may not retain the previous

mode of operation. When this occurs, the PLC can power-up in either Run or Program Mode if the mode

switch is in the term position. There is no way to determine which mode will be entered as the startup

mode. Failure to adhere to this warning greatly increases the risk of unexpected equipment startup.

The mode in which the CPU will power up in is also determined by the state of System

Memory bit B7633.13. If the bit is set and the Mode Switch is in the TERM position, the

CPU will power-up in RUN mode. If B7633.13 is not set with the Mode Switch in TERM

position, then the CPU will power up in the state it was in when it was powered down.

Mode Switch Position CPU Action

RUN (Run Program) CPU is forced into the RUN mode if no errors are encountered.

No changes are allowed by the attached programming/

monitoring device.

TERM (Terminal) RUN PROGRAM and the TEST modes are available. Mode and

program changes are allowed by the programming/monitoring

device.

STOP CPU is forced into the STOP mode. No changes are allowed

by the programming/monitoring device.

PLC Menu

MODE Key

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-14

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Using Battery Backup

An optional lithium battery is available to maintain the system RAM retentive memory when

the DL205 system is without external power. Typical CPU battery life is five years, which

includes PLC runtime and normal shut-down periods. However, consider installing a fresh

battery if your battery has not been changed recently and the system will be shut down for a

period of more than ten days.

NOTE: Before installing or replacing your CPU battery, back up your V-memory and system parameters. You

can do this by using DirectSOFT to save the program, V-memory, and system parameters to hard/floppy

disk on a personal computer.

To install the D2–BAT CPU battery in DL230 or

DL240 CPUs:

1. Gently push the battery connector onto the circuit

board connector.

2. Push the battery into the retaining clip. Don’t use

excessive force. You may break the retaining clip.

3. Make a note of the date the battery was installed.

To install the D2–BAT–1 CPU battery in the DL250–1/DL260

CPUs: (#CR2354)

1. Press the retaining clip on the battery door down and swing the

battery door open.

2. Place the battery into the coin–type slot with the +, or larger, side

out.

3. Close the battery door making sure that it locks securely in place.

4. Make a note of the date the battery was installed.

WARNING: Do not attempt to recharge the battery or dispose of an old battery by fire. The battery may

explode or release hazardous materials.

Battery Backup

The battery backup is available immediately after the battery has been installed in the DL205

CPUs. The battery low (BATT) indicator will turn on if the battery is less than 2.5VDC (refer

to the Status Indicator table on page 3-12). Special Relay 43 (SP43) will also be activated. The

low battery indication is enabled by setting bit 12 of V7633 (B7633.12). If the low-battery

feature is not desired, do not set bit V7633.12.

The super capacitor will retain memory IF it is configured as retentive regardless of the state of

B7633.12. The battery will be the same, but for a much longer time.

DL230 and DL240

DL250-1 and DL260 DL230 and DL240

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-15

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Auxiliary Functions

Many CPU set-up tasks involve the use of Auxiliary (AUX) Functions. The AUX Functions

perform many different operations, including clearing ladder memory, displaying the scan

time, copying programs to EEPROM in the Handheld Programmer, etc. They are divided

into categories that affect different system parameters. Appendix A provides a description of

the AUX functions.

You can access the AUX Functions from DirectSOFT or from the DL205 Handheld

Programmer. The manuals for those products provide step-by-step procedures for accessing

the AUX Functions. Some of these AUX Functions are designed specifically for the Handheld

Programmer setup, so they will not be needed (or available) with the DirectSOFT package.

The following table shows a list of the Auxiliary functions for the different CPUs and the

Handheld Programmer.

NOTE: The Handheld Programmer may have additional AUX functions that are not supported with the DL205

CPUs.

AUX Function and

Description 230 240 250–1 260 HPP

AUX 6* — Handheld Programmer Configuration

61 Show Revision Numbers ü ü ü ü –

62 Beeper On / Off XXX Xü

65 Run Self Diagnostics XXX Xü

AUX 7* — EEPROM Operations

71 Copy CPU memory to

HPP EEPROM XXX Xü

72 Write HPP EEPROM to CPU XXX Xü

73 Compare CPU to

HPP EEPROM XXX Xü

74 Blank Check (HPP EEPROM) XXX Xü

75 Erase HPP EEPROM XXX Xü

76 Show EEPROM Type

(CPU and HPP) XXX Xü

AUX 8* — Password Operations

81 Modify Password ü ü ü ü –

82 Unlock CPU ü ü ü ü –

83 Lock CPU ü ü ü ü –

AUX Function and

Description 230 240 250–1 260

AUX 2* — RLL Operations

21 Check Program ü ü ü ü

22 Change Reference ü ü ü ü

23 Clear Ladder Range ü ü ü ü

24 Clear All Ladders ü ü ü ü

AUX 3* — V-Memory Operations

31 Clear V Memory ü ü ü ü

AUX 4* — I/O Configuration

41 Show I/O Configuration ü ü ü ü

42 I/O Diagnostics ü ü ü ü

44 Power-up I/O

Configuration Check ü ü ü ü

45 Select Configuration ü ü ü ü

46 Configure I/O X X ü ü

AUX 5* — CPU Configuration

51 Modify Program Name ü ü ü ü

52 Display / Change Calendar Xü ü ü

53 Display Scan Time ü ü ü ü

54 Initialize Scratchpad ü ü ü ü

55 Set Watchdog Timer ü ü ü ü

56 Set CPU Network Address Xü ü ü

57 Set Retentive Ranges ü ü ü ü

58 Test Operations ü ü ü ü

59 Bit Override Xü ü ü

5B Counter Interface Config. ü ü ü ü

5C Display Error History Xü ü ü

ü Supported

X Not Supported

- Not Applicable

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-16

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Clearing an Existing Program

Before you enter a new program, you should always clear ladder memory. You can use AUX

Function 24 to clear the complete program.

You can also use other AUX functions to clear other memory areas.

AUX 23 — Clear Ladder Range

AUX 24 — Clear all Ladders

AUX 31 — Clear V-Memory

Initializing System Memory

The DL205 CPUs maintain system parameters in a memory area often referred to as the

“scratchpad.” In some cases, you may make changes to the system setup that will be stored in

system memory. For example, if you specify a range of Control Relays (CRs) as retentive, these

changes are stored. AUX 54 resets the system memory to the default values.

WARNING: You may never have to use this feature unless you want to clear any set-up information

that is stored in system memory. Usually, you will only need to initialize the system memory if you

are changing programs and the old program required a special system setup. You can usually change

from program to program without ever initializing system memory. Remember, this AUX function will

reset all system memory. If you have set special parameters such as retentive ranges, etc., they will

be erased when AUX 54 is used. Make sure that you have considered all ramifications of this operation

before you select it.

Setting the Clock and Calendar

The DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 also have a Clock/Calendar that can be used for many

purposes. If you need to use this feature, AUX functions are available that allow you to set the

date and time. For example, you would use AUX 52, Display/Change Calendar to set the time

and date with the Handheld Programmer. With DirectSOFT you would use the PLC set-up

menu options using K–Sequence protocol only.

The CPU uses the following format to display the date and time.

• Date — Year, Month, Date, Day of week (0 – 6, Sunday

through Saturday)

• Time — 24-hour format, Hours, Minutes, Seconds

You can use the AUX function to change any component of the date or time. However, the

CPU will not automatically correct any discrepancy between the date and the day of the week.

For example, if you change the date to the 15th of the month and the 15th is on a Thursday,

you will also have to change the day of the week (unless the CPU already shows the date as

Thursday). The day of the week can only be set using the Handheld Programmer.

23:08:17 08/02/20

Handheld Programmer Display

230

240

250-1

260





DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-17

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Setting the CPU Network Address

The DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs have built in DirectNet ports. You can use the

Handheld Programmer to set the network address for the port and the port communication

parameters. The default settings are:

• Station Address 1

• Hex Mode

• Odd Parity

• 9600 Baud

The DirectNet Manual provides additional information about choosing the communication

settings for network operation.

Setting Retentive Memory Ranges

The DL205 CPUs provide certain ranges of retentive memory by default. The default ranges

are suitable for many applications, but you can change them if your application requires

additional retentive ranges or no retentive ranges at all. The default settings are:

You can use AUX 57 to set the retentive ranges. You can also use DirectSOFT menus to select

the retentive ranges.

WARNING: The DL205 CPUs do not come with a battery. The super capacitor will retain the values in

the event of a power loss, but only for a short period of time, depending on conditions. If the retentive

ranges are important for your application, make sure you obtain the optional battery.

Memory

Area

DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Default Range Avail. Range Default Range Avail. Range Default Range Avail. Range Default Range Avail. Range

Control Relays C300 – C377 C0 – C377 C300 – C377 C0 – C377 C1000 – C1777 C0 – C1777 C1000 – C3777 C0 – C3777

V-Memory V2000 – V7777 V0 – V7777 V2000 – V7777 V0 – V7777 V1400 – V3777 V0 – V17777 V400 – V37777 V0 – V37777

Timers None by default T0 – T77 None by default T0 – T177 None by default T0 – T377 None by default T0 – T377

Counters CT0 – CT77 CT0 – CT77 CT0 – CT177 CT0 – CT177 CT0 – CT177 CT0 – CT177 CT0 – CT377 CT0 – CT377

Stages None by default S0 – S377 None by default S0 – S777 None by default S0 – S1777 None by default S0 – S1777

230

240

250-1

260





DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-18

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Using a Password

The DL205 CPUs allow you to use a password to help minimize the risk of unauthorized

program and/or data changes. Once you enter a password you can “lock” the CPU against

access. Once the CPU is locked you must enter the password before you can use a programming

device to change any system parameters.

You can select an 8-digit numeric password. The CPUs are shipped from the factory with a

password of 00000000. All zeros removes the password protection. If a password has been

entered into the CPU, you cannot enter all zeros to remove it. Once you enter the correct

password, you can change the password to all zeros to remove the password protection. For

more information on passwords, see the appropriate appendix on auxiliary functions.

WARNING: Make sure you remember your password. If you forget your password you will not be able

to access the CPU. The CPU must be returned to the factory to have the password (along with the

ladder project) removed. It is the policy of AutomationDirect to require the memory of the PLC to be

cleared along with the password.

You can use the D2–HPP Handheld Programmer

or DirectSOFT to enter a password. The following

diagram shows how you can enter a password with the

Handheld Programmer.

The CPU can be locked three ways once the password has been entered.

• If the CPU power is disconnected, the CPU will be automatically locked against access.

• If you enter the password with DirectSOFT, the CPU will be automatically locked against access

when you exit DirectSOFT.

•Use AUX 83 to lock the CPU.

When you use DirectSOFT, you will be prompted for a password if the CPU has been locked.

If you use the Handheld Programmer, you have to use AUX 82 to unlock the CPU. Once you

enter AUX 82, you will be prompted to enter the password.

NOTE: The DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs offer multi–level passwords for even more password

protection of the ladder program. This allows password protection while not locking the communication port

to an operator interface. The multi-level password can be invoked by creating a password with an upper case

“A” followed by seven numeric characters (e.g., A1234567).

D2–HPPDirect SOFT

PASSWORD

CLR CLR AUX

BENT

XX ENTX

Select AUX 81

Enter the new 8-digit password

Press CLR to clear the display

XXXXXXXX

PASSWORD

00000000

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-19

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Setting the Analog Potentiometer Ranges

Four analog potentiometers (pots) are on the

face plate of the DL240 CPU. These pots can

be used to change timer constants, frequency of

pulse train output, value for an analog output

module, etc.

Each analog channel has corresponding

V-memory locations for setting lower and upper

limits for each analog channel.

To increase the value associated with the analog

pot, turn the pot clockwise. To decrease the

value, turn the pot counter clockwise

The table below shows the V-memory locations

used for each analog channel. These are the

default locations for the analog pots.

You can use the program logic to load the limits

into these locations, or, you can use a programming

device to load the values. The range for each limit

is 0 – 9999.

These analog pots have a resolution of 256 pieces.

Therefore, if the span between the upper and lower

limits is less than or equal to 256, then you have

better resolution or, more precise control.

Use the formula shown to determine the smallest

amount of change that can be detected.

For example, a range of 100 – 600 would result in a

resolution of 1.95. Therefore, the smallest increment

would be 1.95 units. (The actual result depends on

exactly how you are using the values in the control

program).

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

Analog Data V3774 V3775 V3776 V3777

Analog Data Lower Limit V7640 V7642 V7644 V7646

Analog Data Upper Limit V7641 V7643 V7645 V7647

CPU Specifications

Resolution =256

H = high limit of the range

L = low limit of the range

H = 600

L = 100

Resolution =

H – L

256

Resolution =500

256

Example Calculations:

Resolution =1.95

600–100







230

240

250-1

260 CH1

RUN

TERM

RUN

CPU

PWR

BATT

?PORT 1

PORT 2

DL240

CPU

Analog Pots

0 Max

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

Turn clockwise to increase value.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-20

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

The following example shows how you could use these analog potentiometers to change the

preset value for a timer. See Chapter 5 for details on how these instructions operate.

X1 TMR T20

V3774

OUT

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 0

Current

Value

Timing Diagram

preset = 100

DirectSOFT

1/10 Seconds

K100

OUT

V7640

Load the lower limit (100) for the analog range on Ch1 into V7640.

K600

OUT

V7641

Load the upper limit (600) for the analog range on Ch1 into V7641.

Use V3774 as the preset for the timer. This will allow you to quickly

adjust the preset from 100 to 600 with the CH1 analog pot.

T20

100

Turn all the way counter-clockwise to use lowest value

600

CH1

CH2

Program loads ranges into V-memory

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 0

Current

Value

Timing Diagram

preset = 300

1/10 Seconds

100

Turn clockwise to increase the timer preset.

600

CH1

CH2

SP0

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-21

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

CPU Operation

Achieving the proper control for your equipment or process requires a good understanding

of how DL205 CPUs control all aspects of system operation. The flowchart below shows the

main tasks of the CPU operating system. In this section, we

will investigate four aspects of CPU operation:

• CPU Operating System — The CPU manages all aspects of

system control.

• CPU Operating Modes — The three primary modes of

operation are Program Mode, Run Mode, and Test Mode.

• CPU Timing — The two important areas we discuss are the

I/O response time and the CPU scan time.

• CPU Memory Map — The CPU’s memory map shows the

CPU addresses of various system resources, such as timers,

counters, inputs, and outputs.

CPU Operating System

At power up, the CPU initializes the internal electronic

hardware. Memory initialization starts with examining

the retentive memory settings. In general, the contents of

retentive memory are preserved, and non-retentive memory

is initialized to zero (unless otherwise specified).

After the one-time power-up tasks, the CPU begins the

cyclical scan activity. The flowchart to the right shows how

the tasks differ based on the CPU mode and the existence

of any errors. The “scan time” is defined as the average

time around the task loop. Note that the CPU is always

reading the inputs, even during program mode. This allows

programming tools to monitor input status at any time.

The outputs are only updated in Run mode. In Program

mode, they are in the off state.

In Run Mode, the CPU executes the user ladder program.

Immediately afterwards, any PID loops which are

configured are executed (DL250-1 and DL260). Then

the CPU writes the output results of these two tasks to the

appropriate output points.

Error detection has two levels: Non-fatal and fatal. Non-

fatal errors are reported, but the CPU remains in its current

mode. If a fatal error occurs, the CPU is forced into

program mode and the outputs go off.

YES

Power up

Initialize hardware

Check I/O module

config. and verify

Initialize various memory

based on retentive

configuration

Update input

Read input data from

Specialty and Remote I/O

Service peripheral

PGM Mode?

RUN

Execute ladder program

Update output

Write output data to

Specialty and Remote I/O

Do diagnostics

Fatal error

Force CPU into

PGM mode

OK?

Report the error, set flag,

YES

CPU Bus Communication

Update Clock / Calendar

PID Operations (DL250-1/DL260)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-22

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Program Mode Operation

In Program Mode the CPU does not execute

the application program or update the output

modules. The primary use for Program Mode

is to enter or change an application program.

You also use the program mode to set up

CPU parameters, such as the network address,

retentive memory areas, etc.

You can use the mode switch on the DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs to select Program Mode

operation. Or, with the switch in TERM position, you can use a programming device such as

the Handheld Programmer to place the CPU in Program Mode.

Run Mode Operation

In Run Mode, the CPU executes the application

program, does PID calculations for configured

PID loops (DL250-1/DL260), and updates the

I/O system. You can perform many operations

during Run Mode. Some of these include:

• Monitor and change I/O point status

• Update timer/counter preset values

• Update Variable memory locations

Run Mode operation can be divided into several

key areas. It is very important you understand

how each of these areas of execution can affect

the results of your application program solutions.

You can use the mode switch to select Run Mode

operation (DL240, DL250–1 and DL260).

Or, with the mode switch in TERM position,

you can use a programming device, such as the

Handheld Programmer, to place the CPU in

Run Mode.

You can also edit the program during Run Mode.

The Run Mode Edits are not “bumpless.”

Instead, the CPU maintains the outputs in

their last state while it accepts the new program information. If an error is found in the new

program, then the CPU will turn all the outputs off and enter the Program Mode.

WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the application should make

changes to the program. Changes during Run Mode become effective immediately. Make sure you

thoroughly consider the impact of any changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to

equipment.

Download Program

X10

X17

Read Inputs

Read Inputs from Specialty I/O

Solve the Application Program

Write Outputs

Diagnostics

Service Peripherals, Force I/O

Write Outputs to Specialty I/O

CPU Bus Communication

Update Clock, Special Relays

Solve PID Equations (DL250-1/DL260)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-23

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Read Inputs

The CPU reads the status of all inputs, then stores it in the image register. Input image register

locations are designated with an X followed by a memory location. Image register data is used

by the CPU when it solves the application program. Of course, an input may change after

the CPU has read the inputs. Generally, the CPU scan time is measured in milliseconds. If

you have an application that cannot wait until the next I/O update, you can use Immediate

Instructions. These do not use the status of the input image register to solve the application

program. The Immediate instructions immediately read the input status directly from I/O

modules. However, this lengthens the program scan since the CPU has to read the I/O point

status again. A complete list of the Immediate instructions is included in Chapter 5.

Read Inputs from Specialty and Remote I/O

After the CPU reads the inputs from the input

modules, it reads any input point data from any

Specialty modules that are installed, such as Counter

Interface modules, etc. This is also the portion of

the scan that reads the input status from Remote I/O

bases.

NOTE: It may appear the Remote I/O point status is

updated every scan. This is not quite true. The CPU will receive information from the Remote I/O Master

module every scan, but the Remote Master may not have received an update from all the Remote Slaves.

Remember, the Remote I/O link is managed by the Remote Master, not the CPU.

Service Peripherals and Force I/O

After the CPU reads the inputs from the input modules, it reads any attached peripheral

devices. This is primarily a communications service for any attached devices. For example,

it would read a programming device to see if any input, output, or other memory type status

needs to be modified. Two basic types of forcing are available with the DL205 CPUs.

NOTE: DirectNet protocol does not support bit operations.

• Forcing from a peripheral – not a permanent force, good only for one scan

• Bit Override (DL240, DL250–1 and DL260) – holds the I/O point (or other bit) in the current

state. Valid bits are X, Y, C, T, CT, and S. These memory types are discussed in more detail later

in this chapter.

Regular Forcing — This type of forcing can temporarily change the status of a discrete bit.

For example, you may want to force an input on, even though it is really off. This allows you

to change the point status that was stored in the image register. This value will be valid until

the image register location is written to during the next scan. This is primarily useful during

testing situations when you need to force a bit on to trigger another event.

___

DL250–1/260

RSSS

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-24

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Bit Override — (DL240, DL250–1 and DL260) Bit override can be enabled on a point-by-

point basis by using AUX 59 from the Handheld Programmer or, by a menu option from

within DirectSOFT. Bit override basically disables any changes to the discrete point by the

CPU. For example, if you enable bit override for X1, and X1 is off at the time, then the CPU

will not change the state of X1. This means that even if X1 comes on, the CPU will not

acknowledge the change. So, if you used X1 in the program, it would always be evaluated as

“off” in this case. Of course, if X1 was on when the bit override was enabled, then X1 would

always be evaluated as “on.” There is an advantage available when you use the bit override

feature. The regular forcing is not disabled because the bit override is enabled. For example, if

you enabled the Bit Override for Y0 and it was off at the time, then the CPU would not change

the state of Y0. However, you can still use a programming device to change the status. Now, if

you use the programming device to force Y0 on, it will remain on and the CPU will not change

the state of Y0. If you then force Y0 off, the CPU will maintain Y0 as off. The CPU will never

update the point with the results from the application program or from the I/O update until

the bit override is removed. The following diagram shows a brief overview of the bit override

feature. Notice the CPU does not update the Image Register when bit override is enabled

CPU Bus Communication

Specialty Modules, such as the Data Communications Module, can transfer data to and from

the CPU over the CPU bus on the backplane. This data is more than standard I/O point

status. This type of communications can only occur on the CPU (local) base. A portion of the

execution cycle is used to communicate with these modules. The CPU performs both read and

write requests during this segment.

Update Clock, Special Relays and Special Registers

The DL240 , DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs have an internal real-time clock and calendar

timer which are accessible to the application program. Special V-memory locations hold this

information. This portion of the execution cycle makes sure these locations get updated on

every scan. Several different Special Relays, such as diagnostic relays, etc., are also updated

during this segment.

Input Update

Result of Program

Solution

OFF

Image Register (example)

Y2...Y128

ON...OFF

C0C1C2...C377

OFFOFFON...OFF

OFF

X2...X128

ON...OFF

Bit Override OFF Force from

Programmer

Input Update

Result of Program

Solution

Bit Override ON

Force from

Programmer

DCM

___ ___

DATA

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-25

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Solve Application Program

The CPU evaluates each instruction in the application

program during this segment of the scan cycle. The

instructions define the relationship between input

conditions and the system outputs.

The CPU begins with the first rung of the ladder program,

evaluating it from left to right and from top to bottom. It

continues, rung by rung, until it encounters the END coil

instruction. At that point, a new image for the outputs is

complete.

The internal control relays (C), the stages (S), and the

variable memory (V) are also updated in this segment.

You may recall the CPU may have obtained and stored forcing information when it serviced

the peripheral devices. If any I/O points or memory data have been forced, the output image

NOTE: If an output point was used in the application program, the results of the program solution will

overwrite any forcing information that was stored. For example, if Y0 was forced on by the programming

device, and a rung containing Y0 was evaluated such that Y0 should be turned off, then the output image

application program. In this case, the point remains forced because there is no solution that results from

the application program execution.

Solve PID Loop Equations

The DL260 CPU can process up to 16 PID loops and the DL250–1 can process up to 4 PID

loops. The loop calculations are run as a separate task from the ladder program execution,

immediately following it. Only loops that have been configured are calculated, and then only

according to a built-in loop scheduler. The sample time (calculation interval) of each loop is

programmable. Please refer to Chapter 8, PID Loop Operation, for more on the effects of PID

loop calculation on the overall CPU scan time.

Write Outputs

Once the application program has solved the instruction logic and constructed the output

image register, the CPU writes the contents of the output image register to the corresponding

output points located in the local CPU base or the local expansion bases. Remember, the CPU

also made sure any forcing operation changes were stored in the output image register, so the

forced points get updated with the status specified earlier.





230

240

250-1

260

Read Inputs

Read Inputs from Specialty I/O

Solve the Application Program

Write Outputs

Diagnostics

Service Peripherals, Force I/O

Write Outputs to Specialty I/O

CPU Bus Communication

Update Clock, Special Relays

Solve PID equations (DL250-1/DL260)

X0 X1 Y0

OUT

C100 LD K10

X5 X10 Y3

OUT

END

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-26

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Write Outputs to Specialty and Remote I/O

After the CPU updates the outputs in the local and expansion bases, it sends the output point

information that is required by any Specialty modules that are installed. For example, this is

the portion of the scan that writes the output status from the image register to the Remote I/O

racks.

NOTE: It may appear the Remote I/O point status is updated every scan. This is not quite true. The

CPU will send the information to the Remote I/O Master module every scan, but the Remote Master will

update the actual remote modules during the next communication sequence between the master and slave

modules. Remember, the Remote I/O link communication is managed by the Remote Master, not the CPU.

Diagnostics

During this part of the scan, the CPU performs all

system diagnostics and other tasks, such as:

• calculating the scan time

• updating special relays

• resetting the watchdog timer

DL205 CPUs automatically detect and report

many different error conditions. Appendix

B contains a listing of the various error codes

available with the DL205 system.

One of the more important diagnostic tasks is

the scan time calculation and watchdog timer

control. DL205 CPUs have a “watchdog” timer

that stores the maximum time allowed for the

CPU to complete the solve application segment

of the scan cycle. The default value set from the

factory is 200ms. If this time is exceeded the CPU

will enter the Program Mode, turn off all outputs,

and report the error. For example, the Handheld

Programmer displays “E003 S/W TIMEOUT”

when the scan overrun occurs.

You can use AUX 53 to view the minimum, maximum, and current scan time. Use AUX 55

to increase or decrease the watchdog timer value. There is also an RSTWT instruction that can

be used in the application program to reset the watch dog timer during the CPU scan.

Read Inputs

Read Inputs from Specialty I/O

Solve the Application Program

Write Outputs

Diagnostics

Service Peripherals, Force I/O

Write Outputs to Specialty I/O

CPU Bus Communication

Update Clock, Special Relays

Solve PID Loop Equations

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-27

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

I/O Response Time

Is Timing Important for Your Application?

I/O response time is the amount of time required for the control system to sense a change in

an input point and update a corresponding output point. In the majority of applications, the

CPU performs this task practically instantaneously. However, some applications do require

extremely fast update times. Four things can affect the I/O response time:

• The point in the scan period when the field input changes states

• Input module Off to On delay time

• CPU scan time

• Output module Off to On delay time

Normal Minimum I/O Response

The I/O response time is shortest when the module senses the input change before the Read

Inputs portion of the execution cycle. In this case the input status is read, the application

program is solved, and the output point gets updated. The following diagram shows an

example of the timing for this situation.

In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items:

Input Delay + Scan Time + Output Delay = Response Time

Normal Maximum I/O Response

The I/O response time is longest when the module senses the input change after the Read

Inputs portion of the execution cycle. In this case the new input status does not get read until

the following scan. The following diagram shows an example of the timing for this situation.

In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items:

Input Delay +(2 x Scan Time) + Output Delay = Response Time

Solve

Program

Read

Inputs

Write

Outputs

Solve

Program

Scan

Solve

Program

Field Input

Input Module

Off/On Delay

CPU Reads

Inputs

Output Module

Off/On Delay

I/O Response Time

Scan

Solve

Program

CPU Writes

Outputs

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-28

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Improving Response Time

You can do a few things to help improve throughput.

• Choose instructions with faster execution times

• Use immediate I/O instructions (which update the I/O points during the ladder program

execution segment)

• Choose modules that have faster response times

Immediate I/O instructions are probably the most useful technique. The following example

shows immediate input and output instructions and their effect.

In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items:

Input Delay + Instruction Execution Time + Output Delay = Response Time

The instruction execution time is calculated by adding the time for the immediate input

instruction, the immediate output instruction, and all instructions in between.

NOTE: When the immediate instruction reads the current status from a module, it uses the results to solve

that one instruction without updating the image register. Therefore, any regular instructions that follow

will still use image register values. Any immediate instructions that follow will access the module again to

update the status.

Solve

Program

Read

Inputs

Write

Outputs

Solve

Program

Scan

Solve

Program

Field Input

Input Module

Off/On Delay

CPU Reads

Inputs

Output Module

Off/On Delay

I/O Response Time

Scan

Solve

Program

CPU Writes

Outputs

Solve

Program

Read

Input

Immediate

Normal

Write

Outputs

Solve

Program

Scan

Solve

Program

Field Input

Input Module

Off/On Delay

Output Module

Off/On Delay

I/O Response Time

Scan

Solve

Program

Normal Read

Input

Write

Output

Immediate

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-29

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

CPU Scan Time Considerations

The scan time covers all the cyclical tasks

that the operating system performs. You

can use DirectSOFT or the Handheld

Programmer to display the minimum,

maximum, and current scan times that have

occurred since the previous Program Mode

to Run Mode transition. This information

can be very important when evaluating

system performance.

As shown previously, there are several

segments that make up the scan cycle. Each

of these segments requires a certain amount

of time to complete. Of all the segments,

the only one you really have the most control

over is the amount of time it takes to execute

the application program. This is because

different instructions take different amounts

of time to execute. So, if you think you need

a faster scan, then you can try to choose

faster instructions.

Your choice of I/O modules and system

configuration, such as expansion or remote

I/O, can also affect the scan time; however,

the application usually dictates them.

For example, if you need to count pulses at

high rates of speed, then you will probably

have to use a High-Speed Counter module.

Also, if you have I/O points that need to be

located several hundred feet from the CPU,

then you need remote I/O because it is much

faster and cheaper to install a single remote

I/O cable than it is to run all those signal

wires for each individual I/O point. The

following paragraphs provide some general

information on how much time some of the

segments can require.

YES

Power up

Initialize hardware

Check I/O module

config. and verify

Initialize various memory

based on retentive

configuration

Update input

Read input data from

Specialty and Remote I/O

Service peripheral

PGM Mode?

RUN

Execute ladder program

Update output

Write output data to

Specialty and Remote I/O

Do diagnostics

Fatal error

Force CPU into

PGM mode

OK?

Report the error, set flag,

YES

CPU Bus Communication

Update Clock / Calendar

PID Equations (DL250-1/DL260)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-30

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Initialization Process

The CPU performs an initialization task once the system power is on. The initialization task

is performed once at power up, so it does not affect the scan time for the application program.

Reading Inputs

The time required to read the input status for the input modules depends on which CPU you

are using and the number of input points in the base. The following table shows typical update

times required by the CPU.

For example, the time required for a DL240 to read two 8-point input modules would be

calculated as follows, where NI is the total number of input points:

Formula

Time = 32µs + (12.3 x NI)

Example

Time = 32µs + (12.3 x 16)

Time = 228.8 µs

NOTE: This information provides the amount of time the CPU spends reading the input status from the

modules. Don’t confuse this with the I/O response time that was discussed earlier.

Timing Factors DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Overhead 64.0 µs 32.0 µs 12.6 µs 12.6 µs

Per input point 6.0 µs 12.3 µs 2.5 µs 2.5 µs

Initialization DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Minimum Time 1.6 Seconds 1.0 Seconds 1.2 Seconds 1.2 Seconds

Maximum Time 3.6 Seconds 2.0 Seconds 2.7 Seconds(w/ 2 exp. bases) 3.7 Seconds (w/ 4 exp. bases)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-31

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Reading Inputs from Specialty I/O

During this portion of the cycle the CPU reads any input points associated with the following:

• Remote I/O

• Specialty Modules (such as High-Speed Counter, etc)

The time required to read any input status from these modules depends on which CPU you are

using, the number of modules, and the number of input points.

For example, the time required for a DL240 to read two 8-point input modules (located in a

Remote base) would be calculated as follows, where NM is the number of modules and NI is

the total number of input points:

Remote I/O

Formula

Time = 6µs + (67µs x NM) + (40µs x NI)

Example

Time = 6µs + (67µs x 2) + (40µs x 16)

Time = 780µs

Service Peripherals

Communication requests can occur at any time during the scan, but the CPU only “logs” the

requests for service until the Service Peripherals portion of the scan. The CPU does not spend

any time on this if there are no peripherals connected.

To Log Request (anytime) DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Nothing

Connected Min. & Max. 0 µs 0 µs 0 µs 0 µs

Port 1 Send Min. / Max. 22/28 µs 23/26 µs 3.2/9.2 µs 3.2/9.2 µs

Rec. Min. / Max. 24/58 µs 52/70 µs 25.0/35.0 µs 25.0/35.0 µs

Port 2 Send Min. / Max. N/A 26/30 µs 3.6/11.5 µs 3.6/11.5 µs

Rec. Min. / Max. N/A 60/75 µs 35.0/44.0 µs 35.0/44.0 µs

Remote Module DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Overhead N/A 6.0 µs 1.82 µs 1.82 µs

Per module (with inputs) N/A 67.0 µs 17.9 µs 17.9 µs

Per input point N/A 40.0 µs 2.0 µs 2.0 µs

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-32

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

During the Service Peripherals portion of the scan, the CPU analyzes the communications

request and responds as appropriate. The amount of time required to service the peripherals

depends on the content of the request.

CPU Bus Communication

Some specialty modules can also communicate directly with the CPU via the CPU bus. During

this portion of the cycle the CPU completes any CPU bus communications. The actual time

required depends on the type of modules installed and the type of request being processed.

NOTE: Some specialty modules can have a considerable impact on the CPU scan time. If timing is critical in

your application, consult the module documentation for any information concerning the impact on the scan

time.

Update Clock/Calendar, Special Relays, Special Registers

The clock, calendar, and special relays are updated and loaded into special V-memory locations

during this time. This update is performed during both Run and Program Modes.

Writing Outputs

The time required to write the output status for the local and expansion I/O modules depends

on which CPU you are using and the number of output points in the base. The following table

shows typical update times required by the CPU.

For example, the time required for a DL240 to write data for two 8-point output modules

would be calculated as follows (where NO is the total number of output points):

Formula

Time = 33 + (NO x 14.6 µs)

Example

Time = 33 + (16 x 14.6 µs)

Time = 266.6 µs

Timing Factors DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Overhead 66.0 µs 33.0 µs 28.1 µs 28.1 µs

Per output point 8.5 µs 14.6 µs 3.0 µs 3.0 µs

Modes DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Program Mode Minimum 8.0 µs fixed 35.0 µs 11.0 µs 11.0 µs

Maximum 8.0 µs fixed 48.0 µs 11.0 µs 11.0 µs

Run Mode Minimum 20.0 µs 60.0 µs 19.0 µs 19.0 µs

Maximum 26.0 µs 85.0 µs 26.0 µs 26.0 µs

To Service Request DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Minimum 260µs 250µs 8µs 8µs

Run Mode Max. 30ms 20ms 410µs 410µs

Program Mode Max. 3.5 Seconds 4 Seconds 2 Seconds 3.7 Seconds

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-33

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Writing Outputs to Specialty I/O

During this portion of the cycle the CPU writes any output points associated with the following.

• Remote I/O

• Specialty Modules (such as High-Speed Counter, etc)

The time required to write any output image register data to these modules depends on which

CPU you are using, the number of modules, and the number of output points.

For example, the time required for a DL240 to write two 8-point output modules (located in

a Remote base) would be calculated as follows, where NM is the number of modules and NO

is the total number of output points:

Remote I/O

Formula

Time = 6µs + (67.5 µs x NM) + (46µs x NO)

Example

Time = 6µs + (67.5 µs x 2) + (46µs x 16)

Time = 877µs

NOTE: This total time is the actual time required for the CPU to update these outputs. This does not include

any additional time that is required for the CPU to actually service the particular specialty modules.

Diagnostics

The DL205 CPUs perform many types of system diagnostics. The amount of time required

depends on many things, such as the number of I/O modules installed, etc. The following

table shows the minimum and maximum times that can be expected.

Remote Module DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Overhead N/A 6.0 µs 1.9 µs 1.9 µs

Per module (with outputs) N/A 67.5 µs 17.7 µs 17.7 µs

Per output point N/A 46.0 µs 3.2 µs 3.2 µs

Diagnostic Time DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Minimum 600.0 µs 422.0 µs 26.8 µs 26.8 µs

Maximum 900.0 µs 855.0 µs 103.0 µs 103.0 µs

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-34

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Application Program Execution

The CPU processes the program from the top (address 0) to the END instruction. The CPU

executes the program left to right and top to bottom. As each rung is evaluated, the appropriate

image register or memory location is updated.

The time required to solve the application program depends on the type and number of

instructions used and the amount of execution overhead.

You can add the execution times for all the instructions in your program to find the total

program execution time. For example, the execution time for a DL240 running the program

shown would be calculated as follows:

Appendix C provides a complete list of instruction execution times for DL205 CPUs.

Program Control Instructions — the DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs offer additional

instructions that can change the way the program executes. These instructions include FOR/

NEXT loops, Subroutines, and Interrupt Routines. These instructions can interrupt the

normal program flow and affect the program execution time. Chapter 5 provides detailed

information on how these different types of instructions operate.

X0 X1 Y0

OUT

C100 LD

K10

C101 OUT V2002

C102 LD

K50

C103 OUT V2006

X5 X10 Y3

OUT

END

STR X0

OR C0

ANDN X1

OUT Y0

STRN C100

LD K10

STRN C101

OUT V2002

STRN C102

LD K50

STRN C103

OUT V2006

STR X5

ANDN X10

OUT Y3

END

TOTAL

1.4µs

1.2µs

1.0µs

7.95µs

1.6µs

62.0µs

1.6µs

21.0µs

1.6µs

62.0µs

1.6µs

21.0µs

1.4µs

1.2µs

7.95µs

16.0µs

210.5µs

Instruction Time

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-35

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

PLC Numbering Systems

If you are a new PLC user or are using DirectLOGIC

PLCs for the first time, please take a moment to study

how our PLCs use numbers. You’ll find that each PLC

manufacturer has its own conventions on the use of

numbers in their PLCs. Take a moment to familiarize

yourself with how numbers are used in DirectLOGIC

PLCs. The information you learn here applies to all our

PLCs.

As any good computer does, PLCs store and manipulate numbers in binary form: ones and

zeros. So why do we have to deal with numbers in so many different forms? Numbers have

meaning, and some representations are more convenient than others for particular purposes.

Sometimes we use numbers to represent a size or amount of something. Other numbers refer

to locations or addresses, or to time. In science we attach engineering units to numbers to give

a particular meaning (see Appendix H for numbering system details).

PLC Resources

PLCs offer a fixed number of resources, depending on the model and configuration. We use

the word “resources” to include variable memory (V-memory), I/O points, timers, counters,

etc. Most modular PLCs allow you to add I/O points in groups of eight. In fact, all the

resources of our PLCs are counted in octal. It’s easier for computers to count in groups of eight

than ten, because eight is an even power of two.

Octal means simply counting in groups of eight.

In the figure to the right, there are eight circles.

The quantity in decimal is “8,” but in octal it is

“10” (8 and 9 are not valid in octal). In octal,

“10” means 1 group of 8 plus 0 (no individuals).

In the figure below, we have two groups of eight circles. Counting in octal we have “20.”items,

meaning two groups of eight, plus zero individuals Don’t say “twenty,” say “two–zero octal”.

This makes a clear distinction between number systems.

After counting PLC resources, it’s time to access PLC resources (there’s a difference). The CPU

instruction set accesses resources of the PLC using octal addresses. Octal addresses are the

same as octal quantities, except they start counting at zero. The number zero is significant to a

computer, so we don’t skip it.

Our circles are in an array of square containers to the right.

To access a resource, our PLC instruction will address its

location using the octal references shown. If these were

counters, “CT14” would access the black circle location.

1482

0402

100101

1011

3A9

BCD

binary

decimal

octal

hexadecimal

ASCII

1011

–961428

177

–300124

A72B

49.832

Decimal 12345678

Octal 123456710

01234567

2 X

1 X

Decimal 12345678

Octal

123456710

910111213141516

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-36

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

V–Memory

Variable memory (called “V-memory”) stores data for the ladder program and for configuration settings.

V-memory locations and V-memory addresses are the same thing, and are numbered in octal. For example,

V2073 is a valid location, while V1983 is not valid (“9” and “8” are not valid octal digits).

Each V-memory location is one data word wide, meaning 16 bits. For configuration registers, our manuals will show

each bit of a V-memory word. The least significant bit (LSB) will be on the right, and the most significant bit (MSB)

on the left. We use the word “significant,” referring to the relative binary weighting of the bits.

V-memory data is 16-bit binary, but we rarely program the data registers one bit at a time. We use

instructions or viewing tools that let us work with binary, decimal, octal, and hexadecimal numbers. All

these are converted and stored as binary for us. A frequently-asked question is “How do I tell if a number is

binary, octal, BCD, or hex”? The answer is that we usually cannot tell by looking at the data, but it does not

really matter. What matters is: the source or mechanism which writes data into a V-memory location and

the thing which later reads it must both use the same data type (i.e., octal, hex, binary, or whatever). The

V-memory location is a storage box, that’s all. It does not convert or move the data on its own.

Binary-Coded Decimal Numbers

Since humans naturally count in decimal, we prefer to enter and view PLC data in decimal as well (via

operator interfaces). However, computers are more efficient in using pure binary numbers. A compromise

solution between the two is Binary-Coded Decimal (BCD) representation. A BCD digit ranges from 0 to

9, and is stored as 4 binary bits (a nibble). This permits each V-memory location to store 4 BCD digits, with

a range of decimal numbers from 0000 to 9999.

In a pure binary sense, a 16-bit word represents numbers from 0 to 65535. In storing BCD numbers, the

range is reduced to 0 to 9999. Many math instructions use BCD data, and DirectSOFT and the Handheld

Programmer allow us to enter and view data in BCD. Special RLL instructions convert from BCD to

binary, or visa–versa.

Hexadecimal Numbers

Hexadecimal numbers are similar to BCD numbers, except they utilize all possible binary values in each 4-bit

digit. They are base-16 numbers so we need 16 different digits. To extend our decimal digits 0 through 9,

we use A through F as shown.

A 4-digit hexadecimal number can represent all 65536 values in a V-memory word. The range is from 0000

to FFFF (hex). PLCs often need this full range for sensor data, etc. Hexadecimal is a convenient way for

humans to view full binary data.

0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 01

MSB LSB

V-memory data

(binary)

V-memory address

(octal)

V2017

0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 10

49 36

V-memory storage

BCD number

8421 8421 8421 8421

8910 11 12 13 14 150 1234567

89ABCDEF0 1234567

Decimal

Hexadecimal

1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 00

A7 F4

V-memory storage

Hexadecimal number

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-37

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Memory Map

With any PLC system, you generally have many different types of information to process. This

includes input device status, output device status, various timing elements, parts counts, etc. It

is important to understand how the system represents and stores the various types of data. For

example, you need to know how the system identifies input points, output points, data words,

etc. The following paragraphs discuss the various memory types used in the DL205 CPUs.

A memory map overview for the DL230, DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs follows the

memory descriptions.

Octal Numbering System

All memory locations or areas are numbered in Octal

(base 8). For example, the diagram shows how the

octal numbering system works for the discrete input

points. Notice the octal system does not contain any

numbers with the digits 8 or 9.

Discrete and Word Locations

As you examine the different memory types, you’ll

notice two types of memory in the DL205, discrete and

word memory. Discrete memory is one bit that can

be either a 1 or a 0. Word memory is referred to as

V memory (variable) and is a 16-bit location normally

used to manipulate data/numbers, store data/numbers,

etc. Some information is automatically stored in

V-memory. For example, the timer current values are

stored in V-memory.

V–Memory Locations for Discrete Memory Areas

The discrete memory area is for inputs, outputs, control relays, special relays, stages, timer status

bits and counter status bits. However, you can also access the bit data types as a V-memory

word. Each V-memory location contains 16 consecutive discrete locations. For example, the

following diagram shows how the X input points are mapped into V-memory locations.

These discrete memory areas and their corresponding V-memory ranges are listed in the

memory area table for the DL230, DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs in this chapter.

X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7

X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17

X10

X17

0 110100000010010

Discrete – On or Off, 1 bit

Word Locations – 16 bits

X0X1X2X3X4X5X6X7X10X11X12X13X14X15X16X17

0123456789101112131415 V40400

Bit #

16 Discrete (X) Input Points

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-38

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Input Points (X Data Type)

The discrete input points are noted by an X

data type. Up to 512 discrete input points

are available with the DL205 CPUs. In this

example, the output point Y0 will be turned on

when input X0 energizes.

Output Points (Y Data Type)

The discrete output points are noted by a Y

data type. Up to 512 discrete output points

are available with the DL205 CPUs. In this

example, output point Y1 will turn on when

input X1 energizes.

Control Relays (C Data Type)

Control relays are discrete bits normally used to

control the user program. The control relays do

not represent a real world device; that is, they

cannot be physically tied to switches, output

coils, etc. Control relays are internal to the

CPU and can be programmed as discrete inputs

or discrete outputs. These locations are used in

programming the discrete memory locations (C)

or the corresponding word location which has 16

consecutive discrete locations. In this example,

memory location C5 will energize when input

X10 turns on. The second rung shows a simple

example of how to use a control relay as an input.

Timers and Timer Status Bits (T Data Type)

The number of timers available depends on the

model of CPU you are using. The tables at

the end of this section provide the number of

timers for the DL230, DL240, D2-250-1 and

DL260. Regardless of the number of timers,

you have access to timer status bits that reflect

the relationship between the current value and

the preset value of a specified timer. The timer

status bit will be on when the current value is

equal to or greater than the preset value of a

corresponding timer.

When input X0 turns on, timer T1 will start.

When the timer reaches the preset of 3 seconds

(K of 30), timer status contact T1 turns on.

When T1 turns on, output Y12 turns on.

OUT

Y12

OUT

TMR T1

K30

OUT

X10

Y10

OUT

Y20

OUT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-39

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Timer Current Values (V Data Type)

Some information is automatically stored in

V-memory, such as the current values associated with

timers. For example, V0 holds the current value for

Timer 0, V1 holds the current value for Timer 1, etc.

These are 4-digit BCD values.

The primary reason for this is programming flexibility.

The example shows how you can use relational contacts

to monitor several time intervals from a single timer.

Counters and Counter Status Bits

(CT Data Type)

You have access to counter status bits that reflect the

relationship between the current value and the preset

value of a specified counter. The counter status bit will

be on when the current value is equal to or greater than

the preset value of a corresponding counter.

Each time contact X0 transitions from off to on,

the counter increments by one (If X1 comes on, the

counter is reset to zero). When the counter reaches the

preset of 10 counts (K of 10), counter status contact

CT3 turns on. When CT3 turns on, output Y12 turns

on.

Counter Current Values (V Data Type)

Just like the timers, the counter current values are

also automatically stored in V-memory. For example,

V1000 holds the current value for Counter CT0,

V1001 holds the current value for Counter CT1, etc.

These are 4-digit BCD values. The primary reason for

this is programming flexibility. The example shows

how you can use relational contacts to monitor the

counter values.

Word Memory (V Data Type)

Word memory is referred to as V-memory (variable)

and is a 16-bit location normally used to manipulate

data/numbers, store data/numbers, etc. Some

information is automatically stored in V-memory.

For example, the timer current values are stored in

V-memory. The example shows how a four-digit

BCD constant is loaded into the accumulator and then

stored in a V-memory location.

V1 K100

TMR T1

K1000

V1 K30 Y12

OUT

V1 K50 Y13

OUT

V1 K75 Y14

OUT

Y12

OUT

CT3

X0 CNT CT3

K10

V1003 K8

V1003 K1 Y12

OUT

V1003 K3 Y13

OUT

V1003 K5 Y14

OUT

CNT CT3

K10

V1400

00100110100010

Word Locations – 16 bits

K1345

OUT

1 3 4 5

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-40

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Stages (S Data type)

Stages are used in RLLPLUS programs to create a

structured program, similar to a flowchart. Each

program stage denotes a program segment. When

the program segment, or stage, is active, the logic

within that segment is executed. If the stage is

off, or inactive, the logic is not executed and the

CPU skips to the next active stage. (See Chapter

7 for a more detailed description of RLLPLUS

programming.)

Each stage also has a discrete status bit that can be

used as an input to indicate whether the stage is

active or inactive. If the stage is active, then the

status bit is on. If the stage is inactive, then the

status bit is off. This status bit can also be turned

on or off by other instructions, such as the SET

or RESET instructions. This allows you to easily

control stages throughout the program.

Special Relays (SP Data Type)

Special relays are discrete memory locations

with pre-defined functionality. There are many

different types of special relays. For example,

some aid in program development, others

provide system operating status information, etc.

Appendix D provides a complete listing of the

special relays.

In this example, control relay C10 will energize

for 50ms and de–energize for 50 ms because SP5

is a pre–defined relay that will be on for 50ms and

off for 50ms.

Remote I/O Points (GX Data Type)

Remote I/O points are represented by global

relays. They are generally used only to control

remote I/O, but they can be used as normal

control relays when remote I/O is not used in the

system.

In this example, memory location GX0 represents

an output point and memory location GX10

represents an input point.

ISG

S0000

Start S1

JMP

S0001

Presen

JMP

Part

JMP

Present

Part

S0002

Clamp

SET

JMP

Locked

Part

S400

Wait forStart

Check for a Part

Clamp the part

S500

JMP

C10

OUT

SP5

SP4: 1 second clock

SP5: 100 ms clock

SP6: 50 ms clock

Y12

OUT

X3 GX0

OUT

GX10

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-41

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

DL230 System V-memory

System

V-memory Description of Contents Default Values/Ranges

V2320–V2377 The default location for multiple preset values for the UP counter. N/A

V7620–V7627

V7620

V7621

V7622

V7623

V7624

V7625

V7626

V7627

Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters

Sets the V-memory location that contains the value.

Sets the V-memory location that contains the message.

Sets the total number (1 - 16) of V-memory locations to be displayed.

Sets the V-memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed.

Sets the V-memory location that contains the character code to be displayed.

Sets the bit control pointer.

Power Up mode change preset value password.

Reserved for future use.

V0–V2377

1–16

V0–V2377

V-memory location for

X,Y, or C points used.

0,1,2,3,12 Default = 0000

V7630 Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 1. The default value is

2320, which indicates the first value should be obtained from V2320. Since 24

presets are available, the default range is V2320 – V2377. You can change the

starting point if necessary.

Default: V2320

Range: V0–V2320

V7631–V7632 Not used N/A

V7633 Sets the desired mode for the high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,

pulse train, and input filter (see the D2-CTRINT Manual, D2-CTRIF-M for more

information). Location is also used for setting the with/without battery option,

enable/disable CPU mode change, and power-up in Run Mode option.

Default: 0000

Lower Byte Range:

Range: 0–None

10–Up

40–Interrupt

50–Pulse Catch

60–Filtered discrete In.

Upper Byte Range:

Bits 8–11, 14,15: Unused

Bit 12: With Batt. installed:

0 = disable BATT LED

1 = enable BATT LED

Bit 13: Power-up in Run

V7634 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,

pulse train output, and input filter for X0 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 0000

V7635 Contains set up-information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,

pulse train output, and input filter for X1 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 0000

V7636 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,

pulse train output, and input filter for X2 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 0000

V7637 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,

pulse train output, and input filter for X3 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 0000

V7640–V7642

V7640

V7641

V7642

Additional setup parameters for the DV-1000

Timer preset value pointer

Counter preset value pointer

Timer preset block size (high byte) / Counter preset block size (low byte)

V2000–V2377

1–99

V7643–V7647 Not used N/A

V7751 Fault Message Error Code — stores the 4-digit code used with the FAULT

instruction when the instruction is executed. N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-42

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

System

V-memory Description of Contents Default Values/Ranges

V7752 I/O Configuration Error — stores the module ID code for the module that

does not match the current configuration. N/A

V7753 I/O Configuration Error — stores the correct module ID code.

V7754 I/O Configuration Error — identifies the base and slot number.

V7755 Error code — stores the fatal error code. N/A

V7756 Error code — stores the major error code.

N/A

V7757 Error code — stores the minor error code.

V7760–V7764 Module Error — stores the slot number and error code where an I/O error

occurs.

V7765 Scan — stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the

last Program Mode to Run Mode transition.

V7666–V7774 Not used N/A

V7775 Scan — stores the current scan time (milliseconds). N/A

V7776 Scan — stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last

Program Mode to Run Mode transition (milliseconds). N/A

V7777 Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last

Program Mode to Run Mode transition (milliseconds). N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-43

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

DL240 System V-memory

System

V-memory Description of Contents Default Values/

Ranges

V3630–V3707 The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 1 or pulse

output function. N/A

V3710–V3767 The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 2. N/A

V3770–V3773 Not used N/A

V3774–V3777 Default locations for analog potentiometer data (channels 1–4, respectively). Range: 0 – 9999

V7620–V7627

V7620

V7621

V7622

V7623

V7624

V7625

V7626

V7627

Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters

Sets the V-memory location that contains the value.

Sets the V-memory location that contains the message.

Sets the total number (1 – 16) of V-memory locations to be displayed.

Sets the V-memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed.

Sets the V-memory location that contains the character code to be displayed.

Sets the bit control pointer

Power Up Mode

Change Preset Value Password.

V0 – V3760

1 – 16

V0 – V3760

V-memory location for

X, Y, or C points used.

0,1,2,3,12

Default=0000

V7630 Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 1. Since there are 24 presets

available, the default range is V3630 – V3707. You can change the starting point if

necessary.

Default: V3630

Range: V0 – V3710

V7631 Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 2. Since there are 24 presets

available, the default range is V3710– V3767. You can change the starting point if

necessary.

Default: V3710

Range: V0 – V3710

V7632

Contains the baud rate setting for Port 2. You can use AUX 56 (from the Handheld

Programmer) or, use DirectSOFT to set the port parameters if 9600 baud is

unacceptable. Also allows you to set a delay time between the assertion of the RTS

signal and the transmission of data. This is useful for radio modems that require a

key-up delay before data is transmitted.

e.g., a value of 0302 sets 10ms Turnaround Delay (TAD) and 9600 baud.

Default: 2 – 9600 baud

Lower Byte = Baud Rate

Lower Byte Range:

00 = 300

01 = 1200

02 = 9600

03 = 19.2K

Upper Byte = Time Delay

Upper Byte Range:

01 = 2ms

02 = 5ms

03 = 10ms

04 = 20ms

05 = 50ms

06 = 100ms

07 = 500ms

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-44

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

System

V-memory Description of Contents Default Values/

Ranges

V7633 Sets the desired mode for the high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train,

and input filter (see the D2-CTRINT manual, D2-CTRIF-M, for more information).

Location is also used for setting the with/without battery option, enable/disable CPU

mode change.

Default: 0000

Lower Byte Range:

0 – None

10 – Up

20 – Up/Dwn.

30 – Pulse Out

40 – Interrupt

50 – Pulse Catch

60 – Filtered Dis.

Upper Byte Range:

Bits 8 – 11, 15 Unused

Bit 12: With Batt. installed:

0 = disable BATT LED

1 = enable BATT LED

Bit 13: Power-up in Run

Bit 14: Mode chg. enable

(K-sequence only)

V7634 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train

output, and input filter for X0 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 0000

V7635 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train

output, and input filter for X1 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 0000

V7636 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train

output, and input filter for X2 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 0000

V7637 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train

output, and input filter for X3 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 0000

V7640–V7641 Location for setting the lower and upper limits for the CH1 analog pot. Default: 0000

Range: 0 – 9999

V7642–V7643 Location for setting the lower and upper limits for the CH2 analog pot. Default: 0000

Range: 0 – 9999

V7644–V7645 Location for setting the lower and upper limits for the CH3 analog pot. Default: 0000

Range: 0 – 9999

V7646–V7647 Location for setting the lower and upper limits for the CH4 analog pot. Default: 0000

Range: 0 – 9999

V7650–V7737 Locations reserved for set-up information used with future options (remote I/O and data communications).

V7720–V7722

V7720

V7721

V7722

Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters.

Titled Timer preset value pointer . V2000–V2377

Titled Counter preset value pointer. V2000–V2377

HiByte-Titled Timer preset block size, LoByte-Titled Counter preset block size. 1–99

V7746 Location contains the battery voltage, accurate to 0.1V. For example, a value of 32 indicates 3.2 volts.

V7747 Location contains a 10ms counter. This location increments once every 10ms.

V7751 Fault Message Error Code — stores the 4-digit code used with the FAULT instruction when the instruction is

executed. If you’ve used ASCII messages (DL240 only), then the data label (DLBL) reference number for that

message is stored here.

V7752 I/O configuration Error — stores the module ID code for the module that does not match the current configuration.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-45

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

System

V-memory Description of Contents

V7753 I/O Configuration Error — stores the correct module ID code.

V7754 I/O Configuration Error — identifies the base and slot number.

V7755 Error code — stores the fatal error code.

V7756 Error code — stores the major error code.

V7757 Error code — stores the minor error code.

V7760–V7764 Module Error — stores the slot number and error code where an I/O error occurs.

V7765 Scan—stores the number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program to Run Mode transition.

V7766 Contains the number of seconds on the clock. (00 to 59).

V7767 Contains the number of minutes on the clock. (00 to 59).

V7770 Contains the number of hours on the clock. (00 to 23).

V7771 Contains the day of the week. (Mon, Tue, etc.).

V7772 Contains the day of the month (1st, 2nd, etc.).

V7773 Contains the month. (01 to 12)

V7774 Contains the year. (00 to 99)

V7775 Scan — stores the current scan time (milliseconds).

V7776 Scan — stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition

(milliseconds).

V7777 Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition

(milliseconds).

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-46

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

DL250–1 System V-memory (DL250 also)

System

V-memory Description of Contents Default Values/

Ranges

V3630–V3707 The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 1 or pulse

output function N/A

V3710–V3767 The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 2. N/A

V3770–V3777 Not used N/A

V7620–V7627

V7620

V7621

V7622

V7623

V7624

V7625

V7626

V7627

Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters

Sets the V-memory location that contains the value

Sets the V-memory location that contains the message

Sets the total number (1 – 32) of V-memory locations to be displayed

Sets the V-memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed

Sets the V-memory location that contains the character code to be displayed

Sets the bit control pointer

Sets the power up mode

Change Preset Value password

V0 – V3760

1 – 32

V0 – V3760

V-memory for X, Y, or C

0,1,2,3,12

Default=0000

V7630 Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 1. Since there are 24 presets

available, the default range is V3630 – V3707. You can change the starting point if

necessary.

Default: V3630

Range: V0 – V3710

V7631 Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 2. Since there are 24 presets

available, the default range is V3710– V3767. You can change the starting point if

necessary.

Default: V3710

Range: V0 – V3710

V7632 Reserved

V7633 Sets the desired mode for the high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train,

and input filter (see the D2-CTRINT manual, D2-CTRIF-M, for more information).

Location is also used for setting the with/without battery option, enable/disable CPU

mode change, and power-up in Run Mode option.

Default: 0060

Lower Byte Range:

Range: 0 – None

10 – Up

20 – Up/Dwn.

30 – Pulse Out

40 – Interrupt

50 – Pulse Catch

60 – Filtered Dis.

Upper Byte Range:

Bits 8 – 11, 14–15 Unused

Bit 12: With Batt. installed:

0 = disable BATT LED

1 = enable BATT LED

Bit 13: Power-up in Run

V7634 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,pulse train

output, and input filter for X0 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 1006

V7635 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train

output, and input filter for X1 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 1006

V7636 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train

output, and input filter for X2 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 1006

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-47

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

System

V-memory Description of Contents Default Values/Ranges

V7637 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,

pulse train output, and input filter for X3 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 1006

V7640 Loop Table Beginning address. V1400–V7340 V10000–

V17740

V7641 Number of Loops Enabled 1–4

V7642 Error Code – V–memory Error Location for Loop Table.

V7643–V7647 Reserved.

V7650 Port 2 End–code setting Setting (A55A), Non–procedure communications start.

V7651 Port 2 Data format – Non–procedure communications format setting.

V7652 Port 2 Format Type setting – Non–procedure communications type code setting.

V7653 Port 2 Terminate–code setting – Non–procedure communications Termination code setting.

V7654 Port 2 Store v–mem address – Non–procedure communication data store V–Memory address

V7655 Port 2 Setup area –0–7 Comm protocol (flag 0) 8–15 Comm time out/response delay time (flag 1).

V7656 Port 2 Setup area – 0–15 Communication (flag 2, flag 3).

V7657 Port 2: Setup completion code.

V7660–V7717 Set–up Information – Locations reserved for set-up information used with future options.

V7720–V7722

V7720

V7721

V7722

Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters.

Titled Timer preset value pointer.

Title Counter preset value pointer.

HiByte-Titled Timer preset block size, LoByte-Titled Counter preset block size.

V7740 Port 2 Communication Auto Reset Timer setup.

V7741 Output Hold or reset setting: Expansion bases 1 and 2 (DL250–1).

V7747 Location contains a 10ms counter. This location increments once every 10ms.

V7750 Reserved.

V7751 Fault Message Error Code — stores the 4-digit code used with the FAULT instruction when the instruction

is executed. If you’ve used ASCII messages (DL240 only), then the data label (DLBL) reference number for

that message is stored here.

V7752 I/O configuration Error — stores the module ID code for the module that does not match the current

configuration.

V7753 I/O Configuration Error — stores the correct module ID code.

V7754 I/O Configuration Error — identifies the base and slot number.

V7755 Error code — stores the fatal error code.

V7756 Error code — stores the major error code.

V7757 Error code — stores the minor error code.

V7760–V7764 Module Error — stores the slot number and error code where an I/O error occurs.

V7765 Scan — stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program Mode to Run

Mode transition.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-48

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

System

V-memory Description of Contents

V7766 Contains the number of seconds on the clock. (00 to 59)

V7767 Contains the number of minutes on the clock. (00 to 59)

V7770 Contains the number of hours on the clock. (00 to 23)

V7771 Contains the day of the week. (Mon, Tue, etc.)

V7772 Contains the day of the month (1st, 2nd, etc.)

V7773 Contains the month. (01 to 12)

V7774 Contains the year. (00 to 99)

V7775 Scan — stores the current scan time (milliseconds)

V7776 Scan — stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run

Mode transition (milliseconds)

V7777 Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run

Mode transition (milliseconds)

V36000–36057 Analog pointer method for expansion base 1 (DL250–1)

V36100–36157 Analog pointer method for expansion base 2 (DL250–1)

V36400–36427 Analog pointer method for local base

V37700–37737 Port 2: Setup register for Koyo Remote I/O

System CRs Description of Contents

C740 Completion of setups – ladder logic must turn this relay on when it has finished writing to the Remote I/O setup

table.

C741 Erase received data – turning on this flag will erase the received data during a communication error.

C743 Re-start – Turning on this relay will resume after a communications hang-up on an error.

C750 to C757 Setup Error – The corresponding relay will be ON if the setup table contains an error.

(C750 = master, C751 = slave 1 C757 = slave 7)

C760 to C767 Communications Ready – The corresponding relay will be ON if the set-up table data is valid.

(C760 = master, C761 = slave 1 C767 = slave 7)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-49

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

DL260 System V-memory

System

V-memory Description of Contents Default Values/Ranges

V3630–V3707 The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 1 or

pulse output function N/A

V3710–V3767 The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 2 N/A

V3770–V3777 Not used N/A

V7620–V7627

V7620

V7621

V7622

V7623

V7624

V7625

V7626

V7627

Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters

Sets the V-memory location that contains the value

Sets the V-memory location that contains the message

Sets the total number (1 – 32) of V-memory locations to be displayed

Sets the V-memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed

Sets the V-memory location that contains the character code to be displayed

Sets the bit control pointer

Sets the power up mode

Change Preset Value password

V0 – V3760

1 – 32

V0 – V3760

V-memory for X, Y, or C

0,1,2,3,12

Default=0000

V7630 Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 1. Since there are 24

presets available, the default range is V3630 – V3707. You can change the

starting point if necessary.

Default: V3630

Range: V0 – V3710

V7631 Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 2. Since there are 24

presets available, the default range is V3710– V3767. You can change the starting

point if necessary.

Default: V3710

Range: V0 – V3710

V7632 Reserved

V7633 Sets the desired mode for the high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse

train, and input filter (see the D2-CTRINT manual, D2-CTRIF-M, for more

information). Location is also used for setting the with/without battery option,

enable/disable CPU mode change, and power-up in Run Mode option.

Default: 0060

Lower Byte Range:

Range: 0 – None

10 – Up

20 – Up/Dwn

30 – Pulse Ou

40 – Interrupt

50 – Pulse Catch

60 – Fltered Dis.

Upper Byte Range

Bits 8 – 11, 14–15 Unused

Bit 12: With Batt. installed:

0 = disable BATT LED

1 = enable BATT LED

Bit 13: Power-up in Run

V7634 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse

train output, and input filter for X0 (when D2–CTRINT is installed) Default: 1006

V7635 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse

train output, and input filter for X1 (when D2–CTRINT is installed) Default: 1006

V7636 Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse

train output, and input filter for X2 (when D2–CTRINT is installed) Default: 1006

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-50

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

System

V-memory Description of Contents Default Values/

Ranges

V7637 Contains set up information for high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train

output, and input filter for X3 (when D2–CTRINT is installed). Default: 1006

V7640 PID Loop Table Beginning address.

V400–640

V1400–V7340

V10000–V35740

V7641 Number of Loops Enabled. 1–16

V7642 Error Code – V–memory Error Location for Loop Table.

V7643 - V7647 Reserved.

V7650 Port 2 End–code Setting (A55A), Non-procedure communications start.

V7651 Port 2 Data format - Non-procedure communications format setting.

V7652 Port 2 Format Type setting – Non–procedure communications type code setting.

V7653 Port 2 Terminate–code setting – Non–procedure communications Termination code setting

V7654 Port 2 Store v–mem address – Non–procedure communication data store V–Memory address.

V7655 Port 2 Setup area –0–7 Comm protocol (flag 0) 8–15 Comm time out/response delay time (flag 1)

V7656 Port 2 Setup area – 0–15 Communication (flag 2, flag 3)

V7657 Port 2: Setup completion code.

V7660–V7717 Set–up Information – Locations reserved for set up information used with future options.

V7720–V7722

V7720

V7721

V7722

Locations for DV-1000 operator interface parameters.

Titled Timer preset value pointer.

Title Counter preset value pointer.

HiByte-Titled Timer preset block size, LoByte-Titled Counter preset block size.

V7740 Port 2 Communication Auto Reset Timer setup.

V7741 Output Hold or reset setting: Expansion bases 1 and 2.

V7742 Output Hold or reset setting: Expansion bases 3 and 4.

V7747 Location contains a 10ms counter. This location increments once every 10ms.

V7750 Reserved.

V7751 Fault Message Error Code — stores the 4-digit code used with the FAULT instruction when the instruction is

executed. If you’ve used ASCII messages (DL240 only), then the data label (DLBL) reference number for that

message is stored here.

V7752 I/O configuration Error — stores the module ID code for the module that does not match the current

configuration.

V7753 I/O Configuration Error — stores the correct module ID code.

V7754 I/O Configuration Error — identifies the base and slot number.

V7755 Error code — stores the fatal error code.

V7756 Error code — stores the major error code.

V7757 Error code — stores the minor error code.

V7763–V7764 Module Error — stores the slot number and error code where an I/O error occurs.

V7765 Scan — stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode

transition.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-51

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

The following system control relays are used for Koyo Remote I/O setup on Communications

Port 2.

System CRs Description of Contents

C740 Completion of setups – ladder logic must turn this relay on when it has finished writing to the Remote I/O setup

table.

C741 Erase received data – turning on this flag will erase the received data during a communication error.

C743 Re-start – Turning on this relay will resume after a communications hang-up on an error.

C750 to C757 Setup Error – The corresponding relay will be ON if the set-up table contains an error.

(C750 = master, C751 = slave 1... C757= slave 7

C760 to C767 Communications Ready – The corresponding relay will be ON if the set-up table data is valid.

(C760 = master, C761 = slave 1...C767 = slave 7

System

V-memory Description of Contents

V7766 Contains the number of seconds on the clock. (00 to 59).

V7767 Contains the number of minutes on the clock. (00 to 59).

V7770 Contains the number of hours on the clock. (00 to 23).

V7771 Contains the day of the week. (Mon, Tue, etc.).

V7772 Contains the day of the month (1st, 2nd, etc.).

V7773 Contains the month. (01 to 12)

V7774 Contains the year. (00 to 99)

V7775 Scan — stores the current scan time (milliseconds).

V7776 Scan — stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition

(milliseconds).

V7777 Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition

(milliseconds).

V36000–36057 Analog pointer method for expansion base 1

V36100–36157 Analog pointer method for expansion base 2

V36200–36257 Analog pointer method for expansion base 3

V36300–36357 Analog pointer method for expansion base 4

V36400–36427 Analog pointer method for local base

V37700–37737 Port 2: Set-up register for Koyo Remote I/O

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-52

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

DL205 Aliases

An alias is an alternate way of referring to certain memory types, such as timer/counter current

values, V-memory locations for I/O points, etc., which simplifies understanding the memory

address. The use of the alias is optional, but some users may find the alias to be helpful when

developing a program. The table below shows how the aliases can be used.

DL205 Aliases

Address Start Alias Start Example

V0 TA0 V0 is the timer accumulator value for timer 0, therefore, its

alias is TA0. TA1 is the alias for V1, etc.

V1000 CTA0 V1000 is the counter accumulator value for counter 0,

therefore, its alias is CTA0. CTA1 is the alias for V1001, etc.

V40000 VGX

V40000 is the word memory reference for discrete bits GX0

through GX17, therefore, its alias is VGX0. V40001 is the

word memory reference for discrete bits GX20 through GX37,

therefore, its alias is VGX20.

V40200 VGY

V40200 is the word memory reference for discrete bits GY0

through GY17, therefore, its alias is VGY0. V40201 is the

word memory reference for discrete bits GY20 through GY37,

therefore, its alias is VGY20.

V40400 VX0

V40400 is the word memory reference for discrete bits X0

through X17, therefore, its alias is VX0. V40401 is the word

memory reference for discrete bits X20 through X37, therefore,

its alias is VX20.

V40500 VY0

V40500 is the word memory reference for discrete bits Y0

through Y17, therefore, its alias is VY0. V40501 is the word

memory reference for discrete bits Y20 through Y37, therefore,

its alias is VY20.

V40600 VC0

V40600 is the word memory reference for discrete bits C0

through C17, therefore, its alias is VC0. V40601 is the word

memory reference for discrete bits C20 through C37, therefore,

its alias is VC20.

V41000 VS0

V41000 is the word memory reference for discrete bits S0

through S17, therefore, its alias is VS0. V41001 is the word

memory reference for discrete bits S20 through S37, therefore,

its alias is VS20.

V41100 VT0

V41100 is the word memory reference for discrete bits T0

through T17, therefore, its alias is VT0. V41101 is the word

memory reference for discrete bits T20 through T37, therefore,

its alias is VT20.

V41140 VCT0

V41140 is the word memory reference for discrete bits CT0

through CT17, therefore, its alias is VCT0. V41141 is the

word memory reference for discrete bits CT20 through CT37,

therefore, its alias is VCT20.

V41200 VSP0

V41200 is the word memory reference for discrete bits SP0

through SP17, therefore, its alias is VSP0. V41201 is the

word memory reference for discrete bits SP20 through SP37,

therefore, its alias is VSP20.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-53

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

DL230 Memory Map

NOTE 1: The DL230 systems are limited to 256 discrete I/O points (total) with the present system hardware

available. These can be mixed between inputs and output points as necessary.

Memory Type Discrete Memory

Reference (octal)

Word Memory

Reference (octal)

Qty.

Decimal Symbol

Input Points X0 – X177 V40400 – V40407 1281X0

Output Points Y0 – Y177 V40500 – V40507 1281Y0

Control Relays C0 – C377 V40600 – V40617 256

Special Relays SP0 – SP117

SP540 – SP577

V41200 – V41204

V41226 – V41227 112

SP0

Timers T0 – T77 64 TMR

K100

Timer Current Values None V0 – V77 64 V0 K100

Timer Status Bits T0 – T77 V41100 – V41103 64 T0

Counters CT0 – CT77 64

CNT

K10

CT0

Counter Current Values None V1000 – V1077 64 V1000 K100

Counter Status Bits CT0 – CT77 V41140 – V41143 64 CT0

Data Words None V2000 – V2377 256 None specific, used with many

instructions

Data Words Non–volatile None V4000 – V4177 128 None specific, used with many

instructions

Stages S0 – S377 V41000 – V41017 256 S0

S001

System parameters None V7620 – V7647

V7750–V7777 48 None specific, used for various

purposes

C0C0

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-54

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

DL240 Memory Map

NOTE 1: The DL240 systems are limited to 256 discrete I/O points (total) with the present system hardware

available. These can be mixed between inputs and output points as necessary.

Memory Type Discrete Memory

Reference (octal)

Word Memory

Reference(octal) Qty. Decimal Symbol

Input Points X0 – X477 V40400 – V40423 3201X0

Output Points Y0 – Y477 V40500 – V40523 3201Y0

Control Relays C0 – C377 V40600 – V40617 256 C0C0

Special Relays SP0 – SP137

SP540 – SP617

V41200 – V41205

V41226 – V41230 144 SP0

Timers T0 – T177 128 TMR

K100

Timer Current Values None V0 – V177 128 V0 K100

Timer Status Bits T0 – T177 V41100 – V41107 128 T0

Counters CT0 – CT177 128

CNT

K10

CT0

Counter Current Values None V1000 – V1177 128 V1000 K100

Counter Status Bits CT0 – CT177 V41140 – V41147 128 CT0

Data Words None V2000 – V3777 1024 None specific, used with many

instructions

Data Words Non–volatile None V4000 – V4377 256 None specific, used with many

instructions

Stages S0 – S777 V41000 – V41037 512 S0

S001

System parameters None V7620 – V7737

V7746–V7777 106 None specific, used for various

purposes

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-55

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

DL250–1 Memory Map (DL250 also)

Memory Type Discrete Memory

Reference (octal)

Word Memory

Reference (octal)

Qty.

Decimal Symbol

Input Points X0 – X777 V40400 – V40437 512 X0

Output Points Y0 – Y777 V40500 – V40537 512 Y0

Control Relays C0 – C1777 V40600 – V40677 1024 C0C0

Special Relays SP0 – SP777 V41200 – V41237 512 SP0

Timers T0 – T377 256 TMR

K100

Timer Current Values None V0 – V377 256 V0 K100

Timer Status Bits T0 – T377 V41100 – V41117 256 T0

Counters CT0 – CT177 128

CNT

K10

CT0

Counter Current Values None V1000 – V1177 128 V1000 K100

Counter Status Bits CT0 – CT177 V41140 – V41147 128 CT0

Data Words None V1400 – V7377 V10000–

V17777 7168 None specific, used with many

instructions

Stages S0 – S1777 V41000 – V41077 1024 S0

S001

System parameters None V7400–V7777 V36000–

V37777 768 None specific, used for various

purposes

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-56

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

DL260 Memory Map

Memory Type Discrete Memory

Reference (octal)

Word Memory

Reference (octal)

Qty.

Decimal Symbol

Input Points X0 – X1777 V40400 – V40477 1024 X0

Output Points Y0 – Y1777 V40500 – V40577 1024 Y0

Control Relays C0 – C3777 V40600 – V40777 2048 C0C0

Special Relays SP0 – SP777 V41200 – V41237 512 SP0

Timers T0 – T377 256 TMR

K100

Timer Current Values None V0 – V377 256 V0 K100

Timer Status Bits T0 – T377 V41100 – V41117 256 T0

Counters CT0 – CT377 256

CNT

K10

CT0

Counter Current Values None V1000 – V1377 256 V1000 K100

Counter Status Bits CT0 – CT377 V41140 – V41157 256 CT0

Data Words None

V400 – V777

V1400 – V7377 V10000–

V35777

14.6K None specific, used with many

instructions

Stages S0 – S1777 V41000 – V41077 1024 S0

S001

Remote Input and

Output Points

GX0 – GX3777

GY0 – GY3777

V40000 – V40177

V40200–V40377

2048

GX0 GY0

System parameters None

V7400–V7777

V36000–V37777

1.2K None specific, used for various

purposes

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-57

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

X Input/Y Output Bit Map

This table provides a listing of the individual Input points associated with each V-memory

address bit for the DL230, DL240, and DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs. The DL250–1 ranges

apply to the DL250.

MSB Additional DL250-1/DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points LSB

517 516 515 514 513 512 511 510 507 506 505 504 503 502 501 500 V40424 V40524

537 536 535 534 533 532 531 530 527 526 525 524 523 522 521 520 V40425 V40525

557 556 555 554 553 552 551 550 547 546 545 544 543 542 541 540 V40426 V40526

577 576 575 574 573 572 571 570 567 566 565 564 563 562 561 560 V40427 V40527

617 616 615 614 613 612 611 610 607 606 605 604 603 602 601 600 V40430 V40530

637 636 635 634 633 632 631 630 627 626 625 624 623 622 621 620 V40431 V40531

657 656 655 654 653 652 651 650 647 646 645 644 643 642 641 640 V40432 V40532

677 676 675 674 673 672 671 670 667 666 665 664 663 662 661 660 V40433 V40533

717 716 715 714 713 712 711 710 707 706 705 704 703 702 701 700 V40434 V40534

737 736 735 734 733 732 731 730 727 726 725 724 723 722 721 720 V40435 V40535

757 756 755 754 753 752 751 750 747 746 745 744 743 742 741 740 V40436 V40536

777 776 775 774 773 772 771 770 767 766 765 764 763 762 761 760 V40437 V40537

MSB DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points LSB

217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V40410 V40510

237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V40411 V40511

257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V40412 V40512

277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V40413 V40513

317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 V40414 V40514

337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V40415 V40515

357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V40416 V40516

377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V40417 V40517

417 416 415 414 413 412 411 410 407 406 405 404 403 402 401 400 V40420 V40520

437 436 435 434 433 432 431 430 427 426 425 424 423 422 421 420 V40421 V40521

457 456 455 454 453 452 451 450 447 446 445 444 443 442 441 440 V40422 V40522

477 476 475 474 473 472 471 470 467 466 465 464 463 462 461 460 V40423 V40523

MSB DL230/DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points LSB X Input

Address

Y Output

Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876 5 4 3 2 1 0

017 016 015 014 013 012 011 010 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000 V40400 V40500

037 036 035 034 033 032 031 030 027 026 025 024 023 022 021 020 V40401 V40501

057 056 055 054 053 052 051 050 047 046 045 044 043 042 041 040 V40402 V40502

077 076 075 074 073 072 071 070 067 066 065 064 063 062 061 060 V40403 V40503

117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 V40404 V40504

137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 V40405 V40505

157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V40406 V40506

177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V40407 V40507

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-58

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

MSB Additional DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points LSB X Input

Address

Y Output

Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012 1011 1010 1007 1006 1005 1004 1003 1002 1001 1000 V40440 V40540

1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025 1024 1023 1022 1021 1020 V40441 V40541

1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045 1044 1043 1042 1041 1040 V40442 V40542

1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065 1064 1063 1062 1061 1060 V40443 V40543

1117 1116 1115 1114 1113 1112 1111 1110 1107 1106 1105 1104 1103 1102 1101 1100 V40444 V40544

1137 1136 1135 1134 1133 1132 1131 1130 1127 1126 1125 1124 1123 1122 1121 1120 V40445 V40545

1157 1156 1155 1154 1153 1152 1151 1150 1147 1146 1145 1144 1143 1142 1141 1140 V40446 V40546

1177 1176 1175 1174 1173 1172 1171 1170 1167 1166 1165 1164 1163 1162 1161 1160 V40447 V40547

1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212 1211 1210 1207 1206 1205 1204 1203 1202 1201 1200 V40450 V40550

1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225 1224 1223 1222 1221 1220 V40451 V40551

1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245 1244 1243 1242 1241 1240 V40452 V40552

1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265 1264 1263 1262 1261 1260 V40453 V40553

1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312 1311 1310 1307 1306 1305 1304 1303 1302 1301 1300 V40454 V40554

1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325 1324 1323 1322 1321 1320 V40455 V40555

1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345 1344 1343 1342 1341 1340 V40456 V40556

1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365 1364 1363 1362 1361 1360 V40457 V40557

1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412 1411 1410 1407 1406 1405 1404 1403 1402 1401 1400 V40460 V40560

1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425 1424 1423 1422 1421 1420 V40461 V40561

1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445 1444 1443 1442 1441 1440 V40462 V40562

1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465 1464 1463 1462 1461 1460 V40463 V40563

1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512 1511 1510 1507 1506 1505 1504 1503 1502 1501 1500 V40464 V40564

1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525 1524 1523 1522 1521 1520 V40465 V40565

1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545 1544 1543 1542 1541 1540 V40466 V40566

1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565 1564 1563 1562 1561 1560 V40467 V40567

1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612 1611 1610 1607 1606 1605 1604 1603 1602 1601 1600 V40470 V40570

1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625 1624 1623 1622 1621 1620 V40471 V40571

1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645 1644 1643 1642 1641 1640 V40472 V40572

1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665 1664 1663 1662 1661 1660 V40473 V40573

1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712 1711 1710 1707 1706 1705 1704 1703 1702 1701 1700 V40474 V40574

1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725 1724 1723 1722 1721 1720 V40475 V40575

1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V40476 V40576

1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 V40477 V40577

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-59

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Control Relay Bit Map

This table provides a listing of the individual control relays associated with each V-memory address bit.

MSB Additional DL250-1/DL260 Control Relays (C) LSB Address

417 416 415 414 413 412 411 410 407 406 405 404 403 402 401 400 V40620

437 436 435 434 433 432 431 430 427 426 425 424 423 422 421 420 V40621

457 456 455 454 453 452 451 450 447 446 445 444 443 442 441 440 V40622

477 476 475 474 473 472 471 470 467 466 465 464 463 462 461 460 V40623

517 516 515 514 513 512 511 510 507 506 505 504 503 502 501 500 V40624

537 536 535 534 533 532 531 530 527 526 525 524 523 522 521 520 V40625

557 556 555 554 553 552 551 550 547 546 545 544 543 542 541 540 V40626

577 576 575 574 573 572 571 570 567 566 565 564 563 562 561 560 V40627

617 616 615 614 613 612 611 610 607 606 605 604 603 602 601 600 V40630

637 636 635 634 633 632 631 630 627 626 625 624 623 622 621 620 V40631

657 656 655 654 653 652 651 650 647 646 645 644 643 642 641 640 V40632

677 676 675 674 673 672 671 670 667 666 665 664 663 662 661 660 V40633

717 716 715 714 713 712 711 710 707 706 705 704 703 702 701 700 V40634

737 736 735 734 733 732 731 730 727 726 725 724 723 722 721 720 V40635

757 756 755 754 753 752 751 750 747 746 745 744 743 742 741 740 V40636

777 776 775 774 773 772 771 770 767 766 765 764 763 762 761 760 V40637

MSB DL230/DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Control Relays (C) LSB Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

017 016 015 014 013 012 011 010 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000 V40600

037 036 035 034 033 032 031 030 027 026 025 024 023 022 021 020 V40601

057 056 055 054 053 052 051 050 047 046 045 044 043 042 041 040 V40602

077 076 075 074 073 072 071 070 067 066 065 064 063 062 061 060 V40603

117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 V40604

137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 V40605

157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V40606

177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V40607

217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V40610

237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V40611

257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V40612

277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V40613

317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 V40614

337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V40615

357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V40616

377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V40617

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-60

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

MSB Additional DL250-1/DL260 Control Relays (C) LSB Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012 1011 1010 1007 1006 1005 1004 1003 1002 1001 1000 V40640

1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025 1024 1023 1022 1021 1020 V40641

1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045 1044 1043 1042 1041 1040 V40642

1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065 1064 1063 1062 1061 1060 V40643

1117 1116 1115 1114 1113 1112 1111 1110 1107 1106 1105 1104 1103 1102 1101 1100 V40644

1137 1136 1135 1134 1133 1132 1131 1130 1127 1126 1125 1124 1123 1122 1121 1120 V40645

1157 1156 1155 1154 1153 1152 1151 1150 1147 1146 1145 1144 1143 1142 1141 1140 V40646

1177 1176 1175 1174 1173 1172 1171 1170 1167 1166 1165 1164 1163 1162 1161 1160 V40647

1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212 1211 1210 1207 1206 1205 1204 1203 1202 1201 1200 V40650

1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225 1224 1223 1222 1221 1220 V40651

1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245 1244 1243 1242 1241 1240 V40652

1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265 1264 1263 1262 1261 1260 V40653

1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312 1311 1310 1307 1306 1305 1304 1303 1302 1301 1300 V40654

1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325 1324 1323 1322 1321 1320 V40655

1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345 1344 1343 1342 1341 1340 V40656

1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365 1364 1363 1362 1361 1360 V40657

1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412 1411 1410 1407 1406 1405 1404 1403 1402 1401 1400 V40660

1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425 1424 1423 1422 1421 1420 V40661

1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445 1444 1443 1442 1441 1440 V40662

1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465 1464 1463 1462 1461 1460 V40663

1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512 1511 1510 1507 1506 1505 1504 1503 1502 1501 1500 V40664

1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525 1524 1523 1522 1521 1520 V40665

1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545 1544 1543 1542 1541 1540 V40666

1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565 1564 1563 1562 1561 1560 V40667

1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612 1611 1610 1607 1606 1605 1604 1603 1602 1601 1600 V40670

1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625 1624 1623 1622 1621 1620 V40671

1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645 1644 1643 1642 1641 1640 V40672

1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665 1664 1663 1662 1661 1660 V40673

1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712 1711 1710 1707 1706 1705 1704 1703 1702 1701 1700 V40674

1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725 1724 1723 1722 1721 1720 V40675

1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V40676

1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 V40677

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-61

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

This portion of the table shows additional Control Relays points available with the DL260.

MSB Additional DL260 Control Relays (C) LSB Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

2017 2016 2015 2014 2013 2012 2011 2010 2007 2006 2005 2004 2003 2002 2001 2000 V40700

2037 2036 2035 2034 2033 2032 2031 2030 2027 2026 2025 2024 2023 2022 2021 2020 V40701

2057 2056 2055 2054 2053 2052 2051 2050 2047 2046 2045 2044 2043 2042 2041 2040 V40702

2077 2076 2075 2074 2073 2072 2071 2070 2067 2066 2065 2064 2063 2062 2061 2060 V40703

2117 2116 2115 2114 2113 2112 2111 2110 2107 2106 2105 2104 2103 2102 2101 2100 V40704

2137 2136 2135 2134 2133 2132 2131 2130 2127 2126 2125 2124 2123 2122 2121 2120 V40705

2157 2156 2155 2154 2153 2152 2151 2150 2147 2146 2145 2144 2143 2142 2141 2140 V40706

2177 2176 2175 2174 2173 2172 2171 2170 2167 2166 2165 2164 2163 2162 2161 2160 V40707

2217 2216 2215 2214 2213 2212 2211 2210 2207 2206 2205 2204 2203 2202 2201 2200 V40710

2237 2236 2235 2234 2233 2232 2231 2230 2227 2226 2225 2224 2223 2222 2221 2220 V40711

2257 2256 2255 2254 2253 2252 2251 2250 2247 2246 2245 2244 2243 2242 2241 2240 V40712

2277 2276 2275 2274 2273 2272 2271 2270 2267 2266 2265 2264 2263 2262 2261 2260 V40713

2317 2316 2315 2314 2313 2312 2311 2310 2307 2306 2305 2304 2303 2302 2301 2300 V40714

2337 2336 2335 2334 2333 2332 2331 2330 2327 2326 2325 2324 2323 2322 2321 2320 V40715

2357 2356 2355 2354 2353 2352 2351 2350 2347 2346 2345 2344 2343 2342 2341 2340 V40716

2377 2376 2375 2374 2373 2372 2371 2370 2367 2366 2365 2364 2363 2362 2361 2360 V40717

2417 2416 2415 2414 2413 2412 2411 2410 2407 2406 2405 2404 2403 2402 2401 2400 V40720

2437 2436 2435 2434 2433 2432 2431 2430 2427 2426 2425 2424 2423 2422 2421 2420 V40721

2457 2456 2455 2454 2453 2452 2451 2450 2447 2446 2445 2444 2443 2442 2441 2440 V40722

2477 2476 2475 2474 2473 2472 2471 2470 2467 2466 2465 2464 2463 2462 2461 2460 V40723

2517 2516 2515 2514 2513 2512 2511 2510 2507 2506 2505 2504 2503 2502 2501 2500 V40724

2537 2536 2535 2534 2533 2532 2531 2530 2527 2526 2525 2524 2523 2522 2521 2520 V40725

2557 2556 2555 2554 2553 2552 2551 2550 2547 2546 2545 2544 2543 2542 2541 2540 V40726

2577 2576 2575 2574 2573 2572 2571 2570 2567 2566 2565 2564 2563 2562 2561 2560 V40727

2617 2616 2615 2614 2613 2612 2611 2610 2607 2606 2605 2604 2603 2602 2601 2600 V40730

2637 2636 2635 2634 2633 2632 2631 2630 2627 2626 2625 2624 2623 2622 2621 2620 V40731

2657 2656 2655 2654 2653 2652 2651 2650 2647 2646 2645 2644 2643 2642 2641 2640 V40732

2677 2676 2675 2674 2673 2672 2671 2670 2667 2666 2665 2664 2663 2662 2661 2660 V40733

2717 2716 2715 2714 2713 2712 2711 2710 2707 2706 2705 2704 2703 2702 2701 2700 V40734

2737 2736 2735 2734 2733 2732 2731 2730 2727 2726 2725 2724 2723 2722 2721 2720 V40735

2757 2756 2755 2754 2753 2752 2751 2750 2747 2746 2745 2744 2743 2742 2741 2740 V40736

2777 2776 2775 2774 2773 2772 2771 2770 2767 2766 2765 2764 2763 2762 2761 2760 V40737

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-62

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

MSB Additional DL260 Control Relays (C) LSB Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

3017 3016 3015 3014 3013 3012 3011 3010 3007 3006 3005 3004 3003 3002 3001 3000 V40740

3037 3036 3035 3034 3033 3032 3031 3030 3027 3026 3025 3024 3023 3022 3021 3020 V40741

3057 3056 3055 3054 3053 3052 3051 3050 3047 3046 3045 3044 3043 3042 3041 3040 V40742

3077 3076 3075 3074 3073 3072 3071 3070 3067 3066 3065 3064 3063 3062 3061 3060 V40743

3117 3116 3115 3114 3113 3112 3111 3110 3107 3106 3105 3104 3103 3102 3101 3100 V40744

3137 3136 3135 3134 3133 3132 3131 3130 3127 3126 3125 3124 3123 3122 3121 3120 V40745

3157 3156 3155 3154 3153 3152 3151 3150 3147 3146 3145 3144 3143 3142 3141 3140 V40746

3177 3176 3175 3174 3173 3172 3171 3170 3167 3166 3165 3164 3163 3162 3161 3160 V40747

3217 3216 3215 3214 3213 3212 3211 3210 3207 3206 3205 3204 3203 3202 3201 3200 V40750

3237 3236 3235 3234 3233 3232 3231 3230 3227 3226 3225 3224 3223 3222 3221 3220 V40751

3257 3256 3255 3254 3253 3252 3251 3250 3247 3246 3245 3244 3243 3242 3241 3240 V40752

3277 3276 3275 3274 3273 3272 3271 3270 3267 3266 3265 3264 3263 3262 3261 3260 V40753

3317 3316 3315 3314 3313 3312 3311 3310 3307 3306 3305 3304 3303 3302 3301 3300 V40754

3337 3336 3335 3334 3333 3332 3331 3330 3327 3326 3325 3324 3323 3322 3321 3320 V40755

3357 3356 3355 3354 3353 3352 3351 3350 3347 3346 3345 3344 3343 3342 3341 3340 V40756

3377 3376 3375 3374 3373 3372 3371 3370 3367 3366 3365 3364 3363 3362 3361 3360 V40757

3417 3416 3415 3414 3413 3412 3411 3410 3407 3406 3405 3404 3403 3402 3401 3400 V40760

3437 3436 3435 3434 3433 3432 3431 3430 3427 3426 3425 3424 3423 3422 3421 3420 V40761

3457 3456 3455 3454 3453 3452 3451 3450 3447 3446 3445 3444 3443 3442 3441 3440 V40762

3477 3476 3475 3474 3473 3472 3471 3470 3467 3466 3465 3464 3463 3462 3461 3460 V40763

3517 3516 3515 3514 3513 3512 3511 3510 3507 3506 3505 3504 3503 3502 3501 3500 V40764

3537 3536 3535 3534 3533 3532 3531 3530 3527 3526 3525 3524 3523 3522 3521 3520 V40765

3557 3556 3555 3554 3553 3552 3551 3550 3547 3546 3545 3544 3543 3542 3541 3540 V40766

3577 3576 3575 3574 3573 3572 3571 3570 3567 3566 3565 3564 3563 3562 3561 3560 V40767

3617 3616 3615 3614 3613 3612 3611 3610 3607 3606 3605 3604 3603 3602 3601 3600 V40770

3637 3636 3635 3634 3633 3632 3631 3630 3627 3626 3625 3624 3623 3622 3621 3620 V40771

3657 3656 3655 3654 3653 3652 3651 3650 3647 3646 3645 3644 3643 3642 3641 3640 V40772

3677 3676 3675 3674 3673 3672 3671 3670 3667 3666 3665 3664 3663 3662 3661 3660 V40773

3717 3716 3715 3714 3713 3712 3711 3710 3707 3706 3705 3704 3703 3702 3701 3700 V40774

3737 3736 3735 3734 3733 3732 3731 3730 3727 3726 3725 3724 3723 3722 3721 3720 V40775

3757 3756 3755 3754 3753 3752 3751 3750 3747 3746 3745 3744 3743 3742 3741 3740 V40776

3777 3776 3775 3774 3773 3772 3771 3770 3767 3766 3765 3764 3763 3762 3761 3760 V40777

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-63

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Stage Control/Status Bit Map

This table provides a listing of the individual Stage control bits associated with each V-memory

address.

MSB DL230/DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Stage (S) Control Bits LSB Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 V41000

037 036 035 034 033 032 031 030 027 026 025 024 023 022 021 020 V41001

057 056 055 054 053 052 051 050 047 046 045 044 043 042 041 040 V41002

077 076 075 074 073 072 071 070 067 066 065 064 063 062 061 060 V41003

117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 V41004

137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 V41005

157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V41006

177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V41007

217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V41010

237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V41011

257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V41012

277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V41013

317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 V41014

337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V41015

357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V41016

377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V41017

MSB Additional DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Stage (S) Control Bits LSB Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

417 416 415 414 413 412 411 410 407 406 405 404 403 402 401 400 V41020

437 436 435 434 433 432 431 430 427 426 425 424 423 422 421 420 V41021

457 456 455 454 453 452 451 450 447 446 445 444 443 442 441 440 V41022

477 476 475 474 473 472 471 470 467 466 465 464 463 462 461 460 V41023

517 516 515 514 513 512 511 510 507 506 505 504 503 502 501 500 V41024

537 536 535 534 533 532 531 530 527 526 525 524 523 522 521 520 V41025

557 556 555 554 553 552 551 550 547 546 545 544 543 542 541 540 V41026

577 576 575 574 573 572 571 570 567 566 565 564 563 562 561 560 V41027

617 616 615 614 613 612 611 610 607 606 605 604 603 602 601 600 V41030

637 636 635 634 633 632 631 630 627 626 625 624 623 622 621 620 V41031

657 656 655 654 653 652 651 650 647 646 645 644 643 642 641 640 V41032

677 676 675 674 673 672 671 670 667 666 665 664 663 662 661 660 V41033

717 716 715 714 713 712 711 710 707 706 705 704 703 702 701 700 V41034

737 736 735 734 733 732 731 730 727 726 725 724 723 722 721 720 V41035

757 756 755 754 753 752 751 750 747 746 745 744 743 742 741 740 V41036

777 776 775 774 773 772 771 770 767 766 765 764 763 762 761 760 V41037

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-64

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

MSB Additional DL250-1/DL260 Stage (S) Control Bits LSB Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012 1011 1010 1007 1006 1005 1004 1003 1002 1001 1000 V41040

1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025 1024 1023 1022 1021 1020 V41041

1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045 1044 1043 1042 1041 1040 V41042

1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065 1064 1063 1062 1061 1060 V41043

1117 1116 1115 1114 1113 1112 1111 1110 1107 1106 1105 1104 1103 1102 1101 1100 V41044

1137 1136 1135 1134 1133 1132 1131 1130 1127 1126 1125 1124 1123 1122 1121 1120 V41045

1157 1156 1155 1154 1153 1152 1151 1150 1147 1146 1145 1144 1143 1142 1141 1140 V41046

1177 1176 1175 1174 1173 1172 1171 1170 1167 1166 1165 1164 1163 1162 1161 1160 V41047

1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212 1211 1210 1207 1206 1205 1204 1203 1202 1201 1200 V41050

1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225 1224 1223 1222 1221 1220 V41051

1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245 1244 1243 1242 1241 1240 V41052

1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265 1264 1263 1262 1261 1260 V41053

1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312 1311 1310 1307 1306 1305 1304 1303 1302 1301 1300 V41054

1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325 1324 1323 1322 1321 1320 V41055

1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345 1344 1343 1342 1341 1340 V41056

1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365 1364 1363 1362 1361 1360 V41057

1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412 1411 1410 1407 1406 1405 1404 1403 1402 1401 1400 V41060

1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425 1424 1423 1422 1421 1420 V41061

1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445 1444 1443 1442 1441 1440 V41062

1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465 1464 1463 1462 1461 1460 V41063

1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512 1511 1510 1507 1506 1505 1504 1503 1502 1501 1500 V41064

1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525 1524 1523 1522 1521 1520 V41065

1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545 1544 1543 1542 1541 1540 V41066

1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565 1564 1563 1562 1561 1560 V41067

1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612 1611 1610 1607 1606 1605 1604 1603 1602 1601 1600 V41070

1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625 1624 1623 1622 1621 1620 V41071

1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645 1644 1643 1642 1641 1640 V41072

1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665 1664 1663 1662 1661 1660 V41073

1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712 1711 1710 1707 1706 1705 1704 1703 1702 1701 1700 V41074

1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725 1724 1723 1722 1721 1720 V41075

1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V41076

1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 V41077

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-65

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps

This table provides a listing of the individual timer and counter contacts associated with each

V-memory address bit.

This portion of the table shows additional Timer and Counter contacts available with the

DL240/250–1/260.

This portion of the table shows additional Timer contacts available with the DL250-1 and

DL260.

This portion of the table shows additional Counter contacts available with the DL260.

MSB Additional DL260 Counter (CT) Contacts LSB Counter

Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V41150

237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V41151

257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V41152

277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V41153

317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 V41154

337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V41155

357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V41156

377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V41157

MSB Additional DL250-1/DL260 Timer (T) Contacts LSB Timer

Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V41110

237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V41111

257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V41112

277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V41113

317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 V41114

337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V41115

357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V41116

377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V41117

MSB Additional DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Timer (T) and Counter (CT) Contacts LSB Timer

Address

Counter

Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 V41104 V41144

137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 V41105 V41145

157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V41106 V41146

177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V41107 V41147

MSB DL230/DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Timer (T) and Counter (CT) Contacts LSB Timer

Address

Counter

Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

017 016 015 014 013 012 011 010 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000 V41100 V41140

037 036 035 034 033 032 031 030 027 026 025 024 023 022 021 020 V41101 V41141

057 056 055 054 053 052 051 050 047 046 045 044 043 042 041 040 V41102 V41142

077 076 075 074 073 072 071 070 067 066 065 064 063 062 061 060 V41103 V41143

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-66

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Remote I/O Bit Map

This table provides a listing of the individual remote I/O points associated with each V-memory

address bit.

MSB DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points LSB GX

Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

017 016 015 014 013 012 011 010 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000 V40000 V40200

037 036 035 034 033 032 031 030 027 026 025 024 023 022 021 020 V40001 V40201

057 056 055 054 053 052 051 050 047 046 045 044 043 042 041 040 V40002 V40202

077 076 075 074 073 072 071 070 067 066 065 064 063 062 061 060 V40003 V40203

117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 V40004 V40204

137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 V40005 V40205

157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 V40006 V40206

177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 V40007 V40207

217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 V40010 V40210

237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 V40011 V40211

257 256 255 254 253 252 251 250 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240 V40012 V40212

277 276 275 274 273 272 271 270 267 266 265 264 263 262 261 260 V40013 V40213

317 316 315 314 313 312 311 310 307 306 305 304 303 302 301 300 V40004 V40214

337 336 335 334 333 332 331 330 327 326 325 324 323 322 321 320 V40015 V40215

357 356 355 354 353 352 351 350 347 346 345 344 343 342 341 340 V40016 V40216

377 376 375 374 373 372 371 370 367 366 365 364 363 362 361 360 V40007 V40217

417 416 415 414 413 412 411 410 407 406 405 404 403 402 401 400 V40020 V40220

437 436 435 434 433 432 431 430 427 426 425 424 423 422 421 420 V40021 V40221

457 456 455 454 453 452 451 450 447 446 445 444 443 442 441 440 V40022 V40222

477 476 475 474 473 472 471 470 467 466 465 464 463 462 461 460 V40023 V40223

517 516 515 514 513 512 511 510 507 506 505 504 503 502 501 500 V40024 V40224

537 536 535 534 533 532 531 530 527 526 525 524 523 522 521 520 V40025 V40225

557 556 555 554 553 552 551 550 547 546 545 544 543 542 541 540 V40026 V40226

577 576 575 574 573 572 571 570 567 566 565 564 563 562 561 560 V40027 V40227

617 616 615 614 613 612 611 610 607 606 605 604 603 602 601 600 V40030 V40230

637 636 635 634 633 632 631 630 627 626 625 624 623 622 621 620 V40031 V40231

657 656 655 654 653 652 651 650 647 646 645 644 643 642 641 640 V40032 V40232

677 676 675 674 673 672 671 670 667 666 665 664 663 662 661 660 V40033 V40233

717 716 715 714 713 712 711 710 707 706 705 704 703 702 701 700 V40034 V40234

737 736 735 734 733 732 731 730 727 726 725 724 723 722 721 720 V40035 V40235

757 756 755 754 753 752 751 750 747 746 745 744 743 742 741 740 V40036 V40236

777 776 775 774 773 772 771 770 767 766 765 764 763 762 761 760 V40037 V40237

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-67

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

MSB DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points LSB GX

Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012 1011 1010 1007 1006 1005 1004 1003 1002 1001 1000 V40040 V40240

1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025 1024 1023 1022 1021 1020 V40041 V40241

1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045 1044 1043 1042 1041 1040 V40042 V40242

1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065 1064 1063 1062 1061 1060 V40043 V40243

1117 1116 1115 1114 1113 1112 1111 1110 1107 1106 1105 1104 1103 1102 1101 1100 V40044 V40244

1137 1136 1135 1134 1133 1132 1131 1130 1127 1126 1125 1124 1123 1122 1121 1120 V40045 V40245

1157 1156 1155 1154 1153 1152 1151 1150 1147 1146 1145 1144 1143 1142 1141 1140 V40046 V40246

1177 1176 1175 1174 1173 1172 1171 1170 1167 1166 1165 1164 1163 1162 1161 1160 V40047 V40247

1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212 1211 1210 1207 1206 1205 1204 1203 1202 1201 1200 V40050 V40250

1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225 1224 1223 1222 1221 1220 V40051 V40251

1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245 1244 1243 1242 1241 1240 V40052 V40252

1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265 1264 1263 1262 1261 1260 V40053 V40253

1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312 1311 1310 1307 1306 1305 1304 1303 1302 1301 1300 V40054 V40254

1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325 1324 1323 1322 1321 1320 V40055 V40255

1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345 1344 1343 1342 1341 1340 V40056 V40256

1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365 1364 1363 1362 1361 1360 V40057 V40257

1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412 1411 1410 1407 1406 1405 1404 1403 1402 1401 1400 V40060 V40260

1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425 1424 1423 1422 1421 1420 V40061 V40261

1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445 1444 1443 1442 1441 1440 V40062 V40262

1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465 1464 1463 1462 1461 1460 V40063 V40263

1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512 1511 1510 1507 1506 1505 1504 1503 1502 1501 1500 V40064 V40264

1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525 1524 1523 1522 1521 1520 V40065 V40265

1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545 1544 1543 1542 1541 1540 V40066 V40266

1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565 1564 1563 1562 1561 1560 V40067 V40267

1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612 1611 1610 1607 1606 1605 1604 1603 1602 1601 1600 V40070 V40270

1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625 1624 1623 1622 1621 1620 V40071 V40271

1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645 1644 1643 1642 1641 1640 V40072 V40272

1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665 1664 1663 1662 1661 1660 V40073 V40273

1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712 1711 1710 1707 1706 1705 1704 1703 1702 1701 1700 V40074 V40274

1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725 1724 1723 1722 1721 1720 V40075 V40275

1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1744 1743 1742 1741 1740 V40076 V40276

1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765 1764 1763 1762 1761 1760 V40077 V40277

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-68

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

MSB DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points LSB GX

Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 987 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

2017 2016 2015 2014 2013 2012 2011 2010 2007 2006 2005 2004 2003 2002 2001 2000 V40100 V40300

2037 2036 2035 2034 2033 2032 2031 2030 2027 2026 2025 2024 2023 2022 2021 2020 V40101 V40301

2057 2056 2055 2054 2053 2052 2051 2050 2047 2046 2045 2044 2043 2042 2041 2040 V40102 V40302

2077 2076 2075 2074 2073 2072 2071 2070 2067 2066 2065 2064 2063 2062 2061 2060 V40103 V40303

2117 2116 2115 2114 2113 2112 2111 2110 2107 2106 2105 2104 2103 2102 2101 2100 V40104 V40304

2137 2136 2135 2134 2133 2132 2131 2130 2127 2126 2125 2124 2123 2122 2121 2120 V40105 V40305

2157 2156 2155 2154 2153 2152 2151 2150 2147 2146 2145 2144 2143 2142 2141 2140 V40106 V40306

2177 2176 2175 2174 2173 2172 2171 2170 2167 2166 2165 2164 2163 2162 2161 2160 V40107 V40307

2217 2216 2215 2214 2213 2212 2211 2210 2207 2206 2205 2204 2203 2202 2201 2200 V40110 V40310

2237 2236 2235 2234 2233 2232 2231 2230 2227 2226 2225 2224 2223 2222 2221 2220 V40111 V40311

2257 2256 2255 2254 2253 2252 2251 2250 2247 2246 2245 2244 2243 2242 2241 2240 V40112 V40312

2277 2276 2275 2274 2273 2272 2271 2270 2267 2266 2265 2264 2263 2262 2261 2260 V40113 V40313

2317 2316 2315 2314 2313 2312 2311 2310 2307 2306 2305 2304 2303 2302 2301 2300 V40114 V40314

2337 2336 2335 2334 2333 2332 2331 2330 2327 2326 2325 2324 2323 2322 2321 2320 V40115 V40315

2357 2356 2355 2354 2353 2352 2351 2350 2347 2346 2345 2344 2343 2342 2341 2340 V40116 V40316

2377 2376 2375 2374 2373 2372 2371 2370 2367 2366 2365 2364 2363 2362 2361 2360 V40117 V40317

2417 2416 2415 2414 2413 2412 2411 2410 2407 2406 2405 2404 2403 2402 2401 2400 V40120 V40320

2437 2436 2435 2434 2433 2432 2431 2430 2427 2426 2425 2424 2423 2422 2421 2420 V40121 V40321

2457 2456 2455 2454 2453 2452 2451 2450 2447 2446 2445 2444 2443 2442 2441 2440 V40122 V40322

2477 2476 2475 2474 2473 2472 2471 2470 2467 2466 2465 2464 2463 2462 2461 2460 V40123 V40323

2517 2516 2515 2514 2513 2512 2511 2510 2507 2506 2505 2504 2503 2502 2501 2500 V40124 V40324

2537 2536 2535 2534 2533 2532 2531 2530 2527 2526 2525 2524 2523 2522 2521 2520 V40125 V40325

2557 2556 2555 2554 2553 2552 2551 2550 2547 2546 2545 2544 2543 2542 2541 2540 V40126 V40326

2577 2576 2575 2574 2573 2572 2571 2570 2567 2566 2565 2564 2563 2562 2561 2560 V40127 V40327

2617 2616 2615 2614 2613 2612 2611 2610 2607 2606 2605 2604 2603 2602 2601 2600 V40130 V40330

2637 2636 2635 2634 2633 2632 2631 2630 2627 2626 2625 2624 2623 2622 2621 2620 V40131 V40331

2657 2656 2655 2654 2653 2652 2651 2650 2647 2646 2645 2644 2643 2642 2641 2640 V40132 V40332

2677 2676 2675 2674 2673 2672 2671 2670 2667 2666 2665 2664 2663 2662 2661 2660 V40133 V40333

2717 2716 2715 2714 2713 2712 2711 2710 2707 2706 2705 2704 2703 2702 2701 2700 V40134 V40334

2737 2736 2735 2734 2733 2732 2731 2730 2727 2726 2725 2724 2723 2722 2721 2720 V40135 V40335

2757 2756 2755 2754 2753 2752 2751 2750 2747 2736 2735 2734 2733 2732 2731 2730 V40136 V40336

2777 2776 2775 2774 2773 2772 2771 2770 2767 2766 2765 2764 2763 2762 2761 2760 V40137 V40337

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 3-69

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

MSB DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points LSB GX

Address

15 14 13 12 11 10 987 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

3017 3016 3015 3014 3013 3012 3011 3010 3007 3006 3005 3004 3003 3002 3001 3000 V40140 V40340

3037 3036 3035 3034 3033 3032 3031 3030 3027 3026 3025 3024 3023 3022 3021 3020 V40141 V40341

3057 3056 3055 3054 3053 3052 3051 3050 3047 3046 3045 3044 3043 3042 3041 3040 V40142 V40342

3077 3076 3075 3074 3073 3072 3071 3070 3067 3066 3065 3064 3063 3062 3061 3060 V40143 V40343

3117 3116 3115 3114 3113 3112 3111 3110 3107 3106 3105 3104 3103 3102 3101 3100 V40144 V40344

3137 3136 3135 3134 3133 3132 3131 3130 3127 3126 3125 3124 3123 3122 3121 3120 V40145 V40345

3157 3156 3155 3154 3153 3152 3151 3150 3147 3146 3145 3144 3143 3142 3141 3140 V40146 V40346

3177 3176 3175 3174 3173 3172 3171 3170 3167 3166 3165 3164 3163 3162 3161 3160 V40147 V40347

3217 3216 3215 3214 3213 3212 3211 3210 3207 3206 3205 3204 3203 3202 3201 3200 V40150 V40350

3237 3236 3235 3234 3233 3232 3231 3230 3227 3226 3225 3224 3223 3222 3221 3220 V40151 V40351

3257 3256 3255 3254 3253 3252 3251 3250 3247 3246 3245 3244 3243 3242 3241 3240 V40152 V40352

3277 3276 3275 3274 3273 3272 3271 3270 3267 3266 3265 3264 3263 3262 3261 3260 V40153 V40353

3317 3316 3315 3314 3313 3312 3311 3310 3307 3306 3305 3304 3303 3302 3301 3300 V40154 V40354

3337 3336 3335 3334 3333 3332 3331 3330 3327 3326 3325 3324 3323 3322 3321 3320 V40155 V40355

3357 3356 3355 3354 3353 3352 3351 3350 3347 3346 3345 3344 3343 3342 3341 3340 V40156 V40356

3377 3376 3375 3374 3373 3372 3371 3370 3367 3366 3365 3364 3363 3362 3361 3360 V40157 V40357

3417 3416 3415 3414 3413 3412 3411 3410 3407 3406 3405 3404 3403 3402 3401 3400 V40160 V40360

3437 3436 3435 3434 3433 3432 3431 3430 3427 3426 3425 3424 3423 3422 3421 3420 V40161 V40361

3457 3456 3455 3454 3453 3452 3451 3450 3447 3446 3445 3444 3443 3442 3441 3440 V40162 V40362

3477 3476 3475 3474 3473 3472 3471 3470 3467 3466 3465 3464 3463 3462 3461 3460 V40163 V40363

3517 3516 3515 3514 3513 3512 3511 3510 3507 3506 3505 3504 3503 3502 3501 3500 V40164 V40364

3537 3536 3535 3534 3533 3532 3531 3530 3527 3526 3525 3524 3523 3522 3521 3520 V40165 V40365

3557 3556 3555 3554 3553 3552 3551 3550 3547 3546 3545 3544 3543 3542 3541 3540 V40166 V40366

3577 3576 3575 3574 3573 3572 3571 3570 3567 3566 3565 3564 3563 3562 3561 3560 V40167 V40367

3617 3616 3615 3614 3613 3612 3611 3610 3607 3606 3605 3604 3603 3602 3601 3600 V40170 V40370

3637 3636 3635 3634 3633 3632 3631 3630 3627 3626 3625 3624 3623 3622 3621 3620 V40171 V40371

3657 3656 3655 3654 3653 3652 3651 3650 3647 3646 3645 3644 3643 3642 3641 3640 V40172 V40372

3677 3676 3675 3674 3673 3672 3671 3670 3667 3666 3665 3664 3663 3662 3661 3660 V40173 V40373

3717 3716 3715 3714 3713 3712 3711 3710 3707 3706 3705 3704 3703 3702 3701 3700 V40174 V40374

3737 3736 3735 3734 3733 3732 3731 3730 3727 3726 3725 3724 3723 3722 3721 3720 V40175 V40375

3757 3756 3755 3754 3753 3752 3751 3750 3747 3746 3745 3744 3743 3742 3741 3740 V40176 V40376

3777 3776 3775 3774 3773 3772 3771 3770 3767 3766 3765 3764 3763 3762 3761 3760 V40177 V40377

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

3-70

Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations

Notes

SyStem DeSign anD

Configuration

Chapter

In This Chapter:

DL205 System Design Strategies ................................................ 4–2

Module Placement ..................................................................... 4–3

Calculating the Power Budget .................................................... 4–7

Local Expansion I/O ................................................................... 4–11

Expanding DL205 I/O ................................................................ 4–17

Network Connections to Modbus and DirectNet ....................... 4–32

Network Slave Operation ........................................................... 4–35

Network Modbus RTU Master Operation (DL260 only) .............. 4–45

Non–Sequence Protocol (ASCII In/Out and PRINT) .................... 4–54

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-2

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

DL205 System Design Strategies

I/O System Configurations

The DL205 PLCs offer the following ways to add I/O to the system:

• Local I/O – consists of I/O modules located in the same base as the CPU.

• Local Expansion I/O – consists of I/O modules in expansion bases located close to the CPU local

base. Expansion cables connect the expansion bases and CPU base in daisy–chain format.

• Ethernet Remote Master – provides a low-cost, high-speed Ethernet Remote I/O link to Ethernet

Remote Slave I/O.

• Ethernet Base Controller – provides a low-cost, high-speed Ethernet link between a network master

to AutomationDirect Ethernet Remote Slave I/O.

• Remote I/O – consists of I/O modules located in bases which are serially connected to the local CPU

base through a Remote Master module, or may connect directly to the bottom port on a DL250–1

or DL260 CPU.

A DL205 system can be developed using many different arrangements of these configurations.

All I/O configurations use the standard complement of DL205 I/O modules and bases. Local

expansion requires using (–1) bases.

Networking Configurations

The DL205 PLCs offers the following way to add networking to the system:

• Ethernet Communications Module – connects DL205 systems (DL240, DL250–1 or DL260

CPUs only) and DL405 CPU systems in high–speed, peer–to–peer networks. Any PLC can initiate

communications with any other PLC when using either the ECOM or ECOM100 modules.

• Data Communications Module – connects a DL205 (DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 only) system

to devices using the DirectNET protocol, or connects as a slave to a Modbus RTU network.

• DL250–1 Communications Port – The DL250–1 CPU has a 15–Pin connector on Port 2 that

provides a built–in Modbus RTU or DirectNET master/slave connection.

• DL260 Communications Port – The DL260 CPU has a 15–Pin connector on Port 2 that provides

a built–in DirectNET master/slave or Modbus RTU master/slave connection with more Modbus

function codes than the DL250–1. (The DL260 MRX and MWX instructions allow you to

enter native Modbus addressing in your ladder program with no need to perform octal to decimal

conversions.) Port 2 can also be used for ASCII IN or ASCII OUT communications.

Module/Unit Master Slave

DL240 CPU DirectNet, K–Sequence

DL250–1 CPU DirectNet, Modbus RTU DirectNet, K–Sequence, Modbus RTU

DL260 CPU DirectNet, Modbus RTU, ASCII DirectNet, K–Sequence, Modbus RTU, ASCII

ECOM Ethernet Ethernet

ECOM100 Ethernet, Modbus TCP Ethernet, Modbus TCP

DCM DirectNet DirectNet, K–Sequence, Modbus RTU

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-3

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Module Placement

Slot Numbering

The DL205 bases each provide different

numbers of slots for use with the I/O

modules. You may notice the bases refer

to 3-slot, 4-slot, etc. One of the slots is

dedicated to the CPU, so you always have

one less I/O slot. For example, you have five

I/O slots with a 6-slot base. The I/O slots

are numbered 0 – 4. The CPU slot always

contains a CPU or a base controller (EBC)

or Remote Slave and is not numbered.

Module Placement Restrictions

The following table lists the valid locations for all types of modules in a DL205 system.

Module/Unit Local CPU Base Local Expansion Base Remote I/O Base

CPUs CPU Slot Only

DC Input Modules A A A

AC Input Modules A A A

DC Output Modules A A A

AC Output Modules A A A

Relay Output Modules A A A

Analog Input and Output Modules A A A

Local Expansion

Base Expansion Unit A A

Base Controller Module CPU Slot Only

Serial Remote I/O

Remote Master A (not Slot O)

Remote Slave Unit CPU Slot Only

Ethernet Remote Master A (not Slot O)

Ethernet Slave (EBC) CPU Slot Only

CPU Interface

Ethernet Base Controller CPU Slot Only CPU Slot Only*

WinPLC CPU Slot Only

DeviceNet CPU Slot Only A

Profibus CPU Slot Only

SDS CPU Slot Only

Specialty Modules

Counter Interface (CTRINT) Slot 0 Only

Counter I/O (CTRIO) A A *

Data Communications A (not Slot O)

Ethernet Communications A (not Slot O)

BASIC CoProcessor A (not Slot O)

Simulator A A A

Filler A A A

*When used in H2–ERM(100) Ethernet Remote I/O systems.

Power

Wiring

Connections CPU Slot I/O Slots

Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-4

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Automatic I/O Configuration

The DL205 CPUs automatically detect any installed I/O modules (including specialty modules)

at powerup, and establish the correct I/O configuration and addresses. This applies to modules

located in local and local expansion I/O bases. For most applications, you will never have to

change the configuration.

I/O addresses use octal numbering, starting at X0 and Y0 in the slot next to the CPU. The

addresses are assigned in groups of 8 or 16, depending on the number of points for the I/O

module. The discrete input and output modules can be mixed in any order, but there may

be restrictions placed on some specialty modules. The following diagram shows the I/O

numbering convention for an example system.

Both the Handheld Programmer and DirectSOFT provide AUX functions that allow you

to automatically configure the I/O. For example, with the Handheld Programmer AUX 46

executes an automatic configuration, which allows the CPU to examine the installed modules

and determine the I/O configuration and addressing. With DirectSOFT, the PLC Configure

I/O menu option would be used.

Manual I/O Configuration

It may never become necessary, but DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs allow manual I/O address

assignments for any I/O slot(s) in local or local expansion bases. You can manually modify

an auto configuration to match arbitrary I/O numbering. For example, two adjacent input

modules can have starting addresses at X20 and X200. Use DirectSOFT PLC Configure I/O

menu option to assign manual I/O address.

In automatic configuration, the addresses are assigned on 8-point boundaries. Manual

configuration, however, assumes that all modules are at least 16 points, so you can only assign

addresses that are a multiple of 20 (octal). For example, X30 and Y50 are not valid starting

addresses. You can still use 8-point modules, but 16 addresses will be assigned and the upper

eight addresses will be unused.

WARNING: If you manually configure an I/O slot, the I/O addressing for the other modules may change.

This is because the DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs do not allow you to assign duplicate I/O addresses. You

must always correct any I/O configuration errors before you place the CPU in RUN mode. Uncorrected

errors can cause unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or damage

to equipment.

Slot 0

8pt. Input

X0-X7

Slot 1

16pt. Output

Y0-Y17

Slot 2

16pt. Input

X10-X27

Slot 3

8pt. Input

X30-X37

Slot 0

8pt. Input

X0-X7

Slot 1

16pt. Output

Y0-Y17

Slot 2

16pt. Input

X100-X117

Slot 3

8pt. Input

X20-X27

Automatic

Manual



230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-5

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Removing a Manual Configuration

After a manual configuration, the system will automatically retain the new I/O addresses

through a power cycle. You can remove (overwrite) any manual configuration changes by

changing all of the manually configured addresses back to automatic.

Power–On I/O Configuration Check

The DL205 CPUs can also be set to automatically check the I/O configuration on power-up.

By selecting this feature, you can detect any changes that may have occurred while the power

was disconnected. For example, if someone places an output module in a slot that previously

held an input module, the CPU will not go into RUN mode and the configuration check will

detect the change and print a message on the Handheld Programmer or DirectSOFT screen

(use AUX 44 on the HPP to enable the configuration check).

If the system detects a change in the PLC/Setup/I/O configuration check at power-up, error

code E252 will be generated. You can use AUX 42 (HPP) or DirectSOFT I/O diagnostics to

determine the exact base and slot location where the change occurred. When a configuration

error is generated, you may actually want to use the new I/O configuration. For example, you

may have intentionally changed an I/O module to use with a program change. You can use

PLC/Diagnostics/I/O Diagnostics in DirectSoft or AUX 45 to select the new configuration, or,

keep the existing configuration stored in memory.

WARNING: You should always correct any I/O configuration errors before you place the CPU into RUN

mode. Uncorrected errors can cause unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of

personal injury or damage to equipment.

WARNING: Verify that the I/O configuration being selected will work properly with the CPU program.

Always correct any I/O configuration errors before placing the CPU in RUN mode. Uncorrected errors

can cause unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or damage to

equipment.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-6

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

I/O Points Required for Each Module

Each type of module requires a certain number of I/O points. This is also true for some

specialty modules, such as analog, counter interface, etc.

NOTE: 12pt. modules consume 16 points. The first 6 points are assigned, two are skipped, and then the

next 6 points are assigned. For example, a D2–12TA installed in slot 0 would use Y0–Y5, and Y-10-Y15.

Y6–Y7 and Y16–Y17 would be unused.

DC Input Modules Number of I/O Pts. Required Specialty Modules, etc. Number of I/O Pts. Required

D2–08ND3 8 Input H2–ECOM(–F) None

D2–16ND3–2 16 Input D2–DCM None

D2–32ND3(–2) 32 Input H2–ERM(100,–F) None

AC Input Modules H2–EBC(–F) None

D2–08NA–1 8 Input D2–RMSM None

D2–08NA–2 8 Input D2–RSSS None

D2–16NA 16 Input F2–CP128 None

DC Output Modules H2–CTRIO(2) None

D2–04TD1 8 Output (Only the first four

points are used) D2–CTRINT 8 Input 8 Output

D2–08TD1 8 Output F2–DEVNETS–1 None

D2–16TD1–2 (2-2) 16 Output H2–PBC None

D2–16TD1(2)P 16 Output F2–SDS–1 None

D2–32TD1(–2) 32 Output D2–08SIM 8 Input

AC Output Modules D2-EM None

D2–08TA 8 Output D2-CM None

F2–08TA 8 Output H2-ECOM(100) None

D2–12TA 16 Output (See note 1)

Relay Output Modules

D2–04TRS 8 Output (Only the first four

points are used)

D2–08TR 8 Output

F2–08TRS 8 Output

F2–08TR 8 Output

D2–12TR 16 Output (See note 1)

Combination Modules

D2–08CDR 8 In, 8 Out (Only the first four

points are used for each type)

Analog Modules

F2–04AD–1 & 1L 16 Input

F2–04AD–2 & 2L 16 Input

F2–08AD–1 16 Input

F2–02DA–1 & 1L 16 Output

F2–02DA–2 & 2L 16 Output

F2–08DA–1 16 Output

F2–08DA–2 16 Output

F2–02DAS–1 32 Output

F2–02DAS–2 32 Output

F2–4AD2DA 16 Input & 16 Output

F2–8AD4DA-1 32 Input & 32 Output

F2–8AD4DA-2 32 Input & 32 Output

F2–04RTD 32 Input

F2–04THM 32 Input

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-7

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Calculating the Power Budget

Managing Your Power Resource

When you determine the types and quantities of I/O modules you will be using in the DL205

system, it is important to remember there is a limited amount of power available from the

power supply. We have provided a chart to help you easily see the amount of power available

with each base. The following chart will help you calculate the amount of power you need

with your I/O selections. At the end of this section is an example of power budgeting and a

worksheet for your own calculations.

If the I/O you choose exceeds the maximum power available from the power supply, you may

need to use local expansion bases or remote I/O bases.

WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget,

the system may operate in an unpredictable manner, which may result in a risk of personal injury or

equipment damage.

CPU Power Specifications

The following chart shows the amount of current available for the two voltages supplied from

the DL205 base. Use these currents when calculating the power budget for your system. The

Auxiliary 24V Power Source mentioned in the table is a connection at the base terminal strip

allowing you to connect to devices or DL205 modules that require 24VDC.

Module Power Requirements

Use the power requirements shown on the next page to calculate the power budget for your

system. If an External 24VDC power supply is required, the external 24VDC from the base

power supply may be used as long as the power budget is not exceeded.

Bases 5V Current Supplied Auxiliary 24VDC Current Supplied

D2–03B–1 2600 mA 300 mA

D2–04B–1 2600 mA 300 mA

D2–06B–1 2600 mA 300 mA

D2–09B–1 2600 mA 300 mA

D2–03BDC1–1 2600 mA None

D2–04BDC1–1 2600 mA None

D2–06BDC1–1 2600 mA None

D2–09BDC1–1 2600 mA None

D2–06BDC2–1 2600 mA 300 mA

D2–09BDC2–1 2600 mA 300 mA

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-8

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Power Consumed Power Consumed

Device 5V (mA) 24V Auxilliary

(mA) Device 5V (mA) 24V Auxilliary

(mA)

CPUs Combination Modules

D2–230 120 0D2–08CDR 200 0

D2–240 120 0 Specialty Modules

D2–250–1 330 0 H2–PBC 530 0

D2–260 330 0 H2–ECOM 450 0

DC Input Modules H2–ECOM100 300 0

D2–08ND3 50 0 H2–ECOM-F 640 0

D2–16ND3–2 100 0 H2–ERM(100) 320 0

D2–32ND3(–2) 25 0 H2–ERM–F 450 0

AC Input Modules H2–EBC 320 0

D2–08NA–1 50 0 H2–EBC–F 450 0

D2–08NA–2 100 0H2–CTRIO(2) 275 0

D2–16NA 100 0 D2–DCM 300 0

DC Output Modules D2–RMSM 200 0

D2–04TD1 60 20 D2–RSSS 150 0

D2–08TD1(–2) 100 0D2–CTRINT 50* 0

D2–16TD1–2 200 80 D2–08SIM 50 0

D2–16TD2–2 200 0 D2–CM 100 0

D2–32TD1(–2) 350 0 D2–EM 130 0

AC Output Modules F2–CP128 235 0

D2–08TA 250 0 F2–DEVNETS–1 160 0

F2–08TA 250 0F2–SDS–1 160 0

D2–12TA 350 0

Relay Output Modules

D2–04TRS 250 0

D2–08TR 250 0

F2–08TRS 670 0

F2–08TR 670 0

D2–12TR 450 0

Analog Modules

F2–04AD–1 50 80 F2–02DAS–1 100 50mA per channel

F2–04AD–1L 100 5mA @ 10-30V F2–02DAS–2 100 60mA per channel

F2–04AD–2 110 5mA @ 10-30V F2–4AD2DA 90 80mA**

F2–04AD–2L 60 90mA @ 12V** F2–8AD4DA-1 35 100

F2–08AD–1 100 5mA @ 10-30V F2–8AD4DA-2 35 80

F2–08AD–2 100 5mA @ 10-30V F2–04RTD 90 0

F2–02DA–1 40 60** F2–04THM 110 60

F2–02DA–1L 40 70mA @ 12V**

F2–02DA–2 40 60

F2–02DA–2L 40 70mA @ 12V**

F2–08DA–1 30 50mA**

F2–08DA–2 60 140

*requires external 5VDC for outputs

**add an additional 20mA per loop

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-9

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Power Budget Calculation Example

The following example shows how to calculate the power budget for the DL205 system.

1. Use the power budget table to fill in the power requirements for all the system components.

First, enter the amount of power supplied by the base. Next, list the requirements for

the CPU, any I/O modules, and any other devices, such as the Handheld Programmer,

C-more HMI or the DV–1000 operator interface. Remember, even though the Handheld

Programmer or the DV–1000 are not installed in the base, they still obtain their power

from the system. Also, make sure you obtain any external power requirements, such as the

24VDC power required by the analog modules.

2. Add the current columns starting with CPU slot and put the total in the row labeled “Total

Power Required.”

3. Subtract the row labeled “Total Power Required” from the row labeled “Available Base

Power.” Place the difference in the row labeled “Remaining Power Available.”

4. If “Total Power Required” is greater than the power available from the base, the power

budget will be exceeded. It will be unsafe to use this configuration, and you will need to

restructure your I/O configuration.

WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget,

the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or

equipment damage.

Base #

0 Module Type 5 VDC (mA)

Auxiliary

Power Source

24 VDC Output (mA)

Available Base Power D2–09B–1 2600 300

CPU Slot D2–260 + 330

Slot 0 D2–16ND3–2 + 100 + 0

Slot 1 D2–16NA + 100 + 0

Slot 2 D2–16NA + 100 + 0

Slot 3 F2–04AD–1 + 50 + 80

Slot 4 F2–02DA–1 + 40 + 60

Slot 5 D2–08TA + 250 + 0

Slot 6 D2–08TD1 + 100 + 0

Slot 7 D2–08TR + 250 + 0

Other

Handheld Programmer D2–HPP + 200 + 0

Total Power Required 1520 140

Remaining Power Available 2600–1520 = 1080 300 – 140 = 160

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-10

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Power Budget Calculation Worksheet

This blank chart is provided for you to copy and use in your power budget calculations.

1. Use the power budget table to fill in the power requirements for all the system components.

This includes the CPU, any I/O modules, and any other devices, such as the Handheld

Programmer, C-more HMI or the DV–1000 operator interface. Also, make sure you

obtain any external power requirements, such as the 24VDC power required by the analog

modules.

2. Add the current columns starting with CPU slot and put the total in the row labeled “Total

Power Required.”

3. Subtract the row labeled “Total Power Required” from the row labeled “Available Base

Power.” Place the difference in the row labeled “Remaining Power Available.”

4. If “Total Power Required” is greater than the power available from the base, the power

budget will be exceeded. It will be unsafe to use this configuration, and you will need to

restructure your I/O configuration.

WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget,

the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or

equipment damage.

Base #

0Module Type 5 VDC (mA)

Auxiliary

Power Source

24 VDC Output (mA)

Available Base Power

CPU Slot

Slot 0

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 5

Slot 6

Slot 7

Other

Total Power Required

Remaining Power Available

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-11

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Local Expansion I/O

Use local expansion when you need more I/O points, a greater power budget than the local

CPU base provides or when placing an I/O base at a location away from the CPU base, but

within the expansion cable limits. Each local expansion base requires the D2–CM controller

module in the CPU slot. The local CPU base requires the D2–EM expansion module, as well

as each expansion base. All bases in the system must be the new (–1) bases. These bases have

a connector on the right side of the base to which the D2–EM expansion module attaches. All

local and local expansion I/O points are updated on every CPU scan.

Use the DirectSOFT PLC Configure I/O menu option to view the local expansion system

automatic I/O addressing configuration. This menu also allows manual addresses to be

assigned if necessary.

D2–CM Local Expansion Module

The D2–CM module is placed in

the CPU slot of each expansion base.

The rotary switch is used to select the

expansion base number. The expansion

base I/O addressing (Xs and Ys) is based

on the numerical order of the rotary

switch selection and is recognized by the

CPU on power–up. Duplicate expansion

base numbers will not be recognized by

the CPU.

The status indicator LEDs on the D2–

CM front panels have specific functions

which can help in programming and

troubleshooting.

D2–CM Indicators Status Meaning

PWR (Green) ON Power good

OFF Power failure

RUN (Green) ON D2–CM has established communication with PLC

OFF D2–CM has not established communication with PLC

DIAG (Red)

ON Hardware watch–dog failure

ON/OFF I/O module failure (ON 500ms / OFF 500ms)

OFF No D2–CM error

DL230 DL240 DL250 DL250-1 DL260

Total number of local / expansion bases per system

These CPUs do not support local

expansion systems

3 5

Maximum number of expansion bases 2 4

Total I/O (includes CPU base and expansion bases) 768 1280

Maximum inputs 512 1024

Maximum outputs 512 1024

Maximum expansion system cable length 30m (98ft.)

Expansion

Controller

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-12

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

D2–EM Local Expansion Module

The D2–EM expansion unit is attached to the right side of each base in the expansion system,

including the local CPU base. (All bases in the local expansion system must be the new

(–1) bases). The D2–EMs on each end of the expansion system should have the TERM

(termination) switch placed in the ON position. The expansion units between the endmost

bases should have the TERM switch placed in the OFF position. The CPU base can be located

at any base position in the expansion system. The bases are connected in a daisy–chain fashion

using the D2–EXCBL–1 (category 5 straight–through cable with RJ45 connectors). Either of

the RJ45 ports (labelled A and B) can be used to connect one expansion base to another.

The status indicator LEDs on the D2–EM front panels have specific functions which can help

in programming and troubleshooting.

WARNING: Connect/disconnect the expansion cables with the PLC power turned OFF in order for the

ACTIVE indicator to function normally.

D2–EXCBL–1 Local Expansion Cable

The category 5 straight–through D2–EXCBL–1 (1m) is used to connect the D2–EM expansion

modules together. If longer cable lengths are required, we recommend that you purchase a

commercially manufactured cable with RJ45 connectors already attached. The maximum total

expansion system cable length is 30m (98ft). Do not use Ethernet hubs to connect the local

expansion network together.

NOTE: Commercially available Patch (Straight–through) Category 5, UTP cables will work in place of the

D2–EXCBL–1. The D2–EM modules only use the wires connected to pins 3 and 6 as shown above.

D2–EM Indicator Status Meaning

ACTIVE (Green) ON D2–EM is communicating with other D2–EM

OFF D2–EM is not communicating with other D2–EM

D2–EXCBL–1 Cable

34 562187

8-pin RJ45 Connector

(8P8C) RJ45 RJ45

GRN

GRN/WHT

GRN

GRN/WHT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-13

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

DL260 Local Expansion System

The D2–260 supports local expansion up to five total bases (one CPU base + four local

expansion bases) and up to a maximum of 1280 total I/O points. An example local expansion

system is shown below. All local and expansion I/O points are updated on every CPU scan.

No specialty modules can be located in the expansion bases (refer to the Module Placement

Table earlier in this chapter for restrictions).

• The CPU base can be located at any base position in the expansion system.

• All discrete and analog modules are supported in the expansion bases. Specialty modules are

not supported in the expansion bases.

• The D2–CMs do not have to be in successive numerical order; however, the numerical rotary

selection determines the X and Y addressing order. The CPU will recognize the local and

expansion I/O on power–up. Do not duplicate numerical selections.

• The TERM (termination) switch on the two endmost D2–EMs must be in the ON position.

The other D2–EMs in between should be in the OFF position.

• Use the D2–EXCBL–1 or equivalent cable to connect the D2–EMs together. Either of the

RJ45 ports (labeled A and B) on the D2–EM can be used to connect one base to another.

D2–EM Termination

Switch Settings

D2–CM Expansion

Base Number Selection

D2–260

CPU

I/O addressing #1

I/O addressing #2

I/O addressing #3

I/O addressing #4

I/O addressing #5

30m (98ft.) max. cable length

NOTE: Do not use Ethernet hubs

to connect the local expansion

system together.

NOTE: Use D2-EXCBL-1 (1m)

(Category 5 straight-through

cable) to connect the D2-EMs

together.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-14

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

NOTE: When applying power to the CPU (DL250–1/260) and local expansion bases, make sure the expansion

bases power up at the same time or before the CPU base. Expansion bases that power up after the CPU base

will not be recognized by the CPU. (See chapter 3 Initialization Process timing specifications).

DL250–1 Local Expansion System

The D2–250–1 supports local expansion up to three total bases ( one CPU base + two local

expansion bases) and up to a maximum of 768 total I/O points. An example local expansion

system is shown below. All local and expansion I/O points are updated on every CPU scan.

No specialty modules can be located in the expansion bases (refer to the Module Placement

Table earlier in this chapter for restrictions).

• The CPU base can be located at any base position in the expansion system.

• All discrete and analog modules are supported in the expansion bases. Specialty modules are

not supported in the expansion bases.

• The D2–CMs do not have to be in successive numerical order, however, the numerical rotary

selection determines the X and Y addressing order. The CPU will recognize the local and

expansion I/O on power–up. Do not duplicate numerical selections.

• The TERM (termination) switch on the two endmost D2–EMs must be in the ON position.

The other D2–EMs in between should be in the OFF position.

• Use the D2–EXCBL–1 or equivalent cable to connect the D2–EMs together. Either of the

RJ45 ports (labelled A and B) on the D2–EM can be used to connect one base to another.

D2–EM Termination

Switch Settings

D2–CM Expansion

Base Number Selection

D2–250–1

CPU

Use D2–EXCBL–1 (1m

)

(Category 5 straight–

through cable) to connect

the D2-EMs together.

I/O addressing #1

I/O addressing #2

I/O addressing #3

30m (98ft.) max. cable length

Note: Do not use

Ethernet hubs to

connect the local

expansion system

together.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-15

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Expansion Base Output Hold Option

The bit settings in V–memory registers V7741 and V7742 determine the expansion bases’

outputs response to a communications failure. The CPU will exit the RUN mode to the STOP

mode when an expansion base communications failure occurs. If the Output Hold bit is ON,

the outputs on the corresponding module will hold their last state when a communication error

occurs. If OFF (default), the outputs on the module unit will turn off in response to an error.

The setting does not have to be the same for all the modules on an expansion base.

The selection of the output mode will depend on your application. You must consider the

consequences of turning off all the devices in one or all expansion bases at the same time vs.

letting the system run “steady state” while unresponsive to input changes. For example, a

conveyor system would typically suffer no harm if the system were shut down all at once. In a

way, it is the equivalent of an “E–STOP”. On the other hand, for a continuous process such

as waste water treatment, holding the last state would allow the current state of the process to

continue until the operator can intervene manually. V7741 and V7742 are reserved for the

expansion base Output Hold option. The bit definitions are as follows:

Bit = 0 Output Off (Default)

Bit = 1 Output Hold

WARNING: Selecting “HOLD LAST STATE” means that outputs on the expansion bases will not be

under program control in the event of a communications failure. Consider the consequences to process

operation carefully before selecting this mode.

D2–CM Expansion Base Hold Output

Expansion

Base No. V–memory Register Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7

Exp. Base 1 V7741 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Exp. Base 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Exp. Base 3 V7742 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Exp. Base 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-16

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Enabling I/O Configuration Check using DirectSOFT

Enabling the I/O Config Check will force the CPU, at power up, to examine the local and

expansion I/O configuration before entering the RUN mode. If there is a change in the I/O

configuration, the CPU will not enter the RUN mode. For example, if local expansion base

#1 does not power up with the CPU and the other expansion bases, the I/O Configuration

Check will prevent the CPU from entering the RUN mode. If the I/O Configuration check

is disabled and automatic addressing is used, the CPU would assign addresses from expansion

base #1 to base #2 and possibly enter the RUN mode. This is not desirable, and can be

prevented by enabling the I/O Configuration check.

Manual addressing can be used to manually assign addresses to the I/O modules. This will

prevent any automatic addressing re–assignments by the CPU. The I/O Configuration Check

can also be used with manual addressing.

To display the I/O Config Check window, use DirectSOFT>PLC menu>Setup>I/O Config

Check.

Select “Yes,” then

save to disk or to

PLC, if connected to

the PLC.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-17

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Expanding DL205 I/O

I/O Expansion Overview

Expanding I/O beyond the local chassis is useful for a system which has a sufficient number of

sensors and other field devices located a relatively long distance from the CPU. Two forms of

communication can be used to add remote I/O to your system: either an Ethernet or a serial

communication network. A discussion of each method follows.

Ethernet Remote Master, H2-ERM(100, -F)

The Ethernet Remote Master, H2-ERM(100, -F), is a module that provides a low-cost, high-

speed Ethernet Remote I/O link to connect either a DL240, a DL250-1 or a DL260 CPU to

slave I/O over a high-speed Ethernet link.

Each H2-ERM(100) module can support up to 16 additional H2-EBC systems, 16 Terminator

I/O EBC systems, or 16 fully expanded H4-EBC systems.

The H2-ERM(100) connects to your control network using Category 5 UTP cables for

distances up to 100m (328ft). Repeaters are used to extend the distances and to expand the

number of nodes. The fiber optic version, H2-ERM-F, uses industry standard 62.5/125

ST-style fiber optic cables and can be run up to 2,000m (6560ft).

The PLC, ERM and EBC slave modules work together to update the remote I/O points. These

three scan cycles are occurring at the same time, but asynchronously. We recommend that

critical I/O points that must be monitored every scan be placed in the CPU base.

230

240

250-1

260





Specifications H2-ERM H2-ERM100 H2-ERM-F

Communications 10BaseT Ethernet 10/100BaseT Ethernet 10BaseFL Ethernet

Data Transfer Rate 10Mbps 100Mbps 10Mbps

Link Distance 100 meters (328 ft) 2000 meters (6560 ft)

Ethernet Port RJ45 ST-style fiber optic

Ethernet Protocols TCP/IP, IPX TCP/IP, IPX, Modbus

TCP/IP, DHCP,

HTML configuration TCP/IP, IPX

Power Consumption 320mA @ 5VDC 450mA @ 5VDC

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-18

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Ethernet Remote Master Hardware Configuration

Use a PC equipped with a 10/100BaseT or a 10BaseFL network adapter card and the Ethernet

Remote Master (ERM) Workbench software configuration utility (included with the ERM

manual, H24-ERM-M) to configure the ERM module and its slaves over the Ethernet remote

I/O network.

When networking ERMs with other Ethernet devices, we recommend that a dedicated Ethernet

remote I/O network be used for the ERM and its slaves. While Ethernet networks can handle

an extremely large number of data transactions, and normally very quickly, heavy Ethernet

traffic can adversely affect the reliability of the slave I/O and the speed of the I/O network.

Keep ERM networks, multiple ERM networks and ECOM/office networks isolated from one

another.

Once the ERM remote I/O network is configured and running, the PC can be removed from

the network.

DirectLogic PLC

ERM

Module

PC running ERM WorkBench

to configure the ERM network

Dedicated Hub(s)

for ERM Network

GS–EDRV

or HA–EDRV2

Drive

DirectLogic DL205 I/O

with EBC Module

DirectLogic DL405 I/O

with EBC Module

Terminator I/O

with EBC Module

Dedicated Hub(s)

for ERM Network

DirectLogic PLC

ERM

Module

GS–EDRV

or HA–EDRV2

Drive

DirectLogic DL205 I/O

with EBC Module

DirectLogic DL405 I/O

with EBC Module

Terminator I/O

with EBC Module

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-19

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Installing the ERM Module

This section will briefly describe the installation of the ERM module. More detailed

information is available in the Ethernet Remote Master Module manual, H24-ERM-M, which

will be needed to configure the communication link to the remote I/O.

In addition to the manual, configuration software will be needed. The ERM Workbench

software utility must be used to configure the ERM and its slave modules. The utility is

provided on a CD which comes with the ERM manual. The ERM module can be identified by

two different methods, either by Module ID (dip switch) or by Ethernet address. Whichever

method is used, the ERM Workbench is all that is needed to configure the network modules.

If IP addressing (UDP/IP) is necessary or if the Module ID is set with software, the NetEdit

software utility (included with the ERM Workbench utility) will be needed in addition to the

ERM Workbench.

ERM Module ID

Set the ERM Module ID before installing the module in the DL205 base. Always set the

module ID to 0. A Module ID can be set in one of two ways:

• Use the DIP switches on the module (1-63)

• Use the configuration tools in NetEdit

Use the DIP switch to install and change slave modules without using a PC to set the Module

ID. Set the module’s DIP switch, insert the module in the base, and connect the network

cable. The Module ID is set on power up, and it is ready to communicate on the network.

The Module IDs can also be set or changed on the network from a single PC by using the tools

in NetEdit.

The Module ID equals the sum of the binary values of the slide switches set in the ON position.

For example, if slide switches 1, 2 and 3 are set to the ON position, the Module ID will be 14.

This is found by adding 8+4+2=14. The maximum value which can be set on the DIP switch

is 32+16+8+4+2=63. This is achieved by setting switches 0 through 5 to the ON position. The

6 and 7 switch positions are inactive.

dna noitallatsnI senilediuG ytefaS

1234

Not Used (32)(16) (8)(4) (2)(1)

25......

......

Binary Value

H2-ERM(100)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-20

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Insert the ERM Module

The DL205 system only supports the placement of the ERM module in the CPU base. It does

not support installation of the ERM module in either local expansion or remote I/O bases.

The number of usable slots depends on how many slots the base has. All of the DL205 CPUs

support the ERM module, except the D2-230.

NOTE: The module will not work in slot 0 of the DL205 series PLCs, the slot next to the CPU.

Network Cabling

Of the three types of ERM modules available, one supports the 10BaseT standard, another

supports 10/100BaseT and the other one supports the 10BaseFL standard. The 10/100BaseT

standard uses twisted pairs of copper wire conductors and the 10BaseFL standard is used with

fiber optic cabling.

Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4

DL205 CPU

Do not install the

ERM in Slot 0.

10/100BaseT

Unshielded

Twisted-Pair

cable with RJ45

connectors

10BaseFL

62.5/125 MMF

fiber optics cable

with ST-style

connectors

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-21

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

10/100BaseT Networks

A patch (straight-through) cable is used to connect a PLC (or PC) to a hub or to a repeater. Use

a crossover cable to connect two Ethernet devices (point-to-point) together. It is recommended

that pre-assembled cables be purchased for convenient and reliable networking.

The above diagram illustrates the standard wire positions of the RJ45 connector. It is

recommended that Catagory 5, UTP cable be used for all ERM 10/100BaseT cables.

Refer to the ERM manual for using the fiber optic cable with the H2-ERM-F.

An explanation of the use of the ERM Workbench software is too lengthy for this manual. The

full use of the workbench and NetEdit utilities is discussed in the ERM manual.

RJ45 RJ45

TD– 2

TD+ 1

RD+ 3

RD– 6

GRN

GRN/WHT

OR/WHT

BLU

BLU/WHT

BRN/WHT

BRN

GRN

GRN/WHT

OR/WHT

BLU

BLU/WHT

BRN/WHT

BRN

Patch (Straight–through) Cable

RJ45RJ45

TD– 2

TD+ 1

RD+ 3

RD– 6

GRN

GRN/WHT

OR/WHT

BLU

BLU/WHT

BRN/WHT

BRN

GRN

GRN/WHT

OR/WHT

BLU

BLU/WHT

BRN/WHT

BRN

Crossover Cable

2 TD–

1 TD+

3 RD+

6 RD–

TD–

TD+

RD+

RD–

34 562187

8-pin RJ45 Connector

(8P8C)

10/100BaseT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-22

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Ethernet Base Controller, H2-EBC(100)(-F)

The Ethernet Base Controller module H2-EBC(100)(-F) provides a low-cost, high-performance

Ethernet link between a network master controller and an DirectLOGIC PLC I/O slave system.

Also, the H2-EBC100 supports the Modbus TCP/IP client/server protocol.

The Ethernet Base Controller (EBC) serves as an interface between the master control system

and the DL205/405 I/O modules. The control function is performed by the master controller,

not the EBC slave. The EBC occupies the CPU slot in the base and communicates across the

backplane to input and output modules. Various master controllers with EBC slaves are shown

in the diagram below.

The H2-EBC module supports industry standard 10BaseT Ethernet communications, the

H2-EBC100 module supports industry standard 10/100BaseT Ethernet communications and

the H2-EBC-F module supports 10BaseFL (fiber optic) Ethernet standards.

Example EBC Systems: Various Masters with EBC Slaves

Modbus TCP/IP Masters

(H2-EBC100 only) DirectLOGIC PLC/

WinPLC with ERM

Serial HMI

PC-based Control System

Ethernet

Hub

All H2/H4 Series EBCs

UDP/IP, IPX

10Mbps

H2-EBC100

TCP/IP, UDP/IP, IPX

Modbus TCP/IP

10/100Mbps

EBC

OR OR

Specifications H2-EBC H2-EBC100 H2-EBC-F

Communications 10BaseT Ethernet 10/100BaseT Ethernet 10BaseFL Ethernet

Data Transfer Rate 10 Mbps max. 100 Mbps max. 10 Mbps max.

Link Distance 100m (328ft) 100m (328ft) 2000m (6560ft)

Ethernet Port RJ45 RJ45 ST-style fiber optic

Ethernet Protocols TCP/IP, IPX TCP/IP, IPX/Modbus TCP/IP,

DHCP, HTML configuration TCP/IP, IPX

Serial Port RJ12 RJ12 None

Serial Protocols K-Sequence, ASCII IN/

OUT

K-Sequence, ASCII IN/OUT,

Modbus RTU None

Power Consumption 450mA @ 5VDC 300mA @ 5VDC 640mA @ 5VDC

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-23

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Install the EBC Module

Like the ERM module discussed in the previous section, this section will briefly describe the

installation of the H2 Series EBCs. More detailed information is available in the Ethernet Base

Controller manual, H24-EBC-M, which will be needed to configure the remote I/O.

Each EBC module must be assigned at least one unique identifier to make it possible for master

controllers to recognize it on the network. Two methods for identifying the EBC module give

it the flexibility to fit most networking schemes. These identifiers are:

• Module ID (IPX protocol only)

• IP Address (for TCP/IP and Modbus TCP/IP protocols)

Set the Module ID

The two methods which can be used to set the EBC module ID are either by DIP switch or

by software. One software method is to use the NetEdit3 program which is included with the

EBC manual. To keep the set-up discussion simple here, only the DIP switch method will be

discussed. Refer to the EBC manual for the complete use of NetEdit3.

It is recommended to use the DIP switch to set the Module ID because the DIP switch is simple

to set, and the Module ID can be determined by looking at the physical module, without

reference to a software utility.

The DIP switch can be used to set the Module ID to a number from 1-63. Do not use Module

ID 0 for communication.

If the DIP switch is set to a number greater than 0, the software utilities are disabled from

setting the Module ID. Software utilities will only allow changes to the Module ID if the DIP

switch setting is 0 (all switches OFF).

NOTE: The DIP switch settings are read at powerup only. The power must be cycled each time the DIP

switches are changed.

Setting the Module ID with the DIP switches is identical to setting the DIP switches on the

H2-ERM(100) module. Refer to page 4-19 in this chapter.

Insert the EBC Module

Once the Module ID DIP switches are set, insert the module in the CPU slot of any DL205

base.

Insert H2-EBC in CPU slot

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-24

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Network Cabling

Of the two types of EBC modules available, one supports the 10/100BaseT standard and the

other one supports the 10BaseFL standard. The 10/100BaseT standard uses twisted pairs of

copper wire conductors and the 10BaseFL standard is used with fiber optic cabling.

RJ45 for

10/100BaseT

RJ12

Serial

Port

RS232

ST-style

Bayonet

for

10BaseFL

10/100BaseT

RJ45

TD– 2

TD+ 1

RD+ 3

RD– 6

GRN

GRN/WHT

OR/WHT

BLU

BLU/WHT

BRN/WHT

BRN

GRN

GRN/WHT

OR/WHT

BLU

BLU/WHT

BRN/WHT

BRN

Patch (Straight–through) Cable

RJ4

J45

TD– 2

TD+ 1

RD+ 3

RD– 6

GRN

GRN/WHT

OR/WHT

BLU

BLU/WHT

BRN/WHT

BRN

GRN

GRN/WHT

OR/WHT

BLU

BLU/WHT

BRN/WHT

BRN

Crossover Cable

2 TD–

1 TD+

3 RD+

6 RD–

TD–

TD+

RD+

RD–

34 562187

8-pin RJ45 Connector

(8P8C)

10/100BaseT

The 10BaseT and 100BaseT EBCs have an eight-pin modular jack that accepts RJ45

connectors. UTP Category 5 (CAT5) cable is highly recommended for use with all

Ethernet 10/100BaseT connections. For convenient and reliable networking, purchase

commercially manufactured cables which have the connectors already installed.

To connect an EBC, or a PC, to a hub or repeater, use a patch cable (sometimes called a

straight-through cable). The cable used to connect a PC directly to an EBC or to connect

two hubs is referred to as a crossover cable.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-25

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

10BaseFL Network Cabling

The H2-EBC-F and the H2-ERM-F modules have two ST-style bayonet connectors. The

ST-style connector uses a quick release coupling which requires a quarter turn to engage or

disengage. The connectors provide mechanical and optical alignment of fibers.

Each cable segment requires two strands of fiber; one to transmit data and one to receive data.

The ST-style connectors are used to connect the H2-Exx-F module to a PC or a fiber optic hub

or repeater. The modules themselves cannot act as repeaters.

The H2-EBC-F and the H2-ERM-F modules accept 62.5/125 multimode fiber optic (MMF)

cable. The glass core diameter is 62.5 micrometers, and the glass cladding is 125 micrometers.

The fiber optic cable is highly immune to noise and permits communications over much

greater distances than 10/100BaseT.

Maximum Cable Length

The maximum distance per 10/100BaseT cable segment is 100 meters (328 feet). Repeaters

extend the distance. Each cable segment attached to a repeater can be 100 meters. Two

repeaters connected together extend the total range to 300 meters. The maximum distance

per 10BaseFL cable segment is 2,000 meters (6,560 feet or 1.2 miles). Repeaters extend the

distance. Each cable segment attached to a repeater can be 2,000 meters. Two repeaters

connected together extend the total range to 6,000 meters.

Transmit

Receive

62.5/125 MMF cable with

bayonet ST-style connectors

Transmit Transmit

Receive Receive

Connecting your fiber optic

EBC to a network adapter

card or fiber optic hub

Multimode Fiber Optic (MMF) Cable

100 meters

(328 feet)

100 meters

(328 feet)

100 meters

(328 feet)

100 meters

(328 feet)

100 meters

(328 feet)

10Base–T Ethernet Control Network shown

(also supports 10Base–FL Networks)

10Base–T Hub (required

if using more than one

Ethernet slave)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-26

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Add a Serial Remote I/O Master/Slave Module

In addition to the I/O located in the local base, adding remote I/O can be accomplished via

a shielded twisted-pair cable linking the master CPU to a remote I/O base. The methods of

adding serial remote I/O are:

• DL240 CPUs: Remote I/O requires a remote master module (D2–RMSM) to be installed in the

local base. The CPU updates the remote master, then the remote master handles all communication

to and from the remote I/O base by communicating to a remote slave module (D2–RSSS) installed

in each remote base.

• DL250–1 and D2–260 CPU: The CPU’s comm port 2 features a built-in Remote I/O channel. You

may also use up to seven D2–RMSM remote masters in the local base as described above (you can

use either or both methods).

Remote I/O points map into different CPU memory locations, therefore it does not reduce the

number of local I/O points. Refer to the DL205 Remote I/O manual for details on remote

I/O configuration and numbering. Configuring the built-in remote I/O channel is described

in the following section.

The figure below shows one CPU base, and one remote I/O channel with six remote bases.

If the CPU is a DL250–1 or DL260, adding the first remote I/O channel does not require

installing a remote master module (use the CPU’s built-in remote I/O channel).

DL230 DL240 DL250–1 DL260

Maximum number of Remote Masters supported in the local

CPU base (1 channel per Remote Master) none 2 7 7

CPU built-in Remote I/O channels none none 1 1

Maximum I/O points supported by each channel none 2048 2048 2048

Maximum Remote I/O points supported none Limited by total references available

Maximum number of Remote I/O bases per channel(RM–NET) none 7 7 7

Maximum number of Remote I/O bases per channel (SM–NET) none 31 31 31

230

240

250-1

260





Remote Slaves

Maximumof

7remote bases

per channel

Remote Masters

Masterscan go in any slot except nexttoCPU.

Allowabledistanceisfromfarthestslave to theremotemaster.

Maximumof:

7 per CPU base (DL250-1 & DL260)

(for DL250-1 & DL260 the bottom port of

the CPU can serve as an eighth master)

2 per CPU base (DL240)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-27

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Configuring the CPU’s Remote I/O Channel

This section describes how to configure the DL250–1 and DL260’s built-in remote I/O

channel. Additional information is in the Remote I/O manual, D2–REMIO–M, which

you will need in configuring the Remote slave units on the network. You can use the D2–

REMIO–M manual exclusively when using regular Remote Masters and Remote Slaves for

remote I/O in any DL205 system.

The DL250–1 and DL260 CPU’s built-in remote I/O channel only supports RM–Net which

allows it to communicate with up to seven remote bases containing a maximum of 2048 I/O

points per channel, at a maximum distance of 1000 meters. If required, you can still use

Remote Master modules in the local CPU base (2048 I/O points on each channel).

You may recall from the CPU specifications in Chapter 3 that the DL250–1 and DL260’s Port

2 is capable of several protocols. To configure the port using the Handheld Programmer, use

AUX 56 and follow the prompts, making the same choices as indicated below on this page. To

configure the port in DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then Setup Secondary

Comm Port.

• Port: From the port number list box at the

top, choose “Port 2.”

• Protocol: Click the check box to the left

of “Remote I/O” (called “M–NET” on the

HPP), and then you’ll see the dialog box

shown below.

• Station Number: Choose “0” as the station

number, which makes the DL250–1 or

DL260 the master. Station numbers 1–7

are reserved for remote slaves.

• Baud Rate: The baud rates 19200 and

38400 are available. Choose 38400

initially as the remote I/O baud rate, and

revert to 19200 baud if you experience

data errors or noise problems on the link.

• Memory Address: Choose a V-memory

address to use as the starting location of a

Remote I/O configuration table (V37700

is the default). This table is separate

and independent from the table for any

Remote Master(s) in the system, and it is

32 words in length.

Then click the button indicated to send the Port 2 configuration to the CPU, and click Close.

NOTE: You must configure the baud rate on the Remote Slaves with DIP switches to match the baud rate

selection for the CPU’s Port 2.





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-28

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

The next step is to make the connections between all devices on the Remote I/O link.

The location of Port 2 on the DL250–1 and DL260 is

on the 15-pin connector, as pictured to the right.

• Pin 7 Signal GND

• Pin 9 TXD+

• Pin 10 TXD–

• Pin 13 RXD+

• Pin 6 RXD–

Now we are ready to discuss wiring the DL250–1 or DL260 to the remote slaves on the remote

base(s). The remote I/O link is a 3-wire, half-duplex type. Since Port 2 of the DL250–1 and

DL260 CPU is a 5-wire full duplex–capable port, we must jumper its transmit and receive lines

together as shown below (converts it to 3-wire, half-duplex).

The twisted/shielded pair connects to the DL250–1 or DL260 Port 2 as shown. A termination

resistor must be added externally to the CPU, as close as possible to the connector pins. Its

purpose is to minimize electrical reflections that occur over long cables. A termination resistor

must be present at both physical ends of the network.

Ideally, the two termination resistors at the cable’s opposite ends and the cable’s rated

impedance will all match. For cable impedances

greater than 150 ohms, add a series resistor

at the last slave as shown to the right. If less

than 150 ohms, parallel a matching resistance

across the slave’s pins 1 and 2 instead.

Remember to size the termination resistor at

Port 2 to match the cables rated impedance.

The resistance values should be between 100 and

500 ohms.

NOTE: To match termination resistance to AutomationDirect L19827 (Belden 9841), use a 120 ohm resistor

across terminals 1 and 2.

NOTE: See the transient suppression for inductive loads information in Chapter 2 of this manual for further

information on wiring practices.

DL260

DL250–1 / DL260 CPU Port 2

TXD+

TXD–

RXD+

RXD–

TXD+ / RXD+

TXD– / RXD–

Internal 150 ohms

resistor not used

with 120 ohms cable

Remote I/O Master Remote I/O Slave

(end of chain)

Remote I/O Slave

120 ohms

Termination Resistor

Signal GND

Jumper

Cable: Use AutomationDirect L19954

(Belden 9842) or equivalent

D2-RSSS D2-RSSS

(use

2 grounds leads - twisted pair)

(TXD, RXD are

twisted pair)

Internal

150 ohm

resistor

Add series

external

resistor

Port 2

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-29

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Configure Remote I/O Slaves

After configuring the DL250–1 or DL260 CPU’s Port 2 and wiring it to the remote slave(s),

use the following checklist to complete the configuration of the remote slaves. Full instructions

for these steps are in the Remote I/O manual.

• Set the baud rate to match CPU’s Port 2 setting.

• Select a station address for each slave, from 1 to 7. Each device on the remote link must have

a unique station address. There can be only one master (address 0) on the remote link.

Configuring the Remote I/O Table

The beginning of the configuration table

for the built-in remote I/O channel is the

memory address we selected in the Port 2

setup.

The table consists of blocks of four words

which correspond to each slave in the

system, as shown to the right. The first

four table locations are reserved.

The CPU reads data from the table after

powerup, interpreting the four data words

in each block with these meanings:

1. Starting address of slave’s input data

2. Number of slave’s input points

3. Starting address of outputs in slave

4. Number of slave’s output points

The table is 32 words long. If your system

has fewer than seven remote slave bases,

then the remainder of the table must be

filled with zeros. For example, a three–slave

system will have a remote configuration

table containing four reserved words, 12

words of data and 16 words of “0000.”

A portion of the ladder program must

configure this table (only once) at powerup.

Use the LDA instruction as shown to the

right, to load an address to place in the

table. Use the regular LD constant to load

the number of the slave’s input or output

points. The following page gives a short

program example for one slave.

Remote I/O data

V37700 xxxx

V37701 xxxx

V37702 xxxx

V37703 xxxx

37700Memory Addr. Pointer

LDA

O40000

OUT

V37704

Reserved

Slave 1

Slave 7

V37704 xxxx

V37705 xxxx

V37706 xxxx

V37707 xxxx

V37734 0000

V37735 0000

V37736 0000

V37737 0000

K16

OUT

V37705

SP0

DirectSOFT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-30

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Consider the simple system featuring Remote I/O shown below. The DL250–1 or DL260’s

built-in Remote I/O channel connects to one slave base, which we will assign a station

address=1. The baud rates on the master and slave will be 38.4KB.

We can map the remote I/O points as any type of I/O point, simply by choosing the appropriate

range of V-memory. Since we have plenty of standard I/O addresses available (X and Y), we

will have the remote I/O points start at the next X and Y addresses after the main base points

(X60 and Y40, respectively).

Remote I/O Setup Program

Using the Remote Slave Worksheet shown above can

help organize our system data in preparation for writing

our ladder program (a blank full-page copy of this

worksheet is in the Remote I/O Manual). The four

key parameters we need to place in our Remote I/O

configuration table are in the lower right corner of the

worksheet. You can determine the address values by

using the memory map given at the end of Chapter 3,

CPU Specifications and Operation.

The program segment required to transfer our

worksheet results to the Remote I/O configuration table

is shown to the right. Remember to use the LDA or LD

instructions appropriately.

The next page covers the remainder of the required

program to get this remote I/O link up and running.

LDA

O40403

OUT

V37704

K16

OUT

V37705

SP0

DirectSOFT

LDA

O40502

OUT

V37706

K16

OUT

V37707

Slave 1

Input

Slave 1

Output

Slot

Number

Module

Name Input Addr.Output Addr.

INPUT OUTPUT

No. Inputs No.Outputs

Remote Base Address _________(Choose 1–7)

Remote Slave Worksheet

Input Bit Start Address: ________V-Memory Address:V _______

Output Bit Start Address: ________V-Memory Address:V _______

Total Input Points _____

Total Output Points _____

08ND3S

08TD1

X060

X070

Y040

Y050

X060

Y040

40403

40502

Main Base with CPU as Master

CPU

Remote Slave

X0-X17 X20-X37 X40-X57 Y0-Y17 Y20-Y37

V40400 V40401 V40402 V40500 V40501

X60-X67

V40403

X70-X77 Y40-Y47 Y50-Y57

V40502

RSSS

Slave

Port 2

V40403 V40502

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-31

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

When configuring a Remote I/O channel for

fewer than 7 slaves, we must fill the remainder

of the table with zeros. This is necessary

because the CPU will try to interpret any non-

zero number as slave information.

We continue our set-up program from the

previous page by adding a segment which

fills the remainder of the table with zeros.

The example to the right fills zeros for slave

numbers 2–7, which do not exist in our

example system.

On the last rung in the example program above, we set a special relay contact C740. This

particular contact indicates to the CPU the ladder program has finished specifying a remote

I/O system. At that moment, the CPU begins remote I/O communications. Be sure to include

this contact after any Remote I/O set-up program.

Remote I/O Test Program

Now we can verify the remote I/O link and

set-up program operation. A simple quick

check can be done with one rung of ladder,

shown to the right. It connects the first input

of the remote base with the first output. After

placing the PLC in RUN mode, we can go

to the remote base and activate its first input.

Then its first output should turn on.

X60

DirectSOFT

OUT

Y40

OUTD

V37710

OUTD

V37736

DirectSOFT

SET

C740

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-32

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Network Connections to Modbus and DirectNET

Configuring Port 2 For DirectNET

This section describes how to configure the CPU’s built-in networking ports for either Modbus

or DirectNET. This will allow you to connect the DL205 PLC system directly to Modbus

networks using the RTU protocol, or to other devices on a DirectNET network. For more

details on DirectNET, order our DirectNET manual, part number DA–DNET–M.

Configuring Port 2 For Modbus RTU

Modbus hosts system on the network must be capable of issuing the Modbus commands to

read or write the appropriate data. For details on the Modbus protocol, please refer to the

Gould Modbus Protocol reference Guide (P1–MBUS–300 Rev. J). In the event a more recent

version is available, check with your Modbus supplier before ordering the documentation.

You will need to determine whether the network connection is a 3-wire RS–232 type, or a

5-wire RS–422 type. Normally, the RS–232 signals are used for shorter distance (15 meters

(50 feet) maximum) communications between two devices. RS–422 signals are for longer

distance (1000 meters (3280ft) maximum) multi-drop networks (from two to 247 devices).

Use termination resistors at both ends of RS–422 network wiring, matching the impedance

rating of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms).

RXD

RXD–

TXD+

TXD–

Signal GND

TXD

RXD

RS–422

Multi–drop

Network

RS–232

Point-to-point

DTE Device 4

PORT 2

(DL250–1, DL260)

RS–422 Slave

9 TXD+

10 TXD–

13 RXD+

6 RXD–

1 1 R TS+

12 R TS–

14 CTS+

15 CTS–

70 V

PC/PLC Master

PORT 1: DL250–1, DL260 (slave only)

PORT 2: DL240 (slave only)

T ermination

Resistor on

last slave only

0V Signal GND

RXD

TXD

RS–232

Master

Port 1 Pinouts (DL250–1 / DL260)

1 0 V Power (–) connection (GND)

2 5 V Power (+) conection

3 RXD Receive Data (RS-232)

4 TXD T ransmit Data (RS-232)

5 5 V Power (+) conection

6 0 V Power (–) connection (GND)

6-pin Female

Modular Connector

Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL240 only)

1 0 V Power (–) connection (GND)

2 5 V Power (+) conection

3 RXD Receive Data (RS-232)

4 TXD T ransmit Data (RS-232)

5 R TS Request to Send

6 0 V Power (–) connection (GND)

15-pin Female

D-Sub connector

The recommended cable

for RS-232 or RS-422 is

AutomationDirect L19772

(Belden 8102) or equivalent.

The recommended cable for

RS-485 is AutomationDirect L19827

(Belden 9841) or equivalent.

Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL250–1 / DL260)

1 5 V 5 VDC

2 TXD2 T ransmit Data (RS-232)

3 RXD2 Receive Data (RS-232)

4 R TS2 Ready to Send (RS–232)

5 CTS2 Clear to Send (RS–232)

6 RXD2– Receive Data – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

7 0 V Logic Ground

8 0 V Logic Ground

9 TXD2+ T ransmit Data + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

10 TXD2 – T ransmit Data – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

1 1 R TS2 + Request to Send + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

12 R TS2 – Request to Send – (RS–422)(RS–485 DL260)

13 RXD2 + Receive Data + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

14 CTS2 + Clear to Send + (RS422) (RS–485 DL260)

15 CTS2 – Clear to Send – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)

Note: The DL260 supports

RS–485 multi–drop net-

working. See the Network

Master Operation (DL260

Only) section later in this

chapter for details.

230

240

250-1

260









230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-33

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Modbus Port Configuration

In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then “Secondary Comm Port.”

• Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2.”

• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “MODBUS” (use AUX 56 on the HPP, and select

“MBUS”), and then you’ll see the dialog

box below.

• Timeout: The amount of time the port

will wait after it sends a message to get a

response before logging an error.

• RTS On Delay Time: The amount of time

between raising the RTS line and sending

the data.

• RTS Off Delay Time: The amount of

time between resetting the RTS line after

sending the data.

• Station Number: To make the CPU

port a Modbus master, choose “1.” The

possible range for Modbus slave numbers

is from 1 to 247, but the DL250–1 and

DL260 WX and RX network instructions

used in Master mode will access only

slaves 1 to 90. Each slave must have a

unique number. At powerup, the port is

automatically a slave, unless and until the

DL250–1 or DL260 executes ladder logic

network instructions which use the port

as a master. Thereafter, the port reverts

back to slave mode until ladder logic

uses the port again.

• Baud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400

baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors

or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates of all devices on

the network to the same value. Refer to the appropriate product manual for details.

• Stop Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol.

• Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking.

• Echo Suppression: Select the appropriate radio button based on the wiring configuration used on

port 2.

Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close.





230

240

250-1

260

NOTE: The DL250–1 does not support the

Echo Suppression feature

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-34

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

DirectNET Port Configuration

In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then “Secondary Comm Port.”

• Port: From the port number list box, choose “Port 2.”

• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “DirectNET” (use AUX 56 on the HPP, then select

“DNET”), and then you’ll see the dialog box below.

• Timeout: The amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before

logging an error.

• RTS On Delay Time: The amount of time between raising the RTS line and sending the data.

• RTS Off Delay Time: The amount of time between resetting the RTS line after sending the data.

• Station Number: To make the CPU port a DirectNET master, choose “1”. The allowable range

for DirectNET slaves is from 1 to 90 (each slave must have a unique number). At powerup,

the port is automatically a slave, unless and until the DL250–1 or DL260 executes ladder logic

instructions which attempt to use the port as a master. Thereafter, the port reverts back to slave

mode until ladder logic uses the port again.

• Baud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400

baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors

or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates of all devices on

the network to the same value.

• Stop Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol.

• Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking.

• Format: Choose hex or ASCII formats.

Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close.

230

240

250-1

260





DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-35

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Network Slave Operation

This section describes how other devices on a network can communicate with a CPU port that

you have configured as a DirectNET slave (DL240/250–1/260) or Modbus slave (DL250–1,

DL260). A Modbus host must use the Modbus RTU protocol to communicate with the

DL250–1 or DL260 as a slave. The host software must send a Modbus function code and

Modbus address to specify a PLC memory location the DL250–1 or DL260 comprehends.

The DirectNET host uses normal I/O addresses to access applicable DL205 CPU and system.

No CPU ladder logic is required to support either Modbus slave or DirectNET slave operation.

Modbus Function Codes Supported

The Modbus function code determines whether the access is a read or a write, and whether to

access a single data point or a group of them. The DL250–1 and DL260 support the Modbus

function codes described below.

Determining the Modbus Address

There are typically two ways that most host software conventions allow you to specify a PLC

memory location. These are:

• By specifying the Modbus data type and address

• By specifying a Modbus address only.

If Your Host Software Requires the Data Type and Address

Many Host software packages allow you to specify the Modbus data type and the Modbus

address that correspond to the PLC memory location. This is the easiest method, but not all

packages allow you to do it this way.

The actual equation used to calculate the address depends on the type of PLC data you are

using. The PLC memory types are split into two categories for this purpose.

• Discrete – X, SP, Y, C, S, T (contacts), CT (contacts)

• Word – V, Timer current value, Counter current value

In either case, you basically convert the PLC octal address to decimal and add the appropriate

Modbus address (if required). The table on the following page shows the exact equation used

for each group of data.

NOTE: For information about the Modbus protocol see www.Modbus.org and select Technical Resources.

For more information about the DirectNET protocol, order our DirectNET User Manual, DA-DNET-M, or

download the manual free from our website: www.automationdirect.com. Select Manuals/Docs>Online

User Manuals>Misc.>DA-DNET-M

Modbus Function Code Function DL205 Data Types Available

01 Read a group of coils Y, C, T, CT

02 Read a group of inputs X, SP

05 Set / Reset a single coil (slave only) Y, C, T, CT

15 Set / Reset a group of coils Y, C, T, CT

03, 04 Read a value from one or more registers V

06 Write a value into a single register (slave only) V

16 Write a value into a group of registers V

230

240

250-1

260









230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-36

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

DL250–1 Memory

Type QTY (Dec.) PLC Range (Octal) Modbus Address

Range (Decimal) Modbus Data Type

For Discrete Data Types ............. Convert PLC Addr. to Dec. + Start of Range + Data Type

Inputs (X) 512 X0 – X777 2048 – 2560 Input

Special Relays (SP) 512 SP0 – SP137

SP320 – SP717

3072 – 3167

3280 – 3535 Input

Outputs (Y) 512 Y0 – Y777 2048 – 2560 Coil

Control Relays (C) 1024 C0 – C1777 3072 – 4095 Coil

Timer Contacts (T) 256 T0 – T377 6144 – 6399 Coil

Counter Contacts (CT) 128 CT0 – CT177 6400 – 6527 Coil

Stage Status Bits (S) 1024 S0 – S1777 5120 – 6143 Coil

For Word Data Types .............................. Convert PLC Addr. to Dec. + Data Type

Timer Current Values (V) 256 V0 – V377 0 – 255 Input Register

Counter Current Values (V) 128 V1000 – V1177 512 – 639 Input Register

V-Memory, user data (V) 3072

4096

V1400 – V7377

V10000 – V17777

768 – 3839

4096 – 8191 Holding Register

V-Memory, system (V) 256 V7400 – V7777 3480 – 3735 Holding Register

DL260 Memory Type QTY (Dec.) PLC Range (Octal) Modbus Address

Range (Decimal) Modbus Data Type

For Discrete Data Types ............. Convert PLC Addr. to Dec. + Start of Range + Data Type

Inputs (X) 1024 X0 – X1777 2048 – 3071 Input

Remote Inputs (GX) 2048 GX0 – GX3777 3840 – 18431 Input

Special Relays (SP) 512 SP0 – SP777 3072 – 3583 Input

Outputs (Y) 1024 Y0 – Y777 2048 – 3071 Coil

Remote Outputs (GY) 2048 GY0 – GY3777 18432 – 20479 Coil

Timer Contacts (T) 256 T0 – T177 6144 – 6399 Coil

Counter Contacts (CT) 256 CT0 – CT177 6400 – 6655 Coil

Stage Status Bits (S) 1024 S0 – S777 5120 – 6143 Coil

For Word Data Types ............................. Convert PLC Addr. to Dec. + Data Type

Timer Current Values (V) 256 V0 – V177 0 – 255 Input Register

Counter Current Values (V) 256 V1000 – V1177 512 – 767 Input Register

V-Memory, user data (V) 14.6K

V400 – V777

V1400 – V7377

V10000 – V35777

1024 – 2047 Holding Register

V-Memory, system (V) 256

1024

V7400 – V7777

V36000 – V37777

3480 – 4095

15360 – 16383 Holding Register

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-37

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

The following examples show how to generate the Modbus address and data type for hosts which require

this format.

Example 1: V2100

Find the Modbus address for User

V location V2100.

1. Find V memory in the table.

2. Convert V2100 into decimal (1089).

3. Use the Modbus data type from the table.

Example 4: C54

Find the Modbus address for Control

Relay C54.

1. Find Control Relays in the table.

2. Convert C54 into decimal (44).

3. Add the starting address for the

range (3073).

4. Use the Modbus data type from the

table.

Outputs (Y) 320 Y0 – Y477 2049 – 2367 Coil

Control Relays (CR) 256 C0 – C377 3072 - 3551 Coil

Timer Current Values (V) 128 V0 – V177 0 – 128 Input Register

Counter Current Values (V) 128 V1000 – V1177 512 – 639 Input Register

Outputs (Y) 320 Y0 – Y477 2048 - 2367 Coil

Control Relays (C) 256 C0 – C377 3073 – 3551 Coil

PLC Address (Dec.) + Data Type

V2100 = 1088 decimal

1088 + Hold. Reg. =

PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Addr.

+ Data Type

Y20 = 16 decimal

16 + 2049 + Coil =

PLC Address (Dec.) + Data Type

T10 = 8 decimal

8 + Input Reg. =

PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Addr. +Data Type

C54 = 44 decimal

44 + 3073 + Coil =

Coil 2065

Holding Reg. 1089

Input Reg. 9

Coil 3117

Timer Current Values (V) 128 V0 - V177 0 - 127 Input Register

Counter Current Values (V) 128 V1000 - V1177 512 - 639 Input Register

V Memory, user data (V) 1024 V2000 - -V3777 1024 - 2047 Holding Register

Example 3: T10 Current Value

Find the Modbus address to obtain the current

value from Timer T10.

1. Find Timer Current Values in the table.

2. Convert T10 into decimal (8).

3. Use the Modbus data type from the table.

Example 2: Y20

Find the Modbus address for output Y20.

1. Find Y outputs in the table.

2. Convert Y20 into decimal (16).

3. Add the starting address for the range (2049).

4. Use the Modbus data type from the table.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-38

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

If Your Modbus Host Software Requires an Address ONLY

Some host software does not allow you to specify the Modbus data type and address. Instead,

you specify an address only. This method requires another step to determine the address, but

it is not difficult. Basically, Modbus separates the data types by address ranges as well. So

this means an address alone can actually describe the type of data and location. This is often

referred to as “adding the offset.” One important thing to remember here is that two different

addressing modes may be available in your host software package. These are:

• 484 Mode

• 584/984 Mode

We recommend that you use the 584/984 addressing mode if your host software allows you

to choose. This is because the 584/984 mode allows access to a higher number of memory

locations within each data type. If your software only supports 484 mode, then there may be

some PLC memory locations that will be unavailable. The actual equation used to calculate

the address depends on the type of PLC data you are using. The PLC memory types are split

into two categories for this purpose.

• Discrete – X, GX, SP, Y, R, S, T, CT (contacts), C (contacts)

• Word – V, Timer current value, Counter current value

In either case, you basically convert the PLC octal address to decimal and add the appropriate

Modbus addresses (as required). The table below shows the exact equation used for each group

of data.

Discrete Data Types

DL260 Memory Type PLC Range (Octal) Address Range

(484 Mode)

Address Range

(584/984 Mode) Modbus Data Type

Global Inputs (GX) GX0 – GX1746 1001 – 1999 10001 – 10999 Input

GX1747 – GX3777 --- 11000 – 12048 Input

Inputs (X) X0 – X1777 --- 12049 – 13072 Input

Special Relays (SP) SP0 – SP777 --- 13073 – 13584 Input

Global Outputs (GY) GY0 – GY3777 1 – 2048 1 – 2048 Output

Outputs (Y) Y0 – Y1777 2049 – 3072 2049 – 3072 Output

Control Relays (C) C0 – C3777 3073 – 5120 3073 – 5120 Output

Timer Contacts (T) T0 – T377 6145 – 6400 6145 – 6400 Output

Counter Contacts (CT) CT0 – CT377 6401 – 6656 6401 – 6656 Output

Stage Status Bits (S) S0 – S1777 5121 – 6144 5121 – 6144 Output

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-39

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Word Data Types

Registers PLC Range (Octal) Input/Holding

(484 Mode)*

Input/Holding

(585/984 Mode)*

V-Memory (Timers) V0 – V377 3001/4001 30001/40001

V-Memory (Counters) V1000 – V1177 3513/4513 30513/40513

V-Memory (Data Words)

V1200 – V1377 3641/4641 30641/40641

V1400 – V1746 3769/4769 30769/40769

V1747 – V1777 --- 31000/41000

V2000 – V7377 --- 41025

V10000 – V17777 --- 44097

*Modbus: Function 04

The DL-250 supports function 04 read input register (Address 30001). To use function 04,

put the number ‘4’ into the most significant position (4xxx) when defining the number of

bytes to read. Four digits must be entered for the instruction to work properly with this mode.

The maximum constant possible is 4128. This

is due to the 128 maximum number of Bytes

that the RX/WX instruction can allow. The

value of 4 in the most significant position of

the word will cause the RX to use function 04

(30001 range).

Refer to your PLC user manual for the correct memory size of your PLC. Some of the addresses

shown above might not pertain to your particular CPU.

For an automated Modbus/Koyo address conversion utility, search and download the file

modbus_conversion.xls from the www.automationdirect.com website.

K101

K4128

LDA

O4000

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-40

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

DDetermining the DirectNET Address

Addressing the memory types for DirectNET slaves is very easy. Use the ordinary native

address of the slave device itself. To access a slave PLC’s memory address V2000 via

DirectNET, for example, the network master will request V2000 from the slave.

230

240

250-1

260





PLC Address (Dec.) + Mode Address

V2100 = 1088 decimal

1088 + 40001 = 41089

For Word Data Types... PLC Address (Dec.) + Appropriate Mode Address

Timer Current Value (V) 128 V0 - V177 0 - 127 3001 30001 Input Register

Counter Current Value (V) 128 V1000 - V1177 512 - 639 3001 30001 Input Register

V Memory, User Data (V) 1024 V2000 - V3777 1024 - 2047 4001 40001 Hold Register

PLC Addr. (Dec.) + Start Address

+ Mode

Y20 = 16 decimal

16 + 2048 + 1 = 2065

Outputs (Y) 320 Y0 - Y477 2048 - 2367 1 1 Coil

Control Relays (CR) 256 C0 - C377 3072 - 3551 1 1 Coil

Timer Contacts (T) 128 T0 - T177 6144 - 6271 1 1 Coil

For Word Data Types... PLC Address (Dec.) + Appropriate Mode Address

Timer Current Value (V) 128 V0 - V177 0 - 127 3001 30001 Input Register

Counter Current Value (V) 128 V1000 - V1177 512 - 639 3001 30001 Input Register

V Memory, User Data (V) 1024 V2000 - V3777 1024 - 2047 4001 40001 Hold Register

PLC Address (Dec.) + Mode Address

TA10 = 8 decimal

8 + 3001 = 3009

Outputs (Y) 320 Y0 - Y477 2048 - 2367 1 1 Coil

Control Relays (CR) 256 C0 - C377 3072 - 3551 1 1 Coil

Timer Contacts (T) 128 T0 - T177 6144 - 6271 1 1 Coil

PLC Addr. (Dec.) + Start Address +

Mode

C54 = 44 decimal

44 + 3072 + 1 = 3117

Example 1: V2100 584/984 Mode

Find the Modbus address for User V location V2100.

1. Find V memory in the table

2. Convert V2100 into decimal (1088).

3. Add the Modbus starting address for the mode (40001).

Example 2: Y20 584/984 Mode

Find the Modbus address for output Y20.

1. Find Y outputs in the table.

2. Convert Y20 into decimal (16).

3. Add the starting address for the range (2048).

4. Add the Modbus address for the mode (1).

Example 3: T10 Current Value 484 Mode

Find the Modbus address to obtain the

current value from Timer T10.

1. Find Timer Current Values in the table.

2. Convert T10 into decimal (8).

3. Add the Modbus starting address for the mode (3001).

Example 4: C54 584/984 Mode

Find the Modbus address for Control Relay

C54.

1. Find Control Relays in the table.

2. Convert C54 into decimal (44).

3. Add the starting address for the range (3072).

4. Add the Modbus address for the mode (1).

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-41

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Network Master Operation

This section describes how the DL250–1 and DL260 can communicate on a Modbus or

DirectNET network as a master. For Modbus networks, it uses the Modbus RTU protocol,

which must be interpreted by all the slaves on the network. Both Modbus and DirectNET are

single master/multiple slave networks. The master is the only member of the network that can

initiate requests on the network. This section teaches you how to design the required ladder

logic for network master operation.

When using the DL250–1 or DL260 CPU

as the master station, you use simple RLL

instructions to initiate the requests. The

WX instruction initiates network write

operations, and the RX instruction initiates

network read operations. Before executing

either the WX or RX commands, we will

need to load data related to the read or write

operation onto the CPU’s accumulator

stack. When the WX or RX instruction

executes, it uses the information on the stack

combined with data in the instruction box

to completely define the task, which goes to

the port.

The following step-by-step procedure will provide the information necessary to set up your

ladder program to receive data from a network slave.

Slave #1 Slave #3

Master

Modbus RTU Protocol, or DirectNET

Slave #2

Slave

Master

WX (write)

RX (read)

Network





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-42

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Step 1: Identify Master Port # and Slave #

The first Load (LD) instruction identifies the

communications port number on the network

master (DL250-1/260) and the address of the

slave station. This instruction can address up

to 99 Modbus slaves, or 90 DirectNET slaves.

The format of the word is shown to the right.

The “F1” in the upper byte indicates the use of

the bottom port of the DL250-1/260 PLC, port

number 2. The lower byte contains the slave

address number in BCD (01 to 99).

Step 2: Load Number of Bytes to Transfer

The second Load (LD) instruction determines

the number of bytes which will be transferred

between the master and slave in the subsequent

WX or RX instruction. The value to be loaded is

in BCD format (decimal), from 1 to 128 bytes.

The number of bytes specified also depends on

the type of data you want to obtain. For example, the DL205 Input points can be accessed by

V-memory locations or as X input locations. However, if you only want X0 – X27, you’ll have

to use the X input data type because the V-memory locations can only be accessed in 2-byte

increments. The following table shows the byte ranges for the various types of DirectLOGIC™

products.

DL205/405 Memory Bits per unit Bytes

V-memory

T / C current value

Inputs (X, SP) 8 1

Outputs (Y, C, Stage, T/C bits) 8 1

Scratch Pad Memory 8 1

Diagnostic Status 8 1

DL305 Memory Bits per unit Bytes

Data registers

T / C accumulator

I/O, internal relays, shift register bits,

T/C bits, stage bits 1 1

Scratch Pad Memory 8 2

Diagnostic Status(5 word R/W) 16 10

0 1F

CPU bottom port (BCD)

Slave Address (BCD)

KF101

128

K128

Internal port (hex)

# of bytes to transfe

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-43

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Step 3: Specify Master Memory Area

The third instruction in the RX or WX sequence is

a Load Address (LDA) instruction. Its purpose is to

load the starting address of the memory area to be

transferred. Entered as an octal number, the LDA

instruction converts it to hex and places the result

in the accumulator.

For a WX instruction, the DL250-1/260 CPU

sends the number of bytes previously specified from

its memory area beginning at the LDA address

specified.

For an RX instruction, the DL250-1/260 CPU

reads the number of bytes previously specified from

the slave, placing the received data into its memory

area beginning at the LDA address specified.

NOTE: Since V-memory words are always 16 bits, you may not always use the whole word. For example,

if you only specify 3 bytes and you are reading Y outputs from the slave, you will only get 24 bits of data.

In this case, only the 8 least significant bits of the last word location will be modified. The remaining 8 bits

are not affected.

Step 4: Specify Slave Memory Area

The last instruction in our sequence is the WX

or RX instruction itself. Use WX to write to the

slave, and RX to read from the slave. All four of

our instructions are shown to the right. In the last

instruction, you must specify the starting address

and a valid data type for the slave.

• DirectNET slaves – specify the same address in the

WX and RX instruction as the slave’s native I/O

address.

• Modbus DL405 or DL205 slaves – specify the same

address in the WX and RX instruction as the slave’s

native I/O address.

• Modbus 305 slaves – use the following table to

convert DL305 addresses to Modbus addresses.

6 0 00

(octal)

LDA

O40600

Starting address of

master transfer area

V40600

MSB LSB

015

V40601

MSB LSB

015

KF101

K128

LDA

O40600

SP116

DL305 Series CPU Memory Type–to–Modbus Cross Reference

PLC Memory Type PLC Base

Address

Modbus

Base Address

PLC Memory

Type

PLC Base

Address

Modbus

Base Address

TMR/CNT Current Values R600 V0 TMR/CNT

Status Bits CT600 GY600

I/O Points IO 000 GY0 Control Relays CR160 GY160

Data Registers R401,R400 V100 Shift Registers SR400 GY400

Stage Status Bits (D3-330P only) S0 GY200

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-44

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Communications from a Ladder Program

Typically, network communications will last

longer than one scan. The program must

wait for the communications to finish before

starting the next transaction.

Port 2, which can be a master, has two

Special Relay contacts associated with it.

One indicates “Port busy”(SP116), and

the other indicates ”Port Communication

Error”(SP117). The example shows the use

of these contacts for a network master that

only reads a device (RX). The “Port Busy”

bit is on while the PLC communicates with

the slave. When the bit is off, the program

can initiate the next network request.

The “Port Communication Error” bit turns

on when the PLC has detected an error. Use

of this bit is optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since

the error bit is reset when an RX or WX instruction is executed.

Multiple Read and Write Interlocks

If you are using multiple reads and writes in the RLL

program, you have to interlock the routines to make

sure all the routines are executed. If you don’t use the

interlocks, then the CPU will only execute the first

routine. This is because each port can only handle

one transaction at a time.

In the example to the right, after the RX instruction

is executed, C100 is set. When the port has finished

the communication task, the second routine is

executed and C100 is reset.

If you’re using RLLPLUS Stage Programming, you

can put each routine in a separate program stage to

ensure proper execution and switch from stage to

stage allowing only one of them to be active at a time.

Port Communication Error

KF201

LDA

O40600

SP116

Port Busy

SP117

SET

Interlocking Relay

KF201

LDA

O40600

SP116

SET

C100

KF201

LDA

O40400

VY0

SP116

RST

C100

Interlocking

Relay

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-45

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Network Modbus RTU Master Operation (DL260 only)

This section describes how the DL260 can communicate on a Modbus RTU network as a

master using the MRX and MWX read/write instructions. These instructions allow you to

enter native Modbus addressing in your ladder logic program with no need to perform octal-

to-decimal conversions. Modbus is a single-master, multiple-slave network. The master is the

only member of the network that can initiate requests on the network. This section teaches you

how to design the required ladder logic for network master operation.

Modbus Function Codes Supported

The Modbus function code determines whether the access is a read or a write, and whether

to access a single data point or a group of them. The DL260 supports the Modbus function

codes described below.

Slave #1 Slave #3

Master

Modbus RTU Protocol

Slave #2

Modbus Function Code Function DL205 Data Types Available

01 Read a group of coils Y, C, T, CT

02 Read a group of inputs X, SP

05 Set / Reset a single coil (slave only) Y, C, T, CT

15 Set / Reset a group of coils Y, C, T, CT

03, 04 Read a value from one or more registers V

06 Write a value into a single register (slave only) V

07 Read Exception Status V

08 Diagnostics V

16 Write a value into a group of registers V





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-46

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Modbus Port Configuration

In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then “Secondary Comm Port.”

• Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2.”

• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “MODBUS” (use AUX 56 on the HPP, and select

“MBUS”), and then you’ll see the dialog box below.

• Timeout: Amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before logging

an error.

• RTS On Delay Time: The amount of time between raising the RTS line and sending the data.

• RTS Off Delay Time: The amount of time between resetting the RTS line after sending the data.

• Station Number: For making the CPU port a Modbus master, choose “1.” The possible range for

Modbus slave numbers is from 1 to 247. Each slave must have a unique number. At powerup, the

port is automatically a slave, unless and until the DL06 executes ladder logic MWX/MRX network

instructions which use the port as a master. Thereafter, the port reverts back to slave mode until

ladder logic uses the port again.

• Baud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400

baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors

or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates of all devices on

the network to the same value. Refer to the appropriate product manual for details.

• Stop Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol.

• Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking.

• Echo Suppression: Select the appropriate radio button based on the wiring configuration used on

port 2.

Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close.





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-47

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

RS–485 Network (Modbus Only)

RS–485 signals are for longer distances (1000 meters maximum), and for multi-drop networks.

Use termination resistors at both ends of RS–485 network wiring, matching the impedance

rating of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms).

RS–232 Network

Normally, the RS–232 signals are used for shorter distances (15 meters maximum), for

communications between two devices. Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL260 only)

15V 5 VDC

2 TXD2 Transmit Data (RS-232)

3 RXD2 Receive Data (RS-232)

4 RTS2 Ready to Send (RS–232)

5 CTS2 Clear to Send (RS–232)

6RXD2– Receive Data – (RS–422/RS-485)

70V Logic Ground

8 0V Logic Ground

9 TXD2+ Transmit Data + (RS–422/RS–485)

10 TXD2 – Transmit Data – (RS–422/RS–485)

11 RTS2 + Request to Send + (RS–422/RS–485)

12 RTS2 – Request to Send – (RS–422/RS–485)

13 RXD2 + Receive Data + (RS–422/RS–485)

14 CTS2 + Clear to Send + (RS422/RS–485)

15 CTS2 – Clear to Send – (RS–422/RS–485)

DL260 CPU Port 2

TXD+ / RXD+

TXD– / RXD–

T ermination

Resistor

Signal GND

Cable: Use AutomationDirect L19954

(Belden 9842) or equivalent

TXD+

TXD–

RXD–

RXD+

TXD+

TXD–

RXD–

10 15

RXD+

TXD+ / RXD+

TXD– / RXD–

Signal GND

TXD+ / RXD+

TXD– / RXD–

Signal GND

R TS+

R TS–

CTS+

CTS–

R TS+

R TS–

CTS+

CTS–

DL260 CPU Port 2

Signal GND

RXD

510

TXD

RXD

GND

RTS

CTS

RTS

CTS

CPU Port 2

SCII Device





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-48

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Modbus Read from Network (MRX)

The Modbus Read from Network (MRX) instruction is used by the DL260 network master

to read a block of data from a connected slave device and to write the data into V–memory

addresses within the master. The instruction allows the user to specify the Modbus Function

Code, slave station address, starting master and slave memory addresses, number of elements

to transfer, Modbus data format and the Exception Response Buffer.

• Port Number: must be DL260 Port 2 (K2)

• Slave Address: specify a slave station address (1–247)

• Function Code: the MRX instruction supports the following Modbus function codes:

01 – Read a group of coils

02 – Read a group of inputs

03 – Read holding registers

04 – Read input registers

07 – Read Exception status

• Start Slave Memory Address: specifies the starting slave memory address of the data to be read. See

the table on the following page.

• Start Master Memory Address: specifies the starting memory address in the master where the data

will be placed. See the table on the following page.

• Number of Elements: specifies how many coils, input, holding registers or input registers will be

read. See the table on the following page.

• Modbus Data Format: specifies Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used.

• Exception Response Buffer: specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response

will be placed. See the table on the following page.





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-49

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

MRX Slave Memory Address

MRX Master Memory Addresses

MRX Number of Elements

MRX Exception Response Buffer

MRX Slave Address Ranges

Function Code Modbus Data Format Slave Address Range(s)

01 – Read Coil 484 Mode 1–999

01 – Read Coil 584/984 Mode 1–65535

02 – Read Input Status 484 Mode 1001–1999

02 – Read Input Status 584/984 Mode 10001–19999 (5 digit) or

100001–165535 (6 digit)

03 – Read Holding Register 484 Mode 4001–4999

03 – Read Holding Register 584/984 40001–49999 (5 digit) or

4000001–465535 (6 digit)

04 – Read Input Register 484 Mode 3001–3999

04 – Read Input Register 584/984 Mode 30001–39999 (5 digit) or

3000001–365535 (6 digit)

07 – Read Exception Status 484 and 584/984 Mode N/A

MRX Master Memory Address Ranges

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X 0–1777

Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Y 0–1777

Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ C 0–3777

Stage Bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ S 0–1777

Timer Bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–377

Counter Bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ CT 0–377

Special Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ SP 0–777

V–memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V All

Global Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ GX 0–3777

Global Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ GY 0–3777

Number of Elements

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

V–memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V All (see page 3-56)

Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K Bits:1–2000 Registers: 1-125

Exception Response Buffer

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-50

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Modbus Write to Network (MWX)

The Modbus Write to Network (MWX) instruction is used to write a block of data from the

network master (DL260) memory to Modbus memory addresses within a slave device on the

network. The instruction allows the user to specify the Modbus Function Code, slave station

address, starting master and slave memory addresses, number of elements to transfer, Modbus

data format and the Exception Response Buffer.

•

Port Number: must be DL260 Port 2 (K2).

• Slave Address: specify a slave station address (0–247).

• Function Code: the MWX instruction supports the following Modbus function codes:

05 – Force Single coil

06 – Preset Single Register

08 – Diagnostics

15 – Force Multiple Coils

16 – Preset Multiple Registers

• Start Slave Memory Address: specifies the starting slave memory address where the data will be

written.

• Start Master Memory Address: specifies the starting address of the data in the master that is to

written to the slave.

• Number of Elements: specifies how many consecutive coils or registers will be written to. This

field is only active when either function code 15 or 16 is selected.

• Modbus Data Format: specifies Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used.

• Exception Response Buffer: specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response

will be placed.





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-51

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

MWX Slave Memory Address

MWX Master Memory Addresses

MWX Number of Elements

MWX Exception Response Buffer

MWX Slave Address Ranges

Function Code Modbus Data Format Slave Address Range(s)

05 – Force Single Coil 484 Mode 1–999

05 – Force Single Coil 584/984 Mode 1–65535

06 – Preset Single Register 484 Mode 4001–4999

06 – Preset Single Register 584/984 Mode 40001–49999 (5 digit) or

400001–465535 (6 digit)

15 – Force Multiple Coils 484 1–999

15 – Force Multiple Coils 584/984 Mode 1–65535

16 – Preset Multiple Registers 484 Mode 4001–4999

16 – Preset Multiple Registers 584/984 Mode 40001–49999 (5 digit) or 4000001–

465535 (6 digit)

Number of Elements

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

V–memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V All (see page 3-56)

Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K Bits: 1–2000 Registers: 1-125

Exception Response Buffer

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

MRX Master Memory Address Ranges

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ C 0–3777

Counter Bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ CT 0–377

Special Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ SP 0–777

Global Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ GX 0–3777

Global Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ GY 0–3777

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-52

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

MRX/MWX Example in DirectSOFT

DL260 port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it (see Appendix D for comm

port special relays). One indicates “Port busy”(SP116), and the other indicates ”Port

Communication Error”(SP117). The “Port Busy” bit is on while the PLC communicates with

the slave. When the bit is off, the program can initiate the next network request. The “Port

Communication Error” bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error and use of this bit is

optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit

is reset when an MRX or MWX instruction is executed. Typically, network communications

will last longer than one CPU scan. The program must wait for the communications to finish

before starting the next transaction.

The “Port Communication Error” bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error. Use of

this bit is optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the

error bit is reset when an RX or WX instruction is executed.

Multiple Read and Write Interlocks

Port 2 busy bit

SP116

Port 2 error bit

SP117

_FirstScan

SP0

_FirstScan

SP0

CNT

Number of times that

the PLC has tried to

poll network

CTO

K9999

CNT

Number of times that

the PLC has errored

CT1

K9999

SP116 will execute every time it attempts to poll the network. You should see this

counting up as you enable the MWX and MRX instructions. Some things that would

prevent this: 1) Com Port RTS and CTS not jumpered. 2) Port not set up for Modbus

RTU. 3) Problem in logic that is not allowing the MWX or MRX to enable.

SP117 will come on when: 1) The slave device sends an "Exception Response." If this

occurs, look at the V-memory location associated with that instruction and consult the

MODICON Modbus manual for details. 2) Cabling problem. Consult wiring diagram in

user manual and verify. 3) Setting for communications are not matching. For example:

Baud rates, parities, stop bits all must match. 4) Polling a slave address number that

doesn't exist.

Under good conditions, SP116 will be counting up and SP117 will not. You will get an

occasional error in many field environments that introduce electrical/RF noise into the

application. Each application will dictate what allowable "percentage" of error is

acceptable. Anything below 10% typically does not affect the throughput very much.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-53

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

If you are using multiple reads and writes in the RLL program, you need to interlock the

routines to make sure all the routines are executed. If you don’t use the interlocks, then

the CPU will only execute the first routine. This is because each port can only handle one

transaction at a time. In the example, rungs 3 and 4 show that C100 will get set after the RX

instruction has been executed. When the port has finished the communication task, the second

routine is executed and C100 is reset. If you’re using RLLPLUS Stage Programming, you can

put each routine in a separate program stage to ensure proper execution and switch from stage

to stage allowing only one of them to be active at a time.

SP116 C100

MWX

Port Number: K2

Slave Address: K1

Function Code: 06 - Preset Single Register

Start Slave Memory Address: 40001

Start Master Memory Address: V2000

Number of Elements: n/a

Modbus Data Type: 584/984 Mode

Exception Response Buffer: V400

Instruction interlock bit

C100

( SET )

( RST )

C100

Instruction interlock bit

MRX

Port Number: K2

Slave Address: K1

Function Code: 01 - Read Coil Status

Start Slave Memory Address: 1

Start Master Memory Address:

Number of Elements:

Modbus Data Type: 584/984 Mode

Exception Response Buffer:

V400

This rung does a Modbus write to the first holding register 40001 of slave address number one.

It writes the values over that reside in V2000. This particular function code only writes to one

(WX, RX, MWX, MRX) can be enabled in one scan. That is the reason for the interlock bits. For using

many network instructions on the same port, use the Shift Register instruction.

This rung does a Modbus read from the first 32 coils of slave address number one.

It will place the values into 32 bits of the master starting at C0.

Port 2 Busy bit Instruction Interlock bit

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-54

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Non–Sequence Protocol (ASCII In/Out and PRINT)

Configure the DL260 Port 2 for Non-Sequence

Configuring port 2 on the DL260 for Non–Sequence allows the CPU to use port 2 to

either read or write raw ASCII strings using the ASCII instructions. See the ASCII In/Out

instructions and the PRINT instruction in chapter 5.

In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then “Setup Secondary Comm Port.”

• Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2.”

• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “Non–Sequence.”

• Timeout: Amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before logging

an error.

• RTS On Delay Time: The amount of time between raising the RTS line and sending the data.

• RTS Off Delay Time: The amount of time between resetting the RTS line after sending the data.

• Data Bits: Select either 7–bits or 8–bits to match the number of data bits specified for the

connected devices.

• Baud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400

baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors

or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates of all devices on

the network to the same value. Refer to the appropriate product manual for details.

• Stop Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits to match the number of stop bits specified for the connected

devices.

• Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking. Be sure to match the parity specified

for the connected devices.

• Memory Address: Starting V-memory address for ASCII In data storage.





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-55

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

• XON/XOFF Flow Control: When this function is enabled, the PLC will send data (PRINT

command) until it receives a XOFF (0x13) Pause transmission command. It will continue to wait

until it then sees a XON (0x11) Resume transmission command. This selection is only available

when the “Non-Sequence(ASCII)” option has been selected and only functions when the PLC is

sending data (not receiving with AIN command).

• RTS Flow Control: When this function is enabled, the PLC will assert the RTS signal(s) of the

port and wait to see the CTS signal(s) go true before sending data (PRINT command). This

selection is only available when the “Non-Sequence(ASCII)” option has been selected and only

functions when the PLC is sending data (not receiving with AIN command).

• Echo Suppression: Select the appropriate radio button based on the wiring configuration used on

port 2.

Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close.

RS–485 Network

RS–485 signals are for long distances (1000 meters maximum). Use termination resistors at

both ends of RS–485 network wiring, matching the impedance rating of the cable (between

100 and 500 ohms).

RS–232 Network

RS–232 signals are used for shorter

distances (15 meters maximum) and

limited to communications between

two devices.

Signal GND

RXD

510

TXD

RXD

GND

RTS

CTS

RTS

CTS

CPU Port 2

SCII Device

DL260 CPU Port 2

T ermination

Resistor

Cable: Use AutomationDirect L19954

(Belden 9842) or equivalent

TXD+

TXD–

RXD–

RXD+

TXD+ / RXD+

TXD– / RXD–

Signal GND

TXD+ / RXD+

TXD– / RXD–

Signal GND

R TS+

R TS–

CTS+

CTS–

ASCII Device

Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL260 only)

15V 5 VDC

2 TXD2 Transmit Data (RS-232)

3 RXD2 Receive Data (RS-232)

4 RTS2 Ready to Send (RS–232)

5 CTS2 Clear to Send (RS–232)

6RXD2– Receive Data – (RS–422/RS-485)

70V Logic Ground

8 0V Logic Ground

9 TXD2+ Transmit Data + (RS–422/RS–485)

10 TXD2 – Transmit Data – (RS–422/RS–485)

11 RTS2 + Request to Send + (RS–422/RS–485)

12 RTS2 – Request to Send – (RS–422/RS–485)

13 RXD2 + Receive Data + (RS–422/RS–485)

14 CTS2 + Clear to Send + (RS-422/RS–485)

15 CTS2 – Clear to Send – (RS–422/RS–485)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-56

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

• Memory Address: Choose a V-memory address to use as the starting

location for the port set-up parameters listed below. This location is the

start of protocol memory buffer. It should not be used for other purposes.

Buffer size = 2 + (Max receiving data size) / 2 or to allocate the maximum allowable space

buffer size = 66 Words (for example V2000-V2102).

• Use For Printing Only: Check the box to enable the port settings described below. Match

the settings to the connected device.

• Data Bits: Select either 7–bits or 8–bits to match the number of data bits specified for the

connected device.

• Baud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,

and 38400 baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you

experience data errors or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the

baud rates of all devices on the network to the same value. Refer to the appropriate product

manual for details.

• Stop Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits to match the number of stop bits specified for the connected

device.

• Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking. Be sure to match the parity

specified for the connected device.

Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close.

Configure the DL250-1 Port 2 for Non-Sequence

Configuring port 2 on the DL250–1 for Non–Sequence enables the CPU to use the PRINT

instruction to print embedded text or text/data variable message from port 2. See the PRINT

instruction in chapter 5.

In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then “Setup Secondary Comm Port.”

• Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2.”

• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “Non–Sequence.”





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 4-57

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

RS–422 Network

RS–422 signals are for long distances (1000 meters max.). Use termination resistors at both

ends of RS–422 network wiring, matching the impedance rating of the cable (between 100 and

500 ohms).

NOTE: For RS–422 cabling, we recommend AutomationDirect L19853 (Belden 8103) or equivalent.

RS–232 Network

RS–232 signals are used for shorter distances (15 meters maximum) and limited to

communications between two devices.

NOTE: For RS–232 cabling, we recommend AutomationDirect L19772 (Belden 8102) or equivalent.

RXD+

RXD–

TXD+

TXD–

Signal GND

PORT 2

Master

9 TXD+

10 TXD–

13 RXD+

6 RXD–

11RTS+

12 RTS–

14 CTS+

15 CTS–

70V

ASCII

Slave

Device

Termination

Resistor at

both ends of

network

Signal GND

RXD

510

TXD

RXD

GND

RTS

CTS

RTS

CTS

CPU Port 2

SCII Device

ASCII Slave

Device

CPU Port 2

Master

Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL250-1)

15V 5 VDC

2 TXD2 Transmit Data (RS-232)

3 RXD2 Receive Data (RS-232)

4 RTS2 Ready to Send (RS–232)

5 CTS2 Clear to Send (RS–232)

6RXD2– Receive Data – (RS–422)

70V Logic Ground

8 0V Logic Ground

9 TXD2+ Transmit Data + (RS–422)

10 TXD2 – Transmit Data – (RS–422)

11 RTS2 + Request to Send + (RS–422)

12 RTS2 – Request to Send – (RS–422)

13 RXD2 + Receive Data + (RS–422 )

14 CTS2 + Clear to Send + (RS422)

15 CTS2 – Clear to Send – (RS–422)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

4-58

Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration

Notes

RLL and InteLLIgent

Box InstRuctIons

Chapter

In This Chapter:

Introduction ...............................................................................5–2

Using Boolean Instructions .........................................................5–5

Boolean Instructions .................................................................. 5–10

Comparative Boolean .................................................................5–27

Immediate Instructions ...............................................................5–33

Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions ...........................5–41

Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions ..............5–53

Logical Instructions (Accumulator) .............................................5–71

Math Instructions .......................................................................5–88

Transcendental Functions (DL260 only) .....................................5–121

Bit Operation Instructions ..........................................................5–123

Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator) ......................... 5–130

Table Instructions .......................................................................5–144

Clock/Calendar Instructions .......................................................5–175

CPU Control Instructions ............................................................ 5–177

Program Control Instructions .....................................................5–179

Interrupt Instructions .................................................................5–187

Intelligent I/O Instructions .........................................................5–191

Network Instructions ..................................................................5–193

Message Instructions ..................................................................5–197

Modbus RTU Instructions (DL260) .............................................5–205

ASCII Instructions (DL260) .........................................................5–211

Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions (DL250-1/DL260 Only) .........5–230

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-2

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Introduction

The DL205 CPUs offer a wide variety of instructions to perform many different types of

operations. Several instructions are not available in all of the CPUs. This chapter shows you

how to use these individual instructions. There are two ways to quickly ﬁnd the instruction

you need:

• If you know the instruction category (Boolean, Comparative Boolean, etc), use the header at the top

of the page to ﬁnd the pages that discuss the instructions in that category.

• If you know the individual instruction name, use the following table to ﬁnd the page that discusses

the instruction.

Instruction Page

BIN Binary 5–130

BCALL Block Call (Stage) 7–27

BEND Block End (Stage) 7–27

BLK Block (Stage) 7–27

BTOR Binary to Real 5–134

CMP Compare 5–83

CMPD Compare Double 5–84

CMPF Compare Formatted 5–85

CMPR Compare Real Number 5–87

CMPS Compare Stack 5–86

CMPV ASCII Compare 5–221

CNT Counter 5–46

COSR Cosine Real 5–121

CV Converge (Stage) 7–25

CVJMP Converge Jump (Stage) 7–25

DATE Date 5–175

DEC Decrement 5–100

DECB Decrement Binary 5–108

DECO Decode 5–129

DEGR Degree Real Conversion 5–136

DISI Disable Interrupts 5–188

DIV Divide 5–97

DIVB Divide Binary 5–106

DIVBS Divide Binary Top of Stack 5–120

DIVD Divide Double 5–98

DIVF Divide Formatted 5–112

DIVR Divide Real Number 5–99

DIVS Divide Top of Stack 5–116

DLBL Data Label 5–199

DRUM Timed Drum 6–12

EDRUM Event Drum 6–14

ENCO Encode 5–128

END End 5–177

ENI Enable Interrupts 5–188

Instruction Page

ACON ASCII Constant 5–199

ACOSR Arc Cosine Real 5–122

ACRB ASCII Clear Buffer 5–229

ADD Add BCD 5–88

ADDB Add Binary 5–101

ADDBD Add Binary Double 5–102

ADDBS Add Binary Top of Stack 5–117

ADDD Add Double BCD 5–89

ADDF Add Formatted 5–109

ADDR Add Real 5–90

ADDS Add Top of Stack 5–113

AEX ASCII Extract 5–220

AFIND ASCII Find 5–217

AIN ASCII IN 5–212

AND And for contacts or boxes 5–14, 5–32, 5–71

AND STR And Store 5–16

ANDB And Bit–of–Word 5–15

ANDD And Double 5–72

ANDE And if Equal 5–29

ANDF And Formatted 5–73

ANDI And Immediate 5–35

ANDMOV And Move 5–171

ANDN And Not 5–14, 5–32

ANDNB And Not Bit–of–Word 5–15

ANDND And Negative Differential 5–23

ANDNE And if Not Equal 5–29

ANDNI And Not Immediate 5–35

ANDPD And Positive Differential 5–23

ANDS And Stack 5–74

ASINR Arc Sine Real 5–121

ATANR Arc Tangent Real 5–122

ATH ASCII to Hex 5–137

ATT Add to Top of Table 5–166

BCD Binary Coded Decimal 5–131

BCDCPL Tens Complement 5–133

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-3

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Instruction Page

FAULT Fault 5-197

FDGT Find Greater Than 5-152

FILL Fill 5–150

FIND Find 5–151

FINDB Find Block 5–173

FOR For/Next 5–180

GOTO Goto/Label 5–179

GRAY Gray Code 5–141

GTS Goto Subroutine 5–182

HTA Hex to ASCII 5–138

INC Increment 5–100

INCB Increment Binary 5–107

INT Interrupt 5–187

INV Invert 5–132

IRT Interrupt Return 5–188

IRTC Interrupt Return Conditional 7–188

ISG Initial Stage 7–24

JMP Jump 5–24

LBL Label 5–179

LD Load 5–58

LDI Load Immediate 5–39

LDIF Load Immediate Formatted 5–40

LDA Load Address 5-61

LDD Load Double 5–59

LDF Load Formatted 5–60

LDR Load Real Number 5–64

LDX Load Indexed 5–62

LDLBL Load Label 5–145

LDSX Load Indexed from Constant 5–63

MDRMD Masked Drum Event Discrete 6–19

MDRMW Masked Drum Event Word 6–21

MLR Master Line Reset 5–185

MLS Master Line Set 5–185

MOV Move 5–144

MOVMC Move Memory Cartridge 5–145

MRX Read from MODBUS Network 5–205

MWX Write to MODBUS 5–208

MUL Multiply 5–94

MULB Multiply Binary 5–105

MULBS Multiply Binary top of stack 5–119

MULD Multiply Double 5–95

MULF Multiply Formatted 5–111

MULR Multiply Real 5–96

MULS Multiply Top of Stack 5–115

NCON Numeric Constand 5–199

NEXT Next (For/Next) 5–180

Instruction Page

NJMP Not Jump (Stage) 7–24

NOP No Operation 5-177

NOT Not 5–19

OR Or 5–12, 5–31, 5–75

OR OUT Or Out 5–19

OR OUTI Or Out Immediate 5–36

OR STR Or Store 5–16

ORB Or Bit–of–Word 5–13

ORD Or Double 5–76

ORE Or if Equal 5–28

ORF Or Formatted 5–77

ORI Or Immediate 5–34

ORMOV Or Move 5–171

ORN Or Not 5–12, 5–31

ORNB Or Not Bit–of–Word 5–13

ORND Or Negative Differential 5–22

ORNE Or if Not Equal 5–28

ORNI Or Not Immediate 5–34

ORPD Or Positive Differential 5–22

ORS Or Stack 5–78

OUT Out 5–17, 5–65

OUTB Out Bit–of–Word 5–18

OUTD Out Double 5–66

OUTF Out Formatted 5–67

OUTI Out Immediate 5–36

OUTIF Out Immediate Formatted 5–37

OUTL Out Least 5–69

OUTM Out Most 5–69

OUTX Out Indexed 5–68

PAUSE Pause 5–26

PD Positive Differential 5–20

POP Pop 5–70

PRINT Print 5–201

PRINTV ASCII Print from V–Memory 5–227

RADR Radian Real Conversion 5–136

RD Read from Intelligent Module 5–191

RFB Remove from Bottom of Table 5–157

RFT Remove from Top of Table 5–163

ROTL Rotate Left 5–126

ROTR Rotate Right 5–127

RST Reset 5–24

RSTB Reset Bit–of–Word 5–25

RSTBIT Reset Bit 5–148

RSTI Reset Immediate 5–38

RSTWT Reset Watch Dog Timer 5–178

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-4

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Instruction Page

SUB Subtract 5–91

SUBB Subtract Binary 5–103

SUBBD Subtract Binary Double 5–104

SUBBS Subtract Binary Top of Stack 5–118

SUBD Subtract Double 5–92

SUBF Subtract Formatted 5–110

SUBS Subtract Top of Stack 5–114

SUBR Subtract Real Number 5–93

SUM Sum 5–123

SWAP Swap Table Data 5–174

SWAPB ASCII Swap Bytes 5–228

TANR Tangent Real 5–121

TIME Time 5–176

TMR Timer 5–42

TMRF Fast Timer 5–42

TMRA Accumulating Timer 5–44

TMRAF Fast Accumulating Timer 5–44

TSHFL Table Shift Left 5–169

TSHFR Table Shift Right 5–169

TTD Table to Destination 5–154

UDC Up Down Counter 5–50

VPRINT ASCII Print to V–Memory 5–222

WT Write to Intelligent Module 5–192

WX Write to Network 5–195

XOR Exclusive Or 5–79

XORD Exclusive Or Double 5–80

XORF Exclusive Or Formatted 5–81

XORMOV Exclusive Or Move 5–171

XORS Exclusive Or Stack 5–82

Instruction Page

RT Subroutine Return 5–182

RTC Subroutine Return Conditional 5–182

RTOB Real to Binary 5–135

RX Read from Network 5–193

SBR Subroutine (Goto Subroutine) 5–182

SEG Segment 5–140

SET Set 5–24

SETB Set Bit–of–Word 5–25

SETBIT Set Bit 5–148

SETI Set Immediate 5–38

SFLDGT Shufﬂe Digits 5–142

SG Stage 7–23

SGCNT Stage Counter 5–48

SHFL Shift Left 5–124

SHFR Shift Right 5–125

SINR Sine Real 5–121

SQRTR Square Root Real 5–122

SR Shift Register 5–52

STOP Stop 5–177

STR Store 5–10, 5–30

STRB Store Bit–of–Word 5–11

STRE Store if Equal 5–27

STRI Store Immediate 5–33

STRN Store Not 5–10, 5–30

STRNB Store Not Bit–of–Word 5–11

STRND Store Negative Differential 5–21

STRNE Store if Not Equal 5–27

STRNI Store Not Immediate 5–33

STRPD Store Positive Differential 5–21

STT Source to Table 5–160

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-5

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Using Boolean Instructions

Do you ever wonder why so many PLC manufacturers always quote the scan time for a 1K

boolean program? Simple, most programs utilize many boolean instructions. These are

typically very simple instructions designed to join input and output contacts in various series

and parallel combinations. Our DirectSOFT programming package is a similar program. It

uses graphic symbols to develop a program; therefore, you don’t necessarily have to know the

instruction mnemonics in order to develop your program.

Many of the instructions in this chapter are not program instructions used in DirectSOFT, but

are implied. In other words, they are not actually keyboard commands but they can be seen

in a Mnemonic View of the program once the DirectSOFT program has been developed and

accepted (compiled). Each instruction listed in this chapter will have a small chart to indicate

how the instruction is used with DirectSOFT and the HPP.

The following paragraphs show how these instructions are used to build simple ladder programs.

END Statement

All DL205 programs require an END statement as the last instruction. This tells the CPU that

this is the end of the program. Normally, any instructions placed after the END statement

will not be executed. There are exceptions to this such as interrupt routines, etc. Chapter 5

discusses the instruction set in detail.

Simple Rungs

You use a contact to start rungs that contain both contacts and coils. The boolean instruction

that does this is called a Store or, STR instruction. The output point is represented by the

Output or, OUT instruction. The following example shows how to enter a single contact and

a single output coil.

OUT

Y0X0

END

DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics

STR X0

OUT Y0

END

OUT

Y0X0

END

All programs must have

an END statement

DS Implied

HPP Used

DirectSOFT Example

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-6

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Normally Closed Contact

Normally closed contacts are also very common. This is accomplished with the Store Not, or

STRN instruction. The following example shows a simple rung with a normally closed contact.

Contacts in Series

Use the AND instruction to join two or more contacts in series. The following example shows

two contacts in series and a single output coil. The instructions used would be STR X0, AND

X1, followed by OUT Y0.

Midline Outputs

Sometimes it is necessary to use midline outputs to get additional outputs that are conditional

on other contacts. The following example shows how you can use the AND instruction to

continue a rung with more conditional outputs.

OUT

Y0X0

END

DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics

STR X0

AND X1

OUT Y0

END

OUT

Y0X0

END

DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics

STR X0

AND X1

OUT Y0

AND X2

OUT Y1

AND X3

OUT Y2

END

OUT

Y0X0

END

DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics

STRN X0

OUT Y0

END

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-7

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Parallel Elements

You may also have to join contacts in parallel. The OR instruction allows you to do this. The

following example shows two contacts in parallel and a single output coil. The instructions

would be STR X0, OR X1, followed by OUT Y0.

Joining Series Branches in Parallel

Quite often it is necessary to join several groups of series elements in parallel. The Or Store

(ORSTR) instruction allows this operation. The following example shows a simple network

consisting of series elements joined in parallel.

Joining Parallel Branches in Series

You can also join one or more parallel branches in series. The And Store (ANDSTR) instruction

allows this operation. The following example shows a simple network with contact branches

in series with parallel contacts.

Combination Networks

You can combine the various types of

series and parallel branches to solve most

any application problem. The following

example shows a simple combination

network.

OUT

Y0X0

END

DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics

STR X0

OR X1

OUT Y0

END

OUT

Y0X0

END

DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics

STR X0

AND X1

STR X2

AND X3

ORSTR

OUT Y0

END

OUT

Y0X0

END

DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics

STR X0

STR X1

OR X2

ANDSTR

OUT Y0

END

OUT

END

X3X1 X4

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-8

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Comparative Boolean

The DL205 Micro PLCs provide Comparative Boolean instructions that allow you to quickly

and easily solve compare two numbers. The Comparative Boolean provides evaluation of two

4-digit values using boolean contacts. The valid evaluations are: equal to, not equal to, equal

to or greater than, and less than.

In the example ,when the BCD value in V-memory location V1400 is equal to the constant

value 1234, Y3 will energize.

Boolean Stack

There are limits to how many elements you can

include in a rung. This is because the DL205 CPUs use an 8-level boolean stack to evaluate

the various logic elements. The boolean stack is a temporary storage area that solves the logic

for the rung. Each time you enter a STR instruction, the instruction is placed on the top

of the boolean stack. Any other STR instructions on the boolean stack are pushed down a

level. The ANDSTR, and ORSTR instructions combine levels of the boolean stack when they

are encountered. Since the boolean stack is only eight levels, an error will occur if the CPU

encounters a rung that uses more than the eight levels of the boolean stack.

The following example shows how the boolean stack is used to solve boolean logic.

X1 or (X2 AND X3)

STR X0 STR X1 STR X2

1STR X0

1STR X1

2STR X0

AND X3

ORSTR

2STR X0

OUT

Y0X0 X1

X2 X3

STR

AND

ORSTR

ANDSTR

Output

STR

AND

X4 AND {X1 or (X2 AND X3)}

AND X4

2STR X0

NOT X5 OR X4 AND {X1 OR (X2 AND X3)}

ORNOT X5

ANDSTR

XO AND (NOT X5 or X4) AND {X1 or (X2 AND X3)}

STR X0

STR X2

STR X1

STR X0

STR X2

STR X1

STR X0

OUT

V1400 K1234

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-9

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Boolean

The DL205 Micro PLCs can usually complete an operation cycle in a matter of milliseconds.

However, in some applications you may not be able to wait a few milliseconds until the next

I/O update occurs. The DL205 PLCs offer immediate input and outputs which are special

boolean instructions that allow reading directly from inputs and writing directly to outputs

during the program execution portion of the CPU cycle. You may recall that this is normally

done during the input or output update portion of the CPU cycle. The immediate instructions

take longer to execute because the program execution is interrupted while the CPU reads or

writes the I/O point. This function is not normally done until the read inputs or the write

outputs portion of the CPU cycle.

NOTE: Even though the immediate input instruction reads the most current status from the input point, it only

uses the results to solve that one instruction. It does not use the new status to update the image register.

Therefore, any regular instructions that follow will still use the image register values. Any immediate

instructions that follow will access the I/O again to update the status. The immediate output instruction will

write the status to the I/O and update the image register.

OFF

CPU Scan

Read Inputs

Diagnostics

Input Image Register

Th e CPU reads the inputs from

the local base and stores the

status in an input image

X0 Y0

X0X1X2...X128

OFFOFFON...OFF

Solve the Application Program

Read Inputs from Specialty I/O

Write Outputs

Write Outputs to Specialty I/O

OFF

Immediate instruction does

not use the input image

status from the module

immediately. I/O Point X0 Changes

X10

X17

X20

X27

Y10

Y17

Y20

Y27

Y30

Y37

X30

X37

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-10

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions

Store (STR)

The Store instruction begins a new rung or an additional

branch in a rung with a normally open contact. Status

of the contact will be the same state as the associated

image register point or memory location.

Store Not (STRN)

The Store Not instruction begins a new rung or an

additional branch in a rung with a normally closed

contact. Status of the contact will be opposite the

state of the associated image register point or memory

location.

In the following

Store example, when input X1 is on output Y2 will energize.

In the following Store Not example, when input X1 is off output Y2 will energize.

Aaaa



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250–1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

Inputs X 0 – 177 0 – 477 0 – 777 0 – 1777

Outputs Y 0 – 177 0 – 477 0 – 777 0 – 1777

Control Relays C 0 – 377 0 – 377 0 – 1777 0 – 3777

Stage S 0 – 377 0 – 777 0 – 1777 0 – 1777

Timer T 0 – 77 0 – 177 0 – 377 0 – 377

Counter CT 0 – 77 0 – 177 0 – 177 0 – 377

Special Relay SP 0 – 117, 540 – 577 0 – 137 540 – 617 0 – 777 0 – 777

Global GX – – – 0 –3777

Global GY – – – 0 – 3777

STRN

BENT

OUT

CENT

OUT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

STR

BENT

OUT

CENT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

OUT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-11

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Store Bit-of-Word (STRB)

The Store Bit-of-Word instruction begins a new rung

or an additional branch in a rung with a normally open

contact. Status of the contact will be the same state as

the bit referenced in the associated memory location.

Store Not Bit-of-Word (STRNB)

The Store Not instruction begins a new rung or an

additional branch in a rung with a normally closed

contact. Status of the contact will be opposite the state

of the bit referenced in the associated memory location.

In the following Store Bit-of-Word example, when bit 12 of V-memory location V1400 is on,

output Y2 will energize.

In the following Store Not Bit-of-Word example, when bit 12 of V-memory location V1400

is off, output Y2 will energize.

Aaaa.bb





230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa bb aaa bb

V-memory B See memory map

page 3-55 BCD, 0 to 15 See memory map

page 3-56 BCD, 0 to 15

Pointer PB See memory map

page 3-55 BCD, 0 to 15 See memory map

page 3-56 BCD, 0 to 15

OUT

B1400.12

DirectSOFT

OUT 2 ENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STRN V 1SHFT 4 0 0

1 2 ENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

OUT

B1400.12

STR V 1

OUT 2

SHFT 4 0 0

1 2 ENT

ENT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-12

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or (OR)

The Or instruction logically ors a normally open contact

in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status of

the contact will be the same state as the associated image

Or Not (ORN)

The Or Not instruction logically ors a normally closed

contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The

status of the contact will be opposite the state of the

associated image register point or memory location.

In the following Or example, when input X1 or X2 is on, output Y5 will energize.

In the following Or Not example, when input X1 is on or X2 is off, output Y5 will energize.

Aaaa



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

Inputs X 0-177 0-477 0-777 0-1777

Outputs Y 0-177 0-477 0-777 0-1777

Control Relays C 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–3777

Stage S 0–377 0–777 0–1777 0–1777

Timer T 0–77 0–177 0–377 0–377

Counter CT 0–77 0–177 0–177 0–377

Special Relay SP 0-117, 540-577 0-137, 540-617 0-137, 540-717 0-137, 540-717

Global GX - - - 0-3777

Global GY - - - 0-3777

STR

BENT

CENT

OUT

FENT

OUT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

STR

BENT

CENT

OUT

FENT

ORN

X1 Y5

OUT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-13

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or Bit-of-Word (ORB)

The Or Bit-of-Word instruction logically ors a normally

open Bit-of-Word contact in parallel with another

contact in a rung. Status of the contact will be the same

state as the bit referenced in the associated memory

location.

Or Not Bit-of-Word (ORNB)

The Or Not Bit-of-Word instruction logically ors a

normally closed Bit-of-Word contact in parallel with

another contact in a rung. Status of the contact will be

opposite the state of the bit referenced in the associated

memory location.

In the following Or Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 or bit 7 of V1400 is on, output Y7

will energize.

In the following Or Not Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on or bit 7 of V1400 is off,

output Y7 will energize.

Aaaa.bb





230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

OUT

B1400.7

STR 1

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

OR V 1

OUT 7

SHFT 4 0 0

ENT

OUT

STR 1

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

ORN V 1

OUT 7

4 0 0

B1400.7

ENT

SHFT B

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

Aaaa bb aaa bb

V-memory B See memory map

page 3-55 BCD, 0 to 15 See memory map

page 3-56 BCD, 0 to 15

Pointer PB See memory map

page 3-55 BCD, 0 to 15 See memory map

page 3-56 BCD, 0 to 15

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-14

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And (AND)

The AND instruction logically ands a normally open

contact in series with another contact in a rung. The

status of the contact will be the same state as the

associated image register point or memory location.

And Not (ANDN)

The And Not instruction logically “ANDs” a normally

closed contact in series with another contact in a rung.

The status of the contact will be opposite the state of the

associated image register point or memory location.

In the following And example, when input X1 and X2 are on output Y5 will energize.

In the following And Not example, when input X1 is on and X2 is off output Y5 will energize.

Aaaa



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 DL260 Range

Aaaa aaa aaa aaa

Inputs X 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

Outputs Y 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

Control Relays C 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–3777

Stage S 0–377 0–777 0–1777 0–1777

Timer T 0–77 0–177 0–377 0–377

Counter CT 0–77 0–177 0–177 0–377

Special Relay SP 0-117, 540-577 0-137, 540-617 0-137, 540-717 0-137, 540-717

Global GX - - - 0-3777

Global GY - - - 0-3777

STR

BENT

CENT

OUT

FENT

AND

OUT

X1 X2

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

ANDN

STR

BENT

CENT

OUT

FENT

X1 Y5

OUT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-15

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Aaaa.bb

AND Bit-of-Word (ANDB)

The And Bit-of-Word instruction logically ands a normally open contact in series with another

contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be the same state as the bit referenced in the

associated memory location.

And Not Bit-of-Word (ANDNB)

The And Not Bit-of-Word instruction logically ands a normally closed contact in series with

another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be opposite the state of the bit

referenced in the associated memory location.

In the following And Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 and bit 4 of V1400 is on output

Y5 will energize.

In the following And Not Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on and bit 4 of V1400 is

off, output Y5 will energize.





230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

Aaaa bb aaa bb

V-memory B See memory map

page 3-55 BCD, 0 to 15 See memory map

page 3-56 BCD, 0 to 15

Pointer PB See memory map

page 3-55 BCD See memory map

page 3-56 BCD

X1 Y5

OUT

B1400.4

DirectSOFT

STR 1

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

OUT 5

ANDN V 1SHFT 4 0 0

4 ENT

ENT

OUT

X1 B1400.4

DirectSOFT

OUT 5

ENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V 1SHFT 4 0 0

4 ENT

STR 1 ENT

AND

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-16

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And Store (ANDSTR)

The And Store instruction logically ands two branches

of a rung in series. Both branches must begin with

the Store instruction.

In the following And Store example, the branch consisting of contacts X2, X3, and X4 have

been anded with the branch consisting of contact X1.

Or Store (ORSTR)

The Or Store instruction logically ors two branches

of a rung in parallel. Both branches must begin with

the Store instruction.

In the following Or Store example, the branch consisting of X1 and X2 have been OR’d with

the branch consisting of X3 and X4.

OUT

STR

BENT

STR

$ENT

AND

VENT

QENT

ANDST

LENT

OUT

FENT

OUT

X1 X2

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

DS Implied

HPP Used

STR

BENT

STR

$ENT

AND

VENT

OUT

FENT

AND

VENT

ORST

MENT

OUT

X1 X2

X3 X4

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

DS Implied

HPP Used

OUT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-17

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out (OUT)

The Out instruction reﬂects the status of the rung

(on/off) and outputs the discrete (on/off) state to the

speciﬁed image register point or memory location.

Multiple Out instructions referencing the same

discrete location should not be used since only the

last Out instruction in the program will control

the physical output point. Instead, use the next

instruction, the Or Out.

In the following Out example, when input X1 is on, output Y2 and Y5 will energize.

In the following Out example, the program contains two Out instructions using the same

location (Y10). The physical output of Y10 is ultimately controlled by the last rung of logic

referencing Y10. X1 will override the Y10 output being controlled by X0. To avoid this

situation, multiple outputs using the same location should not be used in programming. If

you need to have an output controlled by multiple inputs, see the OROUT instruction on

page 5–19.

Aaaa

OUT



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

Inputs X 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

Outputs Y 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

Control Relays C 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–3777

Global GX - - - 0–3777

Global GY - - - 0–3777

Y10

OUT

Y10

OUT

STR

BENT

OUT

CENT

OUT

GX ENT

OUT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-18

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out Bit-of-Word (OUTB)

The Out Bit-of-Word instruction reﬂects the status of

the rung (on/off) and outputs the discrete (on/off) state

to the speciﬁed bit in the referenced memory location.

Multiple Out Bit-of-Word instructions referencing the

same bit of the same word generally should not be used

since only the last Out instruction in the program will

control the status of the bit.

In the following Out Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on, bit 3 of V1400 and bit 6

of V1401 will turn on.

The following Out Bit-of-Word example contains two Out Bit-of-Word instructions using the

same bit in the same memory word. The ﬁnal state bit 3 of V1400 is ultimately controlled by

the last rung of logic referencing it. X1 will override the logic state controlled by X0. To avoid

this situation, multiple outputs using the same location must not be used in programming.

Aaaa.bb

OUT

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa bb aaa bb

V-memory B See memory map

page 3-55 BCD, 0 to 15 See memory map

page 3-56 BCD, 0 to 15

Pointer PB See memory map

page 3-55 BCD See memory map

page 3-56 BCD

B1400.3

OUT

B1401.6

OUT

DirectSOFT

STR 1

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

OUT V 1SHFT 4 0 0

3 ENT

ENT

OUT V 1SHFT 4 0 1

6 ENT

location must not be used in programming.

B1400.3

OUT

B1400.3

OUT





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-19

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or Out (OROUT)

The Or Out instruction allows more than one rung of discrete

logic to control a single output. Multiple Or Out instructions

referencing the same output coil may be used, since all contacts

controlling the output are logically OR’d together. If the status

of any rung is on, the output will also be on.

In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize.

Not (NOT)

The Not instruction inverts the status of the rung at

the point of the instruction.

In the following example, when X1 is off, Y2 will energize. This is because the Not instruction

inverts the status of the rung at the Not instruction.

A aaa

OR OUT



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

Inputs X 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

Outputs Y 0-177 0-477 0-777 0-1777

Control Relays C 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–3777

Global GX - - - 0–3777

Global GY - - - 0–3777

OUT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

STR

BENT

SHFT TMR

INST#

MLR

TENT

OUT

CENT





230

240

250-1

260

STR

BENT

STR

$ENT

OR OUT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

INST#

DENT ENT 2

CENT

INST#

DENT ENT

DS Used

HPP Used

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-20

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Positive Differential (PD)

The Positive Differential instruction is typically

known as a one shot. When the input logic

produces an off-to-on transition, the output will

energize for one CPU scan.

In the following example, every time X1 makes an off to on transition, C0 will energize for

one scan.

NOTE: To generate a “one–shot” pulse on an on–to–off transition, place a NOT instruction immediately before

the PD instruction. The DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs support the STRND instruction.

STR

BENT

SHFT CV

SHFT 0

AENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

A aaa



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

Inputs X 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

Outputs Y 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

Control Relays C 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–3777

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-21

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Store Positive Differential (STRPD)

The Store Positive Differential instruction begins a

new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a

contact. The contact closes for one CPU scan when

the state of the associated image register point makes

an off-to-on transition. Thereafter, the contact

remains open until the next off-to-on transition (the

symbol inside the contact represents the transition). This function is sometimes called a “one-

shot.” ‘This contact will also close on a program-to-run transition if it is within a retentive range

and on before the PLC mode transition.

Store Negative Differential (STRND)

The Store Negative Differential instruction begins a

new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a

contact. The contact closes for one CPU scan when

the state of the associated image register point makes

an on-to-off transition. Thereafter, the contact

remains open until the next on-to-off transition (the

symbol inside the contact represents the transition).

In the following example, each time X1 is makes an off-to-on transition, Y4 will energize for one scan.

In the following example, each time X1 makes an on-to-off transition, Y4 will energize for one

scan.

Aaaa

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

Inputs X 0–777 0–1777

Outputs Y 0–777 0–1777

Control Relays C 0–1777 0–3777

Stage S 0–1777 0–1777

Timer T 0–377 0–377

Counter CT 0–177 0–377

Global GX –0–3777

Global GY –0–3777

OUT

DirectSOFT

X1 STR

ENT

OUT

SHFT 1

BENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

OUT

DirectSOFT

X1 STR

TMR

ENT

OUT

SHFT 1

BENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes





230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-22

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or Positive Differential (ORPD)

The Or Positive Differential instruction logically ORs a

contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status

of the contact will be open until the associated image register

point makes an off-to-on transition, closing it for one CPU

scan. Thereafter, it remains open until another off-to-on

transition.

Or Negative Differential (ORND)

The Or Negative Differential instruction logically ORs a

contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status

of the contact will be open until the associated image register

point makes an on-to-off transition, closing it for one CPU

scan. Thereafter, it remains open until another on-to-off

transition.

In the following example, Y5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan when X2

transitions from off to on.

In the following example, Y5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan when X2

transitions from on to off.

Aaaa





230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

Inputs X 0–777 0–1777

Outputs Y 0–777 0–1777

Control Relays C 0–1777 0–3777

Stage S 0–1777 0–1777

Timer T 0–377 0–377

Counter CT 0–177 0–377

Global GX – 0–3777

Global GY –0–3777

OUT

DirectSOFT

STR

ENT

OUT

SHFT

BENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

CENT

X1 Y5

OUT

DirectSOFT

STR

TMR

ENT

OUT

SHFT

BENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

CENT

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-23

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And Positive Differential (ANDPD)

The And Positive Differential instruction logically ANDs

a normally open contact in series with another contact

in a rung. The status of the contact will be open until

the associated image register point makes an off-to-on

transition, closing it for one CPU scan. Thereafter, it

remains open until another off-to-on transition.

And Negative Differential (ANDND)

The And Negative Differential instruction logically

ANDs a normally open contact in series with another

contact 5-23in a rung. The status of the contact will

be open until the associated image register point makes

an on-to-off transition, closing it for one CPU scan.

Thereafter, it remains open until another on-to-off transition.

In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2

transitions from off to on.

In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2

transitions from on to off.





230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

Aaaa

OUT

DirectSOFT

X2 STR

ENT

OUT

SHFT

BENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

AND

CENT

X1 Y5

OUT

DirectSOFT

X2 STR

TMR

ENT

OUT

SHFT

BENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

AND

CENT

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

Inputs X 0–777 0–1777

Outputs Y 0–777 0–1777

Control Relays C 0–1777 0–3777

Stage S 0–1777 0–1777

Timer T 0–377 0–377

Counter CT 0–177 0–377

Global GX – 0–3777

Global GY –0–3777

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-24

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Set (SET)

The Set instruction sets or turns on an image register

point/memory location or a consecutive range of image

location is set, it will remain on until it is reset using

the Reset instruction. It is not necessary for the input

controlling the Set instruction to remain on.

Reset (RST)

The Reset instruction resets or turns off an image register

point/memory location or a range of image registers

points/memory locations. Once the point/location is

reset, it is not necessary for the input to remain on.

NOTE: You cannot set inputs (Xs) that are assigned to input modules

In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will energize.

In the following example, when X2 is on, Y2 through Y5 will be reset or de–energized.

A aaa

SET

aaa

Optional

memory range

A aaa

RST

aaa

Optional

Memory range



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

Inputs X 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

Outputs Y 0-177 0-477 0-777 0-1777

Control Relays C 0–377 0–377 0–1777 0–3777

Stage S 0-377 0-777 0-1777 0-1777

Timer* T 0-77 0-177 0-377 0-377

Counter * CT 0-77 0-177 0-177 0-377

Global GX - - - 0–3777

Global GY - - - 0–3777

* Timer and counter operand data types are not valid using the Set instruction

SET

X1 Y2 Y5

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

STR

BENT

SET

XENT

DS Used

HPP Used

STR

CENT

RST

X2 Y2 Y5

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

ENT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-25

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Set Bit-of-Word (SETB)

The Set Bit-of-Word instruction sets or turns on a bit in a V-memory

location. Once the bit is set, it will remain on until it is reset using

the Reset Bit-of-Word instruction. It is not necessary for the input

controlling the Set Bit-of-Word instruction to remain on.

Reset Bit-of-Word (RSTB)

The Reset Bit-of-Word instruction resets or turns off a bit in a

V-memory location. Once the bit is reset, it is not necessary for the

input to remain on.

In the following example, when X1 turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is set to the on state.

In the following example, when X2 turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is reset to the off state.

Aaaa.bb

SET

A aaa.bb

RST





230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

SET

X1 B1400.1

DirectSOFT

STR 1

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SET V 1SHFT 4 0 0

1 ENT

ENT

RST

X2 B1400.1

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR 2

RST V 1SHFT 4 0 0

1 ENT

ENT

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa bb aaa bb

V-memory B See memory map BCD, 0 to 15 See memory map BCD, 0 to 15

Pointer PB See memory map BCD See memory map BCD

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-26

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Pause (PAUSE)

The Pause instruction disables the output update on a

range of outputs. The ladder program will continue to

run and update the image register; however, the outputs

in the range speciﬁed in the Pause instruction will be

turned off at the output points.

In the following example, when X1 is ON, Y5–Y7 will be turned OFF. The execution of the

ladder program will not be affected.

Since the D2–HPP Handheld Programmer does not have a speciﬁc Pause key, you can use the

corresponding instruction number for entry (#960) or type each letter of the command.

In some cases, you may want certain output points in the speciﬁed pause range to operate

normally. In that case, use Aux 58 to override the Pause instruction.

aaaaaaY

PAUSE



230

240

250-1

260

DirectSOFT

PAUSE

X1 Y5 Y7

STR

BENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

HENT

INST#

AENT ENT 5

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Outputs Y 0-177 0-477 0-777 0-1777

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-27

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Comparative Boolean

Store If Equal (STRE)

The Store If Equal instruction begins a new rung or

additional branch in a rung with a normally open

comparative contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa

equals Bbbb .

Store If Not Equal (STRNE)

The Store If Not Equal instruction begins a new rung

or additional branch in a rung with a normally closed

comparative contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa

does not equal Bbbb.

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 4933 , Y3 will

energize.

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 /= 5060, Y3 will energize.

A aaa B bbb

OUT

V2000 K5060

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT

OUT

GX ENT

STRN

AENT

V2000 K4933 Y3

OUT

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

$SHFT 4

DENT

OUT

GX ENT

Operand Data

Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A/B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

V-memory V All. (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-55)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

Pointer P – – –

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

–

All. (See

memory map

page 3-55)

–

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

Constant K – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-28

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or If Equal (ORE)

The Or If Equal instruction connects a normally open

comparative contact in parallel with another contact.

The contact will be on when Vaaa equals Bbbb.

Or If Not Equal (ORNE)

The Or If Not Equal instruction connects a normally

closed comparative contact in parallel with another

contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa does not

equal Bbbb.

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 4500 or V2202 =

2345, Y3 will energize.

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 3916 or V2002 /=

2500, Y3 will energize.

A aaa B bbb

FENT

JENT

OUT

V2000 K3916

V2002 K2500

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

$SHFT 2

ORN

RSHFT 4

OUT

GX ENT

FENT

OUT

V2002 K2345

V2000 K4500

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT 4

STR

QSHFT 4

OUT

GX ENT

Operand Data

Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A/B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

V-memory V All. (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-55)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-55)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

Pointer P – – –

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

–

All. (See

memory map

page 3-55)

–

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

Constant K – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-29

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And If Equal (ANDE)

The And If Equal instruction connects a normally open

comparative contact in series with another contact. The

contact will be on when Vaaa equals Bbbb.

And If Not Equal (ANDNE)

The And If Not Equal instruction connects a normally

closed comparative contact in series with another contact.

The contact will be on when Vaaa does not equal Bbbb

In the following example, when the value in V-memory

location V2000 = 5000 and V2002 = 2345, Y3 will

energize.

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 5000 and V2002 /=

2345, Y3 will energize.



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

A aaa B bbb

FENT

AENT

STR

$SHFT 4

AND

VSHFT 4

OUT

GX ENT

OUT

V2002 K2345V2000 K5000

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

FENT

AENT

STR

$SHFT 4

ANDN

WSHFT 4

OUT

GX ENT

OUT

V2002 K2345V2000 K5000

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Operand

Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A/B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

V-memory V All. (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-55)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-55)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

Pointer P – – –

All V-memory.

(See memory

map page

3-54)

–

All V-memory.

(See memory

map page

3-55)

–

All V-memory.

(See memory

map page

3-56)

Constant K – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-30

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Store (STR)

The Comparative Store instruction begins a new rung or additional

branch in a rung with a normally open comparative contact. The

contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or greater than Bbbb.

Store Not (STRN)

The Comparative Store Not instruction begins a new rung or

additional branch in a rung with a normally open comparative

contact. The contact will be on when Aaaa is less than Bbbb.

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 M 1000, Y3 will

energize.

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 < 4050, Y3 will

energize.

A aaa B bbb

ENT

OUT

V2000 K1000

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

ENT

OUT

SHFT AND

ENT

AENT

OUT

V2000 K4050

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

OUT

STRN

SP SHFT AND

Operand

Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A/B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

V-memory V All. (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-55)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-55)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

Pointer P – – –

All V-memory.

(See memory

map page

3-54)

–

All V-memory.

(See memory

map page

3-55)

–

All V-memory.

(See memory

map page

3-56)

Constant K – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-31

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or (OR)

The Comparative Or instruction connects a normally open

comparative contact in parallel with another contact. The

contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or greater than

Bbbb.

Or Not (ORN)

The Comparative Or Not instruction connects a normally

open comparative contact in parallel with another contact.

The contact will be on when Aaaa is less than Bbbb.

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 6045 or

V2002 M 2345, Y3 will energize.

In the following example when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 1000 or

V2002 < 2500, Y3 will energize.

Operand

Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A/B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

V-memory V All. (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-55)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-55)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

All. (See

memory map

page 3-56)

Pointer P – – –

All V-memory.

(See memory

map page

3-54)

–

All V-memory.

(See memory

map page

3-55)

–

All V-memory.

(See memory

map page

3-56)

Constant K – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF – 0-FFFF



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

A aaa B bbb

FENT

OUT

V2000 K6045

V2002 K2345

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT 4

ENT

STR

OUT

GX ENT

SHFT AND

ENT

FENT

ENT

OUT

V2000 K1000

V2002 K2500

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

$SHFT 2

ORN

OUT

SHFT AND

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-32

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And (AND)

The Comparative And instruction connects a normally

open comparative contact in series with another contact.

The contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or greater

than Bbbb.

And Not (ANDN)

The Comparative And Not instruction connects a normally

open comparative contact in series with another contact.

The contact will be on when Aaaa < Bbbb.

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 5000, and V2002

M 2345, Y3 will energize.

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 7000 and

V2002 < 2500, Y3 will energize.

A aaa B bbb

ENT

FENT

ENT

OUT

V2000 K5000 V2002 K2345

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

$SHFT 4

AND

OUT

SHFT AND

FENT

HENT

OUT

V2000 K7000 V2002 K2500

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

$SHFT 4

ANDN

OUT

GX ENT

SHFT AND



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

Operand

Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A/B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

V-memory V All (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All (See

memory map

page 3-53)

All (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All (See

memory map

page 3-54)

All (See

memory map

page 3-55)

All (See

memory map

page 3-55)

All (See

memory map

page 3-56)

All (See

memory map

page 3-56)

Pointer P ---

All V-memory

(See memory

map page

3-54)

All V-memory

(See memory

map page

3-55)

All V-memory

(See memory

map page

3-56)

Constant K -0-FFFF -0-FFFF -0-FFFF -0-FFFF

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-33

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Instructions

Store Immediate (STRI)

The Store Immediate instruction begins a new rung or

additional branch in a rung. The status of the contact

will be the same as the status of the associated input point

at the time the instruction is executed. The image register

is not updated.

Store Not Immediate (STRNI)

The Store Not Immediate instruction begins a new rung

or additional branch in a rung. The status of the contact

will be opposite the status of the associated input point at

the time the instruction is executed. The image register is

not updated.

In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 will energize.

In the following example, when X1 is off, Y2 will energize.

aaaX



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

ENT

BENT

X1 Y2

OUT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

STR

$SHFT 8

OUT

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Inputs X 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

ENT

BENT

X1 Y2

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

STRN

SP SHFT 8

OUT

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-34

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or Immediate (ORI)

The Or Immediate connects two contacts in parallel. The

status of the contact will be the same as the status of the

associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.

The image register is not updated.

Or Not Immediate (ORNI)

The Or Not Immediate connects two contacts in parallel.

The status of the contact will be opposite the status of the

associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.

The image register is not updated.

In the following example, when X1 or X2 is on, Y5 will energize.

In the following example, when X1 is on or X2 is off, Y5 will energize.

aaaX



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Inputs X 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

BENT

ENT

OUT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

STR

QSHFT 8

OUT

ENT

BENT

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

STR

SHFT 8

ORN

OUT

DS Implied

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-35

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And Immediate (ANDI)

The And Immediate connects two contacts in series. The

status of the contact will be the same as the status of the

associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.

The image register is not updated.

And Not Immediate (ANDNI)

The And Not Immediate connects two contacts in series.

The status of the contact will be opposite the status of the

associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.

The image register is not updated.

In the following example, when X1 and X2 are on, Y5 will energize.

In the following example, when X1 is on and X2 is off, Y5 will energize.



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

aaaX

OUT

X1 X2 Y5

OUT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

STR

BENT

AND

VSHFT 8

IENT

ENT

X1 X2 Y5

OUT

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

STR

ANDN

WSHFT 8

OUT

BENT

ENT

DS Implied

HPP Used

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Inputs X 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-36

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out Immediate (OUTI)

The Out Immediate instruction reﬂects the status of the

rung (on/off) and outputs the discrete (on/off) status to the

speciﬁed module output point and the image register at the

time the instruction is executed. If multiple Out Immediate

instructions referencing the same discrete point are used, it

is possible for the module output status to change multiple

times in a CPU scan. See Or Out Immediate.

Or Out Immediate (OROUTI)

The Or Out Immediate instruction has been designed

to use more than one rung of discrete logic to control a

single output. Multiple Or Out Immediate instructions

referencing the same output coil may be used, since all

contacts controlling the output are ORed together. If

the status of any rung is on at the time the instruction is

executed, the output will also be on.

In the following example, when X1 is on, output point Y2 on the output module will turn

on. For instruction entry on the Handheld Programmer, you can use the instruction number

(#350) as shown, or type each letter of the command.

In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize.

Y aaa

OUTI

OROUTI

Y aaa





230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

BENT

X1 Y2

OUTI

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

INST#

AENT ENT

CENT

STR

OR OUTI

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

BENT

ENT

INST#

AENT ENT

CENT

INST#

AENT ENT

CENT

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Outputs Y 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-37

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out Immediate Formatted (OUTIF)

The Out Immediate Formatted instruction outputs a 1 to

32 bit binary value from the accumulator to speciﬁed output

points at the time the instruction is executed. Accumulator bits

that are not used by the instruction are set to zero.

In the following example, when C0 is on,the binary pattern for X10 –X17 is loaded into the

accumulator using the Load Immediate Formatted instruction. The binary pattern in the

accumulator is written to Y30–Y37 using the Out Immediate Formatted instruction. This

technique is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to outputs (without waiting for the CPU

scan).

bbbK

Yaaa

OUTIF





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaa bbb

Outputs Y 0–1777 –

Constant K – 1–32

LDIF X10

K8X10

00000000101101010000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 98765 4321031 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

K8Y30

X10

X11X12X13X14X15X16X17

ONOFFONOFFONONOFFON

Y30Y31Y32Y33Y34Y35Y36Y37

ONOFFONOFFONONOFFON

Load the value of 8

consecutive locations into the

accumulator, starting with X10.

OUTIF Y30

Copy the value in the lower

8 bits of the accumulator to

Y30-Y37

DirectSOFT

Unused accumulator bits

are set to zero

Location Constant

Acc.

Location Constant

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

AENT

ANDST

IENT

ENT

NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT

SHFT 5

SHFT 8

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-38

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Set Immediate (SETI)

The Set Immediate instruction immediately sets or

turns on an output or a range of outputs in the image

time the instruction is executed. Once the outputs are

set, it is not necessary for the input to remain on. The

Reset Immediate instruction can be used to reset the

outputs.

Reset Immediate (RSTI)

The Reset Immediate instruction immediately resets

or turns off an output or a range of outputs in the

image register and the output point(s) at the time the

instruction is executed. Once the outputs are reset, it is

not necessary for the input to remain on.

In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will be set on in the image register

and on the corresponding output points.

In the following example, when X1 is on, Y5 through Y22 will be reset (off) in the image

aaaY aaa

SETI

aaaY aaa

RSTI



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

BENT

X1 Y2

SETI

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SET

XSHFT 8

IENT

BENT

X1 Y5

RSTI

Y22

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT 8

CENT

RST

DS Used

HPP Used

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Outputs Y 0–177 0–477 0–777 0–1777

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-39

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load Immediate (LDI)

The Load Immediate instruction loads a 16-bit V-memory value

into the accumulator. The valid address range includes all input

point addresses on the local base. The value reﬂects the current

status of the input points at the time the instruction is executed.

This instruction may be used instead of the LDIF instruction,

which requires you to specify the number of input points.

In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of X0–X17 will be loaded into the

accumulator using the Load Immediate instruction. The Out Immediate instruction could be

used to copy the 16 bits in the accumulator to output points, such as Y40–Y57. This technique

is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to output points (without waiting for a full CPU

scan to occur).

Vaaa

LDI

OUTI

V40400

10110100101101010000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 98765 43210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

V40502

X10

X11X12X13X14X15X16X17

OFFOFFONOFFONONOFFON

Y50Y51Y52Y53Y54Y55Y56Y57

OFFOFFONOFFONONOFFON

X0X1X2X3X4X5X6X7

ONOFFONOFFONONOFFON

Y40Y41Y42Y43Y44Y45Y46Y47

ONOFFONOFFONONOFFON

LDI

V40400

V40502

Load the inputs from X0 to

X17 into the accumulator,

immediately

Output the value in the

accumulator to output points

Y40 to Y57

Location

Unused accumulator bits

are set to zero

Location

DirectSOFT





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaaaa

Inputs V-memory V 40400–40477

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

AENT

ANDST

IENT

ENT

SHFT

SHFT 4

SHFT 8

NEXT 4

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-40

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load Immediate Formatted (LDIF)

The Load Immediate Formatted instruction loads a 1–32 bit binary

value into the accumulator. The value reﬂects the current status of the

input module(s) at the time the instruction is executed. Accumulator

bits that are not used by the instruction are set to zero.

In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of X10–X17 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Immediate Formatted instruction. The Out Immediate

Formatted instruction could be used to copy the speciﬁed number of bits in the accumulator

to the speciﬁed outputs on the output module, such as Y30–Y37. This technique is useful to

quickly copy an input pattern to outputs (without waiting for the CPU scan).

Kbbb

XaaaLDIF





230

240

250-1

260

LDIF X10

Load theval ue of 8

consecutivelocationintothe

accumulatorstartingwith

X10

OUTIFY30

Copy theval ue of thelower

8bitsofthe accumulatorto

Y30--Y37

X10

LocationConstant

00000000101101

0000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 98765 4321031 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

K8Y30

LocationConstant

X10

X11X12X13X14X15X16X17

ONOFFONOFFONONOFFON

Y30Y31Y32Y33Y34Y35Y36Y37

ONOFFONOFFONONOFFON

Unused accumulatorbits

areset to zero

DirectSOFT

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

AENT

ANDST

IENT

ENT

SHFT

SHFT 5

SHFT 8

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaa bbb

Intputs X 0–1777 –

Constant K – 1–32

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-41

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions

Using Timers

Timers are used to time an event for a desired length of time. The single input timer will time

as long as the input is on. When the input changes from on to off, the timer current value

is reset to 0. There is a tenth of a second and a hundredth of a second timer available with a

maximum time of 999.9 and 99.99 seconds respectively. A discrete bit is associated with each

timer to indicate that the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value. The timing

diagram below shows the relationship between the timer input, associated discrete bit, current

value, and timer preset.

Some applications that need an accumulating timer, meaning it has the ability to time, stop,

and then resume from where it previously stopped. The accumulating timer works similarly

to the regular timer, but two inputs are required. The enable input starts and stops the timer.

When the timer stops, the elapsed time is maintained. When the timer starts again, the timing

continues from the elapsed time. When the reset input is turned on, the elapsed time is cleared

and the timer will start at 0 when it is restarted. A tenth of a second and a hundredth of

a second timers are available with a maximum time of 9999999.9 and 999999.99 seconds

respectively. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the timer input, timer

reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and timer preset.

123456 78

01010203040500

Current

Value

TMRA T0

K30

Reset Input

Enable

Seconds

1/10 Seconds

TMR T1

K30

123456 78

01020304050600

Current

Value

T1 Y0

OUT

Seconds

1/10 Seconds

Timer Preset

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-42

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Timer (TMR) and Timer Fast (TMRF)

The Timer instruction is a 0.1 second single-input timer

that times to a maximum of 999.9 seconds. The Timer Fast

instruction is a 0.01 second single input timer that times up

to a maximum of 99.99 seconds. These timers will be enabled

if the input logic is true (on) and will be reset to 0 if the input

logic is false (off).

Instruction Speciﬁcations

Timer Reference (Taaa): Speciﬁes the timer number.

Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory

location. (Pointer (P) for DL240, DL250-1 and DL260).

Current Value: Timer current values are accessed by

referencing the associated V or T memory location.* For

example, the timer current value for T3 physically resides in

V-memory location V3.

Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is referenced by the

associated T memory location. It will be on if the current value is equal to or greater than the

preset value. For example, the discrete status bit for Timer 2 would be T2.

NOTE: A V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program or an Operator Interface unit must change

the preset.

NOTE: Both the Timer discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference

with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “T2” for discrete status bit for Timer T2, and

“TA2” for the current value of Timer T2.

You can perform functions when the timer reaches the speciﬁed preset using the discrete status

bit. Or, use the comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals based on

one timer. The examples on the following page show these methods of programming timers.

T aaa

aaa

TMR

B bbb

Preset

Timer #

TMRF

B bbb

Preset Timer #

Operand Data

Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

Timers T 0-77 0-177 0-377 0-377

V-memory for

preset values V – 2000-2377 – 2000-3777 – 1400-7377

10000-17777 – 1400-7377

10000-37777

Pointers

(presets only) P 2000-3777 1400-7377

10000-17777

1400-7377

10000-37777

Constants

(presets only) K – 0-9999 – 0-9999 – 0-9999 – 0-9999

Timer discrete

status bits T/V* 0-77 or V41100-41103 0-177 or V41100-41107 0-377 or V41100-41117 0-377 or V41100-41117

Timer current

values V/T* 0-77 0-177 0-377 0-377



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-43

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, a single-input timer is used with a preset of 3 seconds. The timer

discrete status bit (T2) will turn on when the timer has timed for 3 seconds. The timer is reset

when X1 turns off, turning the discrete status bit off and resetting the timer current value to 0.

Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, a single-input timer is used with a preset of 4.5 seconds. Comparative

contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one-second intervals respectively. When X1 is

turned off, the timer will be reset to 0 and the comparative contacts will turn off Y3, Y4, and

Y5.

STR

TMR

STR

$SHFT MLR

CENT

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 TMRT2

K30

T2 Y0

OUT

123456

01020304050600

Current

Value

Timing Diagram

DirectSOFT

Seconds

BENT

AENT

ENT

BENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 TMR T20

K45

TA20 K10

TA20 K20

TA20 K30

OUT

123456

01020304050600

Current

Value

Timing Diagram

DirectSOFT

Seconds

STR

TMR

CENT

STR

$SHFT MLR

BENT

OUT

GX ENT

STR

$SHFT MLR

AENT

OUT

GX ENT

STR

$SHFT MLR

AENT

OUT

GX ENT

1/10th Seconds

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-44

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulating Timer (TMRA)

The Accumulating Timer is a 0.1 second two-input timer that

will time to a maximum of 9999999.9. The TMRA uses two timer

registers in V-memory.

Accumulating Fast Timer (TMRAF)

The Accumulating Fast Timer is a 0.01 second two-input timer that

will time to a maximum of 999999.99. The TMRAF uses two timer

registers in V-memory.

These timers have two inputs: an enable and a reset. The timer will

start timing when the enable is on and stop timing when the enable

is off without resetting the value to 0. The reset will reset the timer

when on and allow the timer to time when off.

Instruction Speciﬁcations

Timer Reference (Taaa): Speciﬁes the timer number.

Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or two consecutive V-memory locations. (Pointer (P)

for DL240, DL250-1 and DL260).

Current Value: Timer current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or T memory

location. For example, the timer current value for T3 resides in V-memory location V3.

Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated T memory

location. It will be on if the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For

example, the discrete status bit for Timer 2 would be T2.

NOTE: The accumulating timer uses two consecutive V-memory locations for the 8-digit value; therefore,

two consecutive timer locations. For example, if TMRA T1 is used, the next available timer number is T3.

NOTE: A V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program or an OIT must be used to change the preset.

NOTE: * Both the Timer discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference

with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “T2” for discrete status bit for Timer T2, and

“TA2” for the current value of Timer T2.

Operand Data

Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

Timers T 0-76 0-176 0-376 0-376

V-memory for

preset values V – 2000-2377 – 2000-3777 – 1400-7377

10000-17777 – 1400-7377

10000-37777

Pointers

(presets only) P 2000-3777 1400-7377

10000-17777

1400-7377

10000-37777

Constants

(presets only) K – 0-99999999 – 0-99999999 – 0-99999999 – 0-99999999

Timer discrete

status bits T/V* 0-76 or V41100-41103 0-176 or V41100-41107 0-376 or V41100-41117 0-376 or V41100-41117

Timer current

values V/T* 0-76 0-176 0-376 0-376

T aaa

TMRA

B bbb

Enable

Reset

Preset

TMRAF

B bbb

Enable

Reset

Preset

Timer



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-45

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulating Timer Example using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, a two input timer (accumulating timer) is used with a preset of three

seconds. The timer discrete status bit (T6) will turn on when the timer has timed for three

seconds. Notice in this example that the timer times for one second, stops for one second, then

resumes timing. The timer will reset when C10 turns on, turning the discrete status bit off and

resetting the timer current value to zero.

Accumulator Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, a two-input timer is used with a preset of 4.5 seconds. Comparative

contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one-second intervals respectively. The

comparative contacts will turn off when the timer is reset.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

TA20 K10

TA21 K1

TA20 K20

OUT

TMRA T20

K45

C10

123456 780

01010203040500

Current

Value

Timing Diagram

T20

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont’d)

Seconds

AND

VSHFT

MLR

OUT

GX ENT

STR

$SHFT MLR

OUT

GX ENT

STR

BENT

ENT

STR

$SHFT MLR

BENT

OUT

GX ENT

STR

$SHFT ENT

TMR

NSHFT 0

Contacts

TA21 K1

TA20 K30 Y5

OUT

TA21 K0

TA21 K1

QSHFT

MLR

ENT

SHFT

STR

$SHFT MLR

AND

VSHFT

MLR

QSHFT

MLR

ENT

SHFT

ENT

AND

VSHFT

MLR

BENTSHFT 2

1/10th Seconds

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

TMRA T6

K30

C10

Y10

OUT

C10

123456

01010203040500

Current

Value

Timing Diagram

DirectSOFT

Seconds

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont’d)

STR

$SHFT ENT

TMR

NSHFT 0

AENT

STR

$SHFT MLR

TENT

OUT

GX ENT

BENT

1/10th Seconds

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-46

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Counter (CNT)

The Counter is a two-input counter that increments

when the count input logic transitions from off to

on. When the counter reset input is on, the counter

resets to zero. When the current value equals the preset

value, the counter status bit comes on and the counter

continues to count up to a maximum count of 9999.

The maximum value will be held until the counter is

reset.

Instruction Speciﬁcations

Counter Reference (CTaaa): Speciﬁes the counter number.

Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory location. (Pointer (P) for DL240,

DL250-1 and DL260.)

Current Values: Counter current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or CT

memory locations. The V-memory location is the counter location + 1000. For example, the

counter current value for CT3 resides in V-memory location V1003.

Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory

location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example, the

discrete status bit for Counter 2 would be CT2.

NOTE: A V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program or an OIT must used to change the preset

NOTE: * Both the Counter discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference

with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for Counter CT2,

and “CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2.

CT aaa

CNT

B bbb

Count

Reset

Counter #

Preset

Operand Data

Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

Counters CT 0-77 0-177 0-177 0-377

V-memory for

preset values V – 2000-2377 – 2000-3777 – 1400-7377

10000-17777 – 1400-7377

10000-37777

Pointers

(presets only) P 2000-3777 1400-7377

10000-17777

1400-7377

10000-37777

Constants

(presets only) K – 0-9999 – 0-9999 – 0-9999 – 0-9999

Counter discrete

status bits CT/V* 0-77 or V41140-41143 0-177 or V41140-41147 0-177 or V41140-41147 0-377 or V41100-41157

Counter current

values V/CT* 1000-1077 1000-1177 1000-1177 1000-1377



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-47

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, when X1 makes an off-to-on transition, counter CT2 will increment

by one. When the current value reaches the preset value of 3, the counter status bit CT2 will

turn on and energize Y7. When the reset C10 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off

and the current value will be 0. The current value for counter CT2 will be held in V-memory

location V1002.

Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, when X1 makes an off-to-on transition, counter CT2 will increment

by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at different counts. When

the reset C10 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be

0, and the comparative contacts will turn off.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

CT2

CNT CT2

C10

OUT

CT2 or

Current Value

C10

Counting diagram

DirectSOFT

STR

BENT

DENT

STR

$SHFT ENT

CNT

STR

$SHFT ENT

OUT

GX ENT

MLR

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

SHFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

CNT CT2

C10

Current

Value

C10

Counting diagram

CTA2 K1

CTA2 K2

CTA2 K3

OUT

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

STR

$SHFT

ENT

OUT

GX ENT

STR

$SHFT 2

ENT

OUT

GX ENT

STR

BENT

STR

$SHFT

BENT

OUT

GX ENT

STR

$SHFT ENT

CNT

GY ENT

MLR

SHFT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-48

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Stage Counter (SGCNT)

The Stage Counter is a single-input counter that

increments when the input logic transitions from off

to on. This counter differs from other counters since

it will hold its current value until reset using the RST

instruction. The Stage Counter is designed for use in

RLLPLUS programs but can be used in relay ladder logic

programs. When the current value equals the preset value,

the counter status bit turns on and the counter continues

to count up to a maximum count of 9999. The maximum

value will be held until the counter is reset.

Instruction Speciﬁcations

Counter Reference (CTaaa): Speciﬁes the counter number.

Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory location.(Pointer (P) for DL240,

DL250-1 and DL260.)

Current Values: Counter current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or CT

memory locations.* The V-memory location is the counter location + 1000. For example, the

counter current value for CT3 resides in V-memory location V1003.

Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory

location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example, the

discrete status bit for Counter 2 would be CT2.

NOTE: When using a counter inside a stage, the stage must be active for one scan before the input to the

counter makes a 0-1 transition. Otherwise, there is no real transition and the counter will not count.

NOTE: A V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program or an OIT must used to change the preset.

NOTE: * Both the Counter discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference

with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for Counter CT2,

and “CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2.

Operand Data

Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

Counters CT 0-77 0-177 0-177 0-377

V-memory for

preset values V – 2000-2377 – 2000-3777 – 1400-7377

10000-17777 – 1400-7377

10000-37777

Pointers

(presets only) P 2000-3777 1400-7377

10000-17777

1400-7377

10000-37777

Constants

(presets only) K – 0-9999 – 0-9999 – 0-9999 – 0-9999

Counter discrete

status bits CT/V 0-77 or V41140-41143 0-177 or V41140-41147 0-177 or V41140-41147 0-377 or V41140-41157

Counter current

values V/CT 1000-1077 1000-1177 1000-1177 1000-1377

CTaaa

SGCNT

B bbb

Preset

Counter #



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

The counter discrete status bit and the

current value are not speciﬁed in the

counter instruction.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-49

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Stage Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, when X1 makes an off-to-on transition, stage counter CT7 will

increment by one. When the current value reaches 3, the counter status bit CT7 will turn on

and energize Y7. The counter status bit CT7 will remain on until the counter is reset using

the RST instruction. When the counter is reset, the counter status bit will turn off and the

counter current value will be 0. The current value for counter CT7 will be held in V-memory

location V1007.

Stage Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, when X1 makes an off-to-on transition, counter CT2 will increment

by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at different counts. Although

this is not shown in the example, when the counter is reset using the Reset instruction, the

counter status bit will turn off and the current value will be 0. The current value for counter

CT2 will be held in V-memory location V1002.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

C5 CT7

SGCNT CT7

RST

12340

Current

Value

RST

CT7

CT7 Y7

OUT

Counting diagram

DirectSOFT

STR

BENT

CNT

STR

$SHFT ENT

OUT

GX ENT

MLR

STR

$SHFT ENT

RST

SSHFT 2

HENT

SHFT RST

GSHFT

ENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

SHFT

SHFT MLR

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

12 340

Current

Value

Counting diagram

CTA2 K1

CTA2 K2

CTA2 K3

OUT

SGCNT CT2

K10

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

STR

BENT

CNT

SHFT RST

GSHFT

ENT

STR

$SHFT

BENT

OUT

GX ENT

MLR

STR

$SHFT

ENT

OUT

GX ENT

STR

$SHFT 2

ENT

OUT

GX ENT

MLR

SHFT

RST

CT2

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-50

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Up Down Counter (UDC)

This Up/Down Counter counts up on each off-to-on

transition of the Up input and counts down on each

off to on transition of the Down input. The counter

is reset to 0 when the Reset input is on. The count

range is 0 to 99999999. The count input not being

used must be off in order for the active count input to

function.

Instruction Speciﬁcation

Counter Reference (CTaaa): Speciﬁes the counter

number.

Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or two

consecutive V-memory locations. (Pointer (P) for

DL240, DL250-1 and DL260).

Current Values: Current count is a double word value

accessed by referencing the associated V or CT memory locations. The V-memory location

is the counter location + 1000. For example, the counter current value for CT5 resides in

V-memory location V1005 and V1006.

Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory

location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example, the

discrete status bit for Counter 2 would be CT2.

NOTE: The UDC uses two consecutive V-memory locations for the 8-digit value, therefore two consecutive

counter locations. For example, if UDC CT1 is used, the next available counter number is CT3.

NOTE: A V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program or an OIT must be used to change the preset.

NOTE: * Both the Counter discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data

reference with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for

Counter CT2, and “CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2.

CT aaa

UDC

B bbb

Down

Reset

Caution: The UDC uses two

V-memory locations for the 8-digit

current value. This means that the

UDC uses two consecutive

counter locations. If UDC CT1 is

used in the program, the next

available counter is CT3.

Preset

Counter #

Operand Data

Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

Counters CT 0-76 0-176 0-176 0-376

V-memory for

preset values V – 2000-2377 – 2000-3777 – 1400-7377

10000-17777 – 1400-7377

10000-37777

Pointers

(presets only) P 2000-3777 1400-7377

10000-17777

1400-7377

10000-37777

Constants

(presets only) K – 0-99999999 – 0-99999999 – 0-99999999 – 0-99999999

Counter discrete

status bits CT/V* 0-76 or V41140-41143 0-176 or V41140-41147 0-176 or V41140-41147 0-376 or V41100-41157

Counter current

values V/CT* 1000-1076 1000-1176 1000-1176 1000-1376



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-51

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Up/Down Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, if X2 and X3 are off, when X1 toggles from off to on the counter will

increment by one. If X1 and X3 are off, the counter will decrement by one when X2 toggles

from off to on. When the count value reaches the preset value of 3, the counter status bit will

turn on. When the reset X3 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the current value

will be 0.

Up/Down Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will increment

by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3 and Y4 at different counts. When the

reset (X3) turns on, the counter status bit will turn off, the current value will be 0, and the

comparative contacts will turn off.

DENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

UDC CT2

CT2 Y10

OUT

CT2

121230

Current

Value

Counting DiagramDirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

STR

BENT

STR

SHFT ISG

ENT

ENT STR

$SHFT ENT

OUT

GX ENT

CMLR

SHFT

AND

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

UDC CT2

V2000

Counting Diagram

CTA2 K1

CTA2 K2 Y4

OUT

12 340

Current

Value

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

STR

BENT

STR

SHFT ISG

ENT

SHFT ENT

STR

$SHFT

BENT

OUT

GX ENT

MLR

STR

$SHFT

ENT

OUT

GX ENT

MLR

SHFT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-52

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Shift Register (SR)

The Shift Register instruction shifts data through a

predeﬁned number of control relays. The control ranges in

the shift register block must start at the beginning of an 8-bit

boundary and use 8-bit blocks.

The Shift Register has three contacts.

• Data — determines the value (1 or 0) that will enter the

• Clock — shifts the bits one position on each low to high

transition

• Reset —resets the Shift Register to all zeros.

With each off-to-on transition of the clock input, the bits which make up the shift register

block are shifted by one bit position and the status of the data input is placed into the starting

bit position in the shift register. The direction of the shift depends on the entry in the From

and To ﬁelds. From C0 to C17 would deﬁne a block of 16 bits to be shifted from left to

right. From C17 to C0 would deﬁne a block of 16 bits, to be shifted from right to left. The

maximum size of the shift register block depends on the number of available control relays.

The minimum block size is 8 control relays.



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data

Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A/B aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

Control Relay C 0-377 0-377 0-377 0-377 0-1777 0-1777 0-3777 0-3777

DS Used

HPP Used

aaaFrom A

bbbTo B

DATA

CLOCK

RESET

Data Input

Clock Input

Reset Input

Shift Register Bits

C0 C17

Reset

110

010

110

010

001

Inputs on Successive Scans

C0From

C17

X3 To

Handheld Programmer KeystrokesDirectSOFT

STR

BENT

STR

SHFT

ENT

RST

ORN

RSHFT 0

HENT

SHFT

Indicates

OFF

Clock Data

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-53

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions

Using the Accumulator

The accumulator in the DL205 series CPUs is a 32-bit register that is used as a temporary

storage location for data that is being copied or manipulated in some manner. For example, you

have to use the accumulator to perform math operations, such as, add, subtract, multiply, etc.

Since there are 32 bits, you can use up to an 8-digit BCD number or a 32-bit 2’s compliment

number. The accumulator is reset to 0 at the end of every CPU scan.

Copying Data to the Accumulator

The Load and Out instructions and their variations are used to copy data from a V-memory

location to the accumulator, or to copy data from the accumulator to V-memory. The

following example copies data from V-memory location V1400 to V-memory location V1410.

Since the accumulator is 32 bits and V-memory locations are 16 bits, the Load Double and

Out Double (or variations thereof) use two consecutive V-memory locations or 8-digit BCD

constants to copy data either to the accumulator from a V-memory address or from a V-memory

address to the accumulator. For example, if you wanted to copy data from V1400 and V1401

to V1410 and V1411, the most efﬁcient way to perform this function would be as follows:

V1400

Copy data from V1400 to the

lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

Copy data from the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator to V1410

OUT

V1410

Acc.

V1400

8935

0000 8935

Unused accumulator bits

are set to zero

LDD

V1400

Copy data from V1400 and

V1401 to the accumulator

Copy data from the accumulator to

V1410 and V1411

OUTD

V1410

Acc.

V1400

502 6

673 9 502 6

X1 V1401

673 9

V1411

673 9

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-54

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Using the Accumulator Stack

The accumulator stack is used for instructions that require more than one parameter to

execute a function or for user-deﬁned functionality. The accumulator stack is used when more

than one Load instruction is executed without the use of an Out instruction. The ﬁrst Load

instruction in the scan places a value into the accumulator. Every Load instruction thereafter

without the use of an Out instruction places a value into the accumulator and the value that

was in the accumulator is placed onto the accumulator stack. The Out instruction nulliﬁes the

previous Load instruction and does not place the value that was in the accumulator onto the

accumulator stack when the next Load instruction is executed. Every time a value is placed

onto the accumulator stack, the other values in the stack are pushed down one location. The

accumulator is eight levels deep (eight 32-bit registers). If there is a value in the eighth location

when a new value is placed onto the stack, the value in the eighth location is pushed off the

stack and cannot be recovered.

The POP instruction rotates values upward through the stack into the accumulator. When

a POP is executed, the value that was in the accumulator is cleared and the value that was on

top of the stack is in the accumulator. The values in the stack are shifted up one position in

the stack.

Acc.

Load the value 3245 into the accumu-

lator

Load the value 5151 into the accumu-

lator, pushing the value 3245 onto the

stack

Load the value 6363 into the accumu-

lator, pushing the value 5151 to the 1st

stack location and the value 3245 to

the 2nd stack location

K3245

K5151

K6363

Constant

Acc. XXXXX XXXX

Current Acc. value

Previous Acc. value

XXXXXXXX

XXXXXXX

Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

Accumulator Stack

00003245

Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

Accumulator Stack

Acc.

Constant 5151

00005 5151

Acc. 00003245 3245

Current Acc. value

Previous Acc. value

00005151

0000

Level 1

00003245

Level 2

XXXXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

Accumulator Stack

Acc.

Constant 6363

00006363 6363

Acc. 00005 5151

Current Acc. value

Previous Acc. value

Bucket

3245

00003245

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-55

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Acc.

POP the 1st value on the stack into the

accumulator and move stack values

up one location

POP

V2000 4545

XXXXXXXXXXX

Acc. 0000454545

Previous Acc. value

Current Acc. value

00003792

Level 1

00007930

Level 2

XXXXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

Accumulator Stack

00007930

Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

Accumulator Stack

XXXXXXXX

Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

Accumulator Stack

POP the 1st value on the stack into the

accumulator and move stack values

up one location

POP the 1st value on the stack into the

accumulator and move stack values

up one location

OUT

V2000

OUT

V2001

Acc.

V2001 3792

000045454545

Acc. 000037923792

Previous Acc. value

Current Acc. value

Acc.

V2002 7930

000034603792

Acc. XXXX 7930

Previous Acc. value

Current Acc. value

OUT

V2002

Cop data rom the accum ulator to

V2000

Cop data rom the accum ulator to

V2001.

Cop data rom the accum ulator to

V2002

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-56

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Changing the Accumulator Data

Instructions that manipulate data also use the accumulator. The result of the manipulated

data resides in the accumulator. The data that was being manipulated is cleared from the

accumulator. The following example loads the constant value 4935 into the accumulator,

shifts the data right 4 bits, and outputs the result to V1410.

Some of the data manipulation instructions use 32 bits. They use two consecutive V-memory

locations or an 8-digit BCD constant to manipulate data in the accumulator.

The following example rotates the value 67053101 two bits to the right and outputs the value

to V1410 and V1411.

K4935

Load the value 4935 into the

accumulator

Shift the data in the accumulator

4 bits (K4) to the right

Output the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator to V1410

0100100100110101

Constant

V1410

0000010010010011

0000010000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654

3210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Shifted out of

accumulator

049 3

493 5

SHFR

OUT

V1410

0000000000000000

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

0000000000000000

The upper 16 bits of the accumulator

will be set to 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654

3210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

LDD

K67053101

Load the value 67053101

into the accumulator

Rotate the data in the

accumulator 2 bits to the right

Output the value in the

accumulator to V1410 and V1411

0011000100000001

V1410

01001100010000000000010000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654321031 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

8C4 0

ROTR

OUTD

V1410

0101100111000001

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

0110011100000101

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

V1411

59C 1

Constant 670 5 310 1

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-57

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Using Pointers

Many of the DL205 series instructions will allow V-memory pointers as an operand. Pointers

can be useful in ladder logic programming, but can be difﬁcult to understand or implement

in your application if you do not have prior experience with pointers (commonly known as

indirect addressing). Pointers allow instructions to obtain data from V-memory locations

referenced by the pointer value.

NOTE: In the DL205, V-memory addressing is in octal. However the value in the pointer location which will

reference a V-memory location is viewed as HEX. Use the Load Address instruction to move an address into

the pointer location. This instruction performs the Octal to Hexadecimal conversion for you.

The following example uses a pointer operand in a Load instruction. V-memory location

3000 is the pointer location. V3000 contains the value 400, which is the HEX equivalent of

the Octal address V-memory location V2000. The CPU copies the data from V2000 into the

lower word of the accumulator.

The following example is similar to the one above, except for the LDA (load address) instruction,

which automatically converts the Octal address to the Hex equivalent.

V3000 (P3000) contains the value 400

Hex. 400 Hex. = 2000 Octal which

contains the value 2635.

P3000

OUT

V3100

Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V3100.

V3000

040 0

263 5

XXX X

V3100 263 5

V3101 XXX X

263 5

Accumulator

V2000

V2001

V2002

V2003

V2004

V2005

V3000 (P3000) contains the value 400

HEX = 2000 Octal which contains the

value 2635

LDA

O 2000

OUT

V 3000

Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V3000

V3000

0400

2635

XXXX

V3100 2635

V3101 XXXX

P 3000

OUT

V 3100

Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V3100

Load the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator with Hexadecimal

equivalent to Octal 2000 (400))

V3000

Acc.

2000

0400

0000 0400

2000 Octal is converted to Hexadecimal

400 and loaded into the accumulator

Accumulator

0000 2635

Unused accumulator bits

are set to zero

V2000

V2001

V2002

V2003

V2004

V2005

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-58

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load (LD)

The Load instruction is a 16-bit instruction that loads the value

(Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a 4-digit constant,

into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator. The upper 16 bits of

the accumulator are set to 0.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the ﬁrst Load instruction onto the

accumulator stack.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator

and output to V2010.



230

240

250-1

260

A aaa

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP76 On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

OUT

V2010

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to

V2010 V2010

Acc.

V2000

8935

000089358935

DirectSOFT

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

AENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

$ENT

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

Operand Data

Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa bbb

V-memory V All. See Memory map All. See Memory map All See Memory map All See Memory map

Pointer P –All V-memory

See Memory map

All V-memory

See Memory map

All V-memory

See Memory map

Constant K 0-FFFF 0-FFFF 0-FFFF 0-FFFF

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-59

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load Double (LDD)

The Load Double instruction is a 32-bit instruction that loads

the value (Aaaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory

locations or an 8-digit constant value, into the accumulator.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the ﬁrst load instruction onto the

accumulator stack.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32-bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded

into the accumulator and output to V2010 and V2011.

LDD

A aaa

Operand Data

Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa bbb

V-memory V All. See Memory map All. See Memory map All See Memory map All See Memory map

Pointer P –All V-memory

See Memory map

All V-memory

See Memory map

All V-memory

See Memory map

Constant K 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF

BENT

AENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

LDD

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the 32 bit

accumulator

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the 32 bit

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

V2010

Acc.

V2000

67396026

5026?

V2001

67395026

V2011

67395026

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 3



230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP76 On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-60

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load Formatted (LDF)

The Load Formatted instruction loads 1 to 32 consecutive bits

from discrete memory locations into the accumulator. The

instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and the number of

bits (Kbbb) to be loaded. Unused accumulator bit locations are

set to zero.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the ﬁrst Load instruction onto the

accumulator stack.

In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C16 (7 bits) will be

loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7 bits of the

accumulator are output to Y0–Y6 using the Out Formatted instruction.

bbbK

LDF A aaa

HENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LDF C10

Load the status of 7

consecutive bits (C10–C16)

into the accumulator

OUTF Y0

Copy the value from the

specified number of bits in

the accumulator to Y0 – Y6

K7C10

Location Constant

00000000000011100000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

K7Y0

Location Constant

C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10

OFFONONONOFFOFFOFF

? ? ? ? ? Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

OFFONONONOFFOFFOFF

The unused accumulator bits are set to zero

DirectSOFT

STR

$SHFT ENT

SHFT ANDST

SHFT 2

HENT

OUT

GX SHFT 5

230

240

250-1

260





Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

Inputs X 0–477 –0–777 –0–1777 –

Outputs Y 0–477 –0–777 –0–1777 –

Control Relays C 0–377 –0–1777 –0–3777 –

Stage bits S 0–777 –0–1777 –0–1777 –

Timer bits T 0–177 –0–377 –0–377 –

Counter bits CT 0–177 –0–177 –0–377 –

Special Relays SP 0-137, 540-617 –0–777 –0–777 –

Global I/O GX/GY – – – – 0–3777 –

Constant K –1–32 –1–32 –1–32

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP76 On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-61

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load Address (LDA)

The Load Address instruction is a 16-bit instruction. It

converts any octal value or address to the HEX equivalent

value and loads the HEX value into the accumulator. This

instruction is useful when an address parameter is required

since all addresses for the DL205 system are in octal.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the ﬁrst Load instruction onto the accumulator

stack.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the octal number 40400 will be converted to a HEX

4100 and loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The value in the

lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V2000 using the Out instruction.

O aaa

LDA



230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP76 On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

DS Used

HPP Used

Operand Data

Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Octal Address O All V-memory

See Memory map All V-memory

See Memory map

All V-memory

See Memory map

All V-memory

See Memory map

BENT

AENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

LDA

O 40400

Load The HEX equivalent to

the octal number into the

lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

OUT

V2000

Copy the value in lower 16

bits of the accumulator to

V2000

Acc.

Hexadecimal

4100

0000 4100

Octal

40400

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-62

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load Accumulator Indexed (LDX)

Load Accumulator Indexed is a 16-bit instruction that speciﬁes

a source address (V-memory) which will be offset by the value in

the ﬁrst stack location. This instruction interprets the value in

the ﬁrst stack location as HEX. The value in the offset address

(source address + offset) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator. The upper 16 bits of the accumulator are set to 0.

Helpful hint: — The Load Address instruction can be used to convert an octal address to a

HEX address and load the value into the accumulator.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the ﬁrst load instruction onto the

accumulator stack.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the HEX equivalent for octal 25 will be loaded into

the accumulator (this value will be placed on the stack when the Load Accumulator Indexed

instruction is executed). V-memory location V1410 will be added to the value in the ﬁrst level

of the stack and the value in this location (V1435 = 2345) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator using the Load Accumulator Indexed instruction. The value in the lower 16

bits of the accumulator is output to V1500 using the Out instruction.

A aaa

LDX





230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All. See

memory map All. See

memory map

Pointer P All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator

to V1500

LDA

O 25

LDX

V1410

OUT

V1500

Acc. 000 0 001 5

Hexadecimal

001 5

Octal

2 5

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

V1500

Acc.

Octal

143 5

234 5

000 0 234 5

Octal

141 0

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

+1 5

HEX Value in 1st

stack location

000000

Level 1

XXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXX

Level 8

Accumulator Stack

Load The HEX equivalent to

octal 25 into the lower 16

bits of the accumulator

Move the offset to the stack.

Load the accumulator with

the address to be offset

The value in V1435

is 2345

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-63

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load Accumulator Indexed from Data Constants (LDSX)

The Load Accumulator Indexed from Data Constants is a

16-bit instruction. The instruction speciﬁes a Data Label

Area (DLBL) where numerical or ASCII constants are stored.

This value will be loaded into the lower 16 bits.

The LDSX instruction uses the value in the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack as an offset to determine which numerical

or ASCII constant within the Data Label Area will be loaded into the accumulator. The LDSX

instruction interprets the value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack as a HEX value.

Helpful hint: — The Load Address instruction can be used to convert octal to HEX and load

the value into the accumulator.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the ﬁrst load instruction onto the

accumulator stack.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the offset of 1 is loaded into the accumulator. This

value will be placed into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack when the LDSX instruction

is executed. The LDSX instruction speciﬁes the Data Label (DLBL K2) where the numerical

constant(s) are located in the program and loads the constant value, indicated by the offset in

the stack, into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator.

LDSX

K aaa

Load the offset value of 1 (K1) into the lower 16

bits of the accumulator.

LDSX

Move the offset to the stack.

Load the accumulator with the data label

number

END

NCON

K3333

NCON

K2323

NCON

K4549

Acc. 000 0 000 1

Hexadecimal

000 1

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

Value in 1st. level of stack is

used as offset. The value is 1

Offset 0

Offset 1

Offset 2

V2000

Acc.

232 3

000 0 232 3

00000001

Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

Accumulator Stack

Acc. 000 0 000 2

Constant

000 2

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator

to V2000

OUT

V2000

DLBL

Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa

Constant K 1-FFFF 1-FFFF 1-FFFF

230

240

250-1

260





DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-64

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load Real Number (LDR)

The Load Real Number instruction loads a real number

contained in two consecutive V-memory locations, or an

8-digit constant into the accumulator.

DirectSOFT allows you to enter real numbers directly,

by using the leading “R” to indicate a real number

entry. You can enter a constant such as Pi, shown in

the example to the right. To enter negative numbers,

use a minus (–) after the “R”.

For very large numbers or very small numbers, you can

use exponential notation. The number to the right is

5.3 million. The OUTD instruction stores it in V1400

and V1401.

These real numbers are in the IEEE 32-bit ﬂoating point format, so they occupy two V-memory

locations, regardless of how big or small the number may be! If you view a stored real number in

hex, binary, or even BCD, the number shown will be very difﬁcult to decipher. Just like all

other number types, you must keep track of real number locations in memory, so they can be

read with the proper instructions later.

The previous example above stored a real number in V1400

and V1401. Suppose that now we want to retrieve that

number. Just use the Load Real with the V data type, as

shown to the right. Next we could perform real math on it,

or convert it to a binary number.

BENT

ENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT JMP

BENT

SHFT ANDST

RST

SET

SHFT 4

TMR

DENT

SHFT 3

ANDST

CENT

SHFT TMR

INST#

TMR

DENT

SHFT TMR

INST#

TMR

DENT

SHFT TMR

INST#

TMR

NENT

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

A aaa

LDR





230

240

250-1

260

R3.14159

LDR

R5.3E6

LDR

V1400

OUTD

V1400

LDR

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All. See memory map All. See memory map

Pointer P All V-memory. See memory map All V-memory. See memory map

Real Constants R -3.402823E+038 to

+3.402823E+038 -3.402823E+038 to

+3.402823E+038

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-65

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out (OUT)

The Out instruction is a 16-bit instruction that copies the

value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to a speciﬁed

V-memory location (Aaaa).

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the lower

16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator are copied to V2010 using the Out instruction.

OUT

A aaa



230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP76 On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

DS Used

HPP Used

AENT

BENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

OUT

V2010

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to

V2010 V2010

Acc.

V2000

8935

00008935

8935

DirectSOFT

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All. See

memory map All. See

memory map

All. See

memory map

Pointer P -All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-66

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out Double (OUTD)

The Out Double instruction is a 32-bit instruction that

copies the value in the accumulator to two consecutive

V-memory locations at a speciﬁed starting location (Aaaa).

In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32-bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded

into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is

output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.

AENT

BENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2010

Acc.

V2000

67395026 5026?

V2001

67395026

V2011

67395026

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

LDD

OUTD

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

V2000

V2010

DirectSOFT

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 3

OUTD

A aaa

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All. See

memory map All. See

memory map

All. See

memory map

Pointer P -All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-67

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out Formatted (OUTF)

The Out Formatted instruction outputs 1 to 32 bits from the

accumulator to the speciﬁed discrete memory locations. The

instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) for the destination

and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be output.

In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C16 (7 bits) will be

loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7 bits of the

accumulator are output to Y20–Y26 using the Out Formatted instruction.

bbbK

OUTF A aaa

Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa bbb aaa bbb aaa bbb

Constant K 1-32 1-32 1-32

230

240

250-1

260





HENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LDF C10

Load the status of 7

consecutive bits (C10–C16)

into the accumulator

OUTF Y20

Copy the value of the

specified number of bits

from the accumulator to

Y20–Y26

K7C10

Location Constant

0000000000001110

0000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654

3210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

K7Y20

Location Constant

C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10

OFFONONONOFFOFF OFF

Y21 Y20Y23 Y22Y26 Y25 Y24

OFFONONONOFFOFFOFF

The unused accumulator bits are set to zero

Accumulator

DirectSOFT

STR

$SHFT ENT

SHFT ANDST

SHFT 2

HENT

OUT

GX SHFT 5

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-68

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out Indexed (OUTX)

The Out Indexed instruction is a 16-bit instruction. It

copies a 16-bit or 4-digit value from the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack to a source address offset by the value

in the accumulator (V-memory + offset). This instruction

interprets the offset value as a HEX number. The upper 16

bits of the accumulator are set to zero.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value 3544 is loaded into the

accumulator. This is the value that will be output to the speciﬁed offset V-memory location

(V1525). The value 3544 will be placed onto the stack when the Load Address instruction

is executed. Remember, two consecutive Load instructions places the value of the ﬁrst load

instruction onto the stack. The Load Address instruction converts octal 25 to HEX 15 and

places the value in the accumulator. The Out Indexed instruction outputs the value 3544,

which resides in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack to V1525.

aaaA

OUTX

2 5

OUTX

0000 3544

Constant

3544

Acc.

3544

0000 0015

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero.

000035

Level 1

XXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXX

Level 8

0015

V15251500V+

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero.

Acc.

Octal HEX

Octal Octal Octal

The hex 15 converts

to 25 octal, which is

added to the base

address of V1500 to yield

the final destination.

V1525

LDA

K3544

O25

V1500

Load the accumulator with

the value 3544.

Load the HEX equivalent to

octal 25 into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator. This is the

offset for the Out Indexed

instruction, which determines

the final destinaltion address.

Copy the value in the first

level of the stack to the

offset address V1525

(V1500+25).

Accumulator Stack

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT

BENT

ENT

ANDST

DENT

OUT

GX SHFT SET

DirectSOFT





230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All. See

memory map All. See

memory map

Pointer P All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-69

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out Least (OUTL)

The Out Least instruction copies the value in the lower eight

bits of the accumulator to the lower eight bits of the speciﬁed

V-memory location (i.e., it copies the low byte of the low word

of the accumulator).

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the lower

16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 8 bits of the

accumulator are copied to V1500 using the Out Least instruction.

Out Most (OUTM)

The Out Most instruction copies the value in the upper eight bits

of the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to the upper eight bits of

the speciﬁed V-memory location (i.e., it copies the high byte of

the low word of the accumulator).

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the lower 16

bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the upper 8 bits of the lower

16 bits of the accumulator are copied to V1500 using the Out Most instruction.

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

A aaa

V-memory V All V-memory. See memory map

Pointer P All V-memory. See memory map

Aaaa

OUTL

Aaaa

OUTM

Aaaa

OUTM

Acc.

8935

0035

0000 8935

V1400

OUTL

V1500

Load the value in V1400 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulater

Copy the value in the lower

8 bits of the accumulator to

V1500

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

V1400

V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

BENT

AENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT ANDST

AENT

Acc.

8935

8900

0000 8935

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

BENT

AENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT ORST

AENT

V1400

OUTM

V1500

Load the value in V1400 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

Copy the value in the upper

8 bits of the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V1500

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

V1400

V1500





230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

A aaa

V-memory V All V-memory. See memory map

Pointer P All V-memory. See memory map

DS Used

HPP Used

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-70

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Pop (POP)

The Pop instruction moves the value from the ﬁrst level

of the accumulator stack (32 bits) to the accumulator and

shifts each value in the stack up one level. In the example

below, when C0 is on, the value 4545 that was on top of

the stack is moved into the accumulator using the Pop

instruction. The value is output to V2000 using the Out instruction. The next Pop moves

the value 3792 into the accumulator and outputs the value to V2001. The last Pop moves the

value 7930 into the accumulator and outputs the value to V2002. Please note if the value in

the stack were greater than 16 bits (4 digits) the Out Double instruction would be used and

two V-memory locations for each Out Double must be allocated.

POP

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Acc.

Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the

accumulator and move stack values

up one location

POP

V2000 4545

XXXXXXXXXXXX

Acc. 000045454545

Previous Acc. value

Current Acc. value

00003792

Level 1

00007930

Level 2

XXXXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

Accumulator Stack

00007930

Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

Accumulator Stack

XXXXXXXX

Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

Accumulator Stack

Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the

accumulator and move stack values

up one location

Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the

accumulator and move stack values

up one location

OUT

V2000

OUT

V2001

Acc.

V2001 3792

00004545

4545

Acc. 0000 3792

Previous Acc. value

Current Acc. value

Acc.

V2002 7930

0000 3792

Acc. 0000 7930

Previous Acc. value

Current Acc. value

OUT

V2002

Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V2000

Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V2001

Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V2002

DirectSOFT

STR

$SHFT 2

AENT

SHFT CV

INST#

PENT

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

SHFT CV

INST#

PENT

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

SHFT CV

INST#

PENT

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

SHFT

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-71

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Logical Instructions (Accumulator)

And (AND)

The And instruction is a 16-bit instruction that logically

ANDs the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with a

speciﬁed V-memory location (Aaaa). The result resides in the

accumulator. The discrete status ﬂag indicates if the result of

the And is zero.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is anded with the value in V2006

using the And instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is output to

V2010 using the Out instruction.

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

AND

A aaa

AND (V2006)

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

AND

V2006

AND the value in the

accumulator with

the value in V2006

OUT

V2010

Copy the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator to V2010

001010000111

1010

001010000011

1000

0000010000000000

V2000

287A?

0000000000000000

The upper 16 bits of the accumulator

will be set to 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654

3210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

001010000111

1010

0000000000000000

Acc.

01101010001110000000000000000000

6A38

V2010

2838

DirectSOFT

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT AND

AENT

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

AND

BENT

AENT



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All. See

memory map All. See

memory map

All. See

memory map

Pointer P -All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-72

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And Double (ANDD)

The And Double is a 32-bit instruction that

logically ANDs the value in the accumulator with

two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8-digit

(max) constant value (Aaaa). The result resides in

the accumulator. Discrete status ﬂags indicate if

the result of the And Double is zero or a negative

number (the most signiﬁcant bit is on).

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is anded

with 36476A38 using the And Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to

V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.

A aaa

ANDD

AND 36476A38

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LDD

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

ANDD

K36476A38

AND the value in the

accumulator with

the constant value

36476A38

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

001010000111 1010

001010000011 10000000010000000000

287A

0001010001000110

0101010001111110

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

V2010

2838

547E

V2011

1446

01010100011111100010100001111010

011010100011 10000011 011001000111

DirectSOFT

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT

OUT

SHFT 3

AND

VSHFT 3

SHFT

JMP

GENT

BENT

AENT

V2000 V2000

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V - - All. See

memory map

All. See

memory map

Pointer P - - All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

Constant K 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-73

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And Formatted (ANDF)

The And Formatted instruction logically ANDs the binary value in

the accumulator and a speciﬁed range of discrete memory bits (1 to

32). The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and number

of bits (Kbbb) to be ANDed. Discrete status ﬂags indicate if the result

is zero or a negative number (the most signiﬁcant bit =1).

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the Load Formatted instruction loads C10–C13

(4 binary bits) into the accumulator. The accumulator content is logically ANDed with the bit

pattern from Y20–Y23 using the And Formatted instruction. The Out Formatted instruction

outputs the accumulator’s lower four bits to C20–C23.

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative

bbbK

ANDF Aaaa

ndardRLL

C10

K4C10

00000000000011

0000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 98765 4321031 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

C10

C11C12C13

Y20Y21Y22Y23

Accumulator

000000000000

1000

Acc.

Acc. 0000000000000000 000000000000

1110

1000

C20C21C22C23

DirectSOFT

Load the status of 4

consecutive bits (C10-C13)

into the accumulator

ANDF Y20

And the binary bit pattern

(Y20-Y23) with the value in

the accumulator

OUTF C20

Copy the value in the lower

4 bits in accumulator to

C20-C23

AND (Y20-Y23)

The unused accumulator bits are set to zero

Location Constant

ConstantLocation

ON ON ON OFF

ON OFFOFFOFF

C20 K4

LDF

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

BENT

ENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT

AND

VSHFT 5

NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT

NEXT 2

EENT

PREV PREV

EENT

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa bbb aaa bbb

Inputs X 0–777 –0–1777 –

Outputs Y 0–777 –0–1777 –

Control Relays C 0–1777 –0–3777 –

Stage bits S 0–1777 –0–1777 –

Timer bits T 0–377 –0–377 –

Counter bits CT 0–177 –0–377 –

Special Relays SP 0-777 –0–777 –

Global I/O GX/GY - – 0-3777 –

Constant K -1–32 -1–32





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-74

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And with Stack (ANDS)

The And with Stack instruction is a 32-bit instruction that

logically ANDs the value in the accumulator with the ﬁrst level

of the accumulator stack. The result resides in the accumulator.

The value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack is removed

from the stack and all values are moved up one level. Discrete

status ﬂags indicate if the result of the And with Stack is zero or

a negative number (the most signiﬁcant bit is on).

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary value in the accumulator will be anded

with the binary value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack. The result resides in the

accumulator. The 32-bit value is then output to V1500 and V1501.

ANDS





230

240

250-1

260

AND

0010100001111

010

0010100000111

00000010000000000

V1400

287A

0001010001000110

0101010001111110

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654

3210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

V1500

2838

547E

1446

0101010001111110 0010100001111

010

01101010001110000011011001000111

LDD

V1400

Load the value in V1400 and

1401 into the accumulator

ANDS

AND the value in the

accumulator with the

first level of the

accumulator stack

OUTD

V1500

(top of stack)

36476A38

V1501

V1401

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500

and 1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

BENT

AENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

AND

VSHFT RST

SENT

DirectSOFT

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-75

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or (OR)

The Or instruction is a 16-bit instruction that logically

ORs the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with

a speciﬁed V-memory location (Aaaa). The result resides

in the accumulator. The discrete status ﬂag indicates if the

result of the OR is zero.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is OR’d with V2006 using the OR

instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are output to V2010 using the

Out instruction.

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

A aaa

OR (V2006)

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

V2006

Or the value in the

accumulator with

the value in V2006

OUT

V2010

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to

V2010

001010000111

1010

011010100111

1010

0000010000000000

V2000

287A

0000000000000000

The upper 16 bits of the accumulator

will be set to 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654321

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

001010000111

1010

0000000000000000

Acc.

011010100011

1000

0000000000000000

6A38

V2010

6A7A

DirectSOFT

STR

BENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

SHFT AND

AENT

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All

See memory map All

See memory map

All

See memory map

Pointer P -All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-76

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or Double (ORD)

The Or Double is a 32-bit instruction that ORs the value in

the accumulator with the value (Aaaa) or an 8-digit (max)

constant value. The result resides in the accumulator.

Discrete status ﬂags indicate if the result of the Or Double

is zero or a negative number (the most signiﬁcant bit is on).

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is OR’d

with 36476A38 using the Or Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to

V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.

A aaa

ORD



230

240

250-1

260

JMP

OR 36476A38

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LDD

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into accumulator

ORD

K36476A38

OR the value in the

accumulator with

the constant value

36476A38

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

001010000111

1010

011010100111

1010

0000010000000000

287A

0111 0110011111 11

0101010001111110

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

V2010

6A7A

547E

V2011

767F

0101010001111110001010000111

1010

DirectSOFT

011010100011 10000011011001000111

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT

OUT

SHFT 3

SHFT

SHFT 0

GENT

BENT

AENT

V2000V2001

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V - - All. See

memory map

All. See

memory map

Pointer P - - All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

Constant K 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-77

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or Formatted (ORF)

The Or Formatted instruction logically ORs the binary value

in the accumulator and a speciﬁed range of discrete bits (1 to

32). The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and

the number of bits (Kbbb) to be ORed. Discrete status ﬂags

indicate if the result is zero or negative (the most signiﬁcant

bit =1).

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads C10–C13

(4 binary bits) into the accumulator. The Or Formatted instruction logically ORs the

accumulator contents with Y20–Y23 bit pattern. The Out Formatted instruction outputs the

accumulator’s lower four bits to C20–C23.

bbbK

ORFAaaa

X1 K4C10

00000000000001100000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 98765 43210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

Y20Y21Y22Y23

Theunused accumulatorbitsare settozero

OR (Y20 --Y23)

0000000000001110

1000

000000000000000 0Acc.

Constant

C20 K4 ON ON ON

OFF

OFFON ON

C13 C12 C11 C10

C23 C22 C21 C20

ON OFF OFF OFF

Location Constant

Location

LDF C10

ORF Y20

OUTF C20

Load the status of 4

consecutive bits (C10-C13)

into the accumulator

OR the binary bit pattern

(Y20 - Y23) with the value in

the accumulator

Copy the specified number

of bits from the accumulator

to C20-C23

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

BENT

ENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT

QSHFT 5

NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT

NEXT 2

EENT

PREV PREV

EENT

DirectSOFT





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa bbb aaa bbb

Inputs X 0–777 –0–1777 –

Outputs Y 0–777 –0–1777 –

Control Relays C 0–1777 –0–3777 –

Stage bits S 0–1777 –0–1777 –

Timer bits T 0–377 –0–377 –

Counter bits CT 0–177 –0–377 –

Special Relays SP 0-777 –0–777 –

Global I/O GX/GY - – 0-3777 –

Constant K -1–32 -1–32

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-78

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or with Stack (ORS)

The Or with Stack instruction is a 32-bit instruction that

logically ORs the value in the accumulator with the ﬁrst

level of the accumulator stack. The result resides in the

accumulator. The value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack is removed from the stack and all values are moved up

one level. Discrete status ﬂags indicate if the result of the Or

with Stack is zero or a negative number (the most signiﬁcant

bit is on).

In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary value in the accumulator will be ORed

with the binary value in the ﬁrst level of the stack. The result resides in the accumulator.

LDD

V1400

0010100001111010

01101010011110100000010000000000

V1400

287A

0111011001111111

0101010001111110

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

V1500

6A7A

V1401

547E

V1501

767F

0101010001111110 0010100001111010

01101010001110000011011001000111

DirectSOFT

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 in the accumulator

ORS

OR the value in the

accumulator with the value

in the first level of the

accumulator stack

OUTD

V1500

36476A38

OR (top of stack)

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500 and

V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

BENT

AENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

QSHFT RST

SENT

ORS





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-79

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Exclusive Or (XOR)

The Exclusive Or instruction is a 16-bit instruction that

performs an exclusive OR of the value in the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator and a speciﬁed V-memory location (Aaaa). The

result resides in the accumulator. The discrete status ﬂag indicates

if the result of the XOR is zero.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is exclusive OR’d with V2006 using

the Exclusive Or instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are output to

V2010 using the Out instruction.

XOR

A aaa

XOR (V2006)

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

XOR

V2006

XOR the value in the

accumulator with

the value in V2006

OUT

V2010

Copy the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator to V2010

0010 100001111010

01001110010000100000010000000000

V2000

287A

0000000000000000

The upper 16 bits of the accumulator

will be set to 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

001001000111 10100000000000000000

Acc.

6A38

V2010

4E42

DirectSOFT

011010100011 10000000000000000000

STR

BENT

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT AND

AENT

SHFT AND

AENT

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

SHFT SHFT

SET



230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All

See memory map All

See memory map

All

See memory map

Pointer P -All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-80

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Exclusive Or Double (XORD)

The Exclusive Or Double is a 32-bit instruction

that performs an exclusive OR of the value in the

accumulator and the value (Kaaa), which is an

8-digit (max) constant. The result resides in the

accumulator. Discrete status ﬂags indicate if the

result of the Exclusive Or Double is zero or a negative

number (the most signiﬁcant bit is on).

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded

into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is

exclusively OR’d with 36476A38 using the Exclusive Or Double instruction. The value in the

accumulator is output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.

K aaa

XORD

JMP

SHFTSHFT 3

XORD 36476A38

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LDD

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

XORD

K36476A38

XORD the value in the

accumulator with

the constant value

36476A38

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010

and V2011

001010000111

1010

0100001001000010

0000010000000000

V2000

287A

0110001000111001

0101010001111110

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

V2010

4242

V2001

547E

V2011

6239

0101010001111110001010000111

1010

DirectSOFT

011010100011 10000011011001000111

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT SET

OUT

GX SHFT 3

SHFT

SHFT 0

GENT

BENT

AENT



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Constant K 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-81

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Exclusive OR Formatted (XORF)

The Exclusive Or Formatted instruction performs an exclusive OR of

the binary value in the accumulator and a speciﬁed range of discrete

memory bits (1 to 32).

The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and the number

of bits (Kbbb) to be exclusive OR’d. Discrete status ﬂags indicate if

the result of the Exclusive Or Formatted is zero or negative (the most

signiﬁcant bit is on).

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C13 (4 bits) will be loaded

into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value in the accumulator

will be logically Exclusive OR’d with the bit pattern from Y20–Y23 using the Exclusive Or

Formatted instruction. The value in the lower 4 bits of the accumulator are output to C20–

C23 using the Out Formatted instruction.

StandardRLL

K4C10

00000000000001100000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 98765 4321031 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

C10C11C12C13

OFFONONOFF

Y20Y21Y22Y23

OFFONOFFON

Accumulator

0000000000001100

Acc.

Acc. 0000000000000000 0000000000000110

1010

C20C21C22C23

OFF

ONON

K4C20

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

BENT

ENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 5

SHFT SET

XSHFT 5

NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT

NEXT 2

EENT

PREV PREV 0

EENT

Location Constant

The unused accumulator bits are set to zero

DirectSOFT32

X1 LDF C10

X0RF Y20

OUTF C20

Load the status of 4

consecutive bits (C10-C13)

into the accumulator

Exclusive OR the binary bit

pattern (Y20-Y23) with the

value in the accumulator

Copy the specified number

of bits from the accumulator

to C20-C23

XORF (Y20-Y23)

XORF A aaa

K bbb





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa bbb aaa bbb

Inputs X 0–777 –0–1777 –

Outputs Y 0–777 –0–1777 –

Control Relays C 0–1777 –0–3777 –

Stage bits S 0–1777 –0–1777 –

Timer bits T 0–377 –0–377 –

Counter bits CT 0–177 –0–377 –

Special Relays SP 0-777 –0–777 –

Global I/O GX/GY - – 0-3777 –

Constant K -1–32 -1–32

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-82

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Exclusive Or with Stack (XORS)

The Exclusive Or with Stack instruction is a 32-bit

instruction that performs an Exclusive Or of the value in

the accumulator with the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack. The result resides in the accumulator. The value in

the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack is removed from the

stack and all values are moved up one level. Discrete status

ﬂags indicate if the result of the Exclusive Or with Stack is

zero or a negative number (the most signiﬁcant bit is on).

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary value in the accumulator will be Exclusive

OR’d with the binary value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack. The result will reside in

the accumulator.

XORS

0010100001111

010

0100001001000

010

0000010000000000

V1400

287A

0110001000111001

0101010001111110

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

V1500

4242

V1401

547E

V1501

6239

0101010001111110 0010100001111

010

0110101000111

000

0011011001000111

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

BENT

AENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

SHFT SET

XENTSHFT RST

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500 and V1501

OUTD

V1500

Exclusive OR the value

in the accumulator

with the value in the

first level of the

accumulator stack

LDD

V1400

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

36476A38

XOR (1st level of Stack)

XORS

DirectSOFT





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero

SP70 Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-83

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Compare (CMP)

The compare instruction is a 16-bit instruction that

compares the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator

with the value in a speciﬁed V-memory location (Aaaa).

The corresponding status ﬂag will be turned on indicating

the result of the comparison.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant 4526 will be loaded into the lower 16

bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is compared

with the value in V2000 using the Compare instruction. The corresponding discrete status

ﬂag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in

the accumulator is less than the value speciﬁed in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on,

energizing contact C30.

CMP

A aaa



230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.

SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.

SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000

Acc.

CONSTANT

4526 ?

8945

000045264526 ?

Compare the value in the

accumulator with the value

in V2000

Load the constant value

4526 into the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator

K4526

CMP

V2000

Compared

with

SP60 C30

DirectSOFT

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

STR

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT JMP

GENT

SHFT 2

ORST

STR

$SHFT ENT

STRN

OUT

GX SHFT 2

AENT

BENT

AENTSHFT

OUT

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All

See memory map All

See memory map

All

See memory map

Pointer P -All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-84

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Compare Double (CMPD)

The Compare Double instruction is a 32–bit instruction that

compares the value in the accumulator with the value (Aaaa),

which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8–digit

(max) constant. The corresponding status ﬂag will be turned on

indicating the result of the comparison.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is compared

with the value in V2010 and V2011 using the CMPD instruction. The corresponding discrete

status ﬂag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the

value in the accumulator is less than the value speciﬁed in the Compare instruction, SP60 will

turn on, energizing contact C30.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LDD

Compare the value in the

accumulator with the value

in V2010 and V2011

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

V2000

CMPD

V2010

Compared

with

SP60 C30

V2010

Acc.

V2000

452677 ?7299

V2001

45267299

V2011

67395026

DirectSOFT

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT 2

ORST

STR

$SHFT ENT

STRN

OUT

GX SHFT 2

AENT

BENT

ENT

AENT

SHFT

OUT



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All

See memory map All

See memory map

All

See memory map

All

See memory map

Pointer P -All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

Constant K 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF 0-FFFFFFFF

CMPD

A aaa

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value

SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value

SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-85

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Compare Formatted (CMPF)

The Compare Formatted compares the value in the

accumulator with a speciﬁed number of discrete locations

(1–32). The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa)

and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be compared. The

corresponding status ﬂag will be turned on indicating the

result of the comparison.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads the binary

value (6) from C10–C13 into the accumulator. The CMPF instruction compares the value

in the accumulator to the value in Y20–Y23 (E hex). The corresponding discrete status ﬂag

will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in the

accumulator is less than the value speciﬁed in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on,

energizing C30.

CMPF A aaa

K bbb





230

240

250-1

260

K4C10

LocationConstant C10

C11C12C13

OFFONONOFF

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

Y20Y21Y22Y23

OFFONONON

Compar ed

with

Acc. 0000 0006

LDF

Compar ethe valueinthe

accumulatorwiththe value

of thespecifieddiscrete

location (Y20 --Y23)

Load theval ue of the

specifieddiscretelocations

(C10 --C13) into the

accumulator

C10

CMPF

Y20

SP60C30

OUT

DirectSOFT

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa bbb aaa bbb

Inputs X 0–777 –0–1777 –

Outputs Y 0–777 –0–1777 –

Control Relays C 0–1777 –0–3777 –

Stage bits S 0–1777 –0–1777 –

Timer bits T 0–377 –0–377 –

Counter bits CT 0–177 –0–377 –

Special Relays SP 0-777 –0–777 –

Global I/O GX/GY - – 0-3777 –

Constant K -1–32 -1–32

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the ﬁrst level value in the Accumulator Stack.

SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the ﬁrst level value in the Accumulator Stack

SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the ﬁrst level value in the Accumulator Stack.

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-86

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Compare with Stack (CMPS)

The Compare with Stack instruction is a 32-bit instruction that

compares the value in the accumulator with the value in the ﬁrst

level of the accumulator stack.

The corresponding status ﬂag will be turned on indicating the

result of the comparison. This does not affect the value in the

accumulator.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the

accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1410 and V1411 is loaded

into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value that was loaded into the

accumulator from V1400 and V1401 is placed on top of the stack when the second Load

instruction is executed. The value in the accumulator is compared with the value in the ﬁrst

level of the accumulator stack using the CMPS instruction. The corresponding discrete status

ﬂag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in

the accumulator is less than the value in the stack, SP60 will turn on, energizing C30.

CMPS





230

240

250-1

260

Acc. 6500 3544

V1400

3544

SP60C30

OUT

V1401

6500

Acc. 5500 3544

V1410

3544

V1411

5500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT 2

ORST

STR

STRN

OUT

RST

BENT

ENTSHFT

AENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

SHFT

Compared with

Top of Stack

LDD

V1400

LDD

V1410

CMPS

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

Load the value in V1410 and

V1411 into the accumulator

Compare the value in the

accumulator with the value

in the first level of the

accumulator stack

DirectSOFT

ENT

SHFT

ENT

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP60 On when the value in the Accumulator is less than the ﬁrst level value in the

Accumulator Stack

SP61 On when the value in the Accumulator is equal to the ﬁrst level value in the

Accumulator Stack

SP62 On when the value in the Accumulator is greater than the ﬁrst level value in the

Accumulator Stack

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-87

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Compare Real Number (CMPR)

The Compare Real Number instruction compares a real

number value in the accumulator with two consecutive

V-memory locations containing a real number. The

corresponding status ﬂag will be turned on indicating the

result of the comparison. Both numbers being compared are

32 bits long.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the LDR instruction loads the real number

representation for 7 decimal into the accumulator. The CMPR instruction compares the

accumulator contents with the real representation for decimal 6. Since 7 > 6, the corresponding

discrete status ﬂag is turned on (special relay SP62).

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.

SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.

SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value.

SP71 On anytime the V-memory speciﬁed by a pointer (P) is not valid

SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number encountered.

CMPR

Aaaa

0000

40D0 0000

40E0

DirectSOFT

SP62

LDR

R7.0

CMPR

R6.0

OUT

CMPR

Acc.

Load the real number

representation for decimal 7

into the accumulator

Compare the value with the

real number representation

for decimal 6

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All. See

memory map All. See

memory map

Pointer P All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

Constant R -3.402823E+038 to

+ 3.402823E+038 -3.402823E+038 to

+ 3.402823E+038





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-88

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions

Add (ADD)

Add is a 16-bit instruction that adds a BCD value in the

accumulator with a BCD value in a V-memory location (Aaaa).

(You cannot use a constant (K) as the BCD value in the box.)

The result resides in the accumulator.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are added to the

value in V2006 using the Add instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010

using the Out instruction.

ADD

A aaa

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

ADD

V2006

Add the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator

with the value in V2006

OUT

V2010

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to

V2010

V2000

4935

7435

00004935

+2500

Acc. 7435

(V2006)

(Accumulator)

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT 0

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

BENT

AENT



230

240

250-1

260 Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All

See memory map All

See memory map

All

See memory map

Pointer P -All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP66 On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP67 On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number is encountered

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-89

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Add Double (ADDD)

Add Double is a 32-bit instruction that adds the BCD

value in the accumulator with a BCD value (Aaaa), which

is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an

8–digit (max) BCD constant. The result resides in the

accumulator.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is added

with the value in V2006 and V2007 using the Add Double instruction. The value in the

accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All

See memory map All

See memory map

All

See memory map

All

See memory map

Pointer P -All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

Constant K 0-99999999 0-99999999 0-99999999 0-99999999

ADDD

A aaa

67395026

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LDD

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

ADDD

V2006

Add the value in the

accumulator with the value

in V2006 and V2007

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

V2010

V2000

V2001

67395026

V2011

87399072

(V2006 and V2007)

(Accumulator)

20004046+

87399072

Acc.

STR

SHFT 0

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT

AND

AENTSHFT

ENT

AENT

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP66 On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP67 On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number is encountered

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-90

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Add Real (ADDR)

Add Real is a 32-bit instruction that adds a real number, which is

either two consecutive V-memory locations or a 32-bit constant,

to a real number in the accumulator. Both numbers must conform

to the IEEE ﬂoating point format. The result is a 32-bit real

number that resides in the accumulator.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

NOTE1: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE

format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.

NOTE2: If the value being added to a real number is 16,777,216 times smaller than the real number, the

calculation will not work.

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP71 On anytime the V-memory speciﬁed by a pointer (P) is not valid

SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is an invalid ﬂoating point number

SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit

SP74 On anytime a ﬂoating point math operation results in an underﬂow error

SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was encountered

ADDR

Aaaa

ADDR

Aaaa





230

240

250-1

260

LDR

R7.0

Load thereal number 7.0

into theaccumulator

ADDR

R15.0

Addthe real number 15.0to

theaccumulatorcontents,

whichisinreal num ber

format.

00000000000000000100000110110000

8421842184218421

Acc.

41 B0 0000

V1400V1401

Real Value

Copy theresultinthe accumulator

to V1400 and V1401.

OUTD

V1400

Implies2(exp 4)

131 -- 127 =4

(Hex number)

Mantissa (23bits)Sign Bit

40E00000

000040E0

(ADDR)

(Accumulator)

4170 0000+

000041B0

Acc.

7(decimal)

+15

1.011x2(exp4)=10110.binary= 22 decimal

128 +2+1=131

Exponent (8 bits)

DirectSOFT

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All. See

memory map All. See

memory map

Pointer P All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

Constant R -3.402823E+038 to

+ 3.402823E+038 -3.402823E+038 to

+ 3.402823E+038

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-91

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Subtract (SUB)

Subtract is a 16-bit instruction that subtracts the BCD

value (Aaaa) in a V-memory location from the BCD value

in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator. The result resides

in the accumulator.

NOTE: A constant (K) cannot be used for the BCD value.

Status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the

accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V2006 is subtracted from the value

in the accumulator using the Subtract instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to

V2010 using the Out instruction.



230

240

250-1

260

Standard RLL

Instructions

5–91

SUB

A aaa

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All

See memory map All

See memory map

All

See memory map

Pointer P -All V-memory.

See memory map All V-memory.

See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP66 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP67 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number is encountered

Direct SOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

SUB

V2006

Subtract the value in V2006

from the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator

OUT

V2010

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to

V2010

1(V2006)

(Accumulator)

V2000

475

883

000475

592

Acc. 883

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT SHFT AND

AENT

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

RST

ISG

BENT

AENT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-92

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Subtract Double (SUBD)

Subtract Double is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts the

BCD value (Aaaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory

locations or an 8-digit (max) constant, from the BCD value in

the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded

into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V2006 and V2007

is subtracted from the value in the accumulator. The value in the accumulator is copied to

V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3 - 53) All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P -All V-memory

(See page 3-54)

All V-memory

(See page 3-55)

All V-memory

(See page 3-56)

Constant K 0-99999999 0-99999999 0-99999999 0-99999999

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP64 On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP65 On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

SUBD

A aaa

Direct

SOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LDD

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

SUBD

V2006

The value in V2006 and V2007

is subtracted from the value in

the accumulator

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

00390899

01063274

0 1 0 6 3 2 7 4

V2010

V2000V2001

V2011

00390899

672375

ACC.

STR

SHFT

SHFT ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 3

RST

ISG

BENT

AENT

SHFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-93

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Subtract Real (SUBR)

The Subtract Real is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts a real

number, which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or

a 32-bit constant, from a real number in the accumulator. The

result is a 32-bit real number that resides in the accumulator. Both

numbers must be Real data type (IEEE ﬂoating point format).

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE

format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.

SUBR

Aaaa





230

240

250-1

260

ndardRLL

structions

LDR

R22.0

SUBR

R15.0

00000000000000000100000011100000

8421842184218421

Acc.

40 E0 0000

V1400V1401

Real Value

OUTD

V1400

Implies2(exp 2)

129 -- 127 =2

(Hex number)

Mantissa (23bits)Sign Bit

41B00000

000041B0

(SUBR)

(Accumulator)

4170 0000

000040E0

Acc.

22 (decimal)

_15

1.11 x2(exp 2) =111.binary= 7decimal128 +1=129

Exponent (8 bits)

DirectSOFT

Load the real number

22.0 into the accumulator.

Subtract the real number

15.0 from the accumulator

contents, which is in real

number format.

Copy the result in the

accumulator to V1400

and V1401.

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP71 On anytime the V-memory speciﬁed by a pointer (P) is not valid

SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is an invalid ﬂoating point number

SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit

SP74 On anytime a ﬂoating point math operation results in an underﬂow error

SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was encountered

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All. (See page 3-55) All. (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V-memory (See page 3-55) All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Constant R -3.402823E+038 to

+ 3.402823E+038 -3.402823E+038 to

+ 3.402823E+038

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-94

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Multiply (MUL)

Multiply is a 16-bit instruction that multiplies the BCD value

(Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a 4–digit

(max) constant, by the BCD value in the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator The result can be up to 8 digits and resides in

the accumulator.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the

accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V2006 is multiplied by the value in

the accumulator. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out

Double instruction.

MUL

A aaa



230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered.

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

MUL

V2006

The value in V2006 is

multiplied by the value in the

accumulator

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

00025000

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

V2000

00025000

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

Acc.

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT ORST

ISG

ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 3

BENT

AENT

V2011

(Accumulator)

(V2006)

V2010

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-53) All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P -All V-memory

(See page 3-54)

All V-memory

(See page 3-55)

All V-memory

(See page 3-56)

Constant K 0-9999 0-9999 0-9999 0-9999

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-95

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Multiply Double (MULD)

Multiply Double is a 32-bit instruction that multiplies the

8-digit BCD value in the accumulator by the 8-digit BCD

value in the two consecutive V-memory locations speciﬁed

in the instruction. The lower 8 digits of the results reside

in the accumulator. Upper digits of the result reside in the

accumulator stack.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant Kbc614e hex will be loaded into the

accumulator. When converted to BCD the number is ”12345678”. That number is stored in

V1400 and V1401. After loading the constant K2 into the accumulator, we multiply it times

12345678, which is 24691356.

MULD

A aaa

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All V-mem (See page 3-55) All V-mem (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V-mem (See page 3-55) All V-mem (See page 3-56)





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LDD

Kbc614e

X1 Load the hex equivalent

of 12345678 decimal into

the accumulator.

BCD Convert the value to

BCD format. It will

occupy eight BCD digits

(32 bits).

OUTD

V1400

Output the number to

V1400 and V1401 using

the OUTD instruction. 3562469

678

(Accumulator)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(Accumulator)

V1402

V1400

356

V1403

2469

Acc.

Load the constant K2

into the accumulator.

MULD

V1400

Multiply the accumulator

contents (2) by the

8-digit number in V1400

and V1401.

OUTD

V1402

Move the result in the

accumulator to V1402

and V1403 using the

OUTD instruction.

2341

V1401

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT ORST

ISG

ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 3

BENT

EENT

ENT

DPREV SHFT 1

CSHFT SHFT 4

SHFT 1

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

DPREV ENT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-96

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Multiply Real (MULR)

The Multiply Real instruction multiplies a real number in

the accumulator with either a real constant or a real number

occupying two consecutive V-memory locations. The result

resides in the accumulator. Both numbers must be Real data

type (IEEE ﬂoating point format).

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE

format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.

MULR

A aaa

DirectSOFT

LDR

R7.0

Load thereal number 7.0

into theaccumulator.

MULR

R15.0

Multiply theaccumulator

contentsbythe real num ber

15.0

00000000000000000100001011010010

8421842184218421

Acc.

42D20000

V1400V1401

Real Value

Copy theresultinthe accumulator

to V1400 and V1401.

OUTD

V1400

Implies2(exp 6)

133 -- 127 =6

(Hex number)

Sign Bit

40E00000

000040E0

(MULR)

(Accumulator)

4170 0000X

000042D2

Acc.

7(decimal)

x15

105

1.101001 x2(exp 6) =1101001. binary= 105 decimal128 +4+1=133

Exponent (8 bits) Mantissa (23 bits)





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP71 On anytime the V-memory speciﬁed by a pointer (P) is not valid

SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is an invalid ﬂoating point number

SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit

SP74 On anytime a ﬂoating point math operation results in an underﬂow error

SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was encountered

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All. (See page 3-55) All. (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V-memory (See page 3-55) All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Constant R -3.402823E+038 to

+ 3.402823E+038 -3.402823E+038 to

+ 3.402823E+038

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-97

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Divide (DIV)

Divide is a 16-bit instruction that divides the BCD value

in the accumulator by a BCD value (Aaaa), which is either

a V-memory location or a 4-digit (max) constant. The ﬁrst

part of the quotient resides in the accumulator, and the

remainder resides in the ﬁrst stack location.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator will be divided by the value in V2006

using the Divide instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out

instruction.

DIV

A aaa



230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-53) All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P -All V-memory

(See page 3-54)

All V-memory

(See page 3-55)

All V-memory

(See page 3-56)

Constant K 1-9999 1-9999 1-9999 1-9999

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

DIV

V2006

The value in the

accumulator is divided by

the value in V2006

OUT

V2010

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to

V2010

(V2006)

(Accumulator)

V2000

000

100

000000

Acc. 100

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

0000000 0

First stack location contains

the remainder

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT 3

AND

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

BENT

AENT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-98

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Divide Double (DIVD)

Divide Double is a 32-bit instruction that divides the BCD

value in the accumulator by a BCD value (Aaaa), which must

be obtained from two consecutive V-memory locations (You

cannot use a constant as the parameter in the box). The

ﬁrst part of the quotient resides in the accumulator, and the

remainder resides in the ﬁrst stack location.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is divided

by the value in V1420 and V1421 using the Divide Double instruction. The ﬁrst part of the

quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the ﬁrst stack location. The

value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.

DIVD

A aaa

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

Standard RLL

Instructions

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LDD

V1400

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

DIVD

V1420

The value in the accumulator

is divided by the value in

V1420 and V1421

OUTD

V1500

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500

and V1501

0000003

0000150

0(Accumulator)

(V1421 and V1420)

÷0

1500000

V1500

V1400

000

V1401

V1501

0003

0000050

0000000 0

First stack location contains

the remainder

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

Acc.

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT 3

AND

OUT

GX SHFT 0

AENT

BENT

CENT

DENT

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All V-memory (See page 3-55) All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V-memory (See page 3-55) All V-memory (See page 3-56)





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-99

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Divide Real (DIVR)

The Divide Real instruction divides a real number in the

accumulator by either a real constant or a real number

occupying two consecutive V-memory locations. The result

resides in the accumulator. Both numbers must conform to the

IEEE ﬂoating point format.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE

format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.

DIVR

A aaa

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP71 On anytime the V-memory speciﬁed by a pointer (P) is not valid.

SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid ﬂoating point number.

SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.

SP74 On anytime a ﬂoating point math operation results in an underﬂow error.

SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was encountered.

ndar

dRLL

LDR

R15.0

Load thereal number 15.0

into theaccumulator.

DIVR

R10.0

Dividethe accumulatorcontents

by thereal number 10.0.

00000000000000000011111111000000

8421842184218421

Acc.

3FC0 0000

V1400V1401

Real Value

Copy theresultinthe accumulator

to V1400 and V1401.

OUTD

V1400

Implies2(exp 0)

127 -- 127 =0

(Hex number)

Mantissa (23bits)Sign Bit

4170 0000

00004170

(DIVR)

(Accumulator)

4120 0000

00003FC0

Acc.

15 (decimal)

1.1x2(exp0)=1.1binary= 1.5 decimal64 +32+16 +8+4+2+1=127

Exponent (8 bits)

DirectSOFT

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V-mem (See page 3-55) All V-mem (See page 3-56)

Constant R -3.402823E + 038 to

+ 3.402823E+038

-3.402823E + 038 to

+ 3.402823E+038





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-100

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Increment (INC)

The Increment instruction increments a BCD value in a

speciﬁed V-memory location by “1” each time the instruction

is executed.

Decrement (DEC)

The Decrement instruction decrements a BCD value in a

speciﬁed V-memory location by “1” each time the instruction

is executed.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following increment example, the value in V1400 increases by one each time that C5 is

closed (true).

In the following decrement example, the value in V1400 is decreased by one each time that C5

is closed (true).

NOTE: Use a pulsed contact closure to INC/DEC the value in V–memory once per closure.

A aaa

INC

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered.

DirectSOFT

C5 INC

V1400

Increment the value in

V1400 by “1”.

V1400

8935

V1400

8936

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

FENT

IENT

NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT

SHFT TMR

SHFT 3

A aaa

DEC

DirectSOFT

C5 DEC

V1400

Decrement the value in

V1400 by “1”.

V1400

8935

V1400

8934

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

FENT

DENT

NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT

SHFT 4

SHFT 3





230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260 Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All V mem (See page 3-55) All V mem (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V mem (See page 3-55) All V mem (See page 3-56)

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-101

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Add Binary (ADDB)

The Add Binary instruction adds a 16-bit number (Aaaa)

to the value stored in the accumulator. The number in the

accumulator can be up to 32 bits long. The source of the

16-bit operand can be a constant or a data value located in

V-memory. Add Binary performs the addition operation on the

full binary representation of the operands, which distinguishes

it from the Add instruction (see page 5-88), which treats the operands as BCD numbers.

Although the addition operation is performed on the underlying binary values, the native

display format is hexadecimal. For that reason you will need to load constants in hex.

The sum of the Add Binary operation occupies the full 32-bit accumulator and requires an Out

Double to move the sum to V-memory. If the value in the accumulator occupies fewer than 32

bits, leading zeros are loaded in the left-most empty bit positions.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is added to the binary value in the

accumulator using the Add Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to

V1500 - V1501 using the Out Double instruction.

ADDB

A aaa

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP66 On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP67 On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carr

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit.

Handheld ProgrammerKeystrokes

(Accumulator)00

0A05

CC 9

000 A05

2C4

Acc. CC 9

STR1

D1400

OUT1500

14 0

SHFT B

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

SHFT D

ENT

SHFT LENT

DD ENT

ENT

Load the value in V1400

into the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator

BIN

ADDB

OUTD

V1500

K2565

Use either OR Constant

V-memory

V1420

V1400

(V1420)

V1500

V1400

The binary value in the

accumulator is added to the

binary value in V1420

Copy the value in the lower

16bits of the accumulator to

V1500 and V1501

DirectSOFT

A05 (Hex) = 2565 (decimal)

12C4 (Hex) = 4804 (decimal)

(Accumulator) 1CC9 (Hex) = 7369 (decimal)

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V mem (See page 3-55) All V mem (See page 3-56)

Constant. K 0-FFFF 0-FFFF





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-102

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Add Binary Double (ADDBD)

Add Binary Double is a 32-bit instruction that adds the binary

value in the accumulator with the value (Aaaa), which is either

two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8-digit (max.) binary

constant. The result resides in the accumulator.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the

accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is added

with the binary value in V1420 and V1421 using the Add Binary Double instruction. The

value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

ADDBD

A aaa

LDD

V1400

ADDBD

V1420

Thebinaryvalue in the

accumulatorisadded withthe

valueinV1420 and V1421

OUTD

V1500

Copy thevalue in the

accumulatortoV1500

and V1501

111000

010000

(Accumulator)

0 0

00A01

V1500

(V1421 and V1420)

V1400

A11

V1401

V1501

1000

000 C010

Acc.

Load the value in V1400

and V1401 into the

accumulator

LD D

BIN

K2561

Use either OR Constant

V-memory

DirectSOFT

STR

OUT

ADD

SHFT DSHFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

400

214 0

500

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP66 On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP67 On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

A aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V mem (See page 3-56)

Constant. K 0-FFFFFFFF

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-103

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Subtract Binary (SUBB)

The Subtract Binary instruction subtracts a 16-bit number (Aaaa)

from the value stored in the accumulator. The number in the

accumulator can be up to 32 bits long. The source of the 16-bit

operand can be a constant or a data value located in V-memory. Subtract Binary performs the

subtraction operation on the full binary representation of the operands, which distinguishes

it from the Subtract instruction (see page 5-91), which treats the operands as BCD numbers.

Although the subtraction operation is performed on the underlying binary values, the native

display format is hexadecimal. For that reason, you will need to load constants in hex.

The difference (result) of the Subtract Binary operation occupies the full 32 bits of the

accumulator and requires an Out Double to move the value to V-memory. If the value in the

accumulator occupies fewer than 32 bits, leading zeros are loaded in the left-most empty bit

positions of the accumulator.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is subtracted from the binary value in

the accumulator using the Subtract Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied

to V1500 - V1501 using the Out Double instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

SUBB

A aaa

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP64 On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP65 On when the 32-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

HandheldProgr ammerKeystrokes

V1400

SUBB

V1420

Thebinar yval ue in V1420 is

subtracted fr om theval ue in

theaccumulator

OUT

V1500

Copy thevalue in thelow er 16

bits of theaccumulatortoV1500

V1500

(V1420) A0B (Hex) = 2571 (decimal)

1(Accumulator) 1024 (Hex) = 4132 (decimal)

V1400

024

61 9

000 02 4

A0 B

Acc. 619

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

STR1

D1 40 0

OUT1500

14 0

SHFT B

SHFT

ENT

SHFT LENT

ENT

SHFT

Use either OR Constant

V-memory

BIN

K1024

Load the value in V1400

into the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator

DirectSOFT

(Accumulator) 619 (Hex) = 1561 (decimal)

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V-mem (See page 3-55) All V-mem (See page 3-56)

Constant K 0-FFFF 0-FFFF

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-104

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Subtract Binary Double (SUBBD)

Subtract Binary Double is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts

the binary value (Aaaa), which is either two consecutive

V-memory locations or an 8-digit (max) binary constant, from

the binary value in the accumulator. The result resides in the

accumulator.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The binary value in V1420 and V1421

is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract Binary Double

instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out

Double instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

SUBBD

A aaa

LDD

V1400

SUBBD

V1420

Thebinaryvalue in V1420 and

V1421 is subtracted from the

binaryvalue in theaccumulator

OUTD

V1500

Copy theval ue in the

accumulatortoV1500

and V1501

FE0005

FF0006

(V1421 and V1420)

600FF(Accumulator)

V1500

V1400

6FE

V1401

V1501

0005

00 01A01

Acc.

Use either OR Constant

V-memory

LD D

BIN

K393471

Load the value in V1400

and V1401 into the

accumulator

DirectSOFT

STR

SHFT

SHFT SHFT

SHFTOUT

ENT

142

D14

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP64 On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP65 On when the 32-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

A aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V mem (See page 3-56)

Constant K 0-FFFFFFFF

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-105

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Multiply Binary (MULB)

The Multiply Binary instruction multiplies a 16-bit number

A(aaa) by the value stored in the accumulator. The number

in the accumulator can be up to 32 bits long. The source of

the 16-bit operand can be a constant or a data value located

in V-memory. Multiply Binary performs the multiplication operation on the full binary

representation of the operands, which distinguishes it from the Multiply instruction (see page

5-94), which treats the operands as BCD numbers. Although the multiplication operation is

performed on the underlying binary values, the native display format is hexadecimal. For that

reason, you will need to load constants in hex.

The product of the Multiply Binary operation occupies the full 32-bit accumulator and requires

an Out Double to move the product to V-memory. If the value in the accumulator occupies

fewer than 32 bits, leading zeros are loaded in the left-most empty bit positions.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is multiplied by the binary value in the

accumulator using the Multiply Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to

V1500 - V1501 using the Out Double instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

MULB

A aaa

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

HandheldProgrammerKeystrokes

V1400

MULB

V1420

Thebinar yvalue in V1420 is

multipliedbythe binary

valueinthe accumulator

OUTD

V1500

V1400

A01

000 A0 1

02 E

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

2E0001 C

V1500

C2 E

V1501

0001

Acc.

STR1

D1400

15 00

14 0

SHFT B

SHFT D

ENT

SHFT LENT

UL ENT

ENT

Copy the value of the accumulator

to V1500 and V1501

Use either OR Constant

V-memory

BIN

K2561

Load the value in V1400

into the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator

DirectSOFT

(Accumulator) A01 (Hex) = 2561 (decimal)

(V1420) 2E (Hex) = 46 (decimal)

(Accumulator) 1CC2E (Hex) = 117806 (decimal)

(V1500 - V1501 value = 117806 decimal)

OUT

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V mem (See page 3-55) All V mem (See page 3-56)

Constant K 0-FFFF 0-FFFF

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-106

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Divide Binary (DIVB)

The Divide Binary instruction divides a 16-bit number

(Aaaa) into the value stored in the accumulator. The number

in the accumulator can be up to 32 bits long. The source of

the 16-bit divisor can be a constant or a data value located

in V-memory. Divide Binary performs the division operation on the full binary representation

of the operands, which distinguishes it from the Divide instruction (see page 5-97), which

treats the operands as BCD numbers. Although the division operation is performed on the

underlying binary values, the native display format is hexadecimal. For that reason you will

need to load constants in hex.

At the completion of the division operation, the quotient resides in the accumulator and the

remainder resides in the ﬁrst stack location.

The quotient occupies the full 32-bit accumulator and requires an Out Double to move the

quotient to V-memory. If the value in the accumulator occupies fewer than 32 bits, leading

zeros are loaded in the left-most empty bit positions.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is divided by the binary value

in V1420 using the Divide Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to

V1500 using the Out Double instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

DIVB

A aaa

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

V1500

0(Accumulator)F

(V1420)

V1400

A01

320

000 A0 1

05 0

320

Theunusedaccumulator

bits areset to zero

00 10000 0

STR1

D140 0

OUTV1500

14 0

SHFT B

SHFT

ENT

SHFT LENT

IV ENT

ENT

0000

V1501

FA01 (Hex) = 64001 (decimal)

50 (Hex) = 80 (decimal)

320 (Hex) = 800 (decimal)

1 (Hex) = 1 (decimal)

(Accumulator)

Top of stack holds remainder

V1400

DIVB

V1420

Thebinaryvalue in the

accumulatorisdivided by

thebinar yvalue in V1420

OUT

V1500

Copy thevalue in thelow er 16

bits of theaccumulatortoV1500

Use either OR Constant

V-memory

LD D

BIN

K64001

Load the value in V1400

into the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V mem (See page 3-55) All V mem (See page 3-56)

Constant K 0-FFFF 0-FFFF

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-107

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Increment Binary (INCB)

The Increment Binary instruction increments a binary value in

a speciﬁed V-memory location by “1” each time the instruction

is executed.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when C5 is on, the binary value in V2000 is increased by 1.



230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3 - 53) All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P -All V-memory

(See page 3-54) All V-memory

(See page 3-55) All V-memory

(See page 3-56)

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

C5 INCB

V2000

Increment the binary value

in V2000 by “1”

4A3C

4A3D

STR

SHFT ENT

SHFT 8

TMR

AENT

V2000

DS Used

HPP Used

INCB

A aaa

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-108

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Decrement Binary (DECB)

The Decrement Binary instruction decrements a binary

value in a speciﬁed V-memory location by “1” each time the

instruction is executed.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂag is executed.

In the following example, when C5 is on, the value in V2000 is decreased by 1.



230

240

250-1

260

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

C5 DECB

V2000

Decrement the binary value

in V2000 by “1”

V2000

4A3C?

V2000

4A3B?

STR

SHFT ENT

SHFT 2

AENT

SHFT

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3 - 53) All (See page 3 - 54) All (See page 3 - 55) All (See page 3 - 56)

Pointer P -All V-memory

(See page 3 - 54) All V-memory

(See page 3 - 55) All V-memory

(See page 3 - 56)

DS Used

HPP Used

A aaa

DECB

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-109

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Add Formatted (ADDF)

Add Formatted is a 32-bit instruction that adds the BCD value

in the accumulator with the BCD value (Aaaa), which is a range

of discrete bits. The speciﬁed range (Kbbb) can be 1 to 32

consecutive bits. The result resides in the accumulator.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X0–X3 is

loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value formed by

discrete locations C0–C3 is added to the value in the accumulator using the Add Formatted

instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–Y13 using

the Out Formatted instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

ADDF A aaa

K bbb

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

A aaa bbb

Inputs X 0-1777 -

Outputs Y 0-1777 -

Control Relays C 0-3777 -

Stage Bits S 0-1777 -

Timer Bits T 0-377 -

Counter Bits CT 0-377 -

Special Relays SP 0-777 -

Global I/O GX/GY 0-3777 -

Constant K -1-32

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP66 On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP67 On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

DirectSOFT

LDF X0

X6 Load the BCD value represented

by discrete locations X0–X3

into the accumulator

ADDF C0

Add the BCD value in the

accumulator with the value

represented by discrete

location C0–C3

OUTF Y10

Copy the lower 4 bits of the

accumulator to discrete

locations Y10–Y13

0000000 8

(C0-C3)

(Accumulator)

X0X1X2X3

OFFOFF

OFF

C0C1C2C3

ONONOFFOFF

Y10Y11Y12Y13

ONOFFOFFOFF

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

Acc.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT 3

OUT

GX SHFT 5

EENT

GENT

AENT

SHFT ANDST

EENT

ANEXT NEXT NEXTNEXT

01100 000

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-110

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Subtract Formatted (SUBF)

Subtract Formatted is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts the

BCD value (Aaaa), which is a range of discrete bits, from the

BCD value in the accumulator. The speciﬁed range (Kbbb)

can be 1 to 32 consecutive bits. The result resides in the

accumulator.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X0–X3 is

loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value formed by

discrete location C0–C3 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator using the Subtract

Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–

Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

SUBF A aaa

K bbb

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP64 On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP65 On when the 32-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

LDFX0

SUBF C0

OUTF Y10

Copy thelower 4bitsofthe

accumulatortodiscrete

locations Y10--Y13

010000 0

000

00009

(C0--C3)

(Accumulator)

X0X1X2X3

ONOFFOFFON

C0C1C2C3

OFFOFFOFFON

Y10Y11Y12Y13

ONOFFOFFOFF

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

ACC.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ISG

OUT

GX SHFT 5

EENT

GENT

AENT

SHFT ANDST

EENT

RST

SNEXT NEXT NEXTNEXT

SHFT

Load the BCD value represented

by discrete locations X0-X3 into

the accumulator

Subtract the BCD value

represented by C0-C3 from

the value in the accumulator

DirectSOFT

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

A aaa bbb

Inputs X 0-1777 -

Outputs Y 0-1777 -

Control Relays C 0-3777 -

Stage Bits S 0-1777 -

Timer Bits T 0-377 -

Counter Bits CT 0-377 -

Special Relays SP 0-777 -

Global I/O GX/GY 0-3777 -

Constant K -1-32

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-111

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Multiply Formatted (MULF)

Multiply Formatted is a 16-bit instruction that multiplies the

BCD value in the accumulator by the BCD value (Aaaa) which

is a range of discrete bits. The speciﬁed range (Kbbb) can be 1

to 16 consecutive bits. The result resides in the accumulator.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X0–X3 is

loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value formed by

discrete locations C0–C3 is multiplied by the value in the accumulator using the Multiply

Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–

Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

MULF A aaa

K bbb

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

LDFX0

X6 Load thevalue repr esented

by discretelocations X0 --X3

into theaccumulator

MULF C0

Multiply theval ue in the

accumulatorwiththe value

represented by discrete

locations C0--C3

OUTF Y10

Copy thelow er 4bitsofthe

accumulatortodiscrete

locations Y10--Y13

060000 0

000

00003

(C0--C3)

(Accumulator)

X0X1X2X3

ONONOFFOFF

C0C1C2C3

OFFONOFFOFF

Y10Y11Y12Y13

OFFONONOFF

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

Acc.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ISG

ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 5

EENT

GENT

AENT

SHFT ANDST

EENT

ORST

MNEXT NEXT NEXTNEXT

DirectSOFT

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

A aaa bbb

Inputs X 0-1777 -

Outputs Y 0-1777 -

Control Relays C 0-3777 -

Stage Bits S 0-1777 -

Timer Bits T 0-377 -

Counter Bits CT 0-377 -

Special Relays SP 0-777 -

Global I/O GX/GY 0-3777 -

Constant K -1-16

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-112

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Divide Formatted (DIVF)

Divide Formatted is a 16-bit instruction that divides the BCD

value in the accumuator by the BCD value (Aaaa), a range

of discrete bits. The speciﬁed range (Kbbb) can be 1 to 16

consecutive bits. The ﬁrst part of the quotient resides in the

accumulator and the remainder resides in the ﬁrst stack location.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X0–X3

is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value in the

accumulator is divided by the value formed by discrete location C0–C3 using the Divide

Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–

Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

DIVF A aaa

K bbb

LDFX0

X6 Load theval ue repr esented

by discretelocations X0 --X3

into theaccumulator

DIVF C0

Dividethe valueinthe

accumulatorwiththe value

represented by di screte

location C0--C3

OUTF Y10

Copy thelower 4bitsofthe

accumulatortodiscrete

locations Y10--Y13

040000 0

000

0000 8

(C0--C3)

(Accumulator)

X0X1X2X3

OFFOFFOFFON

C0C1C2C3

OFFONOFFOFF

Y10Y11Y12Y13

OFFOFFONOFF

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

00 00000 0

Fi rststack location contai ns

therem ai nd er

Acc.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT 8

AND

OUT

GX SHFT 5

EENT

GENT

AENT

SHFT ANDST

EENT

DNEXT NEXT NEXTNEXT

DirectSOFT

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

A aaa bbb

Inputs X 0-1777 -

Outputs Y 0-1777 -

Control Relays C 0-3777 -

Stage Bits S 0-1777 -

Timer Bits T 0-377 -

Counter Bits CT 0-377 -

Special Relays SP 0-777 -

Global I/O GX/GY 0-3777 -

Constant K -1-16

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-113

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Add Top of Stack (ADDS)

Add Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that adds the BCD

value in the accumulator with the BCD value in the ﬁrst

level of the accumulator stack. The result resides in the

accumulator. The value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack is removed and all stack values are moved up one level.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded

into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded

in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack is added with the value in the accumulator using the Add Stack instruction. The value in

the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

ADDS

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP66 On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carr

SP67 On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry.

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negativ.

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

LDD

V1400

X1 Load thevalue in V1400 and

V1401 into theaccumulator

LDD

V1420

Load thevalue in V1420 and

V1421 into theaccumulator

OUTD

V1500

Copy thevalue in the

accumulatortoV1500

and V1501

XXXX

Level 1

XXXX

Level 2

XXXX

Level 3

XXXX

Level 4

XXXX

Level 5

XXXX

Level 6

XXXX

Level 7

XXXX

Level 8

0039

5026

Level 1

XXXX

Level 2

XXXX

Level 3

XXXX

Level 4

XXXX

Level 5

XXXX

Level 6

XXXX

Level 7

XXXX

Level 8

ADDS Addthe valueinthe

accumulatorwiththe value

in thefirst levelofthe

accumulatorstack

Acc.

V1400

5026

0039 5026

V1401

0039

Acc.

V1420

2056

0017 2056

V1421

0017

Accumulatorstack

after1st LDD

Accumulatorstack

after2nd LD D

Acc. 0056 7082

0056 7082

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT 3

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

BENT

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

RST

V1501 V1500

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-114

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Subtract Top of Stack (SUBS)

Subtract Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts

the BCD value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack from

the BCD value in the accumulator. The result resides in the

accumulator. The value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack is removed and all stack values are moved up one level.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded

into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded

into the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The BCD value in the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack is subtracted from the BCD value in the accumulator using the Subtract

Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out

Double instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

SUBS

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP64 On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP65 On when the 32-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

LDD

V1400

X1 Load thevalue in V1400 and

V1401 into theaccumulator

LDD

V1420

Load thevalue in V1420 and

V1421 into theaccumulator

OUTD

V1500

Copy thevalue in the

accumulatortoV1500

and V1501

XXXXXXXXLevel 1

XXXXXXXXLevel 2

XXXXXXXXLevel 3

XXXXXXXXLevel 4

XXXXXXXXLevel 5

XXXXXXXXLevel 6

XXXXXXXXLevel 7

XXXXXXXXLevel 8

00172056Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXXLevel 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXXLevel 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXXLevel 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

SUBS Subtract theval ue in thefirst

levelofthe accumulator

stackfromthe valueinthe

accumulator

Acc.

V1400

2056

0017 2056

V1401

0017

Acc.

V1420

5026

0039 5026

V1421

0039

Accumulatorstack

after1st LDD

Accumulatorstack

after2nd LD D

Acc. 0022 2970

0022 2970

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT ISG

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

BENT

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

RST

SSHFT

V1501 V1500

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-115

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Multiply Top of Stack (MULS)

Multiply Top of Stack is a 16-bit instruction that multiplies a

4-digit BCD value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack by

a 4-digit BCD value in the accumulator. The result resides in

the accumulator. The value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack is is removed, and all stack values are moved up one level.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load

instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator

stack. The BCD value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack is multiplied by the BCD

value in the accumulator using the Multiply Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator

is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

MULS

V1400

X1 Load thevalue in V1400 into

theaccumulator

V1420

Load thevalue in V1420 into

theaccumulator

OUTD

V1500

Copy thevalue in the

accumulatortoV1500

and V1501

XXXX

Level 1

XXXX

Level 2

XXXX

Level 3

XXXX

Level 4

XXXX

Level 5

XXXX

Level 6

XXXX

Level 7

XXXX

Level 8

00005

000

Level 1

XXXX

Level 2

XXXX

Level 3

XXXX

Level 4

XXXX

Level 5

XXXX

Level 6

XXXX

Level 7

XXXX

Level 8

MULS Multiply thevalue in

theaccumulatorwiththe

valueinthe firstlevel

of theaccumulatorstack

Acc.

V1400

5000

0000 5000

Acc.

V1420

0200

0000 0200

Accumulatorstack

after1st LDD

Accumulatorstack

after2nd LDD

Acc. 0100 0000

0100 0000

V1500V1501

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT ORST

ISG

ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

BENT

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

RST

ENT

DirectSOFT

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-116

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Divide by Top of Stack (DIVS)

Divide Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that divides the

8-digit BCD value in the accumulator by a 4-digit BCD

value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack. The result

resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the

ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the Load instruction loads the value in V1400 into

the accumulator. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double

instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator

stack. The BCD value in the accumulator is divided by the BCD value in the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack using the Divide Stack instruction. The Out Double instruction copies the

value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501.





230

240

250-1

260

DIVS

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zer

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

V1400

X1 Load thevalue in V1400 into

theaccumulator

LDD

V1420

Load the value V1420 and

V1421 into the accumulator

OUTD

V1500

Copy thevalue in the

accumulatortoV1500

and V1501

XXXXXXXXLevel 1

XXXXXXXXLevel 2

XXXXXXXXLevel 3

XXXXXXXXLevel 4

XXXXXXXXLevel 5

XXXXXXXXLevel 6

XXXXXXXXLevel 7

XXXXXXXXLevel 8

00000020Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXXLevel 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXXLevel 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXXLevel 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

DIVS Divide the value in the

accumulator by the value in

the first level of the

accumulator stack

Acc.

V1400

0020

0000 0020

Acc.

V1420

0000

0050 0000

Accumulatorstack

after1st LDD

Accumulatorstack

after2nd LDD

Acc. 0002 5000

0002 5000

V1500V1501

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT 3

AND

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

BENT

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

RST

ENT

V1421

0050

00000000Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXXLevel 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXXLevel 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXXLevel 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

The remainder resides in the

first stack location

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-117

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Add Binary Top of Stack (ADDBS)

Add Binary Top of Stack instruction is a 32-bit instruction

that adds the binary value in the accumulator with the

binary value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack.

The result resides in the accumulator. The value in the

ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack is removed, and all stack

values are moved up one level.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the

accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the

accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The binary value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack is added with the binary value in the accumulator using the Add Stack instruction. The

value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

ADDBS

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP66 On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP67 On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit

LDD

V1400

X1 Load thevalue in V1400 and

V1401 into theaccumulator

LDD

V1420

Load thevalue in V1420 and

V1421 into theaccumulator

OUTD

V1500

Copy thevalue in the

accumulatortoV1500

and V1501

XXXXXXXXLevel 1

XXXXXXXXLevel 2

XXXXXXXXLevel 3

XXXXXXXXLevel 4

XXXXXXXXLevel 5

XXXXXXXXLevel 6

XXXXXXXXLevel 7

XXXXXXXXLevel 8

003A50C6Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXXLevel 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXXLevel 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXXLevel 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

ADDBSAddthe binar yvalue in the

accumulatorwiththe binar y

valueinthe firstlevel of the

accumulatorstack

Acc.

V1400

50C6

003A 50C6

V1401

003A

Acc.

V1420

B05F

0017 B05F

V1421

0017

Accumulatorstack

after1st LDD

Accumulatorstack

after2nd LD D

Acc. 0052 0125

0052 0125

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT 3

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

BENT

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

RST

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-118

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Subtract Binary Top of Stack (SUBBS)

Subtract Binary Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that

subtracts the binary value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack from the binary value in the accumulator. The result

resides in the accumulator. The value in the ﬁrst level of

the accumulator stack is removed, and all stack locations are

moved up one level.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded

into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded

in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The binary value in the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract

Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out

Double instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

SUBBS

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP64 On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP65 On when the 32-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

LDD

V1400

X1 Load thevalue in V1400 and

V1401 into theaccumulator

LDD

V1420

Load thevalue in V1420 and

V1421 into theaccumulator

OUTD

V1500

Copy thevalue in the

accumulatortoV1500

and V1501

XXXX

Level 1

XXXX

Level 2

XXXX

Level 3

XXXX

Level 4

XXXX

Level 5

XXXX

Level 6

XXXX

Level 7

XXXX

Level 8

001A

205B

Level 1

XXXX

Level 2

XXXX

Level 3

XXXX

Level 4

XXXX

Level 5

XXXX

Level 6

XXXX

Level 7

XXXX

Level 8

SUBBS Subtract thebinar yval ue in

thefirst levelofthe

accumulatorstack from the

binaryval ue in the

accumulator

Acc.

V1400

205B

001A 205B

V1401

001A

Acc.

V1420

50C6

003A 50C6

V1421

003A

Accumulatorstack

after1st LDD

Accumulatorstack

after2nd LDD

Acc. 0020 306B

0020 306B

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT ISG

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

BENT

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

RST

SSHFT

V1501 V1500

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-119

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Multiply Binary Top of Stack (MULBS)

Multiply Binary Top of Stack is a 16-bit instruction that

multiplies the 16-bit binary value in the ﬁrst level of

the accumulator stack by the 16-bit binary value in the

accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator and can

be 32 bits (8 digits maximum). The value in the ﬁrst level of

the accumulator stack is removed, and all stack locations are

moved up one level.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the Load instruction moves the value in V1400

into the accumulator. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load

instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the stack. The binary

value in the accumulator stack’s ﬁrst level is multiplied by the binary value in the accumulator

using the Multiply Binary Stack instruction. The Out Double instruction copies the value in

the accumulator to V1500 and V1501.





230

240

250-1

260

MULBS

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

V1400

X1 Load thevalue in V1400 into

theaccumulator

V1420

Load thevalue in V1420 into

theaccumulator

OUTD

V1500

Copy thevalue in the

accumulatortoV1500

and V1501

XXXX

Level 1

XXXX

Level 2

XXXX

Level 3

XXXX

Level 4

XXXX

Level 5

XXXX

Level 6

XXXX

Level 7

XXXX

Level 8

0000C

350

Level 1

XXXX

Level 2

XXXX

Level 3

XXXX

Level 4

XXXX

Level 5

XXXX

Level 6

XXXX

Level 7

XXXX

Level 8

MULBSMultiply thebinaryvalue in

theaccumulatorwiththe

binaryvalue in thefirst level

of theaccumulatorstack

Acc.

V1400

C350

0000 C350

Acc.

V1420

0014

0000 0014

Accumulatorstack

after1st LDD

Accumulatorstack

after2nd LDD

Acc. 000F 4240

000F 4240

V1500V1501

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT ORST

ISG

ANDST

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

BENT

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

RST

ENT

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-120

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Divide Binary by Top of Stack (DIVBS)

Divide Binary Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that divides

the 32-bit binary value in the accumulator by the 16-bit binary

value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack. The result

resides in the accumulator. and the remainder resides in the

ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator

onto the accumulator stack. The binary value in the accumulator is divided by the binary value

in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack using the Divide Binary Stack instruction. The value

in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

DIVBS

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

V1400

X1 Load thevalue in V1400 into

theaccumulator

LDD

V1420

Load thevalue in V1420 and

V1421 into theaccumulator

OUTD

V1500

Copy thevalue in the

accumulatortoV1500

and V1501

XXXXXXXXLevel 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXXLevel 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXXLevel 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXXLevel 7

XXXXXXXXLevel 8

00000014Level 1

XXXXXXXX

Level 2

XXXXXXXXLevel 3

XXXXXXXX

Level 4

XXXXXXXXLevel 5

XXXXXXXX

Level 6

XXXXXXXXLevel 7

XXXXXXXX

Level 8

DIVBS Dividethe binar yvalue in

theaccumulatorbythe

binaryvalue in thefirst level

of theaccumulatorstack

Acc.

0014

0000 0014

Acc.

V1420

C350

0000 C350

V1421

0000

ccumulatorstack

after1st LDD

Accumulatorstack

after2nd LDD

Acc. 0000 09C4

0000 09C4

V1500V1501

Theunused accumulator

bits areset to zero

00000000

Level 1

XXXXXXXXLevel 2

XXXXXXXX

Level 3

XXXXXXXXLevel 4

XXXXXXXX

Level 5

XXXXXXXXLevel 6

XXXXXXXX

Level 7

XXXXXXXXLevel 8

Theremai nder resides in the

firststack location

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT 3

AND

OUT

GX SHFT 3

AENT

BENT

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

RST

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-121

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Transcendental Functions (DL260 only)

The DL260 CPU features special numerical functions to complement its real number

capability. The transcendental functions include the trigonometric sine, cosine, and tangent,

and also their inverses (arc sine, arc cosine, and arc tangent). The square root function is also

grouped with these other functions.

The transcendental math instructions operate on a real number in the accumulator (it cannot

be BCD or binary). The real number result resides in the accumulator. The square root

function operates on the full range of positive real numbers. The sine, cosine and tangent

functions require numbers expressed in radians. You can work with angles expressed in degrees

by ﬁrst converting them to radians with the Radian (RADR) instruction, then performing the

trig function. All transcendental functions utilize the following ﬂag bits.

Sine Real (SINR)

The Sine Real instruction takes the sine of the real number stored

in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator. Both

the original number and the result are in IEEE 32-bit format.

Cosine Real (COSR)

The Cosine Real instruction takes the cosine of the real number

stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.

Both the original number and the result are in IEEE 32-bit

format.

Tangent Real (TANR)

The Tangent Real instruction takes the tangent of the real

number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the

accumulator. Both the original number and the result are in

IEEE 32-bit format.

Arc Sine Real (ASINR)

The Arc Sine Real instruction takes the inverse sine of the real

number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the

accumulator. Both the original number and the result are in

IEEE 32-bit format.

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid ﬂoating point number

SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit

SP75 On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was encountered

Math Function Range of Argument

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with

SINR

TANR

Standard RLL

Instructions

COSR

ASINR

DS Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-122

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Arc Cosine Real (ACOSR)

The Arc Cosine Real instruction takes the inverse cosine of the

real number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the

accumulator. Both the original number and the result are in

IEEE 32-bit format.

Arc Tangent Real (ATANR)

The Arc Tangent Real instruction takes the inverse tangent of

the real number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in

the accumulator. Both the original number and the result are in

IEEE 32-bit format.

Square Root Real (SQRTR)

The Square Root Real instruction takes the square root of the

real number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in

the accumulator. Both the original number and the result are in

IEEE 32-bit format.

NOTE: The square root function can be useful in several situations. However, if you are trying to do the

square-root extract function for an oriﬁce ﬂow meter measurement as the PV to a PID loop, note that the PID

loop already has the square-root extract function built in.

The following example takes the sine of 45 degrees. Since these transcendental functions

operate only on real numbers, we do a LDR (Load Real) 45. The trig functions operate only

in radians, so we must convert the degrees to radians by using the RADR command. After

using the SINR (Sine Real) instruction, we use an OUTD (Out Double) instruction to move

the result from the accumulator to V-memory. The result is 32-bits wide, requiring the Out

Double to move it.

NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE

format. You must use DirectSOFT for entering real numbers, using the LDR (Load Real) instruction.

ACOSR

ATANR

SQRTR

LDR

R45

X1 Load the real number 45

into the accumulator.

RADR Convert the degrees into

radians, leaving the result

in the accumulator.

OUTD

V2000

Copy the valus in the

accumulator to V2000

and V2001.

45.000000

0.7853981

SINR Ta ke the sine of the number

in the accumulator, which

is in radians.

0.7071067

DirectSOFT

Accumulator contents

(viewed as real number)

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-123

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Bit Operation Instructions

Sum (SUM)

The Sum instruction counts the number of bits that are set to “1”

in the accumulator. The HEX result resides in the accumulator.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X10–X17 is

loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The number of bits in the

accumulator set to “1” is counted using the Sum instruction. The value in the accumulator is

copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

SUM

DirectSOFT

LDF X10

Load the value represented by

discrete locations X10–X17

into the accumulator

SUM

Sum the number of bits in

the accumulator set to “1”

OUT

V1500

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator

to V1500

X10X11X12X13

ONONOFFON

X14X15X16X17

OFFOFFONON

00000000110010110000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

V1500

Acc.

0005

0000 0005

The unused accumulator

bits are set to zero

STR

$ENT

SHFT ANDST

SHFT RST

ISG

ORST

MENT

IENT

SHFT

OUT

GX PREV 1

AENTPREV PREV

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Math Function Range of Argument

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-124

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Shift Left (SHFL)

Shift Left is a 32-bit instruction that shifts the bits in the

accumulator a speciﬁed number (Aaaa) of places to the left. The

vacant positions are ﬁlled with zeros, and the bits shifted out of

the accumulator are lost.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is

shifted 10 bits to the left using the Shift Left instruction. The value in the accumulator is

copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.



230

240

250-1

260

SHFL

A aaa

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-53) All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Constant K 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-32

Standard RLL

Instructions

ENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Direct SOFT

LDD

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

SHFL

K10

The bit pattern in the

accumulator is shifted 10 bit

positions to the left

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

0011000100000001

V2010

00000000000010000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654321031 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

0110011100000101

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

cc

V2011

C14

6705 3101

Shifted out of the

accumulator

V2000V2001

STR



SHFT NDST

SHFT RST

NDST

OUT

X SHFT 3

ENT



ENT



ENT

SHFT

0011000100 000001

000101 000



1

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-125

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Shift Right (SHFR)

Shift Right is a 32-bit instruction that shifts the bits in the

accumulator a speciﬁed number (Aaaa) of places to the right.

The vacant positions are ﬁlled with zeros, and the bits shifted out

of the accumulator are lost.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is

shifted 10 bits to the right using the Shift Right instruction. The value in the accumulator is

copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.



230

240

250-1

260

SHFR

A aaa

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-53) All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Constant K 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-32

Standard RLL

Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Direct SOFT

LDD

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

SHFR

K10

The bit pattern in the

accumulator is shifted 10 bit

positions to the right

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

0011000100000001

V2010

01001100

0000010000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654321031 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

C14

0000 1100111 000001

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

0110011100000101

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

cc

V2011

Constant 6705 3101

Shifted out of the

accumulator

V2001 V2000

STR



SHFT DST

SHFT RST

FT

OUT

X SHFT 3

OR

SHFT

T



T



T

000000



DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-126

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Rotate Left (ROTL)

Rotate Left is a 32-bit instruction that rotates the bits in the

accumulator a speciﬁed number (Aaaa) of places to the left.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the

accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is rotated

2 bit positions to the left using the Rotate Left instruction. The value in the accumulator is

copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.

ROTL

A aaa

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Constant K 1-32 1-32

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT ORN

MLR

ANDST

LENT

OUT

GX SHFT 3

BENT

INST#

ENT

AENT

X1 LDD

V1400

ROTL

OUTD

V1500

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

The bit pattern in the

accumulator is rotated 2

bit positions to the left

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500

and V1501

00000000001 11111

161819202122232425262728293031

9C14

V1501

Acc.

10000000010 010

023456789101112131415

C405

V1500

10000011110 00011 10000010100 001

17 161819202122232425262728293031

23456789101112131415

67 05 31 01

V1401 V1400





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-127

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Rotate Right (ROTR)

Rotate Right is a 32-bit instruction that rotates the bits in the

accumulator a speciﬁed number (Aaaa) of places to the right.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the

accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is rotated

2 bit positions to the right using the Rotate Right instruction. The value in the accumulator is

copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.

ROTR

A aaa

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Constant K 1-32 1-32

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

LDD

V1400

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

ROTR

The bit pattern in the

accumulator is rotated 2

bit positions to the right

OUTD

V1500

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V1500

and V1501

0011

000100000001

V1500

01001100010000000000010000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654321031 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

4C40

0101100111000001

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

0110011100000101

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

V1501

59C1

6705 3101

V1400V1401

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT ORN

MLR

ORN

RENT

OUT

GX SHFT 3

BENT

INST#

ENT

AENT





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-128

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Encode (ENCO)

The Encode instruction encodes the bit position in the

accumulator having a value of 1, and returns the appropriate

binary representation. If the most signiﬁcant bit is set to

1 (Bit 31), the Encode instruction would place the value

HEX 1F (decimal 31) in the accumulator. If the value to be

encoded is 0000 or 0001, the instruction will place a zero in the accumulator. If the value to

be encoded has more than one bit position set to a “1”, the least signiﬁcant “1” will be encoded

and SP53 will be set on.

NOTE: The status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, The value in V2000 is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The bit position set to a “1” in the accumulator is encoded to the

corresponding 5-bit binary value using the Encode instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out instruction.



230

240

250-1

260

ENCO

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator

ENCO

Encode the bit position set

to “1” in the accumulator to a

5 bit binary value

00010000000000000000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

00000000000011 000000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

V2000

1000

Bit postion 12 is

converted

to binary

Copy the value in the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator to V2010

OUT

V2010

000C

Binary value

for 12.

STR

BENT

SHFT

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

TMR

INST#

OENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

V2010

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-129

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Decode (DECO)

The Decode instruction decodes a 5-bit binary value of 0 to 31

(0 to 1F HEX) in the accumulator by setting the appropriate bit

position to a 1. If the accumulator contains the value F (HEX),

bit 15 will be set in the accumulator. If the value to be decoded

is greater than 31, the number is divided by 32 until the value is

less than 32 and then the value is decoded.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X10–X14 is

loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The 5-bit binary pattern in

the accumulator is decoded by setting the corresponding bit position to a “1” using the Decode

instruction.



230

240

250-1

260

DECO

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

LDF X10

Load the value in

represented by discrete

locations X10–X14 into the

accumulator

DECO

Decode the five bit binary

pattern in the accumulator

and set the corresponding

bit position to a “1”

OFF

00000000000010110000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

00001000000000000000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

The binary vlaue

is converted to

bit position 11.

STR

$ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

SHFT 2

INST#

OENT

ON OFF ON ON

X14 X13 X12 X11 X10

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-130

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator)

Binary (BIN)

The Binary instruction converts a BCD value in the

accumulator to the equivalent binary value. The result resides

in the accumulator.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000

and V2001 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The BCD value

in the accumulator is converted to the binary (HEX) equivalent using the BIN instruction.

The binary value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double

instruction. (The Handheld Programmer will display the binary value in V2010 and V2011

as a HEX value.)



230

240

250-1

260

BIN

STR

OUT

GX SHFT 3

BENT

0000 6F71

V2010V2011

HandheldProgrammerKeystrokes

LDD

V2000

BIN

10000101001010010000000000000010

84218421842184218421842184218421

Acc.

0002 8529

V2000V2001

01101111011100010000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654321031 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

12481

OUTD

V2010

28529 =16384 +8192 +2048 +1024 +512 +256 +64+32 +16+1

BENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

SHFT 1

TMR

NENT

Copy the binary data in the

accumulator to V2010 and V2011

Convert the BCD value in

the accumulator to the

binary equivalent value

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

BCD Value

Binary Equivalent Value

The Binary (HEX)

value copied to

V2010

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-131

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)

The Binary Coded Decimal instruction converts a binary value

in the accumulator to the equivalent BCD value. The result

resides in the accumulator.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary (HEX)

value in V2000 and V2001 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction.

The binary value in the accumulator is converted to the BCD equivalent value using the BCD

instruction. The BCD value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out

Double instruction.



230

240

250-1

260

BCD

HandheldProgrammerKeystrokes

LDD

V2000

Load theval ue in V2000 and

V2001 into theaccumulator

BCD

Convertthe binar yvalue in

theaccumulatortothe BCD

equivalent value

01101111011100010000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 98765 4321031 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

0000 6F71

V2000V2001

BCDEquivalent Va lue

BinaryValue

10000101001010010000000000000010Acc.

12481

Copy theBCD valueinthe

accumulatortoV2010 and V2011

OUTD

V2010

TheBCD value

copied to

V2010 and V2011

0002 8529

V2010V2011

8421842184218421

16384 +8192 +2048 +1024 +512 +256 +64+32 +16+ 1=28529

STR

BENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

SHFT 1

BENT

OUT

GX SHFT 2

AENT

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-132

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Invert (INV)

The Invert instruction inverts or takes the one’s complement

of the 32-bit value in the accumulator. The result resides in

the accumulator.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is inverted

using the Invert instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011

using the Out Double instruction.



230

240

250-1

260

INV

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

LDD

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

INV

Invert the binary bit pattern

in the accumulator

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

0000001001010000

0000010000000101

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654

3210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

04050250 0250

V2000V2001

V2010V2011

11 111 1011

0101111

11 11 101111111010

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654

3210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

FBFAFDAF

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT ENT

OUT

GX SHFT 3

TMR

AND

BENT

AENT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-133

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Ten’s Complement (BCDCPL)

The Ten’s Complement instruction takes the 10’s complement

(BCD) of the 8-digit accumulator. The result resides in the

accumulator. The calculation for this instruction is :

In the following example when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 is loaded into the

accumulator. The 10’s complement is taken for the 8-digit accumulator using the Ten’s

Complement instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using

the Out Double instruction.



230

240

250-1

260

BCDCPL

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

LDD

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

BCDCPL

Takes a 10’s complement of

the value in the accumulator

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

Acc.

V2000

0087

0000 0087

V2001

0000

V2010

Acc.

9913

9999 9913

V2011

9999

STR

BENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

SHFT ENT

OUT

GX SHFT 2

AENT

ANDST

100000000

— accumulator value

10’s complement value

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-134

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Binary to Real Conversion (BTOR)

The Binary-to-Real instruction converts a binary value in the

accumulator to its equivalent real number (ﬂoating point)

format. The result resides in the accumulator. Both the binary

and the real number may use all 32 bits of the accumulator.

NOTE: This instruction only works with unsigned binary, or decimal values. It will not work with signed

decimal values.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the

accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The BTOR instruction converts the binary

value in the accumulator the equivalent real number format. The binary weight of the MSB

is converted to the real number exponent by adding it to 127 (decimal). Then the remaining

bits are copied to the mantissa as shown. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500

and V1501 using the Out Double instruction. The Handheld Programmer would display the

binary value in V1500 and V1501 as a HEX value.

BTOR

48AE4820

V1500V1501

LDD

V1400

Load thevalue in V1400 and

V1401 into theaccumulator

BTOR

Conver tthe binar yval ue in

theaccumulatortothe real

number equivalent format

01110010001000010000000000000101

84218421842184218421842184218421

Acc.

0005 7241

V1400V1401

BinaryValue

Copy thereal valueinthe

accumulatortoV1500 and V1501

OUTD

V1500

Thereal num ber(HEX) value

copied to V1500

00101000001000000100100010101110Acc.

Real Number Format

Mantissa (23bits)Exponent (8 bits)Sign Bit

2(exp18)

127 +18=145

145 =128 +16+1

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT 1

MLR

ORN

RENT

OUT

GX SHFT 3

BENT

INST#

ENT

AENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-135

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Real to Binary Conversion (RTOB)

The Real-to-Binary instruction converts the real number in

the accumulator to a binary value. The result resides in the

accumulator. Both the binary and the real number may use all

32 bits of the accumulator.

NOTE1: The decimal portion of the result will be rounded down (14.1 to 14 or - 14.1 to -15).

NOTE2: If the real number is negative, it becomes a signed decimal value.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the

accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The RTOB instruction converts the real

value in the accumulator the equivalent binary number format. The value in the accumulator

is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction. The Handheld Programmer

would display the binary value in V1500 and V1501 as a HEX value.

RTOB

Standard RLL

Instructions

V1400V1401

DirectSOFT

LDD

V1400

Load the value in V1400 and

V1401 into the accumulator

RTOB

Convert the real number in

the accumulator to binary

format.

01110010001000010000000000000101

8421842184218421

Acc.

V1500V1501

Binary Value

Copy the real value in the

accumulator to V1500 and V1501

OUTD

V1500

00101000001000000100100010101110

Acc.

Real umber Format

antia 2 bitponent 8 bitSin Bit

2 ep 18

12  18  145

128  1  1  145

STR



SFT ADST



SFT 1

LR

OR

RT

OUT

X SFT 

BT

ST

T



AT

andheld rorammer eytroe

48 284A0

00 42501

The binary number copied to V1400





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid ﬂoating point number

SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit.

SP75 On when a number cannot be converted to binary

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-136

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Radian Real Conversion (RADR)

The Radian Real Conversion instruction converts the real

degree value stored in the accumulator to the equivalent real

number in radians. The result resides in the accumulator.

Degree Real Conversion (DEGR)

The Degree Real instruction converts the degree real radian

value stored in the accumulator to the equivalent real number

in degrees. The result resides in the accumulator.

The two instructions described above convert real numbers in

the accumulator from degree format to radian format, and visa-

versa. In degree format, a circle contains 360 degrees. In radian format, a circle contains 2

P. These convert between both positive and negative real numbers, and for angles greater

than a full circle. These functions are very useful when combined with the transcendental

trigonometric functions (see the section on math instructions).

NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE

format. You must use DirectSOFT for entering real numbers, using the LDR (Load Real) instruction.

The following example takes the sine of 45 degrees. Since transcendental functions operate

only on real numbers, we do a LDR (Load Real) 45. The trig functions operate only in radians,

so we must convert the degrees to radians by using the RADR command. After using the SINR

(Sine Real) instruction, we use an OUTD (Out Double) instruction to move the result from

the accumulator to V-memory. The result is 32-bits wide, requiring the Out Double to move

it.

RADR





230

240

250-1

260

DEGR





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

SP71 On anytime the V-memory speciﬁed by a pointer (P) is not valid

SP72 On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid ﬂoating point number

SP74 On anytime a ﬂoating point math operation results in an underﬂow error

SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered

LDR

R45

X1 Load thereal number 45 into

theaccumulator.

RADR Conver tthe degr ees into radians,

leavingthe result in the

accumulator.

OUTD

V2000

Copy theval ue in the

accumulatortoV2000

and V2001.

45.000000

Accumulatorcontents

(viewedasreal number)

0.7853982

SINR Take thesineofthe num ber in

theaccumulator, whichisin

radians.

0.7071067

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-137

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ASCII to HEX (ATH)

The ASCII TO HEX instruction converts a table of ASCII

values to a speciﬁed table of HEX values. ASCII values are

two digits and their HEX equivalents are one digit.

This means an ASCII table of four V-memory locations would only require two V-memory

locations for the equivalent HEX table. The function parameters are loaded into the

accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed below are the

steps necessary to program an ASCII to HEX table function. The example on the following

page shows a program for the ASCII to HEX table function.

Step 1: Load the number of V-memory locations for the ASCII table into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the ASCII table into the accumulator. This

parameter must be a HEX value.

Step 3: Specify the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the HEX table in the ATH instruction.

Helpful hint: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations,

the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load

the value into the accumulator.

In the example on the following page, when X1 is ON, the constant (K4) is loaded into the

accumulator using the Load instruction and will be placed in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack when the next Load instruction is executed. The starting location for the ASCII table

(V1400) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The starting

location for the HEX table (V1600) is speciﬁed in the ASCII to HEX instruction. The table

below lists valid ASCII values for ATH conversion.

aaa

ATH





230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

ASCII Values Valid for ATH Conversion

ASCII Hex Value ASCII Value Hex Value

30 038 8

31 139 9

32 241 A

33 342 B

34 443 C

35 544 D

36 645 E

37 746 F

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-138

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

HEX to ASCII (HTA)

The HEX to ASCII instruction converts a table of HEX

values to a speciﬁed table of ASCII values. HEX values are

one digit and their ASCII equivalents are two digits.

This means a HEX table of two V-memory locations would

require four V-memory locations for the equivalent ASCII table. The function parameters are

loaded into the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed

below are the steps necessary to program a HEX to ASCII table function. The example on the

following page shows a program for the HEX to ASCII table function.

Step 1: Load the number of V-memory locations in the HEX table into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the HEX table into the accumulator. This

parameter must be a HEX value.

Step 3: Specify the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the ASCII table in the HTA instruction.

Helpful hint: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations,

the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load

the value into the accumulator.

DirectSOFT

X1 Load the constant value

into the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator. This value

defines the number of V

memory locations in the

ASCII table

LDA

O 1400

Convert octal 1400 to HEX

300 and load the value into

the accumulator

AT H

V1600

V1600 is the starting

location for the HEX table

ASCII TABLE Hexadecimal

Equivalents

1234

33 34

V1400

5678

31 32V1401

37 38

V1402

35 36

V1403

V1600

V1601

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT

MLR

SHFT

BENT

ENT

Handheld

Programmer Keystrokes

ANDST

DENT

aaaV

HTA





230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-139

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is ON, the constant (K2) is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. The starting location for the HEX table (V1500) is loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The starting location for the ASCII table

(V1400) is speciﬁed in the HEX to ASCII instruction.

The table below lists valid ASCII values for HTA conversion.

DirectSOFT

Load the constant value into

the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator. This value

defines the number of V

locations in the HEX table.

LDA

O 1500

Convert octal 1500 to HEX

340 and load the value into

the accumulator

HTA

V1400

V1400 is the starting

location for the ASCII table.

The conversion is executed

by this instruction.

ASCII TABLE

Hexadecimal

Equivalents

1234

33 34 V1400

5678

31 32 V1401

37 38 V1402

35 36 V1403

V1500

V1501

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT

MLR

SHFT

BENT

ENT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

ANDST

DENT

ASCII Values Valid for HTA Conversion

Hex Value ASCII Value Hex Value ASCII Value

030 838

131 939

232 A41

333 B42

434 C43

535 D44

636 E45

737 F46

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-140

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Segment (SEG)

The BCD / Segment instruction converts a 4digit HEX value

in the accumulator to a 7-segment display format. The result

resides in the accumulator.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 is loaded into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary (HEX) value in the accumulator

is converted to 7-segment format using the Segment instruction. The bit pattern in the

accumulator is copied to Y20–Y57 using the Out Formatted instruction.

SEG





230

240

250-1

260

--gfedcba--gfedc ba --gfedc ba

SEG

Convertthe binar y(HEX)

valueinthe accumulatorto

sevensegm ent display

format

OUTF Y20

K32

Copy thevalue in the

accumulatortoY20 --Y57

V1400

Load thevalue in V1400 ntothe

lower16bitsofthe accumulator

01101111011100010000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

6F71

V1400

00000111000001100111110101110001

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654321031 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

Y20Y21Y22Y23

OFFONONOFF

Y24

OFF

Y53Y54Y55Y56

ONONONON

Y57

OFF

--gfedcba Segmen

Labels

Segment

Labels

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

ANDST

SHFT

BENT

RST

ENT

SHFT

OUT

GX SHFT 2

CENT

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-141

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Gray Code (GRAY)

The Gray code instruction converts a 16-bit gray code value

to a BCD value. The BCD conversion requires 10 bits of the

accumulator. The upper 22 bits are set to “0.” This instruction

is designed for use with devices (typically encoders) that use

the grey code numbering scheme. The Gray Code instruction

will directly convert a gray code number to a BCD number

for devices having a resolution of 512 or 1024 counts per

revolution. If a device having a resolution of 360 counts per

revolution is to be used, you must subtract a BCD value of 76

from the converted value to obtain the proper result. For a

device having a resolution of 720 counts per revolution, you

must subtract a BCD value of 152.

In the following example, when X1 is ON the binary value represented by X10–X27 is loaded

into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The gray code value in the

accumulator is converted to BCD using the Gray Code instruction. The value in the lower 16

bits of the accumulator is copied to V2010.

GRAY

230

240

250-1

260





Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

LDF K16

X10

Load the value represented

by X10–X27 into the lower

16 bits of the accumulator

GRAY

Convert the 16 bit grey code

value in the accumulator to a

BCD value

OUT

V2010

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to

V2010 0000000000

Gray Code BCD

0000000001

0000000011

0000000010

0000000110

0000000111

0000000101

0000000100

1000000001

1000000000

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

0007

1022

1023

X10X11X12

ONOFFON

0000000000000101

0000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654

3210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

0000000000000110

0000000000000000

15 14 13 12 11 10 987654

3210

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1631 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

Acc.

X25X26X27

OFFOFFOFF

V2010

0006

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT 6

ORN

MLS

YENT

OUT

GX SHFT AND

AENT

ENT

AENT

•

••

•

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-142

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Shufﬂe Digits (SFLDGT)

The Shufﬂe Digits instruction shufﬂes a maximum of 8 digits

rearranging them in a speciﬁed order. This function requires

parameters to be loaded into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack and the accumulator with two additional instructions.

Listed below are the steps necessary to use the Shufﬂe Digit

function. The example on the following page shows a program for the Shufﬂe Digits function.

Step 1: Load the value (digits) to be shufﬂed into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack.

Step 2: Load the order that the digits will be shufﬂed to into the accumulator.

Step 3: Insert the SFLDGT instruction.

NOTE: If the number used to specify the order contains a 0 or 9–F, the corresponding position will be set

to 0.

See example on the next page.

NOTE: If the number used to specify the order contains duplicate numbers, the most signiﬁcant duplicate

number is valid. The result resides in the accumulator.

Shufﬂe Digits Block Diagram

A maximum of 8 digits can be shufﬂed. The bit

positions in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack

deﬁne the digits to be shufﬂed. They correspond

to the bit positions in the accumulator that deﬁne

the order in which the digits will be shufﬂed. The

digits are shufﬂed and the result resides in the

accumulator.

SFLDGT

230

240

250-1

260





Digits to be

shuffled (first stack location)

Specified order (accumulator)

DEF09ABC

36541287

Result (accumulator)

0DA9BCEF

43218765

Bit Positions

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-143

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack

will be reorganized in the order speciﬁed by the value in the accumulator.

Example A shows how the shufﬂe digits works when 0 or 9 –F is not used when specifying the

order the digits are to be shufﬂed. Also, there are no duplicate numbers in the speciﬁed order.

Example B shows how the shufﬂe digits works when a 0 or 9–F is used when specifying the

order the digits are to be shufﬂed. Notice when the Shufﬂe Digits instruction is executed, the

bit positions in the ﬁrst stack location that had a corresponding 0 or 9–F in the accumulator

(order speciﬁed) are set to “0”.

Example C shows how the shufﬂe digits works when duplicate numbers are used specifying the

order the digits are to be shufﬂed. Notice when the Shufﬂe Digits instruction is executed, the

most signiﬁcant duplicate number in the order speciﬁed is used in the result.

DEF09ABC

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Direct SOFT

LDD

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

LDD

V2006

Load the value in V2006 and

V2007 into the accumulator

OUTD

V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and

V2011

SFLDGT

Shuffle the digits in the first

level of the accumulator

stack based on the pattern

in the accumulator. The

result is in the accumulator.

V2010

Acc.

0DA9

9ABC DEF0

V2011

BCEF

Acc.

3654

1287 3654

1287

Acc.

BCEF 0DA9

V2000V2001

V2006V2007

CBA90FED

V2010

Acc.

EDA9

0FED CBA9

V2011

0000

Acc.

0021

0043 0021

0043

Acc.

0000 EDA9

V2000V2001

V2006V2007

DEF09ABC

V2010

Acc.

9ABC

9ABC DEF0

V2011

0000

Acc.

4321

4321 4321

4321

Acc.

0000 9ABC

V2000V2001

V2006V2007

ABC

Original

bit

Positions

43218765 43218765 43218765

Specified

order 43218765 43218765 43218765

New bit

Positions 43218765 43218765 43218765

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT RST

ANDST

MLR

TENT

OUT

GX SHFT 3

BENT

AENT

SHFT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-144

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions

Move (MOV)

The Move instruction moves the values from a V-memory

table to another V-memory table the same length. The

function parameters are loaded into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional

instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program

the Move function.

Step 1: Load the number of V-memory locations to be moved into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack. This parameter is a HEX value (KFFF max, 7777 octal).

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the locations to be moved into the accumulator.

This parameter must be a HEX value.

Step 3: Insert the MOVE instruction which speciﬁes starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the

destination table.

Helpful hint: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations,

the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load

the value into the accumulator.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. This value speciﬁes the length of the table and is placed in the ﬁrst

stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 2000 (V2000),

the starting location for the source table is loaded into the accumulator. The destination table

location (V2030) is speciﬁed in the Move instruction.

V aaa

MOV



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-53) All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All (See page 3-53) All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Standard RLL

Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 Load the constant value 6

(HEX) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator

LDA

O 2000

Convert octal 2000 to HEX

400 and load the value into

the accumulator

MOV

V2030

Copy the specified table

locations to a table

beginning at location V2030

V2030

012 3

V2031

050 0

V2032

999 9

V2033

307 4

V2034

898 9

V2035

101 0

V2036

XXX X

V2037

XXX X

V2026

XXX X

V2027

XXX X

V2000

012 3

V2001

050 0

V2002

999 9

V2003

307 4

V2004

898 9

V2005

101 0

V2006

XXX X

V2007

XXX X

V1776

XXX X

V1777

XXX X

SR



SH ADS

DSH M P

E

SH ADS

AE

SH ORS

IS

E 

AE

AD

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-145

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Move Memory Cartridge (MOVMC)

Load Label (LDLBL)

The Move Memory Cartridge instruction is used to copy data

between V-memory and program ladder memory. The Load

Label instruction is only used with the MOVMC instruction

when copying data from program ladder memory to V-memory.

To copy data between V-memory and program ladder memory,

the function parameters are loaded into the ﬁrst two levels of

the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional

instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the

Move Memory Cartridge and Load Label functions.

Step 1: Load the number of words to be copied into the second level of the accumulator stack.

Step 2: Load the offset for the data label area in the program ladder memory and the beginning of the

V-memory block into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack.

Step 3: Load the source data label (LDLBL Kaaa) into the accumulator when copying data from

ladder memory to V-memory. Load the source address into the accumulator when copying

data from V-memory to ladder memory. This is where the value will be copied from. If the

source address is a V-memory location, the value must be entered in HEX.

Step 4: Insert the MOVMC instruction which speciﬁes destination (Aaaa). This is where the value

will be copied to.

WARNING: The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0, but may be any number that does not

result in data outside of the source data area being copied into the destination table. When an offset

is outside of the source information boundaries, then unknown data values will be transferred into the

destination table.

V aaa

MOVMC

LDLBL

aaaK



230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-53) All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Constant K K1-KFFFF K1-KFFFF K1-KFFFF K1-KFFFF

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-146

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Copy Data From a Data Label Area to V-Memory

In the following example, data is copied from a Data Label Area to V-memory. When X1 is

on, the constant value (K4) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This

value speciﬁes the length of the table and is placed in the second stack location after the next

Load and Load Label (LDLBL) instructions are executed. The constant value (K0) is loaded

into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This value speciﬁes the offset for the source

and destination data, and is placed in the ﬁrst stack location after the LDLBL instruction is

executed. The source address where data is being copied from is loaded into the accumulator

using the LDLBL instruction. The MOVMC instruction speciﬁes the destination starting

location and executes the copying of data from the Data Label Area to V-memory.

WARNING: The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0, but may be any number that does not

result in data outside of the source data area being copied into the destination table. When an offset

is outside of the source information boundaries, then unknown data values will be transferred into the

destination table.

Standard RLL

Instructions

1234

CON

4532

CON

6151

CON

8845

CON

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Load the value 4 into the

accumulator specifying the

number of locations to be

copied.

Load the value 0 into the

accumulator specifying the

offset for source and

destination locations

LDLBL

Load the value 1 into the

accumulator specifying the

Data Label Area K1 as the

starting address of the data

to be copied.

V2001

V2002

6151

V2003

8845

V2004

XXXX

V1777

V2000

1234

Data Label Area

Programmed

After the END

Instruction

MOVMC

V2000

V2000 is the destination

starting address for the data

to be copied.

DLBL K1

STR

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT JMP

KENT

SHFT ANDST

ANDST

SHFT ORST

AND

INST#

ORST

BENT

ENT

AENT

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT JMP

AENT

XXXX

4532



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-147

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Copy Data From V-Memory to a Data Label Area

In the following example, data is copied from V-memory to a data label area. When X1 is

on, the constant value (K4) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This

value speciﬁes the length of the table and is placed in the second stack location after the next

Load and Load Address instructions are executed. The constant value (K2) is loaded into

the accumulator using the Load instruction. This value speciﬁes the offset for the source and

destination data, and is placed in the ﬁrst stack location after the Load Address instruction is

executed. The source address where data is being copied from is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load Address instruction. The MOVMC instruction speciﬁes the destination starting

location and executes the copying of data from V-memory to the data label area.

WARNING: The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0. If the offset (or the speciﬁed data table

range) is large enough to cause data to be copied from V-memory to beyond the end of the DLBL area,

then anything after the speciﬁed DLBL area will be replaced with invalid instructions.





230

240

250-1

260

6151

CON

8845

CON

2500

CON

6835

CON

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

Load the value 4 into the

accumulator specifying the

number of locations to be

copied.

Load the value 2 into the

accumulator specifying the

offset for source and

destination locations.

LDA

O 2000

V2001

4532

V2002

6151

V2003

8845

V2004

2500

V1777

XXXX

V2000

1234

Data Label Area

Programmed

After the END

Instruction

MOVMC

K1 is the data label

destination area where the

data will be copied to

V2005

6835

V2006

XXXX

DLBL K1

Offset 7041

CON

4648

CON

Offset

Convert octal 2000 to HEX

400 and load the value into

the accumulator. This

specifies the source location

where the data will be

copied from

STR

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT JMP

KENT

SHFT ANDST

SHFT ORST

AND

INST#

ORST

CSHFT ENT

AENT

JMP

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT JMP

KENT

BENT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-148

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. B

Set Bit (SETBIT)

The Set Bit instruction sets a single bit to one within a range

of V-memory locations.

Reset Bit (RSTBIT)

The Reset Bit instruction resets a single bit to zero within a

range of V-memory locations.

The following description applies to both the Set Bit and Reset Bit table instructions.

Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter

must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.

Step 3: Insert the Set Bit or Reset Bit instruction. This speciﬁes the reference for the bit number of

the bit you want to set or reset. The bit number is in octal, and the ﬁrst bit in the table is

number “0.”

Helpful hint: — Remember that each V-memory location contains 16 bits. So, the bits of the

ﬁrst word of the table are numbered from 0 to 17 octal. For example, if the table length is 6

words, then 6 words = (6 x 16) bits, = 96 bits (decimal), or 140 octal. The permissible range of

bit reference numbers would be 0 to 137 octal. Flag 53 will be set if the bit speciﬁed is outside

the range of the table.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are only valid until the end of the scan or another instruction that uses the same ﬂag is

executed.

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

V aaa

SETBIT

V aaa

RSTBIT





230

240

250-1

260





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the bit number which is referred in the Set Bit or Reset Bit exceeds the range of

the table

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-149

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

5-149

For example, suppose we have a table starting at V3000

that is two words long, as shown to the right. Each word

in the table contains 16 bits, or 0 to 17 in octal. To set bit

12 in the second word, we use its octal reference (bit 14).

Then we compute the bit’s octal address from the start of

the table, so 17 + 14 = 34 octal. The following program

shows how to set the bit as shown to a “1.”

In this ladder example, we will use input X0 to trigger the Set Bit operation. First, we will load

the table length (two words) into the accumulator stack. Next, we load the starting address

into the accumulator. Since V3000 is an octal number we have to convert it to hex by using

the LDA command. Finally, we use the Set Bit (or Reset Bit) instruction and specify the octal

address of the bit (bit 34), referenced from the table beginning.

MSB LSB

V3000

MSB LSB

V3001

7654321

16 bits

Standard RLL

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

X0 Load the constant value 2

(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator.

LDA

O 3000

SETBIT

O 34

Set bit 34 (octal) in the table

to a ”1”.

Convert octal 3000 to HEX

and load the value into the

accumulator. This is the

table beginning.

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT

AENT

ENT

MLR

ANDST

DENT

SET

ENT

SHFT 3

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-150

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Fill (FILL)

The Fill instruction ﬁlls a table of up to 255 V-memory locations

with a value (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a

4-digit constant. The function parameters are loaded into the

ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two

additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to

program the Fill function.

Step 1: Load the number of V-memory locations to be ﬁlled into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FFFF.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter

must be a HEX value.

Step 3: Insert the Fill instructions which speciﬁes the value to ﬁll the table with.

Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the

LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the

value into the accumulator.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K4) is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. This value speciﬁes the length of the table and is placed on the

ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack when the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal

address 1600 (V1600) is the starting location for the table and is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load Address instruction. The value to ﬁll the table with (V1400) is speciﬁed in the

Fill instruction.

FILL

Aaaa





230

240

250-1

260

Standard RLL

Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT

X1 Load the constant value 4

(HEX) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator

LDA

O 1600

Convert the octal address

1600 to HEX 380 and load the

value into the accumulator

FILL

V1400

Fill the table with the value

in V1400

V1576

V1577

V1600

V1601

V1602

V1603

V1604

V1605

V1400

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT 5

ANDST

BENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

2 5 0 0

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

Aaaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

Pointer P All V mem (See page 3-56)

Constant K 0-FFFF

Discrete Bit Flag Description

SP53 On if V-memory address is out of range

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-151

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Find (FIND)

The Find instruction is used to search for a speciﬁed value

in a V-memory table of up to 255 locations. The function

parameters are loaded into the ﬁrst and second levels of the

accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional

instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program

the Find function.

Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the second level of the

accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FFFF.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack.

This parameter must be a HEX value.

Step 3: Load the offset from the starting location to begin the search. This parameter must be a HEX

value.

Step 4: Insert the Find instruction which speciﬁes the ﬁrst value to be found in the table.

Results: The offset from the starting address to the ﬁrst V-memory location which contains the

search value is returned to the accumulator as a HEX value. SP53 will be set on if an address

outside the table is speciﬁed in the offset or the value is not found. If the value is not found,

0 will be returned in the accumulator.

Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the

LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the

value into the accumulator.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed. The

pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resides in the accumulator.

In the example on the following page, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into

the accumulator using the Load instruction. This value speciﬁes the length of the table and is

placed in the second stack location when the following Load Address and Load instruction is

executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400) is the starting location for the table and is loaded

into the accumulator. This value is placed in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack when the

following Load instruction is executed. The offset (K2) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator using the Load instruction. The value to be found in the table is speciﬁed in the

Find instruction. If a value is found equal to the search value, the offset (from the starting

location of the table) where the value is located will reside in the accumulator.

FIND

Aaaa





230

240

250-1

260

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

Aaaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

Constant K 0-FFFF

Discrete Bit Flag Description

SP53 On if there is no value in the table that is equal to the search value.

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-152

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Find Greater Than (FDGT)

The Find Greater Than instruction is used to search for the ﬁrst

occurrence of a value in a V-memory table that is greater than the

speciﬁed value (Aaaa), which can be either a V-memory location

or a 4-digit constant. The function parameters are loaded into

the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by

two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary

to program the Find Greater Than function.

NOTE: This instruction does not have an offset, such as the one required for the FIND instruction.

Step 1: Load the length of the table (up to 255 locations) into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack.

This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FFFF.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter

must be a HEX value.

Step 3: Insert the FDGT instruction which speciﬁes the greater than search value.

Results: The offset from the starting address to the ﬁrst V-memory location which contains the

greater than search value is returned to the accumulator as a HEX value. SP53 will be set on

if the value is not found and 0 will be returned in the accumulator.

Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the

LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the

value into the accumulator.

FDGT

Aaaa





230

240

250-1

260

Load the constant value 6

(HEX) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator

LDA

O1400

V1400 0

V1401 1

V1402 2

V1403 3

V1404 4

V1405 5

V1406

V1407

0123

0500

9999

3074

8989

1010

XXXX

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT ANDST

DPREV

SHFT 8

TMR

BENT

PREV 6

GENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

ENT

FIND

K8989

Convert octal 1400 to HEX

300 and load the value into

the accumulator

Load the constant value 2

into the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator

Find the location in the table

where the value 8989 resides

Offset

Begin here

Table length

Accumulator

00000004

V1404 contains the location

where the match was found.

The value 8989 was the 4th

location after the start of the

specified table.

NEXT J

9 9

AENT

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-153

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

NOTE: Status ﬂags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same ﬂags is executed. The

pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resides in the accumulator.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. This value speciﬁes the length of the table and is placed in the ﬁrst

stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400)

is the starting location for the table and is loaded into the accumulator. The greater than search

value is speciﬁed in the Find Greater Than instruction. If a value is found greater than the

search value, the offset (from the starting location of the table) where the value is located will

reside in the accumulator. If there is no value in the table that is greater than the search value,

a zero is stored in the accumulator and SP53 will come ON.

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On if there is no value in the table that is equal to the search value.

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

A aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

Constant K 0-FFFF

Load the constant value 6

(HEX) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator

LDA

O1400

V1400 0

V1401 1

V1402 2

V1403 3

V1404 4

V1405 5

V1406

V1407

0123

0500

9999

3074

8989

1010

XXXX

FDGT

K8989

Convert octal 1400 to HEX

300 and load the value into

the accumulator

Find the value in the table

greater than the specified value

Begin here Table length

Accumulator

00000002

V1402 contains the location

where the first value greater

than the search value was

found. 9999 was the 2nd

location after the start of the

specified table.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT ANDST

STR

SHFT

MLR

BENT

PREV 6

GENT

SHFT ANDST

IENT

NEXT J

9 9

AENT

DirectSOFT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-154

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Table to Destination (TTD)

The Table To Destination instruction moves a value from a

V-memory table to a V-memory location and increments the

table pointer by 1. The ﬁrst V-memory location in the table

contains the table pointer which indicates the next location in

the table to be moved. The instruction will be executed once

per scan provided the input remains on. The table pointer will

reset to 1 when the value equals the last location in the table.

The function parameters are loaded into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional

instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the

Table To Destination function.

Step 1: Load the length of the data table (number of V-memory locations) into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. (Remember, the

starting location of the table is used as the table pointer.) This parameter must be a HEX

value.

Step 3: Insert the TTD instruction that speciﬁes the destination V-memory location (Vaaa).

Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the

LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the

value into the accumulator.

Helpful hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do not

want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) should be used in the

input logic.

Helpful hint: The pointer location should be set to the value where the table operation will

begin. The special relay SP0 or a one shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in

one scan and will not affect the instruction operation.

NOTE: Status ﬂags (SPs) are only valid until:

— another instruction that uses the same ﬂag is executed, or

— the end of the scan.

The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets when the table length is reached. At ﬁrst glance it

may appear that the pointer should reset to 0. However, it resets to 1, not 0.

TTD

aaaV

TTD

aaa





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On if there is no value in the table that is equal to the search value.

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3 - 56)

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-155

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. This value speciﬁes the length of the table and is placed in the

ﬁrst stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400

(V1400) is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into the accumulator.

Remember, V1400 is used as the pointer location, and is not actually part of the table data

source. The destination location (V1500) is speciﬁed in the Table to Destination instruction.

The table pointer (V1400 in this case) will be increased by “1” after each execution of the TTD

instruction.

It is important to understand how the table

locations are numbered. If you examine the

example table, you’ll notice that the ﬁrst data

location, V1401, will be used when the pointer is

equal to 0, and again when the pointer is equal to

6. Why? Because the pointer is only equal to 0

before the very ﬁrst execution. From then on, it

increments from 1 to 6, and then resets to 1.

Also, our example uses a normal input contact (X1) to

control the execution. Since the CPU scan is extremely

fast, and the pointer increments automatically, the table

would cycle through the locations very quickly. If this is a

problem, you have an option of using SP56 in conjunction

with a one-shot (PD) and a latch (C1 for example) to

allow the table to cycle through all locations one time and

then stop. The logic shown here is not required, it’s just

an optional method.

X1 LD

LDA

0 1400

TTD

V1500

Load the constant value 6

(HEX) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator

Convert octal 1400 to HEX

300 and load the value into

the accumulator. This is the

table pointer location

Copy the specified value from

the table to the specified

destination (V1500)

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT MLR

MLR

BENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

DirectSOFT

DirectSOFT Display (optional latch example using SP56)

SP56

X1 C0

SET

Since Special Relays are

reset at the end of the scan,

this latch must follow the TTD

instruction in the program.

Load the constant value 6

(HEX) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator

RST

1401 0500

1402 9999

1403 3074

1404 8989

1405 1010

1406 2046

1407 XXXX

V1500

XXXX

0 6V1400

000

TableTable Pointer

Destination

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-156

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example

program. Notice how the pointer automatically cycles from 0 to 6, and then starts over at 1

instead of 0. Also, notice how SP56 is only on until the end of the scan.

TablePointer (Automatically Incremented)

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

XXXX

Before TTD ExecutionAfterTTD Execution

Scan N

AfterTTD Execution

Scan N+1

AfterTTD ExecutionScan N+5

Destination

V1400

0000

TablePointerTable

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

0500

Destination

V1400

0001

TablePointer (Automatically Incremented)Table

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

9999

Destination

V1400

0002

Table

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

2046

Destination

V1400

0006

Table

Before TTD Execution

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

0500

Destination

V1400

0001

TablePointerTable

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

1010

Destination

V1400

0005

TablePointerTable

Before TTD Execution

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=ON

SP56

TablePointer (Resetsto1,not 0)

AfterTTD Execution

Scan N+6

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

0500

Destination

V1400

0001

Table

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

2046

Destination

V1400

0006

TablePointerTable

Before TTD Execution

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

until end of scan

or nextinstruction

that uses SP56

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-157

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Remove from Bottom (RFB)

The Remove From Bottom instruction moves a value from

the bottom of a V-memory table to a V-memory location and

decrements a table pointer by 1. The ﬁrst V-memory location

in the table contains the table pointer which indicates the next

location in the table to be moved. The instruction will be executed

once per scan provided the input remains on. The instruction

will stop operation when the pointer equals 0. The function

parameters are loaded into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack

and the accumulator by 2 additional instructions. Listed below

are the steps necessary to program the Remove From Bottom

function.

Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. (Remember, the

starting location of the table blank is used as the table pointer.) This parameter must be a

HEX value.

Step 3: Insert the RFB instructions which speciﬁes destination V-memory location (Vaaa).

Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the

LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the

value into the accumulator.

Helpful hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do not

want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) should be used in the

input logic.

Helpful hint: The pointer location should be set to the value where the table operation will

begin. The special relay SP0 or a one shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in

one scan and will not affect the instruction operation.

NOTE: Status ﬂags (SPs) are only valid until:

— another instruction that uses the same ﬂag is executed, or

— the end of the scan.

The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set automatically. You

have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program.

aaaV

RFB





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP56 On when the table pointer equals 0

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-158

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. This value speciﬁes the length of the table and is placed in the ﬁrst

stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400)

is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into the accumulator. Remember,

V1400 is used as the pointer location, and is not actually part of the table data source. The

destination location (V1500) is speciﬁed in the Remove From Bottom. The table pointer

(V1400 in this case) will be decremented by “1” after each execution of the RFB instruction.

It is important to understand how the table locations are

numbered. If you examine the example table, you’ll notice

that the ﬁrst data location, V1401, will be used when the

pointer is equal to one. The second data location, V1402,

will be used when the pointer is equal to two, etc.

Also, our example uses a normal input contact (X1) to

control the execution. Since the CPU scan is extremely

fast, and the pointer decrements automatically, the table

would cycle through the locations very quickly. If this is a

problem for your applicaton, you have an option of using

a one-shot (PD) to remove one value each time the input

contact transitions from low to high.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT ORN

BENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

LDA

0 1400

RFB

V1500

Load the constant value 6

(HEX) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator

Convert octal 1400 to HEX

300 and load the value into

the accumulator. This is the

table pointer location

Copy the specified value from

the table to the specified

destination (V1500)

DirectSOFT

V1401 050 0

V1402 999 9

V1403 307 4

V1404 898 9

V1405 101 0

V1406 204 6

V1407 XXX X

V150

XXX X

Destination

V140

000 0

Tabl ePointerTable

X1 C0

Load theconstant value6

(HEX) into thelow er 16 bi ts

of theaccumulator

LDA

O1400

Conver toctal 1400 to HEX

300 and load theval ue into

theaccumulator. This is the

tablepoi nter location.

X1 C0

Load theconstant value6

(HEX) into thelow er 16 bi ts

of theaccumulator

LDA

O1400

Conver toctal 1400 to HEX

300 and load theval ue into

theaccumulator. This is the

tablepoi nter location.

DirectSOFT (optional one-shot method)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-159

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example

program. Notice how the pointer automatically decrements from 6 to 0. Also, notice how

SP56 is only on until the end of the scan.

Before RFBExecution AfterRFB Execution

TablePointer (Automatically Decremented)

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

XXXX

Before RFBExecution AfterRFB Execution

ExampleofExecution

Scan N

Scan N+1

Scan N+4

Destination

V1400

0006

TablePointerTable

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

2046

Destination

V1400

0005

TablePointer (Automatically Decremented)Table

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V15001010

Destination

V14000004

Table

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

9999

Destination

V14000001

Table

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V15002046

Destination

V14000005

TablePointerTable

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

3074

Destination

V14000002

TablePointerTable

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

TablePointer

Scan N+5

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V15000500

Destination

V1400

0000

Table

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

9999

Destination

V1400

0001

TablePointerTable

SP56=ON

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

until endof scan

or next instruction

that uses SP56

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-160

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Source to Table (STT)

The Source To Table instruction moves a value from a

V-memory location into a V-memory table and increments a

table pointer by 1. When the table pointer reaches the end of

the table, it resets to 1. The ﬁrst V-memory location in the table

contains the table pointer which indicates the next location

in the table to store a value. The instruction will be executed

once per scan provided the input remains on. The function

parameters are loaded into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack and the accumulator with two additional instructions.

Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Source To

Table function.

Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. (Remember, the

starting location of the table is used as the table pointer.) This parameter must be a HEX

value.

Step 3: Insert the STT instruction which speciﬁes the source V-memory location (Vaaa). This is

where the value will be moved from.

Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the

LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the

value into the accumulator.

Helpful hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do not

want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) should be used in the

input logic.

Helpful hint: The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point for the

operation. Also, it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table. For example, if

the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that could be in the pointer should

be between 0 and 6. If the value is outside of this range, the data will not be moved. Also, a

one shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the

instruction operation.

NOTE: Status ﬂags (SPs) are only valid until:

— another instruction that uses the same ﬂag is executed, or

— the end of the scan

The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets to 1 automatically when the table length is reached.

aaaV

STT





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP56 On when the table pointer equals the table length.

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-161

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. This value speciﬁes the length of the table and is placed in the ﬁrst

stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400),

which is the starting location for the destination table and table pointer, is loaded into the

accumulator. The data source location (V1500) is speciﬁed in the Source to Table instruction.

The table pointer will be increased by “1” after each time the instruction is executed.

It is important to understand how the table

locations are numbered. If you examine the

example table, you’ll notice that the ﬁrst data

storage location, V1401, will be used when

the pointer is equal to 0, and again when the

pointer is equal to 6. Why? Because the pointer

is only equal to 0 before the very ﬁrst execution.

From then on, it increments from 1 to 6, and

then resets to 1.

Also, our example uses a normal input contact

(X1) to control the execution. Since the

CPU scan is extremely fast, and the pointer

increments automatically, the source data

would be moved into all the table locations

very quickly. If this is a problem for your

application, you have an option of using a one-

shot (PD) to move 1 value each time the input

contact transitions from low to high.

Direct SOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT RST

MLR

BENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

AENTSHFT

LDA

0 1400

STT

V1500

Load the constant value 6

(HEX) into the the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator

Convert octal 1400 to HEX

300 and load the value into

the accumulator

Copy the specified value

from the source location

(V1500) to the table

V1401 XXX X

V1402 XXX X

V1403 XXX X

V1404 XXX X

V1405 XXX X

V1406 XXX X

V1407 XXX X

V150

050 0

Data Sour ce

V140

000 0

Tabl ePoi nterTable

Direct SOFT (optional one-shot method)

X1 C0

Load theconstant value6

(HEX)intothe lower16bits

of theaccumulator

LDA

O1400

Convertoctal 1400 to HEX

300 and load thevalue into

theaccumulator. This is the

starting tablelocation.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-162

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example

program. Notice how the pointer automatically cycles from 0 to 6, and then starts over at 1

instead of 0. Also, notice how SP56 is affected by the execution. Although our example does

not show it, we are assuming that there is another part of the program that changes the value in

V1500 (data source) prior to the execution of the STT instruction. This is not required, but it

makes it easier to see how the data source is copied into the table.

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 XXXX

V1404 XXXX

V1405 XXXX

V1406 XXXX

V1407 XXXX

Table

V1401 0500

V1402 XXXX

V1403 XXXX

V1404 XXXX

V1405 XXXX

V1406 XXXX

V1407 XXXX

Table

V1401 0500

V1402 XXXX

V1403 XXXX

V1404 XXXX

V1405 XXXX

V1406 XXXX

V1407 XXXX

Table

V1401 XXXX

V1402 XXXX

V1403 XXXX

V1404 XXXX

V1405 XXXX

V1406 XXXX

V1407 XXXX

Table

AfterSTT Execution

Before STTExecution

TablePointer (Automatically Incremented)

V1500

0500

Before STTExecution AfterSTT ExecutionScan N

Scan N+1

Scan N+5

Source

V1400

0000

TablePointer

V1500

0500

Source

V1400

0001

TablePointer (Automatically Incremented)

V15009999

Source

V14000002

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V15002046

Source

V14000006

Table

Before STTExecution

V1500

9999

Source

V14000001

TablePointer

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 XXXX

V1407 XXXX

V15002046

Source

V14000005

TablePointerTable

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=ON

SP56

TablePointer (Resetsto1,not 0)

Scan N+6

V1401 1234

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V15001234

Source

V1400

0001

Table

V1401 0500

V1402 9999

V1403 3074

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V15001234

Source

V1400

0006

TablePointerTable

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

until end of scan

or nextinstruction

that uses SP56

Example of Execution

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-163

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Remove from Table (RFT)

The Remove From Table instruction pops a value off of a table

and stores it in a V-memory location. When a value is removed

from the table all other values are shifted up 1 location. The

ﬁrst V-memory location in the table contains the table length

counter. The table counter decrements by 1 each time the

instruction is executed. If the length counter is 0 or greater than the maximum table length

(speciﬁed in the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack), the instruction will not execute and SP56

will be on.

The instruction will be executed once per scan provided the input remains on. The function

parameters are loaded into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by 2

additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Remove From

Table function.

Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. (Remember, the

starting location of the table is used as the table length counter.) This parameter must be a

HEX value.

Step 3: Insert the RFT instructions which speciﬁes destination V-memory location (Vaaa). This is

where the value will be moved to.

Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the

LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the

value into the accumulator.

Helpful hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do not

want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) should be used in the

input logic.

Helpful hint: The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point for the

operation. Also, it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table. For example, if

the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that could be in the table counter

should be between 1 and 6. If the value is outside of this range or 0, the data will not be moved

from the table. Also, a one shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in one scan

and will not affect the instruction operation.

NOTE: Status ﬂags (SPs) are only valid until:

— another instruction that uses the same ﬂag is executed, or

— the end of the scan

The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set automatically. You

have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program.

aaaV

RFT





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP56 On when the table counter equals 0.

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-164

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. This value speciﬁes the length of the table and is placed in the ﬁrst

stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400)

is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into the accumulator. The destination

location (V1500) is speciﬁed in the Remove from Table instruction. The table counter will be

decreased by “1” after the instruction is executed.

Since the table counter speciﬁes the range of data

that will be removed from the table, it is important

to understand how the table locations are numbered.

If you examine the example table, you’ll notice that

the data locations are numbered from the top of the

table. For example, if the table counter started at 6,

then all 6 of the locations would be affected during

the instruction execution.

Also, our example uses a normal input contact (X1) to

control the execution. Since the CPU scan is extremely

fast, and the pointer decrements automatically, the

data would be removed from the table very quickly.

If this is a problem for your application, you have the

option of using a one-shot (PD) to remove one value

each time the input contact transitions from low to

high.

Direct SOFT

X1 Load theconstant value6

(Hex.) into thelower 16 bits

of theaccumulator

LDA

O1400

RFT

V1500

Copy thespecifiedvalue

from thetabletothe

specifiedlocation(V1500)

Convertoctal 1400 to HEX

300 and load thevalue into

theaccumulator

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT ORN

MLR

BENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

V1401 050 0

V1402 999 9

V1403 307 4

V1404 898 9

V1405 101 0

V1406 204 6

V1407 XXX X

V150

XXX X

Destination

V140

000 6

Tabl eCounterTabl e

Direct SOFT (optional one-shot method)

X1 C0

Load theconstant value6

(HEX) into thelow er 16 bits

of theaccumulator

LDA

O1400

Convertoctal 1400toHEX

300 and load thevalue into

theaccumulator. This is the

tablepointer location.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-165

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example

program. In our example we’re showing the table counter set to 4 initially (Remember, you

can set the table counter to any value that is within the range of the table). The table counter

automatically decrements from 4 to 0 as the instruction is executed. Notice how the last 2 table

positions, 5 and 6, are not moved up through the table. Also, notice how SP56, which comes

on when the table counter is 0, is only on until the end of the scan.

V1401 8989

V1402 8989

V1403 8989

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1401 8989

V1402 8989

V1403 8989

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1401 8989

V1402 8989

V1403 8989

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1401 407 9

V1402 898 9

V1403 898 9

V1404 898 9

V1405 101 0

V1406 204 6

V1407 XXX X

V1401 9999

V1402 4079

V1403 8989

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1401 050 0

V1402 999 9

V1403 307 4

V1404 898 9

V1405 101 0

V1406 204 6

V1407 XXX X

V1500

XXX X

V1400

000 4 V1401 9999

V1402 4079

V1403 8989

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

V1500

0500

Destination

V1400

0003

V1500

9999

Destination

V1400

0002

V1500

4079

V1400

0001

V1500050 0

V1400

000 3

V1500

999 9

V1400

000 2

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

V1500

8989

V1400

0000

V1500

407 9

V1400

000 1

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

SP56=OFF

SP56

TableCounter

(Automatically decremented)

V1401 4079

V1402 8989

V1403 8989

V1404 8989

V1405 1010

V1406 2046

V1407 XXXX

0500

9999

4079

8989

Before RFT Execution

Table Table Counter

Destination

Table Counter

indicates that

these 4

positions will

used

After RFT Execution

Table

Before RFT Execution

Table

After RFT Execution

Table

Before RFT Execution

Table

After RFT Execution

Table

Before RFT Execution

Table

After RFT Execution

Table

Table Counter

Destinatio

Destination

Start here

Scan N+3

Scan N+2

Scan N+1

Scan N

Destination

SP56 = ON

until end of scan

or next instruction

that uses SP56

Table Counter

(Automatically decremented)

Table Counter

(Automatically decremented)

Table Counter

(Automatically decremented)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-166

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Add to Top (ATT)

The Add To Top instruction pushes a value onto a V-memory

table from a V-memory location. When the value is added to

the table, all other values are pushed down 1 location.

The instruction will be executed once per scan provided the

input remains on. The function parameters are loaded into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator

stack and the accumulator by 2 additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to

program the Add To Top function.

Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. (Remember, the

starting location of the table is used as the table length counter.) This parameter must be a

HEX value.

Step 3: Insert the ATT instruction that speciﬁes the source V-memory location (Vaaa). This is where

the value will be moved from.

Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the

LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the

value into the accumulator.

Helpful hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do not

want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) should be used in the

input logic.

Helpful hint: The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point for the

operation. Also, it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table. For example, if

the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that could be in the table counter

should be between 1 and 6. If the value is outside of this range or zero, the data will not be

moved into the table. Also, a one shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in one

scan and will not affect the instruction operation.

NOTE: Status ﬂags (SPs) are only valid until:

— another instruction that uses the same ﬂag is executed, or

— the end of the scan

The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set automatically. You

have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program.

ATT

V aaa





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP56 On when the table counter equals 0.

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-167

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator

using the Load instruction. This value speciﬁes the length of the table and is placed in the ﬁrst

stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400),

which is the starting location for the destination table and table counter, is loaded into the

accumulator. The source location (V1500) is speciﬁed in the Add to Top instruction. The

table counter will be increased by “1” after the instruction is executed.

For the ATT instruction, the table counter determines

the number of additions that can be made before the

instruction will stop executing. So, it is helpful to

understand how the system uses this counter to control

the execution.

For example, if the table counter was set to 2, and the

table length was 6 words, then there could only be 4

additions of data before the execution was stopped. This

can be calculated easily by:

Table length – table counter = number of executions

Also, our example uses a normal input contact (X1) to

control the execution. Since the CPU scan is extremely

fast, and the table counter increments automatically, the

data would be moved into the table very quickly. If this

is a problem for your applicaton, you have an option of

using a one-shot (PD) to add one value each time the

input contact transitions from low to high.

Direct SOFT

Load theconstant value6

(Hex.) into thelower 16 bits

of theaccumulator

LDA

O1400

AT T

V1500

Copy thespecifiedvalue

from V1500 to thetable

Convertoctal 1400 to HEX

300 and load thevalue into

theaccumulator

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT 0

MLR

BENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

V1401 050 0

V1402 999 9

V1403 307 4

V1404 898 9

V1405 101 0

V1406 204 6

V1407 XXX X

V150

XXX X

Data Source

V140

000 2

TableCounterTable

(e.g.: 6--2=4)

Direct SOFT (optional one- shot method)

X1 C0

Load theconstant value6

(HEX) into thelow er 16 bi ts

of theaccumulator

LDA

O1400

Conver toctal 1400toHEX

300 and load theval ue into

theaccumulator. This is the

starting tablelocation.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-168

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example

program. The table counter is set to 2 initially, and it will automatically increment from 2 to 6

as the instruction is executed. Notice how SP56 comes on when the table counter is 6, which

is equal to the table length. Plus, although our example does not show it, we are assuming that

there is another part of the program that changes the value in V1500 (data source) prior to the

execution of the ATT instruction.

V1401 7777

V1402 4343

V1403 5678

V1404 1234

V1405 0500

V1406 9999

V1407 XXXX

7777

V1401 4343

V1402 5678

V1403 1234

V1404 0500

V1405 9999

V1406 3074

V1407 XXXX

V1401 4343

V1402 5678

V1403 1234

V1404 0500

V1405 9999

V1406 3074

V1407 XXXX

V1401 5678

V1402 1234

V1403 0500

V1404 9999

V1405 3074

V1406 8989

V1407 XXXX

V1401 5678

V1402 1234

V1403 0500

V1404 9999

V1405 3074

V1406 8989

V1407 XXXX

V1401 1234

V1402 0500

V1403 9999

V1404 3074

V1405 8989

V1406 1010

V1407 XXXX

V1401 050 0

V1402 999 9

V1403 307 4

V1404 898 9

V1405 101 0

V1406 204 6

V1407 XXX X

V1500

123 4

V1400

000 2 V1401 1234

V1402 0500

V1403 9999

V1404 3074

V1405 8989

V1406 1010

V1407 XXXX

V1500

1234

V1400

0003

Table

V15005678

Data Source

V14000004

V1500

4343

V1400

0005

V1500567 8

V1400000 3

V1500

433 4

V1400

000 4

SP56= OFF

SP56

SP56= OFF

SP56

SP56=

SP56

V1500

7777

V1400

0006

V1500

777 7

V1400

000 5

SP56 =

SP56

SP56= OFF

SP56

SP56= OFF

SP56

SP56= OFF

SP56

SP56= OFF

SP56

1234

5678

3074

8989

2046

1010

Discard Bucket

343

Table

After ATT Execution Table counter

(Automatically Incremented)

Data Source

Discard Bucket

OFF

Discard Bucket

Data Source

until end of scan

or next instruction

that uses SP56

Table counter

(Automatically Incremented)

Table counter

(Automatically Incremented)

Table counter

(Automatically Incremented)

Data Source

After ATT Execution

Table

After ATT Execution

Table

Before ATT Execution

Table

Before ATT Execution

Table

Before ATT Execution

Table

Before ATT Execution

Table Table counter

Data Source

Table counter

Data Source

Table counter

Data Source

Table counter

Example of Execution

Scan N

Scan N+1

Scan N+2

Scan N+3

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-169

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Table Shift Left (TSHFL)

The Table Shift Left instruction shifts all the bits in a V-memory

table to the left a speciﬁed number of bit positions.

Table Shift Right (TSHFR)

The Table Shift Right instruction shifts all the bits in a V-memory

table to the right a speciﬁed number of bit positions.

The following description applies to both the Table Shift Left and

Table Shift Right instructions. A table is a range of V-memory

locations. The Table Shift Left and Table Shift Right instructions shift bits serially throughout

the entire table. Bits are shifted out the end of one word and into the opposite end of an

adjacent word. At the ends of the table, bits are either discarded, or zeros are shifted into the

table. The example tables below are arbitrarily four words long.

Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter

must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.

Step 3: Insert the Table Shift Left or Table Shift Right instruction. This speciﬁes the number of bit

positions you wish to shift the entire table. The number of bit positions must be in octal.

Helpful hint: Remember that each V-memory location contains 16 bits. The bits of the ﬁrst

word of the table are numbered from 0 to 17 octal. If you want to shift the entire table by 20

bits, that is 24 octal. Flag 53 will be set if the number of bits to be shifted is larger than the

total bits contained within the table. Flag 67 will be set if the last bit shifted (just before it is

discarded) is a “1”.

Vaaa

TSHFL





230

240

250-1

260

Vaaa

TSHFR





230

240

250-1

260

Table Shift Left Table Shift Right

Discard Bit

Shift in zeros

Discard Bits

V - xxxx + 2

V - xxxx + 1

V - xxxx Shift in zeros

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-170

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

NOTE: Status ﬂags are only valid until:

— the end of the scan

— or another instruction that uses the same ﬂag is executed.

The example table to the right contains BCD data

as shown (for demonstration purposes). Suppose we

want to do a table shift right by 3 BCD digits (12 bits).

Converting to octal, 12 bits is 14 octal. Using the Table

Shift Right instruction and specifying a shift by octal 14,

we have the resulting table shown at the far right. Notice

that the 2–3–4 sequence has been discarded, and the

0–0–0 sequence has been shifted in at the bottom.

The following ladder example assumes the data at V3000 to V3004 already exists as shown

above. We will use input X0 to trigger the Table Shift Right operation. First, we will load the

table length (5 words) into the accumulator stack. Next, we load the starting address into the

accumulator. Since V3000 is an octal number we have to convert it to hex by using the LDA

command. Finally, we use the Table Shift Right instruction and specify the number of bits to

be shifted (12 decimal), which is 14 octal.

1234

5678

1122

3344

6781

1225

3441

5663

5566 0005

V3000 V3000

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the number of bits to be shifted is larger than the total bits contained within the

table

SP67 On when the last bit shifted (just before it is discarded) is a “1”

DirectSOFT

X0 Load the constant value 5

(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator.

LDA

O 3000

TSHFR

O 14

Do a table shift right by 12

bits, which is 14 octal.

Convert octal 3000 to HEX

and load the value into the

accumulator. This is the

table beginning.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT MLR

RST

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

EENTSHFT 5

ORN

RNEXT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-171

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

AND Move (ANDMOV)

The AND Move instruction copies data from a table to the

speciﬁed memory location, ANDing each word with the

accumulator data as it is written.

OR Move (ORMOV)

The Or Move instruction copies data from a table to the

speciﬁed memory location, ORing each word with the

accumulator contents as it is written.

Exclusive OR Move (XORMOV)

The Exclusive OR Move instruction copies data from a table to

the speciﬁed memory location, XORing each word with the accumulator value as it is written.

The following description applies to the AND Move, OR Move, and Exclusive OR Move

instructions. A table is just a range of V-memory locations. These instructions copy the data

of a table to another speciﬁed location, preforming a logical operation on each word with the

accumulator contents as the new table is written.

Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter must

be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.

Step 3: Load the BCD/hex bit pattern into the accumulator which will be logically combined with the

table contents as they are copied.

Step 4: Insert the AND Move, OR Move, or XOR Move instruction. This speciﬁes the starting

location of the copy of the original table. This new table will automatically be the same length

as the original table.

The example table to the right contains BCD data as

shown (for demonstration purposes). Suppose we want

to move a table of two words at V3000 and AND it with

K6666. The copy of the table at V3100 shows the result

of the AND operation for each word.

The program on the next page performs the ANDMOV

operation example above. It assumes that the data in the table at V3000 – V3001 already

exists. First we load the table length (two words) into the accumulator. Next we load the

starting address of the source table, using the LDA instruction. Then we load the data into the

accumulator to be ANDed with the table. In the ANDMOV command, we specify the table

destination, V3100.

Vaaa

ANDMOV

Vaaa

ORMOV





230

240

250-1

260

Vaaa

XORMOV

3333

FFFF

2 2 2 2

6 6

V3000 V3100

ANDMOV

K6666

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-172

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

The example to the right shows a table of two words at V3000

and logically ORs it with K8888. The copy of the table at

V3100 shows the result of the OR operation for each word.

The program to the right performs the ORMOV example

above. It assumes that the data in the table at V3000 –

V3001 already exists. First we load the table length (two

words) into the accumulator. Next we load the starting

address of the source table, using the LDA instruction.

Then we load the data into the accumulator to be ORed

with the table. In the ORMOV command, we specify

the table destination, V3100.

The example to the right shows a table of two words at

V3000 and logical XORs it with K3333. The copy of the

table at V3100 shows the result of the XOR operation for

each word.

The ladder program example for the XORMOV is similar

to the one above for the ORMOV. Just use the XORMOV

instruction. On the Handheld Programmer, you must use

the SHFT key and spell “XORMOV” explicitly.

1111

9 9 9 9

9 9

V3000 V3100

ORMOV

K8888

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

ORST

INST#

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

SHFT ANDST

DPREV 8

IENT

SHFT AND

AENT

1111

2 2 2 2

2 2

V3000 V3100

XORMOV

K3333

DirectSOFT 32

LDA

0 3000

K8888

ORMOV

0 3100

Load the constant value 2

(Hex) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator.

Convert octal 3000 to HEX

and load the value into the

accumulator. This is the

table beginning.

Load the constant value

8888 (Hex.) into the lower

16 bits of the accumulator.

Copy the table to V3100,

ORing its contents with the

accumulator as it is written.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

ORST

INST#

AENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

SHFT ANDST

DPREV 6

GENT

AND

SHFT AND

AENT

DirectSOFT

Load the constant value 2

(Hex.) into the lower 16

bits of the accumulator.

Convert otal 3000 to HEX

and load the value into the

accumulator. This is the

table beginning.

Load the constant value

6666 (Hex.) into the lower

16 bits of the accumulator.

Copy the table to V3100,

ANDing its contents with th

accumulator as it is written.

LDA

0 3000

K6666

ANDMOV

0 3100

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-173

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Find Block (FINDB)

The Find Block instruction searches for an occurrence of a

speciﬁed block of values in a V-memory table. The function

parameters are loaded into the ﬁrst and second levels of the

accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional

instructions. If the block is found, its starting address will be

stored in the accumulator. If the block is not found, ﬂag SP53

will be set.

The steps below are necessary to program the Find Block function.

Step 1: Load the number of bytes in the block to be located. This parameter must be a decimal value

from 1 to 256.

Step 2: Load the length of a table (number of words) to be searched. The Find Block will search

multiple tables that are adjacent in V-memory. This parameter must be a decimal value from

1 to 128.

Step 3: Load the ending location for all the tables into the accumulator. This parameter must be a

HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.

Step 4: Load the table starting location for all the tables into the accumulator. This parameter must be

a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.

Step 5: Insert the Find Block instruction. This speciﬁes the starting location of the block of data you

are trying to locate.

FINDB

Aaaa





230

240

250-1

260

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the Find Block instruction was executed but did not

ﬁnd the block of data in table speciﬁed.

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

A aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3 - 56)

V-memory P All (See page 3 - 56)

Table 1

Table 2

Table 3

Table 32

Block

Star

t Addr.

End Addr

32 bytes

Start Addr.

16 words



V2000

V2017

V2020

V2037

V2040

V2057

V2760

V2777

V3000

V3017

LD K32

LD K16

LDA

O2777

LDA

O2000

FINDB

V3000

END

Sample Program of FINDB

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-174

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Swap (SWAP)

The Swap instruction exchanges the data in two tables of equal

length.

The following steps apply to both the Set Bit and Reset Bit table

instructions.

Step 1: Load the length of the tables (number of V-memory locations) into the ﬁrst level of the

accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF. Remember that the tables

must be of equal length.

Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the ﬁrst table into the accumulator. This parameter

must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.

Step 3: Insert the Swap instruction. This speciﬁes the starting address of the second table.

Helpful hint: The data swap occurs within a single scan. If the instruction executes on multiple

consecutive scans, it will be difﬁcult to know the actual contents of either table at any particular

time. So, remember to swap just on a single scan.

The example to the right shows a table of two words at

V3000. We will swap its contents with another table of

two words at V3100 by using the Swap instruction.

The example program below uses a PD contact (triggers for one scan for off-to-on transition).

First, we load the length of the tables (two words) into the accumulator. Then we load the

address of the ﬁrst table (V3000) into the accumulator using the LDA instruction, converting

the octal address to hex. Note that it does not matter which table we declare “ﬁrst,” because

the swap results will be the same.

Vaaa

SWAP





230

240

250-1

260

DirectSOFT

X0 Load the constant value 2

(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator.

LDA

O 3000

SWAP

V 3100

Swap the contents of the

table in the previous

instruction with the one at

V3100.

Convert octal 3000 to HEX

and load the value into the

accumulator. This is the

table beginning.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT RST

ANDN

PENT

ENT

SHFT ANDST

AENT

SHFT CV

SHFT 3

AENT

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8

A B C D

0 0

V3000 V3100

SWAP

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-56)

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-175

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Clock/Calendar Instructions

Date (DATE)

The Date instruction can be used to set the date in the CPU.

The instruction requires two consecutive V-memory locations

(Vaaa) to set the date. If the values in the speciﬁed locations

are not valid, the date will not be set. The current date can be

read from 4 consecutive V-memory locations (V7771–V7774).

In the following example, when C0 is on, the constant value (K94010301) is loaded into

the accumulator using the Load Double instruction (C0 should be a contact from a one shot

(PD) instruction). The value in the accumulator is output to V2000 using the Out Double

instruction. The Date instruction uses the value in V2000 to set the date in the CPU.

DATE

V aaa

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)





230

240

250-1

260

Date Range V-memory Location (BCD)

(READ Only)

Year 0-99 V7774

Month 1-12 V7773

Day 1-31 V7772

Day of Week 0-06 V7771

The values entered for the day of week are:

0=Sunday, 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, 4=Thursday, 5=Friday, 6=Saturday.

V2000

Acc.

0301

9401 0301

9401

V2001

9401

Acc. 9401 0301

03019401

V2001 V2000

DirectSOFT

C0 LDD

K94010301

OUTD

V2000

DATE

V2000

Constant (K)

In this example, the Date

instruction uses the value set in

V2000 and V2001 to set the date

in the appropriate V memory

locations (V7771-V7774).

Format

Year Month Day Day of Week

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

AENT

ENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT MLR

OUT

GX SHFT 3

NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT

CENT

AENT

CENT

Load the constant

value (K94010301)

into the accumulator

Copy the value in

the accumulator to

V2000 and V2001

Set the date in the CPU

using the value in V2000

and 2001

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-176

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Time (TIME)

The Time instruction can be used to set the time (24-hour

clock) in the CPU. The instruction requires two consecutive

V-memory locations (Vaaa) which are used to set the time. If

the values in the speciﬁed locations are not valid, the time will

not be set. The current time can be read from memory locations V7747 and V7766–V7770.

In the following example, when C0 is on, the constant value (K73000) is loaded into the

accumulator using the Load Double instruction (C0 should be a contact from a one shot

(PD) instruction). The value in the accumulator is output to V2000 using the Out Double

instruction. The Time instruction uses the value in V2000 to set the time in the CPU.

TIME

V aaa





230

240

250-1

260

Date Range V-memory Location

(BCD) (READ Only)

1/100 seconds (10ms) 0-99 V7747

Seconds 0-59 V7766

Minutes 0-59 V7767

Hour 0-23 V7770

Standard

RLL Instructions

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

LDD

K73000

Load the constant

value (K73000) into

the accumulator

TIME

V2000

Set the time in the CPU

using the value in V2000

and V2001

OUTD

V2000

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2000

and V2001 V2000

Acc.

3000

0007 3000

0007

V2001

0007

Constant (K)

Acc. 0007 3000

The Time instruction uses the

value set in V2000 and V2001 to

set the time in the appropriate V-

memory locations (V7766–V7770)

Minutes SecondsNot

Used

Hour

30000007

V2001 V2000

Format

AENT

ENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT MLR

OUT

GX SHFT 3

NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT

CENT

ORST

CENT

SHFT

Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-177

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CPU Control Instructions

No Operation (NOP)

The No Operation is an empty (not programmed) memory location.

End (END)

The End instruction marks the termination point of the normal program

scan. An End instruction is required at the end of the main program

body. If the End instruction is omitted, an error will occur and the CPU

will not enter the Run Mode. Data labels, subroutines and interrupt

routines are placed after the End instruction. The End instruction is not

conditional; therefore, no input contact is allowed.

Stop (STOP)

The Stop instruction changes the operational mode of the CPU from

Run to Program (Stop) mode. This instruction is typically used to stop

PLC operation in a shutdown condition such as an I/O module failure.

In the following example, when SP45 comes on indicating an I/O module failure, the CPU will

stop operation and switch to the program mode.

NOP



230

240

250-1

260

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

NOP

SHFT TMR

INST#

PENT

END



230

240

250-1

260

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

END

SHFT 4

TMR

DENT

STOP



230

240

250-1

260

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STOP

SP45 STR

$SHFT ENT

STRN

SHFT RST

MLR

INST#

PENTSHFT

SP45 will turn on

if there is an I/O

module failure.

DS Used

HPP Used

DS Used

HPP Used

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-178

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Reset Watch Dog Timer (RSTWT)

The Reset Watch Dog Timer instruction resets the CPU scan

timer. The default setting for the watch dog timer is 200ms.

Scan times very seldom exceed 200ms, but it is possible. For/next

loops, subroutines, interrupt routines, and table instructions can

be programmed such that the scan becomes longer than 200ms.

When instructions are used in a manner that could exceed the

watch dog timer setting, this instruction can be used to reset the

timer.

A software timeout error (E003) will occur and the CPU will enter the program mode if the

scan time exceeds the watch dog timer setting. Placement of the RSTWT instruction in the

program is very important. The instruction has to be executed before the scan time exceeds the

watch dog timer’s setting.

If the scan time is consistently longer than the watch dog timer’s setting, the timeout value

may be permanently increased from the default value of 200ms by AUX 55 on the HPP or the

appropriate auxiliary function in your programming package. This eliminates the need for the

RSTWT instruction.

In the following example, the CPU scan timer will be reset to 0 when the RSTWT instruction

is executed. See the For/Next instruction for a detailed example.

RSTWT

230

240

250-1

260





DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

RSTWT

SHFT ORN

RST

MLR

ANDN

MLR

TENT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-179

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Program Control Instructions

Goto Label (GOTO) (LBL)

The Goto / Label skips all instructions between the Goto

and the corresponding LBL instruction. The operand

value for the Goto and the corresponding LBL instruction

is the same. The logic between Goto and LBL instruction

is not executed when the Goto instruction is enabled. Up

to 128 Goto instructions and 64 LBL instructions can be

used in the program.

In the following example, when C7 is on, all the program logic between the GOTO and the

corresponding LBL instruction (designated with the same constant Kaaa value) will be skipped.

The instructions being skipped will not be executed by the CPU.

K aaa

GOTO

230

240

250-1

260





KaaaLBLKaaaLBL

Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa

Constant K 1-FFFF 1-FFFF 1-FFFF

HandheldProgr ammerKeystrokes

LBLK5

C7 K5

GOTO

X1 C2

OUT

X5 Y2

OUT

STR

$SHFT 2

CENT

SHFT 6

INST#

MLR

INST#

STR

OUT

GX SHFT 2

CENT

SHFT ANDST

ANDST

FENT

STR

OUT

BENT

ENT

CENT

ENT

DirectSOFT

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-180

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

For/Next (FOR) (NEXT)

The For and Next instructions are used to execute a section of

ladder logic between the For and Next instruction a speciﬁed

numbers of times. When the For instruction is enabled, the

program will loop the speciﬁed number of times. If the For

instruction is not energized, the section of ladder logic between the

For and Next instructions is not executed.

For/Next instructions cannot be nested. Up to 64 For/Next loops

may be used in a program. If the maximum number of For/Next

loops is exceeded, error E413 will occur.

The normal I/O update and CPU housekeeping is suspended while

executing the For/Next loop. The program scan time can increase

signiﬁcantly, depending on the number of times the logic between the For and Next instruction

is executed. With the exception of immediate I/O instructions, I/O will not be updated until

the program execution is completed for that scan. Depending on the length of time required

to complete the program execution, it may be necessary to reset the watchdog timer inside of

the For/Next loop using the RSTWT instruction.

A aaa

FOR

230

240

250-1

260





Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3 - 54) All (See page 3 - 55) All (See page 3 - 56)

Constant K 1-9999 1-9999 1-9999

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-181

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, the application program inside the For/Next loop

will be executed three times. If X1 is off, the program inside the loop will not be executed.

The immediate instructions may or may not be necessary depending on your application. Also,

The RSTWT instruction is not necessary if the For/Next loop does not extend the scan time

larger the Watchdog Timer setting. For more information on the Watchdog Timer, refer to

the RSTWT instruction.

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

FOR

RSTWT

X20 Y5

OUT

123

STR

SHFT 5

INST#

ORN

SHFT ORN

RST

MLR

ANDN

MLR

TENT

STR

$SHFT 8

AENT

OUT

SHFT TMR

SET

MLR

TENT

BENT

DENT

FENT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-182

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Goto Subroutine (GTS) (SBR)

The Goto Subroutine instruction allows a section of ladder

logic to be placed outside the main body of the program

and execute only when needed. There can be a maximum

of 128 GTS instructions and 64 SBR instructions used in

a program. The GTS instructions can be nested up to 8

levels. An error E412 will occur if the maximum limits

are exceeded. Typically this will be used in an application

where a block of program logic may be slow to execute and

is not required to execute every scan. The subroutine label

and all associated logic is placed after the End statement in

the program. When the subroutine is called from the main

program, the CPU will execute the subroutine (SBR) with

the same constant number (K) as the GTS instruction that

called the subroutine.

By placing code in a subroutine, it is only scanned and

executed when needed since it resides after the End

instruction. Code which is not scanned does not impact

the overall scan time of the program.

Subroutine Return (RT)

When a Subroutine Return is executed in the subroutine,

the CPU will return to the point in the main body of the

program from which it was called. The Subroutine Return

is used as termination of the subroutine, which must be

the last instruction in the subroutine and is a stand-alone

instruction (no input contact on the rung).

Subroutine Return Conditional (RTC)

The Subroutine Return Conditional instruction is

an optional instruction used with an input contact to

implement a conditional return from the subroutine. The

Subroutine Return (RT) is still required for termination

of the Subroutine.

K aaa

GTS

230

240

250-1

260





K aaa

SBR

230

240

250-1

260





RTC

230

240

250-1

260





Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa

Constant K 1-FFFF 1-FFFF 1-FFFF

DS Used

HPP Used

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-183

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will jump to

the Subroutine Label K3, and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed. If X35 is on,

the CPU will return to the main program at the RTC instruction. If X35 is not on, Y0–Y17

will be reset to off and then the CPU will return to the main body of the program.

Standard RLL

Instructions

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SBR K3

X1 K3

GTS

END

OUTI



X20

Y10

OUTI

X21

X35

RTC

X35

RSTI

Y0 Y17

STR 1

SHFT GTS

SHFT SBR1

STR SHFT I X20

YOUT SHFT I5

STR SHFT I X21

YOUT SHFT I10

STR SHFT I X35

SHFT RTC

STRN SHFT I X35

RST SHFT I Y0Y17

SHFT RT

K10

ENT

SHFT ND

SHFT



DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-184

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will jump

to the Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed. The CPU

will return to the main body of the program after the RT instruction is executed.

Direct SOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SBR K3

X1 K3

GTS

END

OUT

X20

Y10

OUT

X21

STR

SHFT 6

MLR

RST

SHFT RST

ORN

STR

$SHFT 8

AENT

OUT

STR

$SHFT 8

CENT

OUT

SHFT

ORN

MLR

TENT

SHFT 4

TMR

DENT

BENT

DENT

FENT

ENT

SHFT



DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-185

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Master Line Set (MLS)

The Master Line Set instruction allows the program to control sections

of ladder logic by forming a new power rail controlled by the main left

power rail. The main left rail is always master line 0. When an MLS

K1 instruction is used, a new power rail is created at level 1. Master

Line Sets and Master Line Resets can be used to nest power rails up to

seven levels deep. Note that unlike stages in RLLPLUS, the logic within

the master control relays is still scanned and updated even though it will not function if the

MLS is off.

Master Line Reset (MLR)

The Master Line Reset instruction marks the end of control for the

corresponding MLS instruction. The MLR reference is one less than

the corresponding MLS.

Understanding Master Control Relays

The Master Line Set (MLS) and Master Line Reset (MLR) instructions allow you to quickly

enable (or disable) sections of the RLL program. This provides program control ﬂexibility.

The following example shows how the MLS and MLR instructions operate by creating a sub

power rail for control logic.



230

240

250-1

260

K aaa

MLS

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Constant K 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-7



230

240

250-1

260

K aaa

MLR

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Constant K 0-6 0-6 0-6 0-6

OUT

MLS

X10

MLS

OUT

MLR

OUT

Y10

Y11

DirectSOFT

When contact X0 is ON, logic under the first MLS

will be executed.

When contact X0 and X2 are ON, logic under the

second MLS will be executed.

The MLR instructions note the end of the Master

Control area.

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-186

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

MLS/MLR Example

In the following MLS/MLR example, logic between the ﬁrst MLS K1 (A) and MLR K0 (B)

will function only if input X0 is on. The logic between the MLS K2 (C) and MLR K1 (D)

will function only if input X10 and X0 is on. The last rung is not controlled by either of the

MLS coils.

MLS

OUT

MLS

X10

OUT

MLR

OUT

MLR

OUT

DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR

$ENT

MLS

BENT

STR

BENT

OUT

GX SHFT ENT

STR

$ENT

OUT

GX SHFT ENT

STR

$ENT

OUT

GX ENT

STR

$ENT

MLS

YENT

STR

$ENT

OUT

GX ENT

STR

$ENT

OUT

GX ENT

MLR

BENT

STR

$ENT

OUT

GX SHFT ENT

STR

$ENT

OUT

GX ENT

MLR

TENT

STR

$ENT

OUT

ENT

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-187

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Interrupt Instructions

Interrupt (INT)

The Interrupt instruction allows a section of ladder logic to

be placed outside the main body of the program and executed

when needed. Interrupts can be called from the program or

by external interrupts via the counter interface module (D2–

CTRINT), which provides 4 interrupts.

The software interrupt uses interrupt #00 which means the hardware interrupt #0 and the

software interrupt cannot be used together.

Typically, interrupts will be used in an application where a fast response to an input is needed

or a program section needs to execute faster than the normal CPU scan. The interrupt label

and all associated logic must be placed after the End statement in the program. When the

interrupt routine is called from the interrupt module or software interrupt, the CPU will

complete execution of the instruction it is currently processing in ladder logic, then execute the

designated interrupt routine. Interrupt module interrupts are labeled in octal to correspond

with the hardware input signal (X1 will initiate interrupt INT1). There is only one software

interrupt, and it is labeled INT 0. The program execution will continue from the point it was

before the interrupt occurred once the interrupt is serviced.

The software interrupt is set up by programming the interrupt time in V7634. The valid range

is 3 to 999 ms. The value must be a BCD value. The interrupt will not execute if the value is

out of range.

NOTE: See the example program of a software interrupt.

O aaa

INT

DL240/250-1/260 Software DL240/250-1/260 Hardware

Interrupt Input Interrupt Routine Interrupt Input Interrupt Routine

V7634 sets interrupt time INT 0 X0 (cannot be used along

with s/w interrupt) INT 0

- - X1 INT 1

- - X2 INT 2

- - X3 INT 3

Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa

Constant 0 0-3 0-3 0-3

230

240

250-1

260





DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-188

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Interrupt Return (IRT)

When an Interrupt Return is executed in the interrupt routine, the

CPU will return to the point in the main body of the program from

which it was called. The Interrupt Return is programmed as the last

instruction in an interrupt routine and is a stand alone instruction (no

input contact on the rung).

Interrupt Return Conditional (IRTC)

The Interrupt Return Conditional instruction is a optional instruction

used with an input contact to implement a conditional return from the

interrupt routine. The Interrupt Return is required to terminate the

interrupt routine.

Enable Interrupts (ENI)

The Enable Interrupt instruction is programmed in the main body of

the application program (before the End instruction) to enable hardware

or software interrupts. Once the coil has been energized, interrupts will

be enabled until they are disabled by the Disable Interrupt instruction.

Disable Interrupts (DISI)

The Disable Interrupt instruction is programmed in the main body of

the application program (before the End instruction) to disable both

hardware or software interrupts. Once the coil has been energized,

interrupts will be disabled until they are enabled by the Enable Interrupt

instruction.

IRT

IRTC





230

240

250-1

260

ENI

DISI



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260



230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-189

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Interrupt Example for Interrupt Module

In the following example, when X40 is on, the interrupts will be enabled. When X40 is off,

the interrupts will be disabled. When an interrupt signal X1 is received, the CPU will jump

to the interrupt label INT O 1. The application ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be

performed. The CPU will return to the main body of the program after the IRT instruction

is executed.

DirectSOFT

INT O 1

X40

ENI

DISI

X40

END

SETI

X20

Y10

SETI

X21

IRT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

ORN

MLR

STR

$SHFT 8

AENT

SHFT 8

FENT

STR

$SHFT 8

CENT

SHFT 8

IENT

SHFT 4

TMR

DENT

STR

$ENT

SHFT 4

TMR

IENT

STRN

SP ENT

SHFT 8

TMR

MLR

BENT

SHFT ENT

RST

SET

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-190

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Interrupt Example for Software Interrupt

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value 10 is copied to V7634. This value sets the

software interrupt to 10ms. When X20 turns on, the interrupt will be enabled. When X20

turns off, the interrupt will be disabled. Every 10ms the CPU will jump to the interrupt label

INT O 0. The application ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be performed. If X35

is not on, Y0–Y17 will be reset to off and then the CPU will return to the main body of the

program.

NOTE: Only one software interrupt is allowed and it must be Int0.

Standard RLL

Instructions

DirectSOFT

INT O0

X20

ENI

DISI

X20

END

SETI

X20

X35

RSTI

Y0 Y17

IRT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

K104*

Load the constant value

(K10) into the lower 16 bits

of the accumulator *

OUT

V7634

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to

V7634

STR

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT 0

OUT

GX SHFT AND

VENT

JMP

BENT

STR

SHFT 4

TMR

IENT

STRN

SHFT ENT

RST

ORN

MLR

STR

$SHFT 8

AENT

SHFT 8

FENT

SHFT 8

IENT

SHFT 8

IENT

SHFT 4

TMR

DENT

SHFT 8

TMR

MLR

TENT

SHFT ENT

BENT

ENT

SET

RST

STRN

K40

SP0

OUT

V7633

* The value entered, 3-999, must be followed by the digit 4 to complete the instruction.

SHFT STRN

SHFT 3

DENT

AENT

OUT

GX V7

SHFT 3

DENT

JMP

ANDST

LSHFT 1

STR

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-191

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Intelligent I/O Instructions

Read from Intelligent Module (RD)

The Read from Intelligent Module instruction reads a block of data

(1 to 128 bytes maximum) from an intelligent I/O module into the

CPU’s V-memory. It loads the function parameters into the ﬁrst and

second level of the accumulator stack, and the accumulator by three

additional instructions.

Listed below are the steps to program the Read from Intelligent module function.

Step 1: Load the base number (0 to 3) into the ﬁrst byte and the slot number (0 to 7) into the second

byte of the second level of the accumulator stack.

Step 2: Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack

(maximum of 128 bytes).

Step 3: Load the address from which the data will be read into the accumulator. This parameter

must be a HEX value.

Step 4: Insert the RD instruction that speciﬁes the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) into which the

data will be read.

Helpful hint: Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent and

load it into the accumulator when the hex format is required.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the RD instruction will read six bytes of data from

an intelligent module in base 1, slot 2 starting at address 0 in the intelligent module and copy

the information into V-memory locations V1400–V1402.



230

240

250-1

260

Standard

RLL Instructions

V aaa

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP54 On when RX, WX, RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters.

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-53) All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

K0102

X1 The constant value K0102

specifies the base number

(01) and the base slot

number (02)

The constant value K6

specifies the number of

bytes to be read

The constant value K0

specifies the starting address

in the intelligent module

V1400

V1400 is the starting location

in the CPU where the

specified data will be stored

V1401

V1402

V1403

V1404

V1400 Data

Address 0

Address 1

Address 2

Address 3

Address 4

Address 5

CPU Intelligent Module

BENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT ORN

CENT

SHFT ANDST

DPREV ENT

SHFT ANDST

DPREV ENT

AENT

3142

7586

0910

XXXX

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-192

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Write to Intelligent Module (WT)

The Write to Intelligent Module instruction writes a block of data (1

to 128 bytes maximum) to an intelligent I/O module from a block

of V-memory in the CPU. The function parameters are loaded into

the ﬁrst and second level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional

instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Read from Intelligent module

function.

Step 1: Load the base number (0 to 3) into the ﬁrst byte and the slot number (0 to 7) into the second

byte of the second level of the accumulator stack.

Step 2: Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the ﬁrst level of the accumulator stack

(maximum of 128 bytes).

Step 3: Load the intelligent module address which will receive the data into the accumulator. This

parameter must be a HEX value.

Step 4: Insert the WT instruction which speciﬁes the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) where the

data will be written from in the CPU.

Helpful hint: Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent and

load it into the accumulator when the hex format is required.

NOTE: Status ﬂags are valid only until another instruction uses the same ﬂag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the WT instruction will write six bytes of data to an

intelligent module in base 1, slot 2 starting at address 0 in the intelligent module and copy the

information from V-memory locations V1400–V1402.



230

240

250-1

260

Standard

V aaa

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

K0102

X1 The constant value K0102

specifies the base number

(01) and the base slot

number (02)

The constant value K6

specifies the number of

bytes to be written

The constant value K0

specifies the starting address

in the intelligent module

V1400

V1400 is the starting

location in the CPU where

the specified data will be

written from

V1401 7856

V1402 0190

V1403 XXXX

V1404 XXXX

V1377 XXXX

V1400 3412

Data

Address 0

Address 1

Address 2

Address 3

Address 4

Address 5

CPU Intelligent Module

BENT

STR

SHFT ANDST

SHFT ANDN

CENT

SHFT ANDST

DPREV ENT

SHFT ANDST

DPREV ENT

MLR

AENT

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP54 On when RX, WX, RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters.

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-53) All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-193

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Network Instructions

Read from Network (RX)

The Read from Network instruction is used by the master device

on a network to read a block of data from another CPU. The

function parameters are loaded into the ﬁrst and second levels of

the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional

instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the

Read from Network function.

Step 1: Load the slave address (0 to 90 BCD) into the ﬁrst byte, and load the PLC internal port

(KF1) or slot number of the master DCM or ECOM (0 to 7) into the second byte of the

second level of the accumulator stack.

Step 2: Load the number of bytes (0 to 128 BCD, multiple of 2) to be transferred into the ﬁrst level

of the accumulator stack.

Step 3: Load the address of the data to be read into the accumulator. This parameter requires a HEX

value.

Step 4: Insert the RX instruction which speciﬁes the starting V-memory location (Aaaa) where the

data will be read from in the slave.

Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can be used to

convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.

Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3 - 54) All (See page 3 - 55) All (See page 3 - 56)

Pointer P All V-memory

(See page 3 - 54) All V-memory

(See page 3 - 55) All V-memory

(See page 3 - 56)

Inputs X 0-477 0-777 0-1777

Outputs Y 0-477 0-777 0-1777

Control Relays C 0-377 0-1777 0-3777

Stage S 0-777 0-1777 0-1777

Timer T 0-177 0-377 0-377

Counter CT 0-177 0-177 0-377

Global I/O GX/GY - - 0-3777

Special Relay SP 0-137 540-617 0-777 0-777

A aaa

230

240

250-1

260





DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-194

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on and the module busy relay SP124 (see special relays) is

not on, the RX instruction will access an ECOM or DCM operating as a master in slot 2. Ten

consecutive bytes of data (V2000 – V2004) will be read from a CPU at station address 5 and

copied into V-memory locations V2300–V2304 in the CPU with the master DCM or ECOM.

Standard RLL

Instructions

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

K0205

The constant value K0205 specifies

the ECOM/DCM slot number (2) and

the slave address (5)

K10

The constant value K10

specifies the number of

bytes to be read

LDA

O 2300

Octal address 2300 is

converted to 4C0 HEX and

loaded into the accumulator.

V2300 is the starting

location for the Master CPU

where the specified data will

be read into

V2000

V2000 is the starting location

in the Slave CPU where the

specified data will be read from

V2001

8534

V2002

1936

V2003

9571

V2004

1423

V1777

XXXX

V2000

3457

Master

CPU

SP124

V2005

XXXX

V2301 8534

V2302 1936

V2303 9571

V2304 1423

V2277 XXXX

V2300 3457

V2305 XXXX

Slave

CPU

STR

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT JMP

SHFT ANDST

ANDN

WSHFT STRN

EENT

AENT

SHFT ORN

SET

BENT

AENT

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT JMP

AENT

The constant value KF105

specifies the bottom port

and the slave address (5)

(DL250–1 and DL260 only)

KF105

–or–

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-195

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Write to Network (WX)

The Write to Network instruction is used to write a block of data

from the master device to a slave device on the same network. The

function parameters are loaded into the ﬁrst and second levels of

the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional

instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the

Write to Network function.

Step 1: Load the slave address (0 to 90 BCD) into the ﬁrst byte and the PLC internal port (KF1) or

slot number of the master DCM or ECOM (0 to 7) into the second byte of the second level

of the accumulator stack.

Step 2: Load the number of bytes (0 to 128 BCD, multiple of 2) to be transferred into the ﬁrst level

of the accumulator stack.

Step 3: Load the address of the data in the master that is to be written to the network into the

accumulator. This parameter requires a HEX value.

Step 4: Insert the WX instruction which speciﬁes the starting V-memory location (Aaaa) where the

data will be written to the slave.

Helpful hint: — For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can be used to

convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.

Standard RLL

Instructions

A aaa

230

240

250-1

260





Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3 - 54) All (See page 3 - 55) All (See page 3 - 56)

Pointer P All V-memory

(See page 3 - 54) All V-memory

(See page 3 - 55) All V-memory

(See page 3 - 56)

Inputs X 0-477 0-777 0-1777

Outputs Y 0-477 0-777 0-1777

Control Relays C 0-377 0-1777 0-3777

Stage S 0-777 0-1777 0-1777

Timer T 0-177 0-377 0-377

Counter CT 0-177 0-177 0-377

Global I/O GX/GY - - 0-3777

Special Relay SP 0-137 540-617 0-777 0-777

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-196

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example when X1 is on and the module busy relay SP124 (see special relays) is

not on, the WX instruction will access a DCM or ECOM operating as a master in slot 2. Ten

consecutive bytes of data is read from the CPU at station address 5 and copied to V-memory

locations V2000–V2004 in the slave CPU.

Standard RLL

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

K0205

K10

The constant value K10

specifies the number of

bytes to write

LDA

O 2300

V2000

V2000 is the starting location

in the Slave CPU where the

specified data will be written to.

V2001

8534

V2002

1936

V2003

9571

V2004

1423

V1777

XXXX

V2000

3457

Master

CPU

SP124

V2005

XXXX

V2301 8534

V2302 1936

V2303 9571

V2304 1423

V2277 XXXX

V2300 3457

V2305 XXXX

Slave

CPU

Octal address 2300 is

converted to 4C0 HEX and

loaded into the accumulator.

V2300 is the starting

location for the Master CPU

where the specified data will

be written from.

STR

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT JMP

SHFT ANDST

ANDN

WSHFT STRN

EENT

AENT

SHFT

INST#

AENT

SHFT SHFT AND

AENT

SET

ANDN

SHFT ANDST

DSHFT JMP

AENT

BENT

The constant value KF105

specifies the bottom port

and the slave address (5)

(DL250–1 and DL260 only)

KF105

–or–

The constant value K0205 specifies

the ECOM/DCM slot number (2) and

the slave address (5)

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-197

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions

Fault (FAULT)

The Fault instruction is used to display a message on the

handheld programmer or DirectSOFT. The message has a

maximum of 23 characters and can be either V-memory data,

numerical constant data, or ASCII text. See Appendix G for the

ASCII Conversion Table.

To display the value in a V-memory location, specify the

V-memory location in the instruction. To display the data

in ACON (ASCII constant) or NCON (Numerical constant)

instructions, specify the constant (K) value for the corresponding

data label area.

NOTE: The FAULT instruction takes a considerable amount of time to execute. This is because the FAULT

parameters are stored in EEPROM. Make sure you consider the instruction execution times (shown in

Appendix C) if you are attempting to use the FAULT instructions in applications that require faster than

normal execution cycles.

Operand Data Type DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa aaa

V-memory V All (See page 3-54) All (See page 3-55) All (See page 3-56)

Constant. K 1-FFFF 1-FFFF 1-FFFF

Standard RLL

Instructions

FAULT

A aaa

230

240

250-1

260





DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-198

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Fault Example

In the following example, when X1 is on, the message SW 146 will display on the handheld

programmer. The NCONs use the HEX ASCII equivalent of the text to be displayed. (The

HEX ASCII for a blank is 20, a 1 is 31, 4 is 34 ...)

Standard RLL

Instructions

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DLBL

END

FAULT

ACON

A SW

NCON

K 2031

NCON

K 3436

STR

SHFT 4

TMR

DENT

SHFT 3

ANDST

BENT

SHFT 0

INST#

TMR

SHFT TMR

INST#

TMR

SHFT TMR

INST#

TMR

SW 146

BENT

ENT

RST

ANDN

SHFT ISG

MLR

ANDST

BENT



DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-199

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Data Label (DLBL)

The Data Label instruction marks the beginning of an

ASCII / numeric data area. DLBLs are programmed

after the End statement. A maximum of 64 (DL240 and

DL250–1/260) or 32 (DL230) DLBL instructions can be

used in a program. Multiple NCONs and ACONs can be

used in a DLBL area.

ASCII Constant (ACON)

The ASCII Constant instruction is used with the DLBL

instruction to store ASCII text for use with other

instructions. Two ASCII characters can be stored in an

ACON instruction. If only one character is stored in

an ACON, a leading space will be printed in the Fault

message.

Numerical Constant (NCON)

The Numerical Constant instruction is used with the

DLBL instruction to store the HEX ASCII equivalent of

numerical data for use with other instructions. Two digits

can be stored in an NCON instruction.



230

240

250-1

260

K aaa

DLBL



230

240

250-1

260

A aaa

ACON

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

ASCII A 0-9 A-Z 0-9 A-Z 0-9 A-Z 0-9 A-Z



230

240

250-1

260

K aaa

NCON

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Constant K 0-FFFF 0-FFFF 0-FFFF 0-FFFF

Operand Data Type DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

aaa aaa aaa aaa

Constant K 1-FFFF 1-FFFF 1-FFFF 1-FFFF

DS Used

HPP Used

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-200

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Data Label Example

In the following example, an ACON and two NCON instructions are used within a DLBL

instruction to build a text message. See the FAULT instruction for information on displaying

messages.

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DLBL

END

ACON

A SW

NCON

K 2031

NCON

K 3436

SHFT 4

TMR

DENT

SHFT 3

ANDST

BENT

SHFT 0

INST#

TMR

SHFT TMR

INST#

TMR

SHFT TMR

INST#

TMR

ENT

RST

ANDN

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-201

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Print Message (PRINT)

The Print Message instruction prints the embedded

text or text/data variable message to the speciﬁed

communications port (2 on the DL250–1/260 CPU),

which must have the communications port conﬁgured.

You may recall from the CPU speciﬁcations in Chapter 3 that the DL250–1 and DL260 ports

are capable of several protocols. To conﬁgure a port using the Handheld Programmer, use

AUX 56 and follow the prompts, making the same choices as indicated below on this page.

To conﬁgure a port in DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then Setup Secondary

Comm Port.

• Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2.”

• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “Non-sequence.” The Setup Communication Ports

dialog box opens.

• Memory Address: Choose a V-memory address for DirectSOFT to use to store the port setup

information. You will need to reserve 66 contiguous words in V-memory for this purpose. Select

“Use for printing only” if it applies.

• Baud Rate: Choose the baud rate that matches your printer.

• Stop Bits, Parity: Choose number of stop bits and parity setting to match your printer.

Then click the button indicated to send the Port 2 conﬁguration to the CPU, and click

Close. See Chapter 3 for port wiring information to connect your printer to the DL250-

1/260.

PRINT A aaa

“Hello, this is a PLC message”

Data Type DL250-1 Range DL260 Range

A aaa aaa

Constant K 2 2





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-202

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Port 2 on the DL250–1/260 has standard RS232 levels, and should work with most printer

serial input connections.

Text element - used for printing character strings. The character strings are deﬁned as the

character (more than 0) ranged by the double quotation marks. Two hex numbers preceded

by the dollar sign means an 8-bit ASCII character code. Also, two characters preceded by the

dollar sign is interpreted according to the following table:

The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the output to the

printer.

Example:

” ” Length 0 without character

”A” Length 1 with character A

” ” Length 1 with blank

” $” ” Length 1 with double quotation mark

” $ R $ L ” Length 2 with one CR and one LF

” $ 0 D $ 0 A ” Length 2 with one CR and one LF

” $ $ ” Length 1 with one $ mark

In printing an ordinary line of text, you will need to include double quotation marks before

and after the text string. Error code 499 will occur in the CPU when the print instruction

contains invalid text or no quotations. It is important to test your PRINT instruction data

during the application development.

The following example prints the message to port 2. We use a PD contact, which causes the

message instruction to be active for just one scan. Note the $N at the end of the message,

which produces a carriage return / line feed on the printer. This prepares the printer to print

the next line, starting from the left margin.

#Character code Description

1$$ Dollar sign ($)

2$” Double quotation (“)

3$L or $1 Line feed (LF)

4$N or $n Carriage return line feed (CRLF)

5$P or $p Form feed

6$R or $r Carriage return (CR)

7$T or $t Tab

X1 Print the message to Port 2 when

X1 makes an off-to-on transition.

PRINT K2

“Hello, this is a PLC message.$N”

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-203

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

V-memory element – used for printing V-memory contents in the integer format or real

format. Use V-memory number or V-memory number with “:” and data type. The data types

are shown in the table below. The Character code must be capital letters.

NOTE: There must be a space entered before and after the V-memory address to separate it from the text

string. Failure to do this will result in an error code 499.

Example:

V2000 Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number

V2000 : B Print BCD data in V2000

V2000 : D Print binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number

V2000 : D B Print BCD data in V2000 and V2001

V2000 : R Print ﬂoating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number

V2000 : E Print ﬂoating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number with

exponent

Example: The following example prints a message containing text and a variable. The “reactor

temperature” labels the data, which is at V2000. You can use the ‘: B’ qualiﬁer after the V2000

if the data is in BCD format, for example. The ﬁnal string adds the units of degrees to the line

of text, and the $N adds a carriage return / line feed.

V-memory text element – used for printing text stored in V-memory. Use the % followed

by the number of characters after V-memory number for representing the text. If you assign

“0” as the number of characters, the print function will read the character count from the ﬁrst

location. Then it will start at the next V-memory location and read that number of ASCII

codes for the text from memory.

Example:

V2000 % 16 16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed.

V2000 % 0 The characters in V2001 to Vxxxx (determined by the number in

V2000) will be printed.

#Character code Description

1none 16-bit binary (decimal number)

2: B 4-digit BCD

3: D 32-bit binary (decimal number)

4: D B 8-digit BCD

5: R Floating point number (real number)

6: E Floating point number (real number with exponent)

X1 Print the message to Port 2

when X1 makes an off-to-on

transition.

PRINT K2

“Reactor temperature = ” V2000 “deg. $N”

Message will read:

Reactor temperature = 0156 deg.

represents a space

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-204

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Bit element – used for printing the state of the designated bit in V-memory or a relay bit.

The bit element can be assigned by the designating point (.) and bit number preceded by the

V-memory number or relay number. The output type is described as shown in the table below.

Example:

V2000.15 Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000, in 1/0 format

C100 Prints the status of C100 in 1/0 format

C100 : BOOL Prints the status of C100 in TRUE/FALSE format

C100 : ON/OFF Prints the status of C100 in ON/OFF format

V2000.15 : BOOL Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE/FALSE format

The maximum numbers of characters you can print is 128. The number of characters for each

element is listed in the table below:

The Handheld Programmer’s mnemonic is “PRINT,” followed by the DEF ﬁeld.

Special relay ﬂags SP116 and SP117 indicate the status of the DL250–1/260 CPU ports (busy,

or communications error). See the appendix on special relays for a description.

NOTE: You must use the appropriate special relay in conjunction with the PRINT command to ensure

the ladder program does not try to PRINT to a port that is still busy from a previous PRINT or WX or RX

instruction.

#Data format Description

1none Print 1 for an ON state, and 0 for an OFF state

2: BOOL Print “TRUE” for an ON state, and “FALSE” for an OFF state

3: ONOFF Print “ON” for an ON state, and “OFF” for an OFF state

Element type Maximum

Characters

Text, 1 character 1

16-bit binary 6

32-bit binary 11

4-digit BCD 4

8-digit BCD 8

Floating point (real number) 13

Floating point (real with exponent) 13

V-memory/text 2

Bit (1/0 format) 1

Bit (TRUE/FALSE format) 5

Bit (ON/OFF format) 3

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-205

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Modbus RTU Instructions (DL260)

Modbus Read from Network (MRX)

The Modbus Read from Network (MRX) instruction is used by the DL260 network master

to read a block of data from a connected slave device and to write the data into V–memory

addresses within the master. The instruction allows the user to specify the Modbus Function

Code, slave station address, starting master and slave memory addresses, number of elements to

transfer, Modbus data format and the Exception Response Buffer.

• Port Number: must be DL260 Port 2 (K2)

• Slave Address: specify a slave station address (1 to 247)

• Function Code: The following Modbus function codes are supported by the MRX instruction:

01 – Read a group of coils

02 – Read a group of inputs

03 – Read holding registers

04 – Read input registers

07 – Read Exception status

• Start Slave Memory Address: speciﬁes the starting slave memory address of the data to be read. See

the table on the following page.

• Start Master Memory Address: speciﬁes the starting memory address in the master where the data

will be placed. See the table on the following page.

• Number of Elements: speciﬁes how many coils, inputs, holding registers or input registers will be

read. See the table on the following page.

• Modbus Data Format: speciﬁes Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used.





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-206

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

• Exception Response Buffer: speciﬁes the master memory address where the Exception Response

will be placed (6 bytes in length). See the table on the following page. The exception response

buffer uses 3 words. These bytes are swapped in the MRX/MWX exception response buffer

V-memory so:

V-Memory 1 Hi Byte = Function Code Byte (Most Signiﬁcant Bit Set)

V-Memory 1 Lo Byte = Address Byte

V-Memory 2 Hi Byte = One of the CRC Bytes

V-Memory 2 Lo Byte = Exception Code

V-Memory 3 Hi Byte = 0

V-Memory 3 Lo Byte = Other CRC Byte

MRX Slave Memory Address

MRX Master Memory Addresses

MRX Slave Address Ranges

Function Code Modbus Data Format Slave Address Range(s)

01-Read Coil 484 Mode 1-999

01-Read Coil 584/984 Mode 1-65535

02-Read Input Status 484 Mode 1001-1999

02-Read Input Status 584/984 Mode 10001-19999 (5 digit) or 100001-

165535 (6 digit)

03-Read Holding Register 484 Mode 4001-4999

03-Read Holding Register 584/984 40001-49999 9 (5 digit) or

4000001-465535 (6 digit)

04-Read Input Register 484 Mode 3001-3999

04-Read Input Register 584/984 Mode 30001-39999 (5 digit) or 3000001-

365535 (6 digit)

07-Read Exception Status 484 and 584/984 Mode n/a

MRX Master Memory Address Ranges

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

Inputs X 0-1777

Outputs Y 0-1777

Control Relays C 0-3777

Stage Bits S 0-1777

Timer Bits T 0-377

Counter Bits CT 0-377

Special Relays SP 0-777

V-memory V all (see page 3-56)

Global Inputs GX 0-3777

Global Outputs GY 0-3777

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-207

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

MRX Number of Elements

MRX Exception Response Buffer

MRX Example

DL260 port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it (see Appendix D for comm

port special relays). One indicates “Port busy” (SP116), and the other indicates ”Port

Communication Error” (SP117). The “Port Busy” bit is on while the PLC communicates

with the slave. When the bit is off, the program can initiate the next network request. The

“Port Communication Error” bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error. Use of this bit

is optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit

is reset when an MRX or MWX instruction is executed.

Typically, network communications will last longer than one CPU scan. The program must

wait for the communications to ﬁnish before starting the next transaction.

Number of Elements

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

V-memory V All (see page 3-56)

Constant K Bits: 1-2000

Registers: 1-125

Exception Response Buffer

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

V-memory V All (see page 3-56)

This rung does a Modbus read from the first 32 coils of slave address number one.

It will place the value into 32 bits of the master starting at C0.

SP116

Port 2 Busy Bit

C100

Instruction Interlock Bit MRX

CPU/DCM Slot: CPU

Port Number:

Slave Address:

Function Code:

Start Slave Memory Address:

Start Master Memory Address:

Number of Elements:

Modbus Data Ty pe:

Exception Response Buffer:

01 - Read Coil Status

K32

584/984 Mode

V400

RST

C100

Instruction Interlock Bit

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-208

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Modbus Write to Network (MWX)

The Modbus Write to Network (MWX) instruction is used to write a block of data from the

network master’s (DL260) memory to Modbus memory addresses within a slave device on the

network. The instruction allows the user to specify the Modbus Function Code, slave station

address, starting master and slave memory addresses, number of elements to transfer, Modbus

data format and the Exception Response Buffer.

• Port Number: must be DL260 Port 2 (K2)

• Slave Address: specify a slave station address (0 to 247)

• Function Code: The following Modbus function codes are supported by the MWX instruction:

05 – Force Single coil

06 – Preset Single Register

15 – Force Multiple Coils

16 – Preset Multiple Registers

• Start Slave Memory Address: speciﬁes the starting slave memory address where the data will be

written

• Start Master Memory Address: speciﬁes the starting address of the data in the master that is to be

written to the slave

• Number of Elements: speciﬁes how many consecutive coils or registers will be written to. This ﬁeld

is only active when either function code 15 or 16 is selected

• Modbus Data Format: speciﬁes Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-209

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

• Exception Response Buffer: speciﬁes the master memory address where the Exception Response

will be placed (6-bytes in length). See the table on the following page. The exception response

buffer uses 3 words. These bytes are swapped in the MRX/MWX exception response buffer

V-memory so:

V-Memory 1 Hi Byte = Function Code Byte (Most Signiﬁcant Bit Set)

V-Memory 1 Lo Byte = Address Byte

V-Memory 2 Hi Byte = One of the CRC Bytes

V-Memory 2 Lo Byte = Exception Code

V-Memory 3 Hi Byte = 0

V-Memory 3 Lo Byte = Other CRC Byte

MWX Slave Memory Address

MWX Master Memory Addresses

MWX Slave Address Ranges

Function Code Modbus Data Format Slave Address Range(s)

05 - Force Sinlge Coil 484 Mode 1-999

05 - Force Single Coil 584/984 Mode 1-65535

06 - Preset Single Register 484 Mode 4001-4999

06 - Preset Single Register 584/984 Mode 40001-49999 (5 digit) or

400001-465535 (6 digit)

15 - Force Multiple Coils 484 Mode 1-999

15 - Force Multiple Coils 584/984 Mode 1-65535

16 - Preset Multiple Registers 484 Mode 4001-4999

16 - Preset Multiple Registers 584/984 Mode 40001-49999 (5 digit) or

4000001-465535 (6 digit)

MWX Master Memory Address Ranges

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

Inputs X 0-1777

Outputs Y 0-1777

Control Relays C 0-3777

Stage Bits S 0-1777

Timer Bits T 0-377

Counter Bits CT 0-377

Special Relays SP 0-777

V-memory V all (see page 3-56)

Global Inputs GX 0-3777

Global Outputs GY 0-3777

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-210

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

MWX Number of Elements

MWX Exception Response Buffer

MWX Example

DL260 port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it (see Appendix D for comm

port special relays). One indicates “Port busy” (SP116), and the other indicates ”Port

Communication Error” (SP117). The “Port Busy” bit is on while the PLC communicates

with the slave. When the bit is off, the program can initiate the next network request. The

“Port Communication Error” bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error. Use of this bit

is optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit

is reset when an MRX or MWX instruction is executed.

Typically, network communications will last longer than one CPU scan. The program must

wait for the communications to ﬁnish before starting the next transaction.

This rung does a Modbus write to the first holding register 40001 of the slave address 1. It will write the

values to V2000. This particular function code only writes to one register. Use Function Code 16 to write

to multiple registers. Only one network instruction (WX, RX, MWX, MRX) can be enabled in each one scan.

That is the reason for the interlock bits. For using many network instructions on the same port, look at

using the shift register instruction.

SP116

Port 2 Busy Bit

C100

Instruction Interlock Bit MWX

CPU/DCM Slot: CPU

Port Number:

Slave Address:

Function Code:

Start Slave Memory Address:

Start Master Memory Address:

Number of Elements:

Modbus Data Ty pe:

Exception Response Buffer:

05 - Force Single Coil

40001

V2000

n/a

584/984 Mode

V400

RST

C100

Instruction Interlock Bit

Exception Response Buffer

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

V-memory V all (see page 3-56)

Number of Elements

Operand Data Type DL260 Range

V-memory V all (see page 3-56)

Constant K Bits: 1-2000

Registers: 1-125

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-211

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ASCII Instructions (DL260)

The DL260 CPU supports several instructions and methods that allow ASCII strings to be read

into and written from the PLC communications ports.

Speciﬁcally, port 2 on the DL260 can be used for either reading or writing raw ASCII strings,

but cannot be used for both on the same CPU.

The DL260 can also decipher ASCII embedded within a supported protocol (K–Sequence,

DirectNET, Modbus, Ethernet) via the CPU ports, H2–ECOM or D2–DCM module.

ASCII character tables and descriptions can be found at www.asciitable.com.

Reading ASCII Input Strings

There are several methods which the DL260 can use to read ASCII input strings:

1) ASCII IN (AIN) – This instruction conﬁgures port 2 for raw ASCII input strings with parameters

such as ﬁxed and variable length ASCII strings, termination characters, byte swapping options, and

instruction control bits. Use barcode scanners, weight scales, etc., to write raw ASCII input strings

into port 2 based on the (AIN) instruction’s parameters.

2) Write embedded ASCII strings directly to V–memory from an external HMI or similar master

device via a supported communications protocol using the CPU ports, H2–ECOM or D2–DCM

module. The AIN instruction is not used in this case.

3) If a DL260 PLC is a master on a network, the Network Read instruction (RX) can be used to read

embedded ASCII data from a slave device via a supported communications protocol using port 2,

H2–ECOM or D2–DCM module. The RX instruction places the data directly into V–memory.

Writing ASCII Output Strings

The following instructions can be used to write ASCII output strings:

1) Print from V–memory (PRINTV) – Use this instruction to write raw ASCII strings out of port 2

to a display panel or a serial printer, etc. The instruction features the starting V–memory address,

string length, byte swapping options, etc. When the instruction’s permissive bit is enabled, the

string is written to port 2.

2) Print to V–memory (VPRINT) – Use this instruction to create pre–coded ASCII strings in the

PLC (i.e. alarm messages). When the instruction’s permissive bit is enabled, the message is loaded

into a pre–deﬁned V–memory address location. Then use the PRINTV instruction to write the

pre–coded ASCII string out of port 2. American, European and Asian Time/Date stamps are

supported.

Additionally, if a DL260 PLC is a master on a network, the Network Write instruction (WX)

can be used to write embedded ASCII data to an HMI or slave device directly from V–memory

via a supported communications protocol using port 2, H2–ECOM or D2–DCM module.





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-212

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Managing the ASCII Strings

The following instructions can be helpful in managing the ASCII strings within the CPU’s

V-memory:

ASCII Find (AFIND) – Finds where a speciﬁc portion of the ASCII string is located in

continuous V-memory addresses. Forward and reverse searches are supported.

ASCII Extract (AEX) – Extracts a speciﬁc portion (usually some data value) from the ASCII

ﬁnd location or other known ASCII data location.

Compare V-memory (CMPV) – This instruction is used to compare two blocks of

V-memory addresses and is usually used to detect a change in an ASCII string. Compared data

types must be of the same format (i.e., BCD, ASCII, etc.).

Swap Bytes (SWAPB) – usually used to swap V-memory bytes on ASCII data that was written

directly to V-memory from an external HMI or similar master device via a communications

protocol. The AIN and AEX instructions have a built–in byte swap feature.

ASCII Input (AIN)

The ASCII Input instruction allows the CPU to receive ASCII strings through the speciﬁed

communications port and places the string into a series of speciﬁed V-memory registers. The

ASCII data can be received as a ﬁxed number of bytes or as a variable length string with a

speciﬁed termination character(s). Other features include Byte Swap preferences, Character

Timeout, and user-deﬁned ﬂag bits for Busy, Complete and Timeout Error.





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-213

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

AIN Fixed Length Conﬁguration

• Length Type: select ﬁxed length based on the length of the ASCII string that will be sent to the

CPU port.

• Port Number: must be DL260 port 2 (K2).

• Data Destination: speciﬁes where the ASCII string will be placed in V–memory.

• Fixed Length: speciﬁes the length, in bytes, of the ﬁxed-length ASCII string the port will receive.

• Inter–character Timeout: if the amount of time between incoming ASCII characters exceeds the set

time, the speciﬁed Timeout Error bit will be set. No data will be stored at the Data Destination V–

memory location. The bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled. None

selection disables this feature.

• First Character Timeout: if the amount of time from when the AIN is enabled to the time the ﬁrst

character is received exceeds the set time, the speciﬁed First Character Timeout bit will be set. The

bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled. None selection disables this

feature.

• Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and low–byte within each V–memory register of the Fixed Length

ASCII string. See the SWAPB instruction for details.

• Busy Bit: is ON while the AIN instruction is receiving ASCII data.

• Complete Bit: is set once the ASCII data has been received for the speciﬁed ﬁxed length and reset

when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled.

• Inter–character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the Character Timeout is exceed. See Character

Timeout explanation above.

• First Character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the First Character Timeout is exceeded. See First

Character Timeout explanation above.

Parameter DL260 Range

Data Destination All V-memory (See page 3 -56)

Fixed Length K1-128

Bits: Busy, Complete, Timeout Error, Overﬂow C0-3777

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction

SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid

SP116 On when CPU port 2 is communicating with another device

SP117 On when CPU port 2 has experienced a communication error

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-214

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

AIN Fixed Length Examples

Fixed Length example when the PLC is reading the port continuously and timing is not critical.

Fixed Length example when character to character timing is critical.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-215

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

AIN Variable Length Conﬁguration:

• Length Type: select Variable Length if the ASCII string length followed by termination characters

will vary in length.

• Port Number: must be DL260 port 2 (K2).

• Data Destination: speciﬁes where the ASCII string will be placed in V–memory.

• Maximum Variable Length: speciﬁes, in bytes, the maximum length of a Variable Length ASCII

string the port will receive.

• Inter–character Timeout: if the amount of time between incoming ASCII characters exceeds the set

time, the Timeout Error bit will be set. No data will be stored at the Data Destination V–memory

location. The Timeout Error bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled.

None selection disables this feature.

• First Character Timeout: if the amount of time from when the AIN is enabled to the time the ﬁrst

character is received exceeds the set time, the speciﬁed First Character Timeout bit will be set. The

bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled. None selection disables this

feature.

• Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and low–byte within each V–memory register of the Varaible

Length ASCII string. See the SWAPB instruction for details.

• Termination Code Length: consists of either 1 or 2 characters. Refer to the ASCII table in

Appendix G.

• Overﬂow Error Bit: is set when the ASCII data received exceeds the Maximum Variable Length

speciﬁed.

• Busy Bit: is ON while the AIN instruction is receiving ASCII data.

• Complete Bit: is set once the ASCII data has been received up to the termination code characters.

It will be reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled.

• Inter–character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the Character Timeout is exceed. See Character

Timeout explanation above.

• First Character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the First Character Timeout is exceeded. See First

Character Timeout explanation above.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-216

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

AIN Variable Length Example

AIN Variable Length example used to read barcodes on boxes (PE = photoelectric sensor).

Parameter DL260 Range

Data Destination All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Max. Variable Length K1-128

Bits: Busy, Complete, Timeout Error, Overﬂow C0-3777

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-217

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ASCII Find (AFIND)

The ASCII Find instruction locates a speciﬁc ASCII string or portion of an ASCII string within

a range of V-memory registers and places the string’s Found Index number (byte number where

desired string is found) in Hex, into a speciﬁed V-memory register. Other features include,

Search Starting Index number for skipping over unnecessary bytes before beginning the FIND

operation, Forward or Reverse direction search, and From Beginning and From End selections

to reference the Found Index Value.

• Base Address: speciﬁes the beginning V-memory

memory.

• Total Number of Bytes: speciﬁes the total number

of bytes to search for the desired ASCII string.

• Search Starting Index: speciﬁes which byte to skip to

(with respect to the Base Address) before beginning

the search.

• Direction: Forward begins the search from lower

numbered V-memory registers to higher numbered

V-memory registers. Reverse does the search from

higher numbered V–memory registers to lower-

numbered V-memory registers.

• Found Index Value: speciﬁes whether the Beginning

or the End byte of the ASCII string found will be

loaded into the Found Index register.

• Found Index: speciﬁes the V–memory register where

the Found Index Value will be stored. A value of

FFFF will result if the desired string is not located

in the memory registers speciﬁed. A value of EEEE

will result if there is a conﬂict in the AFIND search

parameters speciﬁed.

• Search for String: up to 128 characters.





230

240

250-1

260

Parameter DL260 Range

Base Address All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Total Number of Bytes All V-memory (See page 3-56)

or K1-128

Search Starting Index All V-memory (See page 3-56)

or K0-127

Found Index All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.

SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-218

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

AFIND Search Example

In the following example, the AFIND instruction is used to search for the “day” portion

of “Friday” in the ASCII string “Today is Friday,” which had previously been loaded into

V–memory. Note that a Search Starting Index of constant (K) 5 combined with a Forward

Direction Search is used to prevent ﬁnding the “day” portion of the word “Today.” The Found

Index will be placed into V4000.

Base Address T

54h

6Fh

64h

61h

79h

20h

69h

73h

20h

46h

72h

69h

64h

61h

79h

2Eh

Low

High

V3000

V3001

V3002

V3003

V3004

V3005

V3006

V3007

Reverse Direction Search

Forward Direction Search

Search start Index Number

Beginning Index Number

End Index Number

Found Index Number

40000012

ASCII Characters

HEX Equivalent

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-219

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

AFIND Example Combined with AEX Instruction

When an AIN instruction has executed, its Complete bit can be used to trigger an AFIND

instruction to search for a desired portion of the ASCII string. Once the string is found, the

AEX instruction can be used to extract the located string.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-220

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ASCII Extract (AEX)

The ASCII Extract instruction extracts a speciﬁed number of bytes of ASCII data from one

series of V-memory registers and places them into another series of V-memory registers. Other

features include Extract at Index for skipping over unnecessary bytes before begining the

Extract operation, Shift ASCII Option, for One Byte Left or One Byte Right, Byte Swap and

Convert data to a BCD format number.

• Source Base Address: speciﬁes the beginning

V-memory register where the entire ASCII string

is stored in memory.

• Extract at Index: speciﬁes which byte to skip to

(with respect to the Source Base Address) before

extracting the data.

• Number of Bytes: speciﬁes the number of bytes

to be extracted.

• Shift ASCII Option: shifts all extracted data

one byte left or one byte right to displace

“unwanted” characters, if necessary.

• Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and the low–

byte within each V-memory register of the

extracted data. See the SWAPB instruction for

details.

• Convert BCD(Hex) ASCII to BCD (Hex):

if enabled, this will convert ASCII numerical

characters to Hexadecimal numerical values.

• Destination Base Address: speciﬁes the

V-memory register where the extracted data

will be stored.

See the previous page for an example using the AEX instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

Parameter DL260 Range

Source Base Address All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Extract at Index All V-memory (See page 3-56) or K0-127

Number of Bytes K1-128

Destination Base Address All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.

SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-221

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ASCII Compare (CMPV)

The ASCII Compare instruction compares two groups of V–memory registers. The CMPV

will compare any data type (ASCII to ASCII, BCD to BCD, etc) of one series (group) of

V–memory registers to another series of V–memory registers for a speciﬁed byte length.

“Compare from” Starting Address:

specifies the beginning V–memory

registers to be compared from.

“Compare to” Starting Address: speciﬁes

the beginning V–memory register of the

second group of V–memory registers to

be compared to.

Number of Bytes: speciﬁes the length of

each V–memory group to be compared.

SP61 = 1 (ON), the result is equal

SP61 = 0 (OFF), the result is not equal

CMPV Example

The CMPV instruction executes when the AIN instruction is complete. If the compared

V–memory tables are equal, SP61 will turn ON.





230

240

250-1

260

Parameter DL260 Range

Compare from Starting Address All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Compare to Starting Address All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Number of Bytes All V-memory (See page 3-56) or K0-127

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.

SP61 On when result is equal.

SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.

Strings are equal

OUT

AIN Complete

CMPV

"Compare from" Starting Address: V3400

"Compare to" Starting Address: V3500

Number of Bytes: K12

C11

SP61

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-222

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ASCII Print to V-memory (VPRINT)

The ASCII Print to V–memory instruction will write a speciﬁed ASCII string into a series of

V–memory registers. Other features include Byte Swap, options to suppress or convert leading

zeros or spaces, and _Date and _Time options for U.S., European, and Asian date formats and

12- or 24-hour time formats.

• Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and low–byte

within each V–memory register to which

the ASCII string is printed. See the SWAPB

instruction for details.

• Print to Starting V–memory Address:

speciﬁes the beginning of a series of V–

memory addresses where the ASCII string will

be placed by the VPRINT instruction.

• Starting V–memory Address: the ﬁrst V–

memory register of the series of registers

speciﬁed will contain the ASCII string’s length

in bytes.

• Starting V–memory Address +1: the 2nd and

subsequent registers will contain the ASCII

string printed to V–memory.

VPRINT Time/Date Stamping

The codes in the table below can be used in the VPRINT ASCII string message to “print to

V–memory” the current time and/or date.





230

240

250-1

260

Parameter DL260 Range

Print to Starting V-memory Address All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.

SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.

#Character Code Date/Time Stamp Options

1_Date:us American standard (month/day/2 digit year)

2_Date:e European standard (day/month/2 digit year)

3_Date:a Asian standard (2 digit year/month/day)

4_Time:12 standard 12 hour clock (0-12 hour:min am/pm)

5_Time:24 standard 24 hour clock (0-23 hour:min am/pm)

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-223

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

VPRINT V-memory element

The following modiﬁers can be used in the VPRINT ASCII string message to “print to

V–memory” register contents in integer format or real format. Use V-memory number or

V-memory number with “:” and data type. The data types are shown in the table below. The

Character code must be capital letters.

NOTE: There must be a space entered before and after the V-memory address to separate it from the text

string. Failure to do this will result in error code 499.

Examples:

V2000 Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number

V2000 : B Print BCD data in V2000

V2000 : D Print binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number

V2000 : D B Print BCD data in V2000 and V2001

V2000 : R Print ﬂoating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number

V2000 : E Print ﬂoating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number with exponent

The following modiﬁers can be added to any of the modiﬁes above to suppress or convert

leading zeros or spaces. The character code must be capital letters.

Example with V2000 = 0018 (binary format)

#Character Code Description

1none 16-bit binary (decimal number)

2: B 4-digit BCD

3: D 32-bit binary (decimal number)

4: D B 8-digit BCD

5: R Floating point number (real number)

6: E Floating point number (real number with exponent)

#Character Code Description

1 S Suppresses leading spaces

2C0 Converts leading spaces to zeros

3 0 Suppresses leading zeros

V-memory Register

with Modiﬁer

Number of Characters

1234

V2000 0018

V2000:B 0012

V2000:B0 1 2

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-224

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Example with V2000 = sp sp18 (binary format) where sp = space

VPRINT V-memory text element

The following is used for “printing to V-memory” text stored in registers. Use the % followed

by the number of characters after V-memory number for representing the text. If you assign

“0” as the number of characters, the function will read the character count from the ﬁrst

location. Then it will start at the next V-memory location and read that number of ASCII

codes for the text from memory.

Example:

V2000 % 16 16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed.

V2000 % 0 The characters in V2001 to Vxxxx (determined by the number in

V2000) will be printed.

VPRINT Bit element

The following is used for “printing to V–memory” the state of the designated bit in

V-memory or a control relay bit. The bit element can be assigned by the designating point

(.) and bit number preceded by the V-memory number or relay number. The output type is

described as shown in the table below.

Example:

V2000.15 Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000, in 1/0 format

C100 Prints the status of C100 in 1/0 format

C100 : BOOL Prints the status of C100 in TRUE/FALSE format

C100 : ON/OFF Prints the status of C100 in ON/OFF format

V2000.15 : BOOL Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE/FALSE format

V-memory Register

with Modiﬁer

Number of Characters

1 2 3 4

V2000 sp sp 1 8

V2000:B sp sp 1 2

V2000:BS 1 2

V2000:BC0 0 0 1 2

#Data format Description

1none Print 1 for an ON state, and 0 for an OFF state

2: BOOL Print “TRUE” for an ON state, and “FALSE” for an

OFF state

3: ONOFF Print “ON” for an ON state, and “OFF” for an OFF state

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-225

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

The maximum numbers of characters you can VPRINT is 128. The number of characters

required for each element, regardless of whether the :S, :C0 or :0 modiﬁers are used, is listed

in the table below.

Text element

The following is used for “printing to V-memory” character strings. The character strings

are deﬁned as the character (more than 0) ranged by the double quotation marks. Two hex

numbers preceded by the dollar sign means an 8-bit ASCII character code. Also, two characters

preceded by the dollar sign is interpreted according to the following table:

Element Type Maximum

Characters

Text, 1 character 1

16-bit binary 6

32-bit binary 11

4-digit BCD 4

8-digit BCD 8

Floating point (real number) 13

Floating point (real with exponent) 13

V-memory/text 2

Bit (1/0 format) 1

Bit (TRUE/FALSE format) 5

Bit (ON/OFF format) 3

#Character code Description

1$$ Dollar sign ($)

2$” Double quotation (“)

3$L or $l Line feed (LF)

4$N or $n Carriage return line feed (CRLF)

5$P or $p Form feed

6$R or $r Carriage return (CR)

7$T or $t Tab

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-226

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the output to the

printer.

Example:

” ” Length 0 without character

”A” Length 1 with character A

” ” Length 1 with blank

” $” ” Length 1 with double quotation mark

” $ R $ L ” Length 2 with one CR and one LF

” $ 0 D $ 0 A ” Length 2 with one CR and one LF

” $ $ ” Length 1 with one $ mark

In printing an ordinary line of text, you will need to include double quotation marks before

and after the text string. Error code 499 will occur in the CPU when the print instruction

contains invalid text or no quotations. It is important to test your VPRINT instruction data

during application development.

VPRINT Example Combined with PRINTV Instruction

The VPRINT instruction is used to create a string in V–memory. The PRINTV is used to

print the string out of port 2.

C12

Create string permissive

C13

Delay Permissive for VPRINT

Delay for VPRINT to complete

VPRINT

Byte Swap:

“Print to” Address:

“STX” V3000:B “$0D”

All

V4000

SET

Delay permissive for VPRINT

TMR

Delay for VPRINT

to complete

K10

PRINTV

CPU/DCM Slot:

Port Number:

Start Address:

Number of Bytes:

Append:

Byte Swap:

Busy:

Complete:

CPU

V4000

K12

0D (hexadecimal)

None

C13

RST

Delay permissive for VPRINT

C13

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-227

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ASCII Print from V-memory (PRINTV)

The ASCII Print from V–memory instruction will send an ASCII string out of the designated

communications port from a speciﬁed series of V–memory registers for a speciﬁed length in

number of bytes. Other features include user speciﬁed Append Characters to be placed after

the desired data string for devices that require speciﬁc termination character(s), Byte Swap

options, and user speciﬁed ﬂags for Busy and Complete.

• Port Number: must be DL260 port 2 (K2).

• Start Address: speciﬁes the beginning of series of

V–memory registers that contain the ASCII string

to print.

• Number of Bytes: speciﬁes the length of the string

to print.

• Append Characters: speciﬁes ASCII characters to

be added to the end of the string for devices that

require speciﬁc termination characters.

• Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and low–byte

within each V–memory register of the string while

printing. See the SWAPB instruction for details.

• Busy Bit: will be ON while the instruction is

printing ASCII data.

• Complete Bit: will be set once the ASCII data

has been printed and reset when the PRINTV

instruction permissive bits are disabled.

See the facing page for an example using the PRINTV instruction.





230

240

250-1

260

Parameter DL260 Range

Port Number port 2 (K2)

Start Address All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Number of Bytes All V-memory (See page 3-56) or K1-128

Bits: Busy, Complete C0-3777

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.

SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.

SP116 On when CPU port 2 is communicating with another device.

SP117 On when CPU port 2 has experienced a communication error.

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-228

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ASCII Swap Bytes (SWAPB)

The ASCII Swap Bytes instruction swaps byte positions (high–byte to low–byte and low–byte

to high–byte) within each V-memory register of a series of V-memory registers for a speciﬁed

number of bytes.

• Starting Address: speciﬁes the beginning

of a series of V–memory registers

the instruction will use to begin byte

swapping

• Number of Bytes: speciﬁes the number

of bytes, beginning with the Starting

Address, to byte swap





230

240

250-1

260

Parameter DL260 Range

Starting Address All V-memory (See page 3-56)

Number of Bytes All V-memory (See page 3-56) or K1 to 128

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.

SP71 On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.

V2000

V2001

V2002

V2003

High Low

No Byte Swapping

Byte Swap All

V2000

V2001

V2002

V2003

High Low

0005h

Byte Swap All but Null

V2000

V2001

V2002

V2003

High Low

0005h

Byte

0005h

Byte

(AIN, AEX, PRINTV, VPRINT)

Byte Swap

Preferences

BCDEA

ADCE

BCDE

ADCE

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-229

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

SWAPB Example

The AIN Complete bit is used to trigger the SWAPB instruction. Use a one–shot so the

SWAPB only executes once.

ASCII Clear Buffer (ACRB)

The ASCII Clear Buffer instruction will clear the

ASCII receive buffer of the speciﬁed communications

port number.

Port Number: must be DL260 port 2 (K2)

ACRB Example

The AIN Complete bit or the AIN diagnostic bits are used to clear the ASCII buffer.





230

240

250-1

260

DS Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-230

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions (DL250-1/DL260 Only)

A new class of instructions, called Ibox Instructions, became available with the introduction

of DirectSOFT. These powerful, yet easy-to-use instructions simplify many of the more

complicated tasks that could previously be accomplished only through the use of multiple

RLL Instructions. The IBox Instructions are supported by DL250-1 and DL260 PLCs.

The D2-250-1 CPU requires ﬁrmware version v4.60 or later, and the D2-260 CPU requires

ﬁrmware version v2.40 or later. For more information on DirectSOFT or to download our free

version, please visit our Web site at: www.automationdirect.com.

Analog Helper IBoxes

Instruction IBox # Page

Analog Input / Output Combo Module Pointer Setup (ANLGCMB) IB-462 5-232

Analog Input Module Pointer Setup (ANLGIN) IB-460 5-234

Analog Output Module Pointer Setup (ANLGOUT) IB-461 5-236

Analog Scale 12-Bit BCD to BCD (ANSCL) IB-423 5-238

Analog Scale 12-Bit Binary to Binary (ANSCLB) IB-403 5-239

Filter Over Time - BCD (FILTER) IB-422 5-240

Filter Over Time - Binary (FILTERB) IB-402 5-242

Hi/Low Alarm - BCD (HILOAL) IB-421 5-244

Hi/Low Alarm - Binary (HILOALB) IB-401 5-246

Discrete Helper IBoxes

Instruction Ibox # Page

Off Delay Timer (OFFDTMR) IB-302 5-248

On Delay Timer (ONDTMR) IB-301 5-250

One Shot (ONESHOT) IB-303 5-252

Push On / Push Off Circuit (PONOFF) IB-300 5-253

Memory IBoxes

Instruction Ibox # Page

Move Single Word (MOVEW) IB-200 5-254

Move Double Word (MOVED) IB-201 5-255

Math IBoxes

Instruction Ibox # Page

BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTOR) IB-560 5-256

Double BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTORD) IB-562 5-257

Math - BCD (MATHBCD) IB-521 5-258

Math - Binary (MATHBIN) IB-501 5-260

Math - Real (MATHR) IB-541 5-262

Real to BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding (RTOBCD) IB-561 5-263

Real to Double BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding (RTOBCDD) IB-563 5-264

Square BCD (SQUARE) IB-523 5-265

Square Binary (SQUAREB) IB-503 5-266

Square Real(SQUARER) IB-543 5-267

Sum BCD Numbers (SUMBCD) IB-522 5-268

Sum Binary Numbers (SUMBIN) IB-502 5-269

Sum Real Numbers (SUMR) IB-542 5-270

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-231

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

NOTE: Check your CPU ﬁrmware version using DirectSOFT: PLC Menu > Diagnostics > System

Information. The latest ﬁrmware and update tool are available from:

http://support.automationdirect.com/ﬁrmware/index.html

Communication IBoxes

Instruction Ibox # Page

ECOM100 Conﬁguration (ECOM100) IB-710 5-272

ECOM100 Disable DHCP (ECDHCPD) IB-736 5-274

ECOM100 Enable DHCP (ECDHCPE) IB-735 5-276

ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting (ECDHCPQ) IB-734 5-278

ECOM100 Send E-mail (ECEMAIL) IB-711 5-280

ECOM100 Restore Default E-mail Setup (ECEMRDS) IB-713 5-283

ECOM100 E-mail Setup (ECEMSUP) IB-712 5-286

ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IB-717 5-290

ECOM100 Read Description (ECRDDES) IB-726 5-292

ECOM100 Read Gateway Address (ECRDGWA) IB-730 5-294

ECOM100 Read IP Address (ECRDIP) IB-722 5-296

ECOM100 Read Module ID (ECRDMID) IB-720 5-298

ECOM100 Read Module Name (ECRDNAM) IB-724 5-300

ECOM100 Read Subnet Mask (ECRDSNM) IB-732 5-302

ECOM100 Write Description (ECWRDES) IB-727 5-304

ECOM100 Write Gateway Address (ECWRGWA) IB-731 5-306

ECOM100 Write IP Address (ECWRIP) IB-723 5-308

ECOM100 Write Module ID (ECWRMID) IB-721 5-310

ECOM100 Write Name (ECWRNAM) IB-725 5-312

ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask (ECWRSNM) IB-733 5-314

ECOM100 RX Network Read (ECRX) IB-740 5-316

ECOM100 WX Network Write (ECWX) IB-741 5-319

NETCFG Network Conﬁguration (NETCFG) IB-700 5-322

Network RX Read (NETRX) IB-701 5-324

Network WX Write (NETWX) IB-702 5-327

Counter I/O IBoxes (Work with H2-CTRIO and H2-CTRIO2)

Instruction Ibox # Page

CTRIO Conﬁguration (CTRIO) IB-1000 5-330

CTRIO Add Entry to End of Preset Table (CTRADPT) IB-1005 5-332

CTRIO Clear Preset Table (CTRCLRT) IB-1007 5-335

CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry (CTREDPT) IB-1003 5-338

CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload (CTREDRL) IB-1002 5-342

CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINPT) IB-1004 5-346

CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINTR) IB-1010 5-350

CTRIO Load Proﬁle (CTRLDPR) IB-1001 5-354

CTRIO Read Error (CTRRDER) IB-1014 5-357

CTRIO Run to Limit Mode (CTRRTLM) IB-1011 5-359

CTRIO Run to Position Mode (CTRRTPM) IB-1012 5-362

CTRIO Velocity Mode (CTRVELO) IB-1013 5-365

CTRIO Write File to ROM (CTRWFTR) IB-1006 5-368

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-232

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Analog Input/Output Combo Module Pointer Setup (ANLGCMB) (IB-462)

The Analog Input/Output Combo Module Pointer Setup instruction generates the logic to

conﬁgure the pointer method for an analog input/output combination module on the ﬁrst PLC

scan following a Program to Run transition.

The ANLGCMB IBox instruction

determines the data format and Pointer

addresses based on the CPU type, the

Base# and the module Slot#.

The Input Data Address is the starting

location in user V-memory where the

analog input data values will be stored,

one location for each input channel

enabled.

The Output Data Address is the starting

location in user V-memory where the

analog output data values will be stored

by ladder code or external device, one

location for each output channel enabled.

Since the IBox logic only executes on the ﬁrst scan, the instruction cannot have any input logic.

ANLGCMB Parameters

• Base # (K0-Local): speciﬁes which base the module is in.

• Slot #: speciﬁes which slot is occupied by the analog module.

• Number of Input Channels: speciﬁes the number of analog input channels to scan.

• Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): speciﬁes the analog input data format (BCD or Binary) - the

binary format may be used for displaying data on some OI panels.

• Input Data Address: speciﬁes the starting V-memory location that will be used to store the analog

input data.

• Number of Output Channels: speciﬁes the number of analog output channels that will be used.

• Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): speciﬁes the format of the analog output data (BCD or

Binary).

• Output Data Address: speciﬁes the starting V-memory location that will be used to source the

analog output data.

NOTE The ANLGCMB instruction does not currently support the F2-8AD4DA-1 or F2-8AD4DA-2.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-233

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ANLGCMB Example

In the following example, the ANLGCMB instruction is used to set up the pointer method for

an analog I/O combination module that is installed in option slot 2. Four input channels are

enabled and the analog data will be written to V2000 - V2003 in BCD format. Two output

channels are enabled and the analog values will be read from V2100 - V2101 in BCD format.

NOTE: An Analog I/O IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identiﬁed in

BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.

No permissive contact

or input logic is used

with this instruction

Parameter DL205 Range

Base # (K0-Local) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠KK0-3

Slot # ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-7

Number of Input Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠KK1-8

Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KBCD: K0; Binary: K1

Input Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Number of Output Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK1-8

Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠KBCD: K0; Binary: K1

Output Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-234

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Analog Input Module Pointer Setup (ANLGIN) (IB-460)

Analog Input Module Pointer Setup generates the logic to conﬁgure the pointer method for

one analog input module on the ﬁrst PLC scan following a Program to Run transition.

This IBox determines the data format and Pointer addresses based on the CPU type, the Base#,

and the Slot#.

The Input Data Address is the starting

location in user V-memory where the

analog input data values will be stored,

one location for each input channel

enabled.

Since this logic only executes on the

ﬁrst scan, this IBox cannot have any

input logic.

ANLGIN Parameters

• Base # (K0-Local): speciﬁes which base the analog module is in.

• Slot #: speciﬁes which PLC slot is occupied by the analog module.

• Number of Input Channels: speciﬁes the number of input channels to scan.

• Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): speciﬁes the analog input data format (BCD or Binary) - the

binary format may be used for displaying data on some OI panels.

• Input Data Address: speciﬁes the starting V-memory location that will be used to store the analog

input data.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Base # (K0-Local) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-3

Slot # ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-7

Number of Input Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK1-8

Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KBCD: K0; Binary: K1

Input Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-235

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ANLGIN Example

In the following example, the ANLGIN instruction is used to set up the pointer method for

an analog input module that is installed in option slot 1. Eight input channels are enabled and

the analog data will be written to V2000 - V2007 in BCD format.

NOTE: An Analog I/O IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identiﬁed in

BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.

No permissive contact or

input logic is used with

this instruction

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-236

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Analog Output Module Pointer Setup (ANLGOUT) (IB-461)

Analog Output Module Pointer Setup generates the logic to conﬁgure the pointer method for

one analog output module on the ﬁrst PLC scan following a Program to Run transition.

This IBox determines the data format

and Pointer addresses based on the

CPU type, the Base#, and the Slot#.

The Output Data Address is the

starting location in user V-memory

where the analog output data values

will be placed by ladder code or

external device, one location for each

output channel enabled.

Since this logic only executes on the

ﬁrst scan, this IBox cannot have any

input logic.

ANLGOUT Parameters

• Base # (K0-Local): speciﬁes which base the analog module is in

• Slot #: speciﬁes which PLC slot is occupied by the analog module

• Number of Output Channels: speciﬁes the number of analog output channels that will be used

• Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): speciﬁes the format of the analog output data (BCD or

Binary)

• Output Data Address: speciﬁes the starting V-memory location that will be used to source the

analog output data

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Base # (K0-Local) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-3

Number of Output Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK1-8

Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KBCD: K0; Binary: K1

Output Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-237

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ANLGOUT Example

In the following example, the ANLGOUT instruction is used to set up the pointer method for

an analog output module that is installed in option slot 3. Two output channels are enabled

and the analog data will be read from V2100 - V2101 in BCD format.

NOTE: An Analog I/O IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identiﬁed in

BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.

No permissive contact or input logic is

used with this instruction

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-238

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Analog Scale 12-Bit BCD to BCD (ANSCL) (IB-423)

Analog Scale 12-Bit BCD to BCD scales a 12-bit BCD analog value (0 to 4095 BCD) into

BCD engineering units. You specify the engineering unit high value (when raw is 4095), and

the engineering low value (when raw is 0), and

the output V-memory address where you want

to place the scaled engineering unit value. The

engineering units are generated as BCD and can

be the full range of 0 to 9999 (see ANSCLB -

Analog Scale 12-Bit Binary to Binary if your raw

units are in Binary format).

Note that this IBox only works with unipolar

unsigned raw values. It does NOT work with

bipolar or sign plus magnitude raw values.

ANSCL Parameters

• Raw (0 to 4095 BCD): speciﬁes the V-memory location of the unipolar unsigned raw 0 to 4095

unscaled value

• High Engineering: speciﬁes the high engineering value when the raw input is 4095

• Low Engineering: speciﬁes the low engineering value when the raw input is 0

• Engineering (BCD): speciﬁes the V-memory location where the scaled engineering BCD value will

be placed

ANSCL Example

In the following example, the ANSCL instruction is used to scale a raw value (0 to 4095 BCD)

that is in V2000. The engineering scaling range is set 0 to 100 (low engineering value - high

engineering value). The scaled value will be placed in V2100 in BCD format.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Raw (0-4095 BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

High Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-9999

Low Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-9999

Engineering (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

SP1





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-239

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Analog Scale 12-Bit Binary to Binary (ANSCLB) (IB-403)

Analog Scale 12-Bit Binary to Binary scales a 12-bit binary analog value (0 to 4095 decimal)

into binary (decimal) engineering units. You specify the engineering unit high value (when raw

is 4095), and the engineering low value (when

raw is 0), and the output V-memory address

where you want to place the scaled engineering

unit value. The engineering units are generated

as binary and can be the full range of 0 to

65535 (see ANSCL - Analog Scale 12-Bit BCD

to BCD if your raw units are in BCD format).

Note that this IBox only works with unipolar

unsigned raw values. It does NOT work with

bipolar, sign plus magnitude, or signed 2’s

complement raw values.

ANSCLB Parameters

• Raw (12-bit binary): speciﬁes the V-memory location of the unipolar unsigned raw decimal

unscaled value (12-bit binary = 0 to 4095 decimal)

• High Engineering: speciﬁes the high engineering value when the raw input is 4095 decimal

• Low Engineering: speciﬁes the low engineering value when the raw input is 0 decimal

• Engineering (binary): speciﬁes the V-memory location where the scaled engineering decimal value

will be placed

ANSCLB Example

In the following example, the ANSCLB instruction is used to scale a raw value (0 to 4095

binary) that is in V2000. The engineering scaling range is set 0 to 1000 (low engineering value

- high engineering value). The scaled value will be placed in V2100 in binary format.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

SP1

Parameter DL205 Range

Raw (12-bit binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

High Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-65535

Low Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-65535

Engineering (binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-240

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Filter Over Time - BCD (FILTER) (IB-422)

Filter Over Time BCD will perform a ﬁrst-order ﬁlter on the Raw Data on a deﬁned time

interval. The equation is:

New = Old + [(Raw - Old) / FDC]

where,

New: New Filtered Value

Old: Old Filtered Value

FDC: Filter Divisor Constant

Raw: Raw Data

The Filter Divisor Constant is an integer in

the range K1 to K100, such that if it equaled

K1 then no ﬁltering would be done.

The rate at which the calculation is performed is speciﬁed by time in hundredths of a second

(0.01 seconds) as the Filter Freq Time parameter. Note that this Timer instruction is embedded

in the IBox and must NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Power ﬂow controls

whether the calculation is enabled. If it is disabled, the Filter Value is not updated. On the

ﬁrst scan from Program to Run mode, the Filter Value is initialized to 0 to give the calculation

a consistent starting point.

FILTER Parameters

• Filter Frequency Timer: speciﬁes the Timer (T) number which is used by the Filter instruction.

• Filter Frequency Time (0.01sec): speciﬁes the rate at which the calculation is performed.

• Raw Data (BCD): speciﬁes the V-memory location of the raw unﬁltered BCD value.

• Filter Divisor (1 to 100): this constant is used to control the ﬁltering effect. A larger value will

increase the smoothing effect of the ﬁlter. A value of 1 results with no ﬁltering.

• Filtered Value (BCD): speciﬁes the V-memory location where the ﬁltered BCD value will be

placed.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Filter Frequency Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ TT0-377

Filter Frequency Time (0.01 sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-9999

Raw Data (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Filter Divisor (1-100) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK1-100

Filtered Value (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-241

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

FILTER Example

In the following example, the Filter instruction is used to ﬁlter a BCD value that is in V2000.

Timer(T0) is set to 0.5 sec, the rate at which the ﬁlter calculation will be performed. The ﬁlter

constant is set to 2. A larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the ﬁlter. A value of 1

results with no ﬁltering. The ﬁltered value will be placed in V2100.

SP1

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-242

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Filter Over Time - Binary (FILTERB) (IB-402)

Filter Over Time in Binary (decimal) will perform a ﬁrst-order ﬁlter on the Raw Data on a

deﬁned time interval. The equation is:

New = Old + [(Raw - Old) / FDC] where

New: New Filtered Value

Old: Old Filtered Value

FDC: Filter Divisor Constant

Raw: Raw Data

The Filter Divisor Constant is an integer in the

range K1 to K100, such that if it equaled K1

then no ﬁltering would be done.

The rate at which the calculation is performed is speciﬁed by time in hundredths of a second

(0.01 seconds) as the Filter Freq Time parameter. Note that this Timer instruction is embedded

in the IBox and must NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Power ﬂow controls

whether the calculation is enabled. If it is disabled, the Filter Value is not updated. On the

ﬁrst scan from Program to Run mode, the Filter Value is initialized to 0 to give the calculation

a consistent starting point.

FILTERB Parameters

• Filter Frequency Timer: speciﬁes the Timer (T) number that is used by the Filter instruction.

• Filter Frequency Time (0.01sec): speciﬁes the rate at which the calculation is performed.

• Raw Data (Binary): speciﬁes the V-memory location of the raw unﬁltered binary (decimal) value.

• Filter Divisor (1 to 100): this constant is used to control the ﬁltering effect. A larger value will

increase the smoothing effect of the ﬁlter. A value of 1 results with no ﬁltering.

• Filtered Value (Binary): speciﬁes the V-memory location where the ﬁltered binary (decimal) value

will be placed.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Filter Frequency Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ TT0-377

Filter Frequency Time (0.01 sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-9999

Raw Data (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Filter Divisor (1-100) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK1-100

Filtered Value (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-243

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

FILTERB Example

In the following example, the FILTERB instruction is used to ﬁlter a binary value that is in

V2000. Timer(T1) is set to 0.5 sec, the rate at which the ﬁlter calculation will be performed.

The ﬁlter constant is set to 3. A larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the ﬁlter. A

value of 1 results with no ﬁltering. The ﬁltered value will be placed in V2100

SP1

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-244

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Hi/Low Alarm - BCD (HILOAL) (IB-421)

Hi/Low Alarm - BCD monitors a BCD value V-memory location and sets four possible alarm

states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low whenever the IBox has power ﬂow. You enter

the alarm thresholds as constant (K) BCD values (K0-K9999) and/or BCD value V-memory

locations.

You must ensure that threshold limits are valid,

that is HH >= H > L >= LL. Note that when the

High-High or Low-Low alarm condition is true,

that the High and Low alarms will also be set,

respectively. This means you may use the same

threshold limit and same alarm bit for the High-

High and the High alarms in case you only need

one “High” alarm. Also note that the boundary

conditions are inclusive. That is, if the Low

boundary is K50, and the Low-Low boundary

is K10, and if the Monitoring Value equals 10,

then the Low Alarm AND the Low-Low alarm

will both be ON. If there is no power ﬂow to the IBox, then all alarm bits will be turned off

regardless of the value of the Monitoring Value parameter.

HILOAL Parameters

• Monitoring Value (BCD): speciﬁes the V-memory location of the BCD value to be monitored

• High-High Limit: V-memory location or constant speciﬁes the high-high alarm limit

• High-High Alarm: On when the high-high limit is reached

• High Limit: V-memory location or constant speciﬁes the high alarm limit

• High Alarm: On when the high limit is reached

• Low Limit: V-memory location or constant speciﬁes the low alarm limit

• Low Alarm: On when the low limit is reached

• Low-Low Limit: V-memory location or constant speciﬁes the low-low alarm limit

• Low-Low Alarm: On when the low-low limit is reached

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Monitoring Value (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

High-High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-9999; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

High-High Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map

High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-9999; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

High Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map

Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-9999; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Low Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map

Low-Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-9999; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Low-Low Alarm⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-245

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

HILOAL Example

In the following example, the HILOAL instruction is used to monitor a BCD value that is in

V2000. If the value in V2000 meets/exceeds the High limit of K900, C101 will turn on. If the

value continues to increase to meet/exceed the High-High limit, C100 will turn on. Both bits

would be on in this case. The High and High-High limits and alarms can be set to the same

value if one “High” limit or alarm is desired to be used.

If the value in V2000 meets or falls below the Low limit of K200, C102 will turn on. If the

value continues to decrease to meet or fall below the Low-Low limit of K100, C103 will turn

on. Both bits would be on in this case. The Low and Low-Low limits and alarms can be set to

the same value if one “Low” limit or alarm is desired to be used.

SP1

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-246

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Hi/Low Alarm - Binary (HILOALB) (IB-401)

Hi/Low Alarm - Binary monitors a binary (decimal) V-memory location and sets four

possible alarm states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low whenever the IBox has power

ﬂow. You enter the alarm thresholds as constant (K) decimal values (K0-K65535) and/or

binary (decimal) V-memory locations.

You must ensure that threshold limits are valid, that is HH >= H > L >= LL. Note that when

the High-High or Low-Low alarm condition is true, that the High and Low alarms will also

be set, respectively. This means you may use the same threshold limit and same alarm bit for

the High-High and the High alarms in case you only need one “High” alarm. Also note that

the boundary conditions are inclusive. That is, if the Low boundary is K50, and the Low-Low

boundary is K10, and if the Monitoring Value equals 10, then the Low Alarm AND the

Low-Low alarm will both be ON. If there is no power ﬂow to the IBox, then all alarm bits will

be turned off regardless of the value of the Monitoring Value parameter.

HILOALB Parameters

• Monitoring Value (Binary): speciﬁes the

V-memory location of the Binary value to be

monitored

• High-High Limit: V-memory location or

constant speciﬁes the High-High alarm limit

• High-High Alarm: On when the High-High

limit is reached

• High Limit: V-memory location or constant

speciﬁes the High alarm limit

• High Alarm: On when the High limit is

reached

• Low Limit: V-memory location or constant

speciﬁes the Low alarm limit

• Low Alarm: On when the Low limit is reached

• Low-Low Limit: V-memory location or constant speciﬁes the Low-Low alarm limit

• Low-Low Alarm: On when the Low-Low limit is reached

Parameter DL205 Range

Monitoring Value (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

High-High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-65535; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

High-High Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map

High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-65535; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

High Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map

Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-65535; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Low Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map

Low-Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-65535; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Low-Low Alarm⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-247

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

HILOALB Example

In the following example, the HILOALB instruction is used to monitor a binary value that is

in V2000. If the value in V2000 meets/exceeds the High limit of the binary value in V2011,

C101 will turn on. If the value continues to increase to meet/exceed the High-High limit value

in V2010, C100 will turn on. Both bits would be on in this case. The High and High-High

limits and alarms can be set to the same V-memory location/value if one “High” limit or alarm

is desired to be used.

If the value in V2000 meets or falls below the low limit of the binary value in V2012, C102 will

turn on. If the value continues to decrease to meet or fall below the Low-Low limit in V2013,

C103 will turn on. Both bits would be on in this case. The Low and Low-Low limits and

alarms can be set to the same V-memory location/value if one “Low” limit or alarm is desired

to be used.

SP1

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-248

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Off Delay Timer (OFFDTMR) (IB-302)

Off Delay Timer will delay the “turning off” of the Output parameter by the speciﬁed Off

Delay Time (up to 99.99 seconds) based on the power ﬂow into the IBox. Once the IBox

receives power, the Output bit will turn on immediately. When the power ﬂow to the IBox

turns off, the Output bit WILL REMAIN ON for the speciﬁed amount of time (in hundredths

of a second). Once the Off Delay Time has expired, the output will turn Off. If the power

ﬂow to the IBox comes back on BEFORE the Off Delay Time, then the timer is RESET and

the Output will remain On - so you must continuously have NO power ﬂow to the IBox for

AT LEAST the speciﬁed Off Delay Time before the Output will turn Off.

This IBox utilizes a Timer resource (TMRF), which cannot be used anywhere else in your

program.

OFFDTMR Parameters

• Timer Number: speciﬁes the Timer (TMRF)

number which is used by the OFFDTMR

instruction

• Off Delay Time (0.01sec): speciﬁes how long

the Output will remain on once power ﬂow

to the Ibox is removed (up to 99.99 seconds).

• Output: speciﬁes the output that will be

delayed “turning off” by the Off Delay Time.

Parameter DL205 Range

Timer Number ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ TT0-377

Off Delay Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V K0-9999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Output⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-249

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

OFFDTMR Example

In the following example, the OFFDTMR instruction is used to delay the “turning off”of

output C20. Timer 2 (T2) is set to 5 seconds, the “off-delay” period.

When C100 turns on, C20 turns on and will remain on while C100 is on. When C100 turns

off, C20 will remain on for the speciﬁed Off Delay Time (5 secs), and then turn off.

C100

C20

5 sec 5 sec

Example timing diagram

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-250

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

On Delay Timer (ONDTMR) (IB-301)

On Delay Timer will delay the “turning on” of the Output parameter by the speciﬁed amount

of time (up to 99.99 seconds) based on the power ﬂow into the IBox. Once the IBox loses

power, the Output is turned off immediately. If the power ﬂow turns off BEFORE the On

Delay Time, then the timer is RESET and

the Output is never turned on, so you must

have continuous power ﬂow to the IBox for at

least the speciﬁed On Delay Time before the

Output turns On.

This IBox utilizes a Timer resource (TMRF),

which cannot be used anywhere else in your

program.

ONDTMR Parameters

• Timer Number: speciﬁes the Timer (TMRF) number which is used by the ONDTMR instruction

• On Delay Time (0.01sec): speciﬁes how long the Output will remain on once power ﬂow to the

Ibox is removed (up to 99.99 seconds).

• Output: speciﬁes the output that will be delayed “turning on” by the On Delay Time.

Parameter DL205 Range

Timer Number ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ TT0-377

On Delay Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V K0-9999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Output⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL205 V-memory map

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-251

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ONDTMR Example

In the following example, the ONDTMR instruction is used to delay the “turning on” of

output C21. Timer 1 (T1) is set to 2 seconds, the “on-delay” period.

When C101 turns on, C21 is delayed turning on by 2 seconds. When C101 turns off, C21

turns off immediately.

C101

C21

2 sec 2 sec

Example timing diagram

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-252

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

One Shot (ONESHOT) (IB-303)

One Shot will turn on the given bit output parameter for one scan on an OFF to ON transition

of the power ﬂow into the IBox. This IBox is simply a different name for the PD Coil (Positive

Differential).

ONESHOT Parameters

• Discrete Output: speciﬁes the output that

will be on for one scan

ONESHOT Example

In the following example, the ONESHOT instruction is used to turn C100 on for one PLC

scan after C0 goes from an off to on transition. The input logic must produce an off to on

transition to execute the One Shot instruction.

C100

Scan time

Example Timing Diagram

Parameter DL205 Range

Discrete Output ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C See DL205 V-memory map





230

240

250-1

260

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-253

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Push On/Push Off Circuit (PONOFF) (IB-300)

Push On/Push Off Circuit toggles an output state whenever its input power ﬂow transitions

from off to on. Requires an extra bit parameter for scan-to-scan state information. This extra

bit must NOT be used anywhere else in the program. This is also known as a “ﬂip-ﬂop circuit.”

PONOFF Parameters

• Discrete Input: speciﬁes the input that will

toggle the speciﬁed output

• Discrete Output: speciﬁes the output that will

be “turned on/off” or toggled

• Internal State: speciﬁes a work bit that is used

by the instruction

PONOFF Example

In the following example, the PONOFF instruction is used to control the on and off states of

the output C20 with a single input C10. When C10 is pressed once, C20 turns on. When

C10 is pressed again, C20 turns off. C100 is an internal bit used by the instruction.

NOTE: Neither a permissive nor input logic is required with this instruction.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Discrete Input ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,SP,B,PB See DL205 V-memory map

Discrete Output ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map

Internal State ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C See DL205 V-memory map

No permissive contact or input logic is

used with this instruction





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-254

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Move Single Word (MOVEW) (IB-200)

Move Single Word moves (copies) a word to a memory location directly or indirectly via a

pointer, either as a HEX constant, from a memory location, or indirectly through a pointer.

MOVEW Parameters

• From WORD: speciﬁes the word that will be

moved to another location

• To WORD: speciﬁes the location to which

where the “From WORD” will be moved

MOVEW Example

In the following example, the MOVEW instruction is used to move 16 bits of data from

V2000 to V3000 when C100 turns on.

Parameter DL205 Range

From WORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-FFFF; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

To WORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-255

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Move Double Word (MOVED) (IB-201)

Move Double Word moves (copies) a double word to two consecutive memory locations

directly or indirectly via a pointer, either as a double HEX constant, from a double memory

location, or indirectly through a pointer to a double memory location.

MOVED Parameters

• From DWORD: speciﬁes the double word

that will be moved to another location

• To DWORD: speciﬁes the location to which

where the “From DWORD” will be moved

MOVED Example

In the following example, the MOVED instruction is used to move 32 bits of data from V2000

and V2001 to V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.

Parameter DL205 Range

From DWORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-FFFFFFFF; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

To DWORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-256

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTOR) (IB-560)

BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point converts the given 4-digit WORD BCD value to a

Real number, with the implied number of decimal points (K0-K4).

For example, BCDTOR K1234 with an implied number of decimal points equal to K1, would

yield R123.4

BCDTOR Parameters

• Value (WORD BCD): speciﬁes the word

or constant that will be converted to a Real

number

• Number of Decimal Points: speciﬁes the

number of implied decimal points in the

Result DWORD

• Result (DWORD REAL): speciﬁes the

location where the Real number will be placed

BCDTOR Example

In the following example, the BCDTOR instruction is used to convert the 16-bit data in

V2000 from a 4-digit BCD data format to a 32-bit REAL (ﬂoating point) data format and store

into V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.

K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two digits to the right of the

decimal point.

Parameter DL205 Range

Value (WORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-9999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-4

Result (DWORD REAL)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-257

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Double BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTORD) (IB-562)

Double BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point converts the given 8-digit DWORD BCD

value to a Real number, given an implied number of decimal points (K0-K8).

For example, BCDTORD K12345678 with an implied number of decimal points equal to K5,

would yield R123.45678

BCDTORD Parameters

• Value (DWORD BCD): speciﬁes the Dword

or constant that will be converted to a Real

number

• Number of Decimal Points: speciﬁes the

number of implied decimal points in the

Result DWORD

• Result (DWORD REAL): speciﬁes the

location where the Real number will be placed

BCDTORD Example

In the following example, the BCDTORD instruction is used to convert the 32-bit data in

V2000 from an 8-digit BCD data format to a 32-bit REAL (ﬂoating point) data format and

store into V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.

K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two digits to the right of the

decimal point.

Parameter DL205 Range

Value (DWORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-99999999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-8

Result (DWORD REAL)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-258

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Math - BCD (MATHBCD) (IB-521)

Math - BCD Format lets you enter complex

mathematical expressions like you would in

Visual Basic, Excel, or C++ to do complex

calculations, nesting parentheses up to 4 levels

deep. In addition to + - * /, you can do Modulo

(% aka Remainder), Bit-wise And (&) Or (|)

Xor (^), and some BCD functions - Convert to

BCD (BCD), Convert to Binary (BIN), BCD

Complement (BCDCPL), Convert from Gray

Code (GRAY), Invert Bits (INV), and BCD/

HEX to Seven Segment Display (SEG).

Example: ((V2000 + V2001) / (V2003 - K100)) * GRAY(V3000 & K001F)

Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single-word BCD formatted value. Intermediate

results can go up to 32-bit values, but as long as the ﬁnal result ﬁts in a 16-bit BCD word, the

calculation is valid. Typical example of this is scaling using multiply then divide, (V2000 *

K1000) / K4095. The multiply term most likely will exceed 9999 but ﬁts within 32 bits. The

divide operation will divide 4095 into the 32-bit accumulator, yielding a result that will always

ﬁt in 16 bits.

You can reference binary V-memory values by using the BCD conversion function on a

V-memory location but NOT an expression. That is BCD(V2000) is okay and will convert

V2000 from Binary to BCD, but BCD(V2000 + V3000) will add V2000 as BCD, to V3000

as BCD, then interpret the result as Binary and convert it to BCD - NOT GOOD.

Also, the ﬁnal result is a 16-bit BCD number and so you could do BIN around the entire

operation to store the result as Binary.

MATHBCD Parameters

• Result (WORD): speciﬁes the location where the BCD result of the mathematical expression will

be placed (result must ﬁt into 16-bit single V-memory location).

• Expression: speciﬁes the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored in speciﬁed

Result (WORD). Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in BCD format.

Parameter DL205 Range

WORD Result ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Expression ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Text

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-259

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

MATHBCD Example

In the following example, the MATHBCD instruction is used to calculate the math expression

which multiplies the BCD value in V1200 by 1000, then divides by 4095 and loads the

resulting value in V2000 when C100 turns on.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-260

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Math - Binary (MATHBIN) (IB-501)

Math - Binary Format lets you enter complex

mathematical expressions like you would in Visual

Basic, Excel, or C++ to do complex calculations,

nesting parentheses up to 4 levels deep. In addition

to + - * /, you can do Modulo (% aka Remainder),

Shift Right (>>) and Shift Left (<<), Bit-wise And

(&) Or (|) Xor (^), and some binary functions -

Convert to BCD (BCD), Convert to Binary (BIN),

Decode Bits (DECO), Encode Bits (ENCO), Invert

Bits (INV), HEX to Seven Segment Display (SEG),

and Sum Bits (SUM).

Example: ((V2000 + V2001) / (V2003 - K10)) * SUM(V3000 & K001F)

Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single-word binary formatted value. Intermediate

results can go up to 32-bit values, but as long as the ﬁnal result ﬁts in a 16-bit binary word,

the calculation is valid. Typical example of this is scaling using multiply then divide, (V2000

* K1000) / K4095. The multiply term most likely will exceed 65535 but ﬁts within 32 bits.

The divide operation will divide 4095 into the 32-bit accumulator, yielding a result that will

always ﬁt in 16 bits.

You can reference BCD V-memory values by using the BIN conversion function on a

V-memory location but NOT an expression. That is, BIN(V2000) is okay and will convert

V2000 from BCD to Binary, but BIN(V2000 + V3000) will add V2000 as Binary, to V3000

as Binary, then interpret the result as BCD and convert it to Binary - NOT GOOD.

Also, the ﬁnal result is a 16-bit binary number and so you could do BCD around the entire

operation to store the result as BCD.

MATHBIN Parameters

• Result (WORD): speciﬁes the location where the binary result of the mathematical expression will

be placed (result must ﬁt into 16-bit single V-memory location).

• Expression: speciﬁes the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored in speciﬁed

Result (WORD). Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in binary format.

Parameter DL205 Range

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-261

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

MATHBIN Example

In the following example, the MATHBIN instruction is used to calculate the math expression

which multiplies the Binary value in V1200 by 1000 then divides by 4095 and loads the

resulting value in V2000 when C100 turns on.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-262

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Math - Real (MATHR) (IB-541)

Math - Real Format lets you enter complex

mathematical expressions like you would in

Visual Basic, Excel, or C++ to do complex

calculations, nesting parentheses up to 4 levels

deep. In addition to + - * /, you can do Bit-wise

And (&) Or (|) and Xor (^). The DL260 also

supports several Real functions - Arc Cosine

(ACOSR), Arc Sine (ASINR), Arc Tangent

(ATANR), Cosine (COSR), Convert Radians

to Degrees (DEGR), Invert Bits (INV), Convert

Degrees to Radians (RADR), HEX to Seven

Segment Display (SEG), Sine (SINR), Square

Root (SQRTR), and Tangent (TANR).

Example: ((V2000 + V2002) / (V2004 - R2.5)) * SINR(RADR(V3000 / R10.0))

Every V-memory reference MUST be able to ﬁt into a double-word Real formatted value.

MATHR Parameters

• Result (DWORD): speciﬁes the location where the Real result of the mathematical expression will

be placed (result must ﬁt into a double-word Real formatted location).

• Expression: speciﬁes the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored in speciﬁed

Result (DWORD) location. Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in Real

format.

MATHR Example

In the following example, the MATHR instruction is used to calculate the math expression

which multiplies the REAL (ﬂoating point) value in V1200 by 10.5 then divides by 2.7 and

loads the resulting 32-bit value in V2000 and V2001 when C100 turns on.

Parameter DL205 Range

DWORD Result ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-263

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Real to BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding (RTOBCD) (IB-561)

Real to BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding converts the absolute value of the

given Real number to a 4-digit BCD number, compensating for an implied number of decimal

points (K0-K4) and performs rounding.

For example, RTOBCD R56.74 with an implied number of decimal points equal to K1, would

yield 567 BCD. If the implied number of decimal points was 0, then the function would yield

57 BCD (note that it rounded up).

If the Real number is negative, the Result will equal its positive, absolute value.

RTOBCD Parameters

• Value (DWORD Real): speciﬁes the Real

Dword location or number that will be

converted and rounded to a BCD number

with decimal points

• Number of Decimal Points: speciﬁes the

number of implied decimal points in the

Result WORD

• Result (WORD BCD): speciﬁes the location

where the rounded/implied decimal points

BCD value will be placed

RTOBCD Example

In the following example, the RTOBCD instruction is used to convert the 32-bit REAL

(ﬂoating point) data format in V3000 and V3001 to the 4-digit BCD data format and store in

V2000 when C100 turns on.

K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two implied decimal points.

Parameter DL205 Range

Value (DWORD Real) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V,P,R R ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-4

Result (WORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-264

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Real to Double BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding (RTOBCDD)

(IB-563)

Real to Double BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding converts the absolute value

of the given Real number to an 8-digit DWORD BCD number, compensating for an implied

number of decimal points (K0-K8) and performs rounding.

For example, RTOBCDD R38156.74 with an implied number of decimal points equal to K1,

would yield 381567 BCD. If the implied number of decimal points was 0, then the function

would yield 38157 BCD (note that it rounded up).

If the Real number is negative, the Result will equal its positive, absolute value.

RTOBCDD Parameters

• Value (DWORD Real): speciﬁes the Dword

Real number that will be converted and

rounded to a BCD number with decimal

points

• Number of Decimal Points: speciﬁes the

number of implied decimal points in the

Result DWORD

• Result (DWORD BCD): speciﬁes the location

where the rounded/implied decimal points

DWORD BCD value will be placed

RTOBCDD Example

In the following example, the RTOBCDD instruction is used to convert the 32-bit REAL

(ﬂoating point) data format in V3000 and V3001 to the 8-digit BCD data format and store in

V2000 and V2001 when C100 turns on.

K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two implied decimal points.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Value (DWORD Real) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V,P,R R ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-8

Result (DWORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-265

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Square BCD (SQUARE) (IB-523)

Square BCD squares the given 4-digit WORD BCD number and writes it as an 8-digit

DWORD BCD result.

SQUARE Parameters

• Value (WORD BCD): speciﬁes the BCD

Word or constant that will be squared

• Result (DWORD BCD): speciﬁes the location

where the squared DWORD BCD value will

be placed

SQUARE Example

In the following example, the SQUARE instruction is used to square the 4-digit BCD value in

V2000 and store the 8-digit double word BCD result in V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns

on.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Value (WORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-9999 ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Result (DWORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-266

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Square Binary (SQUAREB) (IB-503)

Square Binary squares the given 16-bit WORD Binary number and writes it as a 32-bit

DWORD Binary result.

SQUAREB Parameters

• Value (WORD Binary): speciﬁes the binary

Word or constant that will be squared

• Result (DWORD Binary): speciﬁes the

location where the squared DWORD

binary value will be placed

SQUAREB Example

In the following example, the SQUAREB instruction is used to square the single-word Binary

value in V2000 and store the 8-digit double-word Binary result in V3000 and V3001 when

C100 turns on.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Value (WORD Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-65535; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Result (DWORD Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-267

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Square Real (SQUARER) (IB-543)

Square Real squares the given REAL DWORD number and writes it to a REAL DWORD

result.

SQUARER Parameters

• Value (REAL DWORD): speciﬁes the Real

DWORD location or number that will be

squared

• Result (REAL DWORD): speciﬁes the location

where the squared Real DWORD value will be

placed

SQUARER Example

In the following example, the SQUARER instruction is used to square the 32-bit ﬂoating point

REAL value in V2000 and V2001 and store the REAL value result in V3000 and V3001 when

C100 turns on.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Value (REAL DWORD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V,P,R R ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Result (REAL DWORD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-268

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Sum BCD Numbers (SUMBCD) (IB-522)

Sum BCD Numbers sums up a list of consecutive 4-digit WORD BCD numbers into an

8-digit DWORD BCD result.

You specify the group’s starting and ending V-memory addresses (inclusive). When enabled,

this instruction will add all the numbers in the group (so you may want to place a differential

contact driving the enable).

SUMBCD could be used as the ﬁrst part of calculating an average.

SUMBCD Parameters

• Start Address: speciﬁes the starting address

of a block of V-memory location values to

be added together (BCD)

• End Addr (inclusive): speciﬁes the ending

address of a block of V-memory location

values to be added together (BCD)

• Result (DWORD BCD): speciﬁes the

location where the sum of the block of

V-memory BCD values will be placed

SUMBCD Example

In the following example, the SUMBCD instruction is used to total the sum of all BCD values

in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 8-digit double word BCD value in V3000

and V3001 when C100 turns on.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

Start Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

End Address (inclusive) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Result (DWORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-269

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Sum Binary Numbers (SUMBIN) (IB-502)

Sum Binary Numbers sums up a list of consecutive 16-bit WORD Binary numbers into a

32-bit DWORD binary result.

You specify the group’s starting and ending V-memory addresses (inclusive). When enabled,

this instruction will add all the numbers in the group (so you may want to place a differential

contact driving the enable).

SUMBIN could be used as the ﬁrst part of calculating an average.

SUMBIN Parameters

• Start Address: speciﬁes the starting address

of a block of V-memory location values to

be added together (Binary)

• End Addr (inclusive): speciﬁes the ending

address of a block of V-memory location

values to be added together (Binary)

• Result (DWORD Binary): speciﬁes the

location where the sum of the block of

V-memory binary values will be placed

SUMBIN Example

In the following example, the SUMBIN instruction is used to total the sum of all Binary values

in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 8-digit double word Binary value in V3000

and V3001 when C100 turns on.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

End Address (inclusive) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Result (DWORD Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-270

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Sum Real Numbers (SUMR) (IB-542)

Sum Real Numbers sums up a list of consecutive REAL DWORD numbers into a REAL

DWORD result.

You specify the group’s starting and ending V-memory addresses (inclusive).

Remember that Real numbers are DWORDs and occupy 2 words of V-memory each, so the

number of Real values summed up is equal to half the number of memory locations. Note

that the End Address can be EITHER word of the 2 word ending address, for example, if you

wanted to add the 4 Real numbers stored in V2000 thru V2007 (V2000, V2002, V2004, and

V2006), you can specify V2006 OR V2007 for the ending address and you will get the same

result.

When enabled, this instruction will add all the numbers in the group (so you may want to place

a differential contact driving the enable).

SUMR could be used as the ﬁrst part of calculating an average.

SUMR Parameters

• Start Address (DWORD): speciﬁes the

starting address of a block of V-memory

location values to be added together (Real)

• End Addr (inclusive) (DWORD):

speciﬁes the ending address of a block of

V-memory location values to be added

together (Real)

• Result (DWORD): speciﬁes the location

where the sum of the block of V-memory

Real values will be placed

Parameter DL205 Range

Start Address (DWORD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

End Address (inclusive DWORD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Result (DWORD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-271

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

SUMR Example

In the following example, the SUMR instruction is used to total the sum of all ﬂoating point

REAL number values in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 32-bit ﬂoating point

REAL number value in V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-272

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Conﬁguration (ECOM100) (IB-710)

ECOM100 Conﬁguration deﬁnes all the common information for one speciﬁc ECOM100

module which is used by the other ECOM100 IBoxes; for example, ECRX - ECOM100

Network Read, ECEMAIL - ECOM100 Send EMail, ECIPSUP - ECOM100 IP Setup, etc.

You MUST have the ECOM100 Conﬁguration IBox at the top of your ladder/stage program

with any other conﬁguration IBoxes. The Message Buffer parameter speciﬁes the starting

address of a 65 WORD buffer. This is 101 Octal addresses (e.g., V1400 thru V1500).

If you have more than one ECOM100 in your PLC, you must have a different ECOM100

Conﬁguration IBox for EACH ECOM100 module in your system that utilizes any ECOM

IBox instructions.

The Workspace and Status parameters and the entire Message Buffer are internal, private

registers used by the ECOM100 Conﬁguration IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE in this one

instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.

In order for MOST ECOM100 IBoxes to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the

ECOM100 circuit board. You can keep dip switch 7 off if you are ONLY using ECOM100

Network Read and Write IBoxes (ECRX, ECWX).

ECOM100 Parameters

• ECOM100#: this is a logical number

associated with this speciﬁc ECOM100

module in the speciﬁed slot. All other

ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this

ECOM100 module must reference this

logical number.

• Slot: speciﬁes which PLC slot is occupied by

the ECOM100 module.

• Status: speciﬁes a V-memory location that

will be used by the instruction.

• Workspace: speciﬁes a V-memory location

that will be used by the instruction.

• Msg Buffer: speciﬁes the starting address of a 65-word buffer that will be used by the module for

conﬁguration.

DS5 Used

HPP N/A

Parameter DL205 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK0-255

Slot ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-7

Status ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

Msg Buffer (65 words used) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-273

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Example

The ECOM100 Conﬁg IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other ECOM100-based

IBoxes (ECxxxx). You must have an ECOM100 Conﬁg IBox for each ECOM100 module

in your system. Conﬁguration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute

every scan.

This IBox deﬁnes ECOM100# K0 to be in slot 3. Any ECOM100 IBoxes that need to

reference this speciﬁc module (such as ECEMAIL, ECRX, ...) would enter K0 for their

ECOM100# parameter.

The Status register is for reporting any completion or error information to other ECOM100

IBoxes. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.

The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the ECOM100, along

with proper sharing and interlocking with the other ECOM100 IBoxes in the program. This

V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.

The Message Buffer of 65 words (130 bytes) is a common pool of memory that is used by

other ECOM100 IBoxes (such as ECEMAIL). This way, you can have a bunch of ECEMAIL

IBoxes, but only need 1 common buffer for generating and sending each EMail. These

V-memory registers must not be used anywhere else in your entire program.

NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identiﬁed in

BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.

No permissive contact or input logic is

used with this instruction

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-274

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Disable DHCP (ECDHCPD) (IB-736)

ECOM100 Disable DHCP will set up the ECOM100 to use its internal TCP/IP settings on a

leading edge transition to the IBox. To conﬁgure the ECOM100’s TCP/IP settings manually,

use the NetEdit3 utility, or you can do it programmatically from your PLC program using

the ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP), or the individual ECOM100 IBoxes: ECOM Write IP

Address (ECWRIP), ECOM Write Gateway Address (ECWRGWA), and ECOM100 Write

Subnet Mask (ECWRSNM).

The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE

UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.

Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there

is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or

a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).

The “Disable DHCP” setting is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution

of this IBox will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the

Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox

ONCE, on the second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY

CLOSED SP0 (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power ﬂow to the IBox.

In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the

ECOM100 circuit board.

ECDHCPD Parameters

• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with

this speciﬁc ECOM100 module in the speciﬁed

slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference

this ECOM100 module must reference this logical

number

• Workspace: speciﬁes a V-memory location that will

be used by the instruction

• Success: speciﬁes a bit that will turn on once the

request is completed successfully

• Error: speciﬁes a bit that will turn on if the

instruction is not completed successfully

• Error Code: speciﬁes the location where the Error

Code will be written

Parameter DL205 Range

Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map

Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map

Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ VSee DL205 V-memory map - Data Words

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-275

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECDHCPD Example

Rung 1: The ECOM100 Conﬁg IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all

ECOM100 type IBoxes for one speciﬁc ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as

ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move

the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is

used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this speciﬁc ECOM100

module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using

this speciﬁc ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use

by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this speciﬁc ECOM100 module.

NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identiﬁed in

BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, disable DHCP in the ECOM100. DHCP is the same protocol used

by PCs for using a DHCP Server to automatically assign the ECOM100’s IP Address, Gateway

Address, and Subnet Mask. Typically disabling DHCP is done by assigning a hard-coded IP

Address either in NetEdit or using one of the ECOM100 IP Setup IBoxes, but this IBox allows

you to disable DHCP in the ECOM100 using your ladder program. The ECDHCPD is

leading edge triggered, not power-ﬂow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command

to disable DHCP will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power ﬂow into the IBox goes

from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails,

you can look at V2000 for the speciﬁc error code.

ECOM100 Config

ECOM10

B-710

ECOM100#

Slot

Status

Workspace

Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)

V400

V401

V402-502

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-276

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Enable DHCP (ECDHCPE) (IB-735)

ECOM100 Enable DHCP will tell the ECOM100 to obtain its TCP/IP setup from a DHCP

Server on a leading edge transition to the IBox.

The IBox will be successful once the ECOM100 has received its TCP/IP settings from the

DHCP server. Since it is possible for the DHCP server to be unavailable, a Timeout parameter

is provided so that the IBox can complete, but with an Error (Error Code = 1004 decimal).

See also the ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox 717 to directly set up ALL of the TCP/IP

parameters in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address.

The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE

UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.

Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there

is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or

a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).

The “Enable DHCP” setting is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution

of this IBox will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the

Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox

ONCE, on the second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY

CLOSED SP0 (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power ﬂow to the IBox.

In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the

ECOM100 circuit board.

ECDHCPE Parameters

• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated

with this speciﬁc ECOM100 module in the speciﬁed

slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference

this ECOM100 module must reference this logical

number.

• Timeout(sec): speciﬁes a timeout period so that the

instruction may have time to complete.

• Workspace: speciﬁes a V-memory location that will

be used by the instruction.

• Success: speciﬁes a bit that will turn on once the

request is completed successfully.

• Error: speciﬁes a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully.

• Error Code: speciﬁes the location where the Error Code will be written.

Parameter DL205 Range

Timeout (sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ KK5-127

Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map

Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-277

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECDHCPE Example

Rung 1: The ECOM100 Conﬁg IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all

ECOM100 type IBoxes for one speciﬁc ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as

ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move

the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is

used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this speciﬁc ECOM100

module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using

this speciﬁc ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use

by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this speciﬁc ECOM100 module.

NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identiﬁed in

BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.

Rung 2: On the second scan, enable DHCP in the ECOM100. DHCP is the same protocol

used by PCs for using a DHCP Server to automatically assign the ECOM100’s IP Address,

Gateway Address, and Subnet Mask. Typically this is done using NetEdit, but this IBox

allows you to enable DHCP in the ECOM100 using your ladder program. The ECDHCPE is

leading edge triggered, not power-ﬂow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The commands

to enable DHCP will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power ﬂow into the IBox goes

from OFF to ON. The ECDHCPE does more than just set the bit to enable DHCP in the

ECOM100, it polls the ECOM100 once every second to see if the ECOM100 has found a

DHCP server and has a valid IP Address. Therefore, a timeout parameter is needed in case the

ECOM100 cannot ﬁnd a DHCP server. If a timeout does occur, the Error bit will turn on and

the error code will be 1005 decimal. The Success bit will turn on only if the ECOM100 ﬁnds

a DHCP Server and is assigned a valid IP Address. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a

failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the speciﬁc error code.

ECOM100 Config

ECOM10

B-710

ECOM100#

Slot

Status

Workspace

Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)

V400

V401

V402-502

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D

5-278

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting (ECDHCPQ) (IB-734)

ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting will determine if DHCP is enabled in the ECOM100 on a

leading edge transition to the IBox. The DHCP Enabled bit parameter will be ON if DHCP

is enabled, OFF if disabled.

The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE

UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.

Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete.

In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the

ECOM100 circuit board.

ECDHCPQ Parameters

• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated

with this speciﬁc ECOM100 module in the

speciﬁed slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that

need to reference this ECOM100 module must

reference this logical number.

• Workspace: speciﬁes a V-memory location that

will be used by the instruction.

• Success: speciﬁes a bit that will turn on once the

instruction is completed successfully.

• Error: speciﬁes a bit that will turn on if the

instruction is not completed successfully.

• DHCP Enabled: speciﬁes a bit that will turn on if the ECOM100’s DHCP is enabled or remain

off if disabled - after instruction query, be sure to check the state of the Success/Error bit state along

with DHCP Enabled bit state to conﬁrm a successful module query.

Parameter DL205 Range

Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map

Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map

DHCP Enabled ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL205 V-memory map

DS5 Used

HPP N/A





230

240

250-1

260

DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D 5-279

Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECDHCPQ Example